Long Beach Police Department Training Bulletins
Long Beach Police Department
Training Bulletins
Effective January 5, 2024
Wally Hebeish
Chief of Police
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETINS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TB TITLE TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 – Department Report
Revised March 2004
4 – LGBTQ Terminology
Revised January 2018
8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd & Mob Behavior
Revised May 2002
10 – Dead Body Calls
Revised June 2017
Reviewed July 2019
11 – Suicides
Revised August 2019
12 – SUICIDE BY COP
Revised April 2020
13 – Report Writing
REVISED August 2023
14 – U-Visa
REVISED July 2023
17 – Canine Unit
REVISED October 2023
18 – Field Interview Card
REVISED May 2017
REVIEWED June 2019
21 – Courtroom Testimony
REVISED March 2020
22 – Solicitors on Private Property Open to Public Access
REVISED December 2011
27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles
REVISED May 2004
28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures
REVISED January 2021
30 – Vehicle Handling Procedure – Abandoned Vehicle
REVISED August 2001
31 – Firearms Safety
REVISED February 2000
Reviewed January 2020
Training Division
32 – Civil Disputes
REVISED February 2001
36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control
REVISED November 2017
37 – Drill Instructions
REVISED May 2017
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
REVISED April 2004
40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations
REVISED May 2004
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics – Citizen Rescue
REVISED July 2004
42 – Impact Weapons
Revised April 2020
43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic Behavior
REVISED January 2024
45 – Crime Lab Field Unit Requests
REVISED January 2003
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
REVISED October 2008
50 – Wellness Program
REVISED March 2021
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
REVISED April 2002
57 – Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR)
REVISED January 2018
58 – Aircraft Accidents
REVISED January 2002
59 – Firearms Evidence
REVISED May 2006
62 – Mentally Ill Persons
REVISED May 10, 2023
65 – Communications Radio Transmission Procedure
REVISED May 2017
67 – Arrest and Control Techniques
REVISED January 2017
REVIEWED January 2020
68 – Prowlers
REVISED April 2001
70 – Investigative Follow-up Procedures
REVISED January 2011
71 – Community Relations
REVISED February 2001
72 – Gangs
REVISED February 2022
73 – Robbery – Arrival at Scene & Broadcast Procedure
REVISED August 2001
74 – Robbery – Deployment and Search
REVISED August 2001
75 – Robbery – Corpus Delicti
REVISED January 2020
76 – Burglary Investigations
REVISED November 2000
78 – Sex Crimes – Indecent Exposure
REVISED January 2022
79 – Sex Crimes – Forcible Rape
REVISED September 2022
81 – Beach Operation - SUV/Quad/ATV
REVISED January 2007
82 – Operation of Emergency Vehicles
REVISED August 2000
Patrol Bureau
84 – Defensive Driving Techniques
REVISED August 2000
Patrol Bureau
85 – CNS Depressants
REVISED July 2000
Investigations Bureau
86 – CNS Stimulants
REVISED September 2019
REVIEWED September 2019
Investigations Bureau
87 – Marijuana
REVISED September 2019
Investigations Bureau
88 – Narcotic Analgesics
REVISED January 30, 2020
89 – Hallucinogens
REVISED November 2019
Investigations Bureau
90 – Under the Influence Investigations and Arrests
REVISED September 2003
91 – Citizen’s Arrest
REVISED May 2003
Patrol Bureau
94 – DUI
REVISED December 2000
Patrol Bureau
95 – Tow Truck Requests
REVISED September 2000
98 – Implied Consent Law
REVISED May 2003
Patrol Bureau
99 – Traffic – Following too closely
REVISED May 2001
Patrol Bureau
100 – Financial Responsibility Laws
REVISED June 2001
Patrol Bureau
101 – Traffic Hand Signals
REVISED September 2002
Patrol Bureau
102 – Collisions – Metro A-Line
Revised March 2021
Support Bureau
103 Public Transportation Safety
Revised March 2021
104 – Crimes in International Waters
REVISED January 2004
Investigation Bureau
106 – Disturbing the Peace
REVISED March 2004
Patrol Bureau
107 – Intoxilyzer 5000
REVISED February 2003
investigations Bureau
108 – Special Incidents
REVISED October 2001
Patrol Bureau
111 – Juvenile Booking Procedures
REVISED September 2000
112 – Juvenile Procedures Truancy
REVISED April 2000
Investigations Bureau
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
REVISED April 2001
Investigations Bureau
115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
REVISED November 2022
Support Bureau
116 – Terrorism – Homicide Bombers
REVISED February 2005
Support Bureau
117 – Robbery – The Report
REVISED August 2019
Investigations Bureau
118 – Solicitors
REVISED February 2002
Investigations Bureau
119 – Bunco Related Crimes
REVISED March 2001
Investigations Bureau
120 – Bomb Scene Investigations
REVISED September 2005
Investigations Bureau
121 – Explosives
REVISED January 2000
Investigations Bureau
122 – Traffic Collision Reporting
REVISED February 2002
Patrol Bureau
123 – Misdemeanor Citations
REVISED March 2001
124 – Credit Card Investigation
REVISED March 2001
128 – Homicide Investigations
REVISED March 2020
129 – Stolen Aircraft
REVISED November 2003
Investigation Bureau
131 – Counterfeit Currency
REVISED March 2001
Investigations Bureau
132 – Community Services Assistant Incidents Involving Self-Defense
REVISED September 2023
Community Services Bureau
133 – Security Guards & Private Patrol Operators
REVISED February 2003
Investigations Bureau
134 – Firearms Qualification
REVISED September 2022
Support Bureau
136 – Shoplifting Theft
REVISED September 2002
Investigations Bureau
140 – Bar Inspections
REVISED April 2004
Investigations Bureau
141 – Security of Information
REVISED August 2001
Investigations Bureau
144 – Clandestine Laboratories & LAIMPACT Clandestine Lab Team
REVISED September 2019
Investigations Bureau
145 – Vehicle Stops
REVISED March 2005
Support Bureau
146 – High-Risk Vehicle Stops
REVISED October 2004
Patrol Bureau
147 – One Officer Patrol Unit
REVISED January 2003
Patrol Bureau
148 – Parking Citation Books
REVISED January 2002
Patrol Bureau
149 – Child Abuse
REVISED September 2022
Investigations Bureau
150 – Flares and Flare Patterns
REVISED April 2002
Patrol Bureau
151 – Licensed Health Facilities
REVISED January 2002
Patrol Bureau
152 – DV Restraining Orders
REVISED November 2021
Investigations Bureau
154 – DMV Re-Examination
REVISED April 2001
Patrol Bureau
155 – Child Abductions
REVISED October 2022
156 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1
REVISED March 2021
157 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2
REVISED March 2021
158 – Hazardous Materials, Wastes & Chemical Dumping
REVISED February 2001
Patrol Bureau
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
REVISED January 2003
Office of the Chief of Police
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID Card
REVISED January 2003
Patrol Bureau
163 – Child Sexual Abuse Material
REVISED September 2022
Investigations Bureau
164 – At-Risk Missing Person
REVISED March 2021
Investigations Bureau
166 – Report of Property
REVISED September 2003
Investigations Bureau
167 – Carotid Restraint
Support Bureau
168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration
REVISED August 2002
Investigations Bureau
169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
REVISED August 2018
Patrol Bureau
170 – Searching Techniques
REVISED May 2019
Support Bureau
174 – Photographic Lineups
REVISED May 2020
175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence Review & Collection
REVISED November 2005
177 – Reserve Police Officer Duties
REVISED May 2004
Patrol Bureau
178 – Court Appearances
REVISED February 2001
179 – Communicable Diseases
REVISED January 2023
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
REVISED December 2000
Administration Bureau
182 – Elder/Dependent Adult Abuse
REVISED September 2022
Investigations Bureau
186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing
REVISED June 2012
Support Bureau
187 – Tactical Communication
REVISED January 2001
191 – Hazards of Approaching Suspects
REVISED August 2019
Support Bureau
192 – Foot Pursuits
REVISED February 2021
Support Bureau
195 – Vessel Collision Responses
REVISED February 2022
Patrol Bureau
196 – Vessel Report
REVISED January 2021
197 – Officer & Employee Involved Traffic Collisions
REVISED June 2002
Patrol Bureau
198 – Parolees
REVISED April 2021
200 – Mandatory Helmet Law
REVISED May 2002
Patrol Bureau
201 – Recognizing and Handling Alzheimer’s Victims
REVISED December 2001
Patrol Bureau
204 – Field Shotgun Inspections
REVISED February 2002
Reviewed January 2020
Support Bureau
205 – Proper Handling of Prisoners Property
REVISED July 2000
Support Bureau
211 – Unloading Firearms
REVISED September 2004
Reviewed January 2020
Support Bureau
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employees
REVISED September 2001
Investigations Bureau
213 – 14602.6 CVC – 30 Day Impounds
REVISED July 2013
Patrol Bureau
216 – Computer Crimes
REVISED May 2003
Investigations Bureau
218 – Sex Offender Status – Megan’s Law
REVISED March 2004
Investigation Bureau
221 – Tire Deflation Device
REVISED June 2017
Patrol Bureau
222 – Hate Crimes
REVISED July 2019
Investigations Bureau
1 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 3 – Department Report
Revised March 2004
DEPARTMENT REPORTS
INTRODUCTION
The Long Beach Police Department utilizes a computer Records Management System
(RMS). This system consolidates several existing computer programs into one
comprehensive package. Your investigative and statistical gathering abilities are
enhanced via the RMS system.
In order for the system to work to its fullest potential, it is imperative that all information
collected is accurate, complete and received in a timely manner. To facilitate the filing of
complete, accurate reports, all reports forms are designed in a uniform manner.
POLICY
In all cases, the initial decision to file a report rests with the investigating Department
employee. Employees are required to file all reports in a complete, accurate, and timely
manner. Department Record #s (DR#s) shall be obtained through the use of a Mobile
Digital Terminal (MDT) or any computer terminal for all incident/informational reports. Any
unused DR# requires a cancellation memo, "Request to Void DR# or SUPP#", addressed
to "Administrator, Records Division" explaining the reason for the cancellation.
In this system, there is only one DR# assigned per incident with supplement numbers
issued for all connecting or follow-up reports. An example of a DR# on the officer's work
sheet would be DR#960012345 SUPP 000 or 001.
When to use a Supplemental Number (SUPP#)
Patrol - An officer is dispatched to an armed robbery of a truck driver driving a tractor-
trailer loaded with five vehicles. This is one incident with one reportable crime. As per
Training Bulletin #194, Hierarchical Report of Crimes, the 215(A) PC carjack would be
the primary crime and would be entered into the CRIME CLASS field on the DR. The
tractor, tractor-trailer and each vehicle would require that a Vehicle form be completed
and receive its own SUPP#.
Detectives – Any type of follow-up will require a "Follow-up Report/Arrest Incident
Worksheet", PD 2310.001(K) to be used. The INCIDENT INFORMATION section should
be completed and attached to the narrative follow-up.
TB3 – Department Reports
2 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
DEPARTMENT REPORT (DR) – FORMS/SECTION USAGE MATRIX
LBPD form PD 10000.00, "Long Beach Police Department Incident Report Worksheet",
is mandatory for all reporting. Additional forms will be added, as needed depending on
the circumstances of the crime. The Property Report, PD 2240.009(A), is the only
Department form that can be filed by itself when used for found property only.
An "X" indicates that the section is a minimum requirement for the listed report type. Other
SECTIONS may be necessary depending on the information available to the Department
Employee.
Yellow Forms Pink Forms Blue White
Report Type Inci
info
Per/
Bus
MO
codes
Veh
sect
Narra
tion
Fraud
doc
Bike
Rpt
Prop
Rpt
Loss
Rpt
Vessel
Rpt
Veh
Form
Follow up X X
Found
Property
X
Veh stolen X
Veh stored
simple
X
Veh impound X
Veh Rec local X
Veh Rec
Foreign
X
Fraud X X X X X
*Bike stolen X X X X X
Bike stored X
Bike impound X
Bike found X
Bike
recovered
X X
Vessel
stolen/emb
X
Vessel stored X
Vessel
impound
X
Vessel
recovered
X
*Bike attachment – goes with incident as loss for stolen bike (PD3200.003(B) "BICYCLE REPORT
CONTINUATION") in 212 or 459.
Stand-alone abbreviated 484 or 487 only with no suspects; use PD 3200.003(A); when
the only loss is the bike "Bicycle Report."
The following form facsimiles are meant to serve only as examples. There are many
other forms, including but not limited to:
TB3 – Department Reports
3 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Fraudulent Document
• Bicycle Report
• Vessel Report
• Loss Report
• Property Report
• Vehicle Report
• Arrest Report
All of these forms are set up so the information required can be entered quickly and
accurately. It is incumbent upon the filing officer to print clearly, check all appropriate
boxes and file complete reports.
1. INCIDENT VICTIM
PD Form 2310.001 (A) or PD Form 10000.00
DR # SUPP NO REPORT TYPE REPORT DATE REPORT TIME CALL NO DISP PRIMARY CRIME CLASS
LOCATION CITY ZIP UNIT #
FROM DATE FROM TIME TO DATE TO TIME DID#1 DID #2 SUPV. CONF TOTAL LOSS
USE OF FORCE RNB SUPV NOTIFY – REMARKS VEH REPORT ATTACHED LAB REQUESTED LAB RESPONDED
SFST EXAM DRE EXAM DOMESTIC VIOLENCE ELDER ABUSE SOC FORM PROPERTY REPORT
LOSS REPORT VICTIM INJURED PHOTOS TAKEN SUSPECT IN CUSTODY JUVENILE ARRESTED DIAGRAM
HATE CRIME
REMARKS
PERSON
INVOLVEMENT
VIC
TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR
HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE CONFIDENTIAL TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYPE ID NUMBER ST
TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION FROM/TO WORK HOURS DAYS OFF
LOCATION CITY ST ZIP CODE CONTACT TYPE
PHONE NO EXT REMARKS
On the reverse side of this form officers will find PD form 2310.001(B), a list of MO Codes. Each
crime investigated and reported requires that MO Codes be identified. Officers are required to
check the boxes next to the appropriate codes for each crime investigated. MO Codes are also
found on the Abbreviated Incident Report Form PD 2310.001(O). On the reverse side PD
2310.00(T).
TB3 – Department Reports
4 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT CONTINUATION/PERSON WORKSHEET
This is a continuation or page two of PD Form 2310.001 (E)
PERSON
INVOLVEMENT
SUSP # TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR
HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE CONFIDENTIAL FROM HEIGHT TO HEIGHT FROM WEIGHT TO WEIGHT FROM AGE TO AGE
TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE ADDRESS CITY S
T
ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYP
E
ID NUMBER
BOOKING # GEN APPEARANCE BUILD HAIR DESC FACIAL FEATURES CHARACTERISTICS
SPEECH DEMEANOR DISGUISE GLASSES WEAPON TYPE CALIBER
BARREL LENGTH
COLOR
CLOTHING
ALIAS NAME SEX RACE
ALIAS NAME
SMT LOCATION DESCRIPTION
SMT LOCATION DESCRIPTION
TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION WORK HRS DAYS OFF
LOCATION/ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CONTACT PERSON
TYP
E
PHONE NO EXT REMARKS
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT CONTINUATION/PERSON WORKSHEET
This is also a continuation of PD Form 2310.001 depending on the number of vehicles involved.
VEHICLE
INVOLVEMENT
INVL DATE TYPE LICENSE NO STATE LIC YEAR LIC TYPE VEH YEAR MAKE
MODEL STYLE COLOR WINDOW TYPE MODIFICATIONS
DAMAGE #OCCUPANTS SPECIAL FEATURES
REMARKS
TB3 – Department Reports
5 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
ABBREVIATED INCIDENT REPORT
This is PD Form 2310.001(O)
DR # SUPP NO REPORT TYPE REPORT DATE REPORT TIME CALL NO DISP PRIMARY CRIME CLASS
LOCATION CITY
ZIP
UNIT #
OCCURRED ON DATE TIME BETWEEN DATE TIME DID#1 DID #2 CONFIDENTIAL TOTAL LOSS
REMARKS
PERSON
INVOLVEMENT
TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR
HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE TYPE ID NUMBER ST SOCIAL SECUIRTY NO
TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT
TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION FROM/TO WORK HOURS DAYS OFF
REMARKS
VEHICLE
INVOLVEMENT
INVL DATE TYPE LICENSE NO STATE LIC YEAR LIC TYPE YEAR MAKE
MODEL STYLE COLOR VALUE VIN
TB3 – Department Reports
6 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
FOLLOW-UP REPORT/ARREST INCIDENT WORKSHEET
This is PD Form 2310.001(K).
FOLLOW – UP REPORT FOLLOW – UP AND ARREST ARREST ONLY RNB INVOLVED
DR SUPP DATE RPTD TIME RPTD PRIMARY CRIME CLASS
LOCATION OF OCCURRENCE CITY
DID #1 OFF #1 DID #2 OFF #2 UNIT ID
VICTIM SUSPECT/DEFENDANT
BOOKING# CALL# DOMESTIC VIOLENCE GANG INVOLVEMENT
JUVENILE ARRESTED USE OF FORCE
NAME/DID# OF SUPV NOTIFIED (RNB ONLY)
REMARKS/MODUS OPERANDI
PERSON
INVOLVEMENT INVOLV DATE NAME SEX RACE DOB HGT WGT
HAIR EYE SKIN OP LIC# STATE SSN ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP PHONE HOM MSG
( )
BUSINESS NAME TYPE OF BUSINESS
SUSPECT INFORMATION
SUSP#________ AGE _______ CLOTHING
IN-CUSTODY
BOOKING#_____________________________
TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION WORK HRS DAYS OFF
LOCATION/ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CONTACT PERSON
TYPE PHONE NO EXT REMARKS
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Administration Bureau
.
7 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 4 – LGBTQ Terminology
Revised January 2018
LESBIAN, GAY, BISEXUAL, TRANSGENDERED, QUEER or
QUESTIONING (LGBTQ) TERMINOLOGY
INTRODUCTION
The City of Long Beach is home to a large population of people who identify as lesbian,
gay, bisexual, transgendered, queer or questioning (LGBTQ). People who are unfamiliar
with these terms are often hesitant to engage in conversation regarding a person’s sexual
orientation or gender expression out of fear of using the incorrect term. Employees will
likely encounter members of this community during their professional contacts or the
investigation of crimes, community partnerships, and within the workplace. In order to
communicate more effectively, and serve the needs of those who identify as LGBTQ,
employees of the Long Beach Police Department should become familiar with the
following terminology:
DEFINITIONS
Ally | A person who is not LGBTQ, but shows support for the LGBTQ people and
promotes equality in a variety of ways.
Androgynous | Identifying or presenting as neither distinguishably masculine, nor
feminine.
Asexual | The lack of a sexual attraction or desire for other people.
Biphobia | Prejudice, fear or hatred directed toward bisexual people.
Bisexual | A person emotionally, romantically or sexually attracted to more than one sex,
gender, or gender identity, though not necessarily simultaneously, in the same way or to
the same degree.
Cisgender | A term used to describe a person whose gender identity aligns with those
typically associated with the sex assigned to them at birth.
Closeted | Describes an LGBTQ person who has not disclosed their sexual orientation
or gender identity.
Coming out | The process in which a person first acknowledges, accepts and appreciates
his or her sexual orientation, or gender identity, and begins to share that with others.
TB4 LGBTQ Terminology
8 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Gay | A person who is emotionally, romantically, or sexually attracted to members of the
same gender.
Gender dysphoria | Clinically significant distress caused when a person's assigned birth
gender is not the same as the one with which they identify. According to the American
Psychiatric Association's Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM),
the term - which replaces Gender Identity Disorder - "is intended to better characterize
the experiences of affected children, adolescents, and adults."
Gender-expansive | Conveys a wider, more flexible range of gender identity or
expression, than typically associated with the binary gender system.
Gender expression | External appearance of one's gender identity, usually expressed
through behavior, clothing, haircut or voice, and which may or may not conform to socially
defined behaviors and characteristics typically associated with being either masculine or
feminine.
Gender-fluid | According to the Oxford English Dictionary, a person who does not identify
with a single fixed gender; of or relating to a person having or expressing a fluid or unfixed
gender identity.
Gender identity | One’s innermost concept of self as male, female, a blend of both, or
neither – how individuals perceive themselves and what they call themselves. One's
gender identity can be the same or different from their sex assigned at birth.
Gender non-conforming | A broad term referring to people who do not behave in a way
that conforms to the traditional expectations of their gender, or whose gender expression
does not fit neatly into a category.
Genderqueer | Genderqueer people typically reject notions of static categories of gender
and embrace a fluidity of gender identity and often, though not always, sexual orientation.
People who identify as "genderqueer" may see themselves as being both male and
female, neither male nor female, or as falling completely outside these categories.
Gender transition | The process by which some people strive to more closely align their
internal knowledge of gender with its outward appearance. Some people socially
transition, whereby they might begin dressing, using names and pronouns or be socially
recognized as another gender. Others undergo physical transitions in which they modify
their bodies through medical interventions.
Homophobia | The fear and hatred of, or discomfort with, people who are attracted to
members of the same sex.
Lesbian | A woman who is emotionally, romantically or sexually attracted to other women.
LGBTQ | An acronym for “lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender and queer.”
TB4 LGBTQ Terminology
9 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Living openly | A state in which LGBTQ people are comfortably out about their sexual
orientation or gender identity – where and when it feels appropriate to them.
Outing | Exposing someone’s lesbian, gay, bisexual or transgender identity to others
without their permission. Outing someone can have serious repercussions on
employment, economic stability, personal safety, or religious, or family situations.
Queer | A term people often use to express fluid identities and orientations. Often used
interchangeably with "LGBTQ."
Questioning | A term used to describe people who are in the process of exploring their
sexual orientation or gender identity.
Same-gender loving | A term some prefer to use instead of lesbian, gay or bisexual to
express attraction to, and love of, people of the same gender.
Sexual orientation | An inherent or immutable enduring emotional, romantic, or sexual
attraction to other people.
Transexual | A person who has undergone treatment or surgery to acquire the physical
characteristics of the opposite sex.
Transgender | An umbrella term for people whose gender identity or expression is
different from cultural expectations based on the sex they were assigned at birth. Being
transgender does not imply any specific sexual orientation. Therefore, transgender
people may identify as straight, gay, lesbian, bisexual, etc.
Transphobia | The fear and hatred of, or discomfort with, transgender people.
Source: http://www.hrc.org/resources/glossary-of-terms
CONCLUSION
Long Beach Police Department employees are challenged with unique and sensitive
interactions when people need police services. The understanding of common
terminology, allowing for a shared language to be spoken, will enhance positive
relationships between law enforcement and the LGBTQ community.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
10 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd
& Mob Behavior
Revised May 2002
PSYCHOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF CROWD AND MOB
BEHAVIOR
INTRODUCTION
An unruly crowd bent on destruction can be a frightening thing. The more an officer knows
about the characteristics of a crowd or mob, the better equipped the officer will be to
handle the problem.
MOBS
Mobs come together with different motives, and often they exist in combination. These
mobs include:
• Aggressive Mob - Riots and terrorizes, as in the case of race riots, lynching, political
riots and prison riots
• Escape Mob - Is in a state of fright or panic. Members have lost their power to reason
• Acquisitive Mob - Is motivated by a desire to acquire something. Food riots and
looting are examples
• Expressive Mob - A mob expressing fervor or revelry, such as religious activity,
sporting events, etc.
MOB PANIC
Panic is over powering fright, creating highly emotional behavior. Panic mobs are
extremely difficult to control. When people become violent, they cease to think rationally;
their actions can be dangerous not only to themselves, but to others. There are four main
factors involved in a panic-producing situation:
• A perceived threat - It may be physical or psychological or both. It is regarded as
imminent and the only alternative is to escape
• Partial entrapment - There is only one, or at best limited escape routes from the
situation
• Partial or complete breakdown of the escape route
• Front to rear communications failure - The false assumption that there is still an
escape route leads people at the rear to exert forces forward. This, of course, causes
those at the front to be smothered, crushed, or trampled
TB8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd and Mob Behavior
11 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
INFLUENCES THAT WORK IN FAVOR OF THE AGITATOR
A mob leader who whips emotions to a peak can induce mob behavior in crowd members
through suggestion and exhibited behaviors, as well as agitation. These behaviors and
suggestions include:
• Novelty - When people are faced with new and strange circumstances, their normal
habits no longer govern their actions. The lessons of previous experience may not be
applied. Some people welcome the break and react enthusiastically to new
circumstances
• Anonymity - People can lose themselves in a mob and feel that they will not be held
accountable for their actions, whatever they may be
• Release of repressed emotions - In a mob, a person's prejudices, dissatisfactions,
and desires that are normally held in reserve are released. This causes the person to
do things that may not be desired or might not have been dared to do
• Force of numbers - A mob gives people a sense of power and a desire to use it. This
feeling is enhanced by a feeling of irresponsibility. These two, a sense of power and
a feeling of irresponsibility, are a dangerous combination. People under normal
conditions control their anger, but when they are supported in their actions by many
and they all share this anger, they feel whatever they do collectively is justified
• Suggestion - A group will accept the leadership of a dominant personality and his
ideas
• Contagion - People become emotionally stimulated by actions of others. They may
not even share the grievance. It may start in sympathy
• Imitation - People copy or imitate others. Only those with strong convictions can
resist conformity. In an emotional crowd or mob, which is likely to turn its anger
against a dissenter, this pressure to conform is strong
POLICE PROBLEMS
Deaths, injuries, and damage to property may be expected as the result of riots. Verbal
abuse, in the form of obscene remarks, taunts, ridicule, and jeers can be expected from
a mob. Officers trained and well-disciplined will continue to carry out their orders, paying
no attention to the psychological persuasion being used.
Officers can expect the mob to throw filth, trash, or missiles of various kinds at them.
Rioters have used vehicles, barrels, rocks, dynamite, weapons, etc., against the police.
The squad leader, in accordance with principles of applying force, should deal with these
attacks.
Officers should avoid staying close to high buildings due to the threat of missiles dropped
by rioters. To successfully meet the situations presented requires careful, intelligent effort
and constant vigilance to detect attacks.
CONCLUSION
TB8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd and Mob Behavior
12 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
In order to exercise control, an officer must have knowledge of how a crowd or mob
reacts, and be able to maintain an impartial and professional approach. If an officer
should panic or lose his temper, he could very well aggravate instead of control the
problem.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
13 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 10 – Dead Body Calls
Revised June 2017
Reviewed July 2019
DEAD BODY CALLS
INTRODUCTION
Police officers have a major responsibility when called upon to investigate a sudden or
violent death. Officers represent the deceased; it is their duty to protect the decedent’s
interests. If, through careless investigation, an improper interpretation is made, a spouse
or family member may be deprived of benefits and property, or a murderer could go free.
REPORTING PROCEDURE
All deaths reported to the Police Department require the issuance of a department record
(DR) number and the filing of a Dead Body Report; in most incidents, a Coroner’s case
number will be issued. When filing the dead body report, officers will classify the death
type as one of the following:
• Natural
• Accidental
• Suicide
• Homicide
• Undetermined
• Traffic Accident
The Coroner’s Office is notified in all of the above, except when the death is of natural
causes, and a doctor has treated the decedent within the past twenty days, and the doctor
is willing to sign the death certificate. If the amount of time between the decedent’s most
recent visits to the doctor exceeds twenty days, the Coroner must be notified; the Coroner
then determines if the doctor can sign the death certificate.
The following is a checklist of information, if available, to include in the narrative to ensure
a thorough investigation:
• How officers received the call;
• Facts regarding the scene such as, position of the body, appearance of the room,
clothing on the decedent, or other observations that seem pertinent;
• Any facts known about the decedent such as, health issues, and attending
physician;
• If there is a doctor willing to sign the death certificate, include the doctor’s name,
address, phone number and information about the illness and treatment;
TB10 – Dead Body Calls
14 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Coroner’s case number, the name and identification number of the Coroner’s
Office employee issuing the Coroner’s Case number;
• The name of the mortuary receiving the decedent;
• Name, address and phone number of next of kin;
• If there are prescription drugs, list each drug and note any abnormal amount
missing, i.e. bottle of 30 pills, only 2 left;
• The contents of a suicide note if one is present.
If an officer is dispatched to a hospital regarding a dead body, the officer should ultimately
return to the location where the body was transported and document any additional facts
surrounding the death investigation in the report. Officers should interview all parties
having any information regarding the decedent.
CORONER’S CASES
In order to alert Coroner’s Office staff that they may need assistance in removing the
decedent, or to expedite their response in the event the decedent is in public view, officers
should collect all pertinent information prior to calling the Coroner’s Office. When officers
notify the Coroner’s Office, they should communicate the following information:
• Whether or not the decedent is in public view, such as on a sidewalk or a roadway;
• The physical condition of the decedent such as, decomposed or overweight;
• Any location issues such as stairs, unusual terrain like sand or the river bed;
• Any weather considerations.
The investigating police officer will remain on the scene until a Coroner’s Investigator
arrives. Police officers will not disturb, move or search a decedent unless first approved
by the Coroner’s investigator (Government Code 27491.2(b). The Coroner’s Investigator
is responsible for inventory of the decedent’s property. Whenever the Coroner’s
Investigator provides a list of the decedent’s property to the investigating officer, this list
must be booked as evidence.
DEATH NOTIFICATION
In situations where a doctor has been contacted, and is willing and able to sign a death
certificate, family members are usually aware of the death. This is because arrangements
have been made by family members for a private mortuary to receive the body.
When a doctor is unable or unwilling to sign a death certificate, and at any time the
Coroner’s Office is notified and responding to the death investigation, the handling patrol
officer shall coordinate with the Coroner’s Investigator which agency will make the death
notification to the next of kin. When requested by the Coroner’s Office, and when the
next of kin resides in the City of Long Beach, the investigating officer will make the death
notification. In the event of a homicide or fatal traffic accident, the handling detective is
responsible for coordinating the death notification with the Coroner’s Office. Notifications
to next of kin residing outside the City of Long Beach are handled by the Coroner’s Office.
If the next of kin resides in the immediate surrounding area of the City of Long Beach, at
the request of the Coroner’s Officer, a field supervisor may authorize the notification.
TB10 – Dead Body Calls
15 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The following will assist an officer in performing a death notification with professionalism
and sensitivity:
• Utilize tact and diplomacy with notifying family or friends of a death;
• Use courtesy and compassion when making a death notification;
• Use consideration when informing an individual who is elderly or in poor health;
• When appropriate, have the individual seated prior to notification;
• Pertinent instructions (who to contact, where, when, or phone numbers) should be
provided in writing to the next of kin only after making an in person notification.
For further, see LBPD Manual § 7.1.28 DEATH NOTIFICATION.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
16 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 11 – Suicides
Revised August 2019
SUICIDES
INTRODUCTION
Suicide is the act or instance of ending one’s own life voluntarily or intentionally. In all
dead body investigations, the first officer on scene should look for signs of foul play or
movement of the body after death. Never assume the deceased died a natural death. The
scene must be investigated and an attempt made to determine whether the death was
natural, homicide, suicide, undetermined, or accidental. The Homicide Detail responds
to any death where foul play is suspected or suspicious circumstances exist.
INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURE
Before a conclusion of suicide is reached, a careful study should be made of the following:
• Type of injury;
• Presence of a weapon or death instrument;
• Body positioning relative to physical evidence associated with or believed
associated with the incident:
• Existence of motive and the elimination of death by murder;
• Accident or natural causes.
The following will assist a patrol officer with their investigation:
• Note the type of injury and attempt to determine if the injury is self-inflicted;
• Note the presence of a tool or device used to cause injury or inflict death, do not
overlook poisons or drugs;
• Ask witnesses or relatives about the decedent’s behavior prior to death to obtain
background information about motive and intent;
• Look for a suicide note.
The same process used to investigate homicides should apply to suicides. Murders have
been committed and arranged to mislead law enforcement into concluding that a death is
a suicide. During a suicide investigation, as with any other investigation, officers must be
careful to preserve the scene and ensure that:
• The body is left in its original position until the Coroner’s investigator arrives;
• Evidence is not handled, moved or otherwise disturbed.
LOS ANGELES COUNTY CORONER’S OFFICE (CORONER)
TB11 -- Suicides
17 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When a suicide is suspected, the Coroner’s Office is notified and will investigate. The
Coroner will collect any suicide notes or poison and drugs that may have been used, while
the investigating officer photographs or copies the note, and collects, packages and
photographs all other evidence.
TYPES OF SUICIDE DEATHS
Gun Shot
Gunshot wounds in a possible suicide can be classified in a variety of wound types
including contact, near-contact, intermediate, and distant wounds. Officers should
describe the wound location but not classify the wound type or whether it is an entrance
or exit wound. Specific training and expertise are necessary for classifying and identifying
wound types.
Cutting
The throat, wrists, chest and femoral artery are the parts of the body most commonly cut
in a suicide. The location of the wound must have been accessible to the victim. Small
superficial cuts near the main wound, or hesitation marks may be seen in a suicide caused
by cutting. Cadaver spasms may also be present in self-inflicted cuttings, causing the
victim to tightly clench the cutting instrument in his or her hand. The location of the body
should also make sense.
Toxicity – Poisoning
Carbon monoxide poisoning is a common type of fatal poisoning. Carbon monoxide is a
toxic gas, but being colorless, odorless, and tasteless it is difficult for people to detect.
Carbon monoxide poisoning occurs after breathing in too much carbon monoxide (CO).
It has also commonly been used as a method to commit suicide, usually by deliberately
inhaling the exhaust fumes of a running vehicle.
Modern automobiles that run on gasoline, diesel, methane or other carbon-based fuels
and tools, gas heaters, and cooking equipment powered by carbon-based fuels such as
propane, butane and charcoal produce levels of carbon monoxide which will kill in an
enclosed space or if the exhaust path is obstructed.
Symptoms of mild acute poisoning include lightheadedness, confusion, headache, feeling
like the world is spinning, and flu-like effects. Larger exposures can lead to toxicity of the
central nervous system and heart, and death.
Death due to poisoning may have the following effect on the body after death:
• Carbon monoxide and cyanide can create a livid cherry red color over large areas
of the body;
• Acids or common household poisons can create burns around the mouth and
nose.
Drowning
When a person drowns, death is caused by asphyxia. Signs of drowning include the
presence of mucus or vomit, violent struggling, and foam exuding from the nose and
mouth of the victim. In the case of drowning deaths, Homicide Detectives should be
TB11 -- Suicides
18 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
notified in accordance with LBPD Manual § 8.2.1.2 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL-OUTS –
NOTIFICATIONS.
Hanging
Death caused by hanging can be suicidal, but at times can be accidental. A particularly
dangerous form of masochism called autoerotic asphyxia manifests itself by a subject
attempting to heighten sexual arousal by oxygen deprivation. The person may also bind
his hands and feet. Subjects employing autoerotic asphyxia may pass out and become
unable to release themselves from the hanging device. In the absence of another person
to release the subject, accidental death may result. In the case of an accidental death by
hanging, or a suicide by hanging, it is not necessary that the body be suspended entirely
off the ground for death to occur. The body may be half prone or in a sitting or kneeling
position. Death may be caused by several circumstances:
• Asphyxia;
• Occlusion or tightening of the great vessels of the neck;
• Inhibition of the heart due to pressure on the vagus nerve;
• Fracture or dislocation of the spine.
It is important that in this type of incident, barring any attempts at life saving measures,
the hanging device remain untouched. Examination of the hanging device and details
related to the knot may become a critical part of the evidence.
End of Life Option Act – Health and Safety Code § 443
The End of Life Option Act creates a provision where physicians can prescribe aid-in-
dying drugs to terminally ill patients. Prior to a doctor prescribing end of life drugs, a
patient must satisfy a list of specific requirements. These requirements include
demonstrating that they have the capacity to make medical decisions in their best interest.
Additionally, the doctor must file forms with the State Department of Health documenting
that the requirements have been met and the patient has made an informed decision.
State law provides immunity from civil and criminal liability to a person who is simply
present when a qualified patient self-administers an aid-in-dying drug. The law makes it
a felony to deliberately aid, advise, or encourage a person to obtain or ingest aid-in-dying
drug. A person may assist a qualified patient in any preparation of an aid-in-dying drug
so long as they do not assist with ingestion.
Officers encountering a scene where they believe a person died after ingesting an aid-in-
dying drug prescribed by a physician should handle the death as a natural death. The
physician should be contacted to sign the death certificate as the Coroner will not
respond. The scene should be documented and witnesses interviewed to determine their
role, if any, in the death. If the investigation shows someone administered aid-in-dying
drugs to the decedent or any foul play is suspected then refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.1.2
HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL OUTS - NOTIFICATIONS.
A qualified patient is required to complete a final attestation form at least 48 hours prior
to choosing to self-administer the drugs. Officers investigating a potential End of Life
Option death should make note of any paperwork they find related to the decision to use
or the prescribing of an aid-in-dying drug. These forms are required to be submitted to
TB11 -- Suicides
19 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
the state by the physician, so officers should leave the originals and document such forms
by making copies or taking photos.
State law specifically says death resulting from self-administering of an aid-in-dying drug,
by a qualified patient, is not suicide and therefore prohibits health and insurance coverage
from being exempted on that basis. Officers should code their report as DEAD BODY -
EOL (End of Life Option) and not as a suicide.
THE REPORT
While this does not cover every possibility or scenario of a death by suicide, the following
list will assist officers is filing a comprehensive report:
• Describe the scene;
• Describe the position of the body, clothing, and the location of any wounds, etc.;
• Describe any physical evidence;
• Include any information from friends, neighbors and relatives-concerning possible
motive and intent;
• Include any facts believed to relevant;
• Include what was written in any suicide note.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 12 – Suicide by Cop
Revised April 2020
12 – SUICIDE BY COP
Revised April 2020
INTRODUCTION
A Suicide by Cop (SbC) incident is an encounter in which a suicidal person attempts to
die by forcing a law enforcement officer to use deadly force. The defining characteristics
of SbC incidents are that the subject threatens the life of the officer or another person or
attempts to make the officer believe the subject poses such a threat in order to give the
officer no choice but to use lethal force to stop the threat.
HOW TO RECOGNIZE AN SbC INCIDENT
The following are some indicators of a possible SbC incident:
• The subject says “kill me” or “shoot me” or otherwise expresses a desire to die.
• The subject appears to be depressed or in a mental health crisis.
• The subject is not behaving like a criminal offender (for example, the subject does not
attempt to leave the scene).
• The subject is behaving aggressively toward the police for no apparent reason.
• The subject is exhibiting strange behavior, such as committing random acts of
vandalism or ramming a police car.
• The calling party may describe the subject as distraught, mentally ill, or a danger to
themselves or others.
RESPONDING TO A POTENTIAL SbC INCIDENT
An important objective in responding to SbC calls is to reduce the subject’s level of anxiety
and buy time for further communication. Officers must ensure their safety and that of the
public. Only when safety is established can officers begin a process of asking the suicidal
subject questions and looking for ways to de-escalate the situation.
To increase your available time:
• Keep a safe distance and use tactical repositioning to protect yourself whenever
possible.
• Slow things down and use whatever time is feasible so you can convey a sense of
calm for the suicidal person.
• Speak slowly to convey to the suicidal person that you are not in a hurry and that you
have time to listen.
Weapons
If the suicidal subject has a firearm, it is a high-risk situation and should be handled like
other situations involving a subject with a firearm. Responding officers should maintain
TB12 – Suicide by Cop
21 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
a safe distance behind cover, use extreme caution, and warn arriving units of the safest
approach.
If you can establish that the suicidal person is unarmed or armed with a weapon other
than firearm (such as a knife or blunt object), and if you can use distance and cover to
protect yourself, you will have a wider range of possible tactics.
Resources
The response to SbC incidents is greatly improved when additional resources can be
called to the scene including assisting units, a supervisor, Mental Evaluation Team (MET),
and a K-9 Unit.
Contact and Cover
Ideally if there are two or more officers at the scene, one officer can be the contact officer
while the other officer(s) provide cover.
• The contact officer’s role is to communicate with the subject, establish a relationship
of trust, and attempt to defuse the incident without use of deadly force.
• To ensure the messages are clear and consistent, communication with the subject
should be exclusively the contact officer’s function. Avoid multiple officers speaking
to the subject at the same time.
• The cover officer’s role is to protect the contact officer and the public.
• If the contact officer is unable to establish a connection with the subject, the two
officers can switch roles, or another officer can take over the contact role.
Gather Information
If there is no imminent danger described by a calling party, officers may be able to first
contact the calling party and gather information regarding the subject. The caller may
know if the subject has immediate access to a weapon or if the subject is acting in a
threatening manner. The caller may have information about any specific issues, such as
a divorce, loss of employment, relationship issues, mental health status, history of drug
abuse or topics that should be avoided that may agitate the subject.
COMMUNICATIING DURING AN SbC INCIDENT
Non-Verbal Communication
Officers should be aware that pointing a gun at a potentially suicidal person may increase
his or her anxiety, exacerbate the situation, and hinder communication. An officer who
says, “I’m here to help you,” while pointing a firearm at the suicidal person sends a
conflicting message.
In some situations, after distance and cover have been established, officers should
consider keeping their firearms unholstered and in a low ready position. The low-ready
position can seem much less threatening to the suicidal person. Pointing a firearm at a
suicidal person can make it difficult to establish trust and communications.
Verbal Communication
TB12 – Suicide by Cop
22 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Establishing a personal connection and a relationship of trust with a suicidal person is the
most effective way of defusing a SbC incident.
The following are ways an officer can better communicate to someone who is suicidal:
• Establish a rapport – introduce yourself and ask the person for his or her name, then
use the name as you converse.
• Speak simply – say one thing at a time and wait for a response.
• Encourage conversation but don’t dominate the conversation or lecture the person.
• Ask a lot of questions and listen carefully to the answers.
• Use language the person can understand and avoid police jargon.
• Aim for a tone of peacefulness and calm, not tension and chaos.
• Be patient - never give ultimatums or deadlines.
• Do not minimize what they are feeling.
• Offer reassurance and allow the suicidal person to save face.
• Be truthful – if you are caught in a lie, you may not be able to recover credibility.
• Don’t go silent – keep the conversation going as much as possible.
• If you say something and it has no effect, try saying something different. Do not repeat
the same thing again and again, expecting a different response.
• Avoid barking orders and instead make small requests, one at a time.
In SbC situations, the difference between making a request and yelling an order can
determine whether the subject complies. For example, if the subject has his hands behind
his back, an officer yelling, “Show me your hands!” can raise the subject’s anxiety level,
which is counter-productive. Instead, make a request rather than issuing an order such
as, “Will you do me a favor and show me your hands? I want to make sure you don’t
have a weapon, so we can take some time and talk. I want to talk to you about what’s
going on with you today, but first I need to know you’re unarmed.”
If the subject has a weapon, ask him or her to put the weapon down. If you get a person
to respond to one request, you establish a precedent of cooperation and can ask another
single request. For example:
• “Hey, what’s going on? Can you do me a favor and move the knife away from your
throat?”
• If the person complies, thank him and make an empathetic comment before making
another request.
• “Good, thank you. I appreciate you doing that for me. I hope you will trust me, so we
can talk a bit now. Do you think you could sit down on that bench for a minute and tell
me what’s going on? I’d like to know what’s happening with you.”
Attempt to keep the person from focusing on their thoughts about suicide by asking
positive questions. Examples of questions include:
• “Is there something in your life that you really enjoy?” If the answer is “no,” go to the
future such as, “If you had your way, what would you like to do someday?”
• Avoid “why” questions such as “Why do you want to die?”, “Why do you feel bad?”
These types of statements keep the subject focused on negative thoughts.
TB12 – Suicide by Cop
23 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Ask “what” questions such as, “Hey, what’s going on with you? What can I do to help
you?”
• Keep the conversation positive by asking, “What you told me must make you feel bad.
Let’s talk about how to fix it”, “Tell me something good in your life or something you’d
like to do some day.”
Persons with Mental Illnesses
Persons who are psychotic, schizophrenic, or who have a delusional disorder, present
additional communication challenges.
• If someone is having visions, do not discount what they are seeing or ignore the
person’s hallucinations, but don’t buy into them as if they are real.
• Acknowledge what they are seeing and how frightening that is for them by saying,
“That must feel scary. I don’t see what you are describing, but I believe that you are
and that must be frightening for you. I’m here to help you.”
• Try to change the subject to something positive.
CONCLUSION
Incidents involving people who are suicidal are unpredictable and at times difficult to
manage. Officers should always ensure their own safety and the safety of the public as
of the utmost importance. When possible, officers should use the communication and
strategies specific to SbC incidents to better assess and control SbC situations with the
goal of achieving a peaceful outcome.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 13 – Report Writing
REVISED August 2023
REPORT WRITING
INTRODUCTION
As much as 40% of a police officer’s work involves writing, most often writing incident
reports. Other Department employees may also be tasked with taking incident reports as
part of their duties. To ensure an employee’s thorough investigation is accurately reflected
by the report filed, employees must present their findings, observations, and actions with
clear and concise writing as a permanent record of that incident.
An investigative report is a written document, prepared by an officer or other Department
employee tasked with taking reports, that details that employee’s observations and
actions as they relate to a specific event or incident. The judicial process cannot function
without the investigative reports written by the investigating employee with direct
knowledge of the criminal incidents. Investigative reports ensure officers, investigating
employees, prosecutors, and judges have sufficient evidence to initiate or continue the
judicial process and successfully prosecute or exonerate a suspect.
CRIME REPORTING AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS
State and federal statutes mandate that law enforcement agencies report certain events
and incidents to the Department of Justice (Penal Code § 11107). These reports should
describe the nature and character of each crime, note all particular circumstances of that
crime, and include all additional or supplemental information pertaining to the suspected
criminal activity.
All incident reports should be based on thorough investigations and should not include
assumptions or known false information. Any employee who knowingly files a false report
will be guilty of a crime (Penal Code § 118.1).
Local Law Enforcement Agencies also have a duty to inform victims of violent crimes
about the California Victim Compensation Program (for further see Manual § 7.1.14
Victims of Violent Crimes Notification Requirements).
CHARACTERISTICS OF AN EFFECTIVE INVESTIGATIVE REPORT
No matter what type of investigative report is being written (e.g., arrest report, incident
report, collision report) the report should have the following six characteristics:
1) Factual – Objective account of relevant facts related to the event or incident
2) Accurate – Consistency between what took place and what is documented in the
report
TB13 – Report Writing
25 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
3) Clear – Free of doubt or confusion on the part of the reader as to what the investigating
officer is reporting
4) Concise - Brief and yet contain all relevant information the readers will need to
understand the details of the incident
5) Complete - Contain all relevant information and facts
6) Timely - Reports should be filed in a timely manner, ensuring that any and all action
required to be taken because of the report, can proceed without unnecessary delay
NARRATIVE FORMAT AND CONTENT
The 10-Part Investigative Report
1) Introduction - Explain how the incident came to your attention (e.g., dispatched,
flagged down, officer initiated).
2) While En Route - Include what updated information was received from the
Communications Center while responding. Not every dispatch will have “while en
route” information.
3) The Location - If needed, provide a word picture of the location as it would look prior
to the crime (e.g., the building structure, layout of property, location of items).
4) Upon Arrival - Statements - Statements from other people (e.g., victim, witness,
suspect) and observations you made during the investigation, including your
reasonable suspicion for a detention and/or your probable cause for arrest if
appropriate. When relevant, describe observations of the suspect made by the officer
(e.g., injuries, whether new or pre-existing, lack of injuries, under the influence, mental
health or other crisis, body language or comments). All the elements of your crime
must be met and logically understood.
5) Descriptions - Descriptive information about persons, places, and things (e.g.,
suspect description, description of loss, inspection of crime scene) that were
mentioned in the statements.
6) Evidence - Document what was found, how it was found, and the chain of custody of
that evidence. Include a detailed description of each item of evidence. Include if
photographs were taken and who took them. Ensure any injuries of officers, victims,
or arrestees are photographed as evidence. The lack of injuries should also be
documented and photographed when appropriate.
7) Additional Resources - This section should include other resources, notifications,
responses, or forms that are part of the overall investigation (e.g., lab units, detective
notifications or response, medical transportation or treatment, towed vehicles, and
supplemental forms).
8) Conclusion - Clarify what your investigation revealed based on the facts. Do not give
opinions during the conclusion statement.
TB13 – Report Writing
26 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
9) The Ending - Note what legally mandated forms and/or resource forms were
provided to the victim, and if the victim desires prosecution if the suspect is located.
Sample Investigative Report Outline
1) On DATE at TIME, my partner (Officer NAME #DID) and I (Officer NAME #DID) were
dispatched to NAME OF PLACE at ADDRESS regarding a CRIME DISPATCH (call
#XXXX). Our call further stated ... Unit XXXX (Officers NAME #DID and Officer NAME
#DID) assisted us on the call.
2) While en route, dispatch advised us ... (UPDATED INFO FROM DISPATCH)
3) This location is a ... (LOCATION DESCRIPTION)
4) Upon arrival, I noticed ... (SCENE DESCRIPTION)
5) I contacted (NAME), and they stated the following: CHRONOLOGICAL TIMELINE OF
EVENTS
6) The victim described the suspect as a ... The victim CAN/CAN NOT identify the suspect
if he/she is seen again. The victim described the loss as ... I inspected the crime scene
and noticed ...
7) I NOTICED/LOCATED/FOUND ... (EVIDENCE)I kept the item in my possession until
placing it into evidence.
8) Lab Unit LXX (NAME #DID) responded and processed the scene.
9) My investigation revealed that the suspect ...
10) I gave the victim a Report Receipt and a Marsy’s Card, and they desire prosecution.
The 10-Part Arrest Report
11) Consent - If the contact started as a consensual encounter, explain in detail how the
subject was free to leave at any moment.
12) Detention - Clearly describe your reasonable suspicion to lawfully detain the subject.
Detentions must be reasonable in scope and duration.
13) Identification - After the subject was detained, state how they were properly identified
as the suspect (officer observed the crime, probable cause existed, a field show-up was
conducted).
14) Arrest - Document as many specific and detailed facts to support your probable cause
for the arrest. Ensure the elements of the crime were met before the arrest. Include who
took the suspect into custody and any details about and how they were taken into custody
and transported to jail.
TB13 – Report Writing
27 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
15) Custodial Care - Describe any medical care or treatment required including type of
injury (pre-existing or not), Fire Department response, any medical aid provided by an
officer, or treatment at a hospital.
16) Search and Seizure - Document your legal authority for your search of a person,
vehicle, or property, including who or what was searched, and the type of search
conducted (e.g., pat down, consent, parole/probation).
17) Statements - Include the suspect’s statements after their arrest and if they were
spontaneous statements or obtained under Miranda.
18) Ending - The report should end with the final disposition of the suspect being either
arrested, cited, or released.
19) Juveniles - Juveniles should not be referred to as “suspect” or “defendant” in your
report. They can be referred to as minor or juvenile or by name. Include notifications made
to parent or guardians, and document compliance with criteria for custodial interrogation
of juveniles.
20) Use of Force - For any use of force (controlling force, intermediate force, or deadly
force), ensure the reader knows the facts of the incident, details of your mindset
throughout the incident, and the reasons for your actions.
Document if a verbal warning was given, and if it was not given, why it was not feasible
in that situation. Include the conduct of the subject leading up to the use of force, attempts
at gaining voluntary compliance, tactics used, and all attempts at de-escalation that
occurred throughout the incident. Each application of force should be documented and
justified. If a force option outside of the Department training is used, fully articulate the
circumstances and why Department trained force options were not utilized.
Note any medical aid provided, and, when necessary, who medically evaluated the
subject prior to booking. Additionally, document what supervisor was notified of the use
of force.
For further on use of force, see LBPD Manual § 10 – USE OF FORCE.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
28 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 14 – U-Visa
REVISED July 2023
U VISA
INTRODUCTION
In 2000, Congress passed the Victims of Trafficking and Violence Protection Act
(VTVPA), establishing the “U Visa Program”. U Visa petitioners are required to submit
the U Visa Nonimmigrant Status Certification Form (I-918, supplement B), which is a
certification of helpfulness from a qualified certifying agency. The official signing this
form is certifying the petitioner meets the following criteria:
• Has been a victim of a qualifying criminal incident.
• Possesses credible and reliable information, including specific facts
about the criminal activity(ies) or events leading to the victimization.
• Has been, is being, or will likely be helpful to the criminal law
enforcement investigation or prosecution.
The U Visa is issued by the United States Citizenship and Immigration Services
(USCIS) and has the dual purpose of protecting noncitizen victims of serious crimes and
promoting cooperation between law enforcement and victims. The U Visa provides
lawful status for up to 4 years, employment authorization (work permit), and may
provide lawful status to qualifying family members.
QUALIFYING CRIMES
Abduction Obstruction of Justice
Abusive Sexual Contact Peonage
Blackmail Perjury
Domestic Violence Prostitution
Extortion Rape
False Imprisonment Sexual Assault
Felonious Assault Sexual Exploitation
Female Genital Mutilation Slave Trade
Hostage Stalking
Incest Torture
Involuntary Servitude Trafficking
Kidnapping Unlawful Criminal Restraint
Manslaughter Witness Tampering
Murder Other related crimes
29 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Other related crimes include incidents with crime elements that are substantially similar
to those listed above. It also includes attempts, conspiracy and solicitation related to the
crimes listed above.
Victims have an ongoing responsibility to be helpful to the certifying agency while in U
Visa Nonimmigrant Status. If a victim fails to be helpful with reasonable investigative and
prosecutorial requests, the victim’s U Visa Nonimmigrant Status can be disavowed by the
USCIS.
A U Visa certification can be denied if the victim was not helpful/cooperative during
the investigation or prosecution of a certifying crime.
Helpfulness is determined pursuant to Penal Code § 679.10 (h), which states, there is a
rebuttable presumption that a victim is helpful, has been helpful, or is likely to be helpful
to the detection, or prosecution of that qualifying criminal activity if the victim has not
refused or failed to provide information and assistance reasonably requested by law
enforcement.
Under USCIS guidelines, certifying agencies may choose to run background and criminal
history checks on a petitioner and document the findings on the USCIS Form I-918. The
fact that a victim has a criminal history does not automatically preclude approval of a U
Visa certification.
QUALIFYING FAMILY MEMBERS
Once a victim has an approved U Visa Nonimmigrant Status, certain family
members may be eligible for a derivative U Visa based on their relationship to the
victim. A person may be eligible for a derivative U Visa if the following
requirements are met:
• If the victim is age 21 or older at the time the qualifying crime was
committed, their spouse and unmarried children under age 21 may qualify.
• If the victim is under age 21 at the time the qualifying crime was committed,
their spouse, unmarried children under age 21, parents, and unmarried
sibling under age 18 may qualify.
• If the victim is unable to assist law enforcement because they are either,
deceased due to murder or manslaughter; or they are incompetent or
incapacitated because of injury, trauma, or age, a family member who is an
indirect victim and meets the above listed criteria may still be eligible for a
derivative U Visa.
APPROVAL OR DENIAL OF U VISA CERTIFICATION
Only a certifying official may sign an approved U Visa certification or Letter of Denial.
Certifying officials include the Information Management Division Administrator and
investigating detail supervisors approved by the Chief of Police.
U Visa Certification Procedure
30 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• The Department has 30 days to process a USCIS Form I-918 (If the petitioner is
in removal proceedings the Department has 7 days to process the USCIS Form I-
918).
• Information Management Division creates a tracking number and forwards the
USCIS Form I-918 and supporting documents to the assigned investigative detail.
• After reviewing the USCIS Form I-918 the certifying official will either approve or
deny the petition.
• The certifying official completes and signs the USCIS Form I-918 approving the
petition or completes a Letter of Denial indicating the reason the Department was
unable to certify the petition.
• The certifying official submits the signed USCIS Form I-918 or the Letter of Denial
to the Divisional Lieutenant, Divisional Commander and Deputy Chief of the
Investigations Bureau for review.
• Investigations Bureau forwards the approved and reviewed USCIS Form I-918 or
Letter of Denial to the Information Management Division for tracking and statistical
purposes.
• Information Management Division mails the approved USCIS Form I-918 or Letter
of Denial to the petitioner, attorney, or accredited representative.
PETITIONING FOR A U VISA CERTIFICATION
Petitioners requesting U Visa certification from the LBPD need to submit a formal request
in writing to LBPD Information Management Division. To help process the request in a
timely manner, please include the following:
• Name of victim and any “other names used”
• Victim’s date of birth
• Government issued identification
• LBPD DR number or supporting documents
• Name of suspect, if known
• Suspect’s date of birth, if known
• Indicate if you are in removal proceedings
A victim, their guardian or legal representation can submit a USCIS Form I-918 for U Visa
certification.
If a U Visa certification is approved and returned to the petitioner, it is the petitioner’s
responsibility to return the approved certification to USCIS.
Review Responsibility
The Investigation Bureau will ensure the information in this Training Bulletin is current.
31 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 17 – Canine Unit
REVISED October 2023
CANINE UNIT
GENERAL INFORMATION
Police canines can provide a variety of services to assist police officers in the
apprehension of criminals or the investigation of crimes. In general terms, the Canine
Unit (CU) provides the following categories of canines:
• Patrol canines
• Detection canines
a) Narcotic Detection Canine
b) Explosive Detection Canine
Each of the above categories of canine provides a specialized tool and service. In the
following sections, this bulletin will discuss each specialty and what officers can do to
optimize this service. The goal of the CU is to support officers in the field by making their
jobs easier and safer by implementing the advantage of time and distance.
CANINE UNIT CATEGORIES
Patrol Canines
Patrol canines are used to locate felony or dangerous suspects who are hiding from the
police. Patrol canines are trained to search an area or building and locate human scent.
Once the canine finds the scent, it will attempt to isolate the scent and locate the suspect.
In many cases, the use of a patrol canine as a backup is an effective psychological tool.
The mere presence of a police canine has been known to prevent crimes, prevent
potentially violent situations from getting out of hand, and deter acts of violence toward
police officers.
Patrol canines may be used to assist in crowd control formations. For crowd control,
patrol canines are best used as additional linebackers and to protect the flanks and rear
of the formation.
Additionally, the canine can be used as a force option on a directed apprehension for a
specific target. The use of a canine on a directed apprehension with contact is a use of
force and must meet deployment policy criteria.
17 – Police Service Dog Unit
32 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
GUIDELINES
Building and Area Searches
A patrol canine is an effective tool for searching buildings or areas for concealed suspects.
The canine is trained to search an area, and when a suspect is located, alert by barking
if the suspect is not accessible. When the suspect is accessible, the canine is trained to
detain and apprehend the suspect until officers can safely place the suspect under arrest.
This search is more effective and safer than a search conducted by officers alone
because it provides time and distance between the search team and the suspect.
When a patrol canine is used to search for a concealed suspect, the following conditions
should be considered:
• Prior to the arrival of the handler, ensure there is a secure containment of the building
or area. The containment should not be entered unless necessary to prevent injury
to an officer or citizen.
• Before searching an area or building, the handler gives a verbal warning that a police
canine is being released to search and is intended to give any suspects hiding an
opportunity to surrender.
• A cover officer remains with the handler during a search of an area or building.
Directed Contacts
A patrol canine is a force option and can be commanded to pursue or apprehend persons
suspected of committing criminal acts or those resisting arrest according to the
deployment criteria. A patrol canine may be directed to contact a violent felony suspect
or if there is imminent danger or potential for great bodily harm to a police officer or citizen.
Evidence Searches
A patrol canine can be effectively used to search for evidence or property within a defined
area. The canine works on scent transferred to any object touched by a human and will
alert on any such object. It is extremely important the search area is not disturbed to give
the canine the best conditions in which to work. Therefore, officers should not attempt to
search the area before the patrol canine. Officers should secure the area and prevent
pedestrian or vehicle entry.
DETECTION CANINE
Detection canines are trained to locate items emitting particular odors. Examples include
illicit drugs, explosives, firearms, cadavers, and arson accelerants. Generally, canines
specialize in one area; however, cross-training in multiple areas is possible. When in
doubt, ask the handler about the capabilities of each canine. If a detection canine is not
on duty the Incident Commander or Watch Commander can request one to be called out.
NARCOTIC DETECTION CANINE (NDC)
Narcotic detection canines are trained to locate the following odors:
• Heroin
• Cocaine
• Methamphetamine
17 – Police Service Dog Unit
33 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Before the arrival of the NDC, it is important to secure the scene and avoid scent
contamination. Fourth Amendment laws, rules, regulations, and policies that generally
apply to police officers also apply to NDC searches.
To maximize the effectiveness of the NDC, consider letting the canine search prior to
officers searching. It is better for the NDC to search an area that has not been disturbed
by a search team.
EXPLOSIVE DETECTION CANINE (EDC)
The EDC operates as a support police unit, and provides searches for explosives for the
following general and specialized law enforcement services:
a) Threat of an explosive device
b) Securing the command post during a bomb squad call-out
c) Checking for secondary explosive devices
d) Sweeping events for explosives (e.g., Grand Prix, LB Marathon, concerts)
e) Responding to calls of suspicious and unattended items
f) Providing EDC support for Metro, Airport, Port, Transit, cruise lines, and school
systems
g) Depending on the situation, EDCs can be used to find guns
EXPLOSIVE DETECTION CANINE DEPLOYMENT
• When requesting an EDC to conduct searches based solely on a bomb threat the CU
supervisor should be notified. The decision to deploy will be evaluated based on
factual intelligence and at the discretion of the CU supervisor or the EDC handler.
• EDC is not authorized for use to assess, examine, or clear items already identified as
suspected explosive devices.
INJURED HANDLER
If the handler is injured and down, the canine will likely stand guard to prevent anyone
from approaching. If a handler is injured, the following information will help officers assist
in securing the canine:
• Do not rush in on the handler or canine.
• If the handler is able, they will take control of the canine.
• Request the assistance of another handler or CU Supervisor.
• Request the assistance of Animal Control.
• Position the handler’s vehicle close to the handler and open the back door.
− If the handler is unable to direct the canine into the vehicle, call to the canine and
try to direct him into the vehicle.
− After the canine is inside, close the vehicle door.
− Once the canine is secured, another handler will take responsibility of the canine.
FOREIGN JURISDICTIONS AND THE CANINE UNIT
17 – Police Service Dog Unit
34 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The training and experience of police canine teams from foreign jurisdictions can vary
significantly. Similarly, the deployment and force policies of other departments can be
different from our own. Per LBPD policy, the use of CUs from other law enforcement
agencies should only be requested when LBPD CUs are unavailable, or fully committed
(for further see LBPD Manual § 7.7.11.1 Use of Foreign Jurisdiction Canines).
OUTSIDE SPECIALIZED DETECTION CANINE
Requests for other specialized detection canines, such as cadaver and arson canines,
should be made through the CU supervisor.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
35 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 18 – Field Interview Card
REVISED May 2017
REVIEWED June 2019
FIELD INTERVIEW CARD
INTRODUCTION
The Field Interview Card (FI card) is an extremely valuable tool for officers and detectives.
On numerous occasions, the information on an FI card has aided investigators in the
identification, apprehension and conviction of suspects in criminal cases. FI cards can be
used to establish a person’s association with another person, to document a person’s
presence at a specific location at a specific date and time, or to connect a person to a
vehicle.
The information officers gather and record on cites and FI cards is entered into a records
management system (RMS). Officers can search FI card data through RMS, and receive
a quick response to the inquiry. Inquires may be made using partial names and license
numbers, nicknames, descriptions of suspects, clothing descriptions, physical oddities,
etc.
COMPLETING THE FIELD INTERVIEW CARD
The success of investigative searches of RMS is dependent upon the quality of
information it contains. For this reason, it is imperative that field officers record all
available information clearly, accurately and completely on the FI card.
The FI card contains numerous, self-explanatory fields into which information is recorded.
Fill out each field, if the information is available, and be sure to submit your completed FI
card for entry into RMS. If an officer wishes to keep an FI card for his or her own work
records, that employee should make and keep a copy before submitting the FI card for
entry into RMS.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
36 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 21 – Courtroom Testimony
REVISED March 2020
COURTROOM TESTIMONY
INTRODUCTION
The success of a criminal prosecution is determined not solely by the quality or quantity
of evidence but by the manner it is presented in court. An officer’s appearance,
demeanor, attitude, and ability to accurately convey evidence in a fair and professional
manner are essential to bringing any case to a just conclusion.
This training bulletin applies not only to testifying in criminal court, but also civil court,
depositions and other quasi-judicial hearings.
PREPARATION
Prior to testifying, Officers should review case documentation to ensure familiarity with
the basic facts; date, time, location, names, and circumstances.; Take a copy of your
report so you may refresh your recollection on any details. View the CA POST resource,
How to Review a Crime Report.
Another important preparation step is meeting with the attorney assigned to prosecute
the case. View the CA POST resource, How to Meet with the DA. Discussing the case
with officers who assisted with the investigation, the assigned detective, and the assigned
Deputy District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or City Attorney is not only permissible and
legal, but essential. When asked under cross-examination if you discussed the case with
anyone, answer “yes.”
Retrieve any evidence required for court and bring it with you if ordered.
APPEARANCE and ATTIRE
Ensure you are punctual; and if unable to attend court due to illness or other reason, notify
Court Affairs so they can inform the detective, and the Deputy District Attorney, City
Prosecutor, City Attorney.
While in court and waiting for proceedings to begin, avoid mannerisms that might imply
disrespect for the court, such as reading, texting, talking, chewing gum, etc.
Courtrooms are traditional and conservative environments and not the best place to
exhibit current fashion trends or styles. LBPD Manual § 3.23.5.3 MANNER OF DRESS IN
COURT specifies that “appearance in court is a duty assignment; when appearing in
court, employees must wear a Department approved uniform, specific to the employee’s
21 – Courtroom Testimony
37 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
duty assignment, or a coat with a dress shirt and tie for male employees and business
attire for female employees,” unless the prosecuting attorney requests you wear specific
clothing relevant to the case.
DIRECT and CROSS EXAMINATION
Testifying is a skill which can improve with practice. Officers can apply the following
principles of effective testimony:
1) Have a general attitude of confidence, but not cockiness.
2) Officers convey an air of authority and respect; therefore, they should maintain
composure and dignity, remembering their job is to present facts and evidence.
3) Body language is important. Sit up straight, if a microphone is present sit close
enough so you do not lean over every time you speak.
4) Tone of voice is very important. Officers should present a professional image while
speaking and avoid attempts at sarcasm and humor.
5) Treat opposing counsel with respect and dignity being sure to not show bias against
them.
6) Reports and documents necessary for court should be neatly organized in front of
you so you can easily find documents without fumbling through an unorganized stack
of paper.
The prosecutor is the first to speak to you and will ask questions such as name,
occupation, assignment, and agency name. These questions are asked to put you at
ease, to enter the information in the court minutes and establish your background.
A defense attorney’s basic purpose in cross-examination is to raise doubts in the minds
of the jury about the accuracy of your testimony. The defense attorney may employ a
variety of tactics to accomplish this goal. If you recognize the tactics, you can respond in
ways that address the question and allow you to counter the strategy and avoid the pitfall.1
Common tactics include questions with absolute language, questions with embedded
assumptions, compound questions, confusing questions, rapid fire questions, repetitious
questions, or aggressive questioning. View the CA POST resource, How to Avoid Cross-
Examination Pitfalls.
When testifying, wait for the attorney to finish asking a question before you answer it.
This allows for an objection by either attorney. In the event an objection is made, wait
until the judge has ruled on the objection. A sustained decision means you DO NOT
answer the question. An overruled decision means you MUST answer the question. If
you are confused by the question, you may ask for clarification prior to answering.
Use common labels to identify individuals, such as “the defendant,” or “the victim,” and
avoid the use of pronouns. If you use the name of a person or a street, spell out the name.
If you use a non-verbal gesture to describe an item, describe your action for the court
reporter. For example, if you use your hands to describe the size of a knife, state the size
that you are describing in addition to making the hand gesture.
1 CA POST Learning Portal Courtroom Testimony for Law Enforcement
21 – Courtroom Testimony
38 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
CREDIBILITY
Different witness behaviors affect a jury’s perception of witness credibility. They fall into
three types:
1) How the witness communicates non-verbally, through body language, such as
posture, gesture and facial expressions:
• Avoid fidgeting,
• Maintain an open attentive posture,
• Use appropriate eye contact with both attorneys,
• Remain calm under cross-examination.
2) How the witness communicates verbally:
• Use plain language, no police jargon,
• Speak clearly, volume, pace, articulation,
• Answer questions confidently,
• Address all parties with equal respect,
• Explain answers in an organized way.
3) The quality of the witness’s responses to questions. This includes elements such as
content of answers as well as word choice:
• Know the key facts of the case,
• Answer the question asked, but not more,
• Admit mistakes, when appropriate,
• Ask for clarification, when appropriate,
• Admit when uncertain of answer.
HEARSAY and PROP 115
Hearsay is a statement, made out of court, that is offered in court to prove the truth of the
matter asserted. Proposition 115 allows an officer associated with a case to testify at a
preliminary hearing to statements made or actions taken by the victim, witnesses or other
police employees.
An officer is Proposition 115 qualified in one of two ways:
• Accruing five years’ work experience as a police officer in the State of California, or
• Completion of the CA POST Proposition 115 course.
Proposition 115 affects the following areas of police work:
• Investigation – Officers should be thorough in their interviews with witnesses, victims
and suspects.
• Report writing – Instead of becoming a “memory refresher” for an officer familiar with
the case, the report becomes a stand-alone document from which any other officer
can testify. Statements of victims, witnesses, or defendants, Miranda warnings,
consent for search must all be included. The report must contain details regarding the
way the suspect was identified. The chain of custody of any and all evidence must be
well documented.
• Testifying in court – The finding of probable cause may be based in whole or part upon
the sworn testimony of a law enforcement officer relating the statement of declarants
made out of court offered for the truth of the matter asserted.
21 – Courtroom Testimony
39 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
EXPERT TESTIMONY
An officer may qualify to give expert opinion if they meet the following criteria:
• The subject matter the officer’s testimony relates to is sufficiently beyond common
experience,
• An expert opinion would be helpful in determining the facts,
• The officer has special knowledge on the subject.
The judge decides who is qualified as an expert witness. An officer’s opinion should be
given in court only when the officer is called upon and is qualified as an expert witness.
Unless you have been qualified, you cannot testify to conclusions or opinions.
COURT RECESS
Avoid discussing the case while at the courthouse, especially when jurors, the defendant,
or defense attorneys might overhear. During periods when court is not in session, do not
become friendly with defendants, their counsel, jurors or prospective jurors. If contact
cannot be avoided, do not discuss the case or anything connected with it, politely explain
the court has ordered you not to speak about the case.
AFTER TESTIMONY
Debrief the case with the detective, Deputy District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or City
Attorney so you may use the experience to learn for the next trial.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
40 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 22 – Solicitors on Private Property
Open to Public Access
REVISED December 2011
SOLICITORS ON PRIVATE PROPERTY
OPEN TO PUBLIC ACCESS
INTRODUCTION
The rights of solicitors have been the basis for many civil rights lawsuits filed not only in
California, but the United States. Much of what is followed today with regards to free
speech of solicitors was established in the 1979 case of Pruneyard Shopping Center v.
Robins. The Pruneyard case did not establish, rather emphasized “reasonable time,
place and manner” (TPM) restrictions as set by the property owner. The Court explained
that shopping centers may impose TPM restrictions in order to avoid interference with
business activities; however, they must still ensure that the solicitor’s right to circulate is
reasonably accommodated.
In 2010, Target Corporation v. Canvass for a Cause became a catalyst for renewed
questions involving the rights of solicitors versus private property owners. In early 2011,
the Court reached a decision in the Target case, which did not change case law, rather
re-affirmed what was established in Pruneyard.
The Court has determined that shopping centers are perceived as the modern day “Time
Square,” providing a meeting place and entertainment for the general public. These
centers are technically private property, but when a property owner, for their advantage,
opens up the property for use by the public in general, the more their rights become limited
by the constitutional rights of those people who use it (Marsh v. Alabama, 326 U.S. 501
(1946)). Political activists have found that the modern day “Time Square,” provides a
large, diverse audience where they can garner support for various political issues.
Stand-alone stores, such as a Target or Costco with no other shopping or entertainment
options on site, have slightly broader rights with restricting access to the property. These
sites have a specific purpose and do not encourage groups to meet and communicate at
the property; therefore, owners are able to set greater restrictions.
PRIVATE PERSON’S ARREST
The Court has determined that solicitors have a First Amendment right to be present at
the location in order to garner support for their cause. A solicitor or petitioner who is
22 -- Solicitors on Private Property Open to Public Access
41 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
interfering with a business i.e., blocking access to a business, aggressively following and
harassing customers may be subject to enforcement actions. However, the property
owner/agent must sign a Private Person’s Arrest (PPA) and be willing to go to court.
Private citizens unaffiliated with the business may also sign a PPA, if they are willing to
be a victim. In the event that a PPA is signed, an officer should issue a citation to the
violator.
As with any situation involving a PPA where probable cause does not appear to be
present, an officer may exercise judgment as to the acceptance of questionable arrests
to reduce the risk of liability.
If the solicitors or petitioners however are not blocking entrances, acting aggressively or
harassing customers then the issue is a civil matter. If a property owner believes their
private property interests are being violated; such party must seek court action. The
courts may set an injunction halting the activity or limiting the actions of the petitioners.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
42 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles
REVISED May 2004
IMPOUNDING & STORING OF VEHICLES
INTRODUCTION
Vehicles ordered to the Police Tow Yard by officers fall into two classes: stored vehicles
and impounded vehicles.
STORED VEHICLES
Stored vehicles are towed to the Police Tow Yard and do not require follow-up
investigation by police. A stored vehicle, as opposed to an impounded vehicle, does not
require authorization from the police department to be released. The stored vehicle is
released to the owner by the Tow Yard upon verification of ownership, without further
police involvement.
Officers shall advise the tow truck driver that the vehicle is being stored, which will enable
the tow truck driver to enter it as such on the work invoice. Stored vehicles are available
for release daily from 0800 to 0000 hours (midnight).
Officers shall store all vehicles removed from the highway under authority of Vehicle
Code Section 22651. Fleet Services will determine current registration and ensure only
licensed drivers are permitted to drive vehicles off the City lot.
Officers shall file a Vehicle Report (PD Form 2310.010) for vehicles they have stored and
obtain a separate number for each vehicle. The officer shall conduct a full inventory of
each vehicle towed. This includes the glove compartment, trunk and all containers in the
vehicle; i.e., bags, cases, purses, etc. Items located during the inventory shall be noted
in the narrative portion of the Vehicle Report form.
When a citizen requests to have a vehicle stored and does not express a desire for a
particular tow service, Police Tow will be called. This is considered a private tow. No
supplemental number or report is required.
FIELD RELEASE OF VEHICLES
Prior to releasing a vehicle to a person other than the driver, a careful evaluation of the
risk should be considered by officers in the field.
A vehicle SHALL NOT be released to another person at the scene under the following
circumstances:
27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles
43 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• When there is no evidence of current registration and the last registered owner is not
at the scene
• When the person to whom the vehicle is to be released has no valid driver's license
or appears to be under the influence of any substance that would impair his/her driving
ability
When a vehicle is released at the scene of an arrest, the Incident Report shall indicate
the disposition of the vehicle including the name, driver's license number, address and
telephone number of the person to whom the vehicle was released.
Recovered, stolen vehicles released to owners in the field shall have, in addition to the
appropriate reports, an All Units Broadcast issued to advise field officers that the owner
has possession of the vehicle.
IMPOUNDED VEHICLES
Impounded vehicles are towed to the Police Tow Yard for additional investigation when
the impounding officer has reason to believe the vehicle either contains evidence, or is
evidence in a criminal matter.
The Tow Yard will not release impounded vehicles without an official release from the
assigned investigator, Division Commander or Watch Commander.
When a vehicle is impounded, a separate report number shall be obtained for each
vehicle and the report shall indicate the arrest charge or Code Section for which the
vehicle is impounded. In such cases, an Impound Report shall be filed. Tow invoice
numbers shall also be noted on the Vehicle Report as well as the Supplemental Report
number(s) of connecting reports. The below guidelines shall be followed:
• If the driver of the vehicle is arrested or cited for misdemeanor Hit and Run (20002
CVC), it is not necessary to store or impound the vehicle, if it can be legally parked at
the scene
• Vehicles used in all felony crimes shall be impounded. However, recovered stolen
vehicles should be stored unless extenuating circumstances exist
• Vehicles involved in a traffic fatality shall be impounded unless otherwise directed by
the on-scene investigator from the Accident Investigation Detail
RELEASING IMPOUNDED VEHICLES
• The "Hold" on impounded vehicles will automatically expire after the vehicle has been
impounded for 10 calendar days
• It shall be the responsibility of any investigator desiring to hold a vehicle longer than
the time prescribed above to notify the Tow Yard and place a permanent hold on the
vehicle by completing PD form 4210.005 "Vehicle Impounds – Hold Instructions to
Towing Operations"
• Only the investigator placing this hold, or a higher-ranking officer assigned to the same
Division may remove the hold
27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles
44 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• A 10-day "Hold" may be removed by an investigator assigned to the case any time
prior to the automatic expiration of the "Hold." The Watch Commander may remove
the "Hold" on a vehicle not yet assigned for investigation, if, after reviewing the
circumstances of the impoundment, it would not be necessary to hold the vehicle for
the assigned Detail. The Watch Commander who authorizes the "hold" removal shall
file a memorandum to the Division Commander of the investigative Detail assigned
the case, stating the date, time and reason for the "Hold" removal
The Vehicle Code directs the return of an impounded vehicle without charge to the owner
when the vehicle is towed for evidence under Section 22655.5 CVC. If a vehicle is towed
to Fleet Services and the "Hold" is placed by a Detective, per Section 22655.5 CVC, all
storage fees from that date forward are waived, but the owner will still be charged for tow
fees and one day storage.
When recovering a stolen vehicle, placing it on hold is not necessary unless it requires
some type of inspection, such as a VIN check, fingerprinting, photos, etc., and then
Section 22655.5 CVC should be used. If Section 22651 CVC is used, a hold should not
be placed on the vehicle. This Section is used for recovered vehicles without extenuating
circumstances. CVC Sections 22655.5 and 22651 should not be used interchangeably.
Correct usage of the CVC Sections will lessen unnecessary police holds.
When recovering a stolen vehicle from a foreign jurisdiction, do not place it on hold
because the Crime Lab does not normally examine for latent fingerprints under these
circumstances. If a suspect is arrested driving a stolen vehicle, processing the vehicle is
not necessary.
When an officer places a vehicle on hold for prints or photos, the officer must write out a
Request for Technician form for the Lab. The vehicle will not be processed or
photographed without this form. When the hold is removed, the owner of the vehicle is
given 24 hours to claim the vehicle before charges begin for storage.
The owner of a vehicle impounded for the commission of a crime is not liable for towing
and storage fees unless the alleged perpetrator of the crime used the vehicle with the
express or implied permission of the owner.
30-DAY STORAGE (SECTION 14602.6 CVC)
Vehicles impounded under this Section will be held for 30 days. A licensed passenger in
a vehicle impounded under Section 14602.6 CVC WILL NOT be authorized to drive the
vehicle for the unlicensed driver.
NOTE: Officers must identify the driver by completing the “person” block of the Vehicle
Report in these situations.
Hearings are available pursuant to Section 22852 CVC. The Accident Investigation Detail
(AID) will process the release of 30 day impound vehicles.
NOTIFYING AUTO RECORDS
27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles
45 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When any vehicle is recovered, stored, or impounded, the officer taking the report shall
notify the Auto Records desk as soon as practicable to ensure prompt entry into the
Stolen Vehicle System (SVS).
When a recovered vehicle is released to the owner, the releasing officer shall, as soon
as practicable, notify Auto Records for removal of the vehicle from the SVS.
NOTE: The Stolen Vehicle System is a computerized statewide system that tracks stolen,
missing, recovered, stored and impounded vehicles. This includes vehicles stored by
private tow companies.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
46 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling
Procedures
REVISED January 2021
STOLEN VEHICLE HANDLING PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
Officers dispatched to take a stolen vehicle report should not assume the vehicle was
stolen. Like any other investigation, officers need to keep an open mind until all the facts
are presented. Question the reporting party carefully and in a manner that will leave little
doubt whether the car was stolen, repossessed or is being used by a relative or friend.
VEHICLES POSSIBLY REPOSSESSED
Officers should first rule out repossession. If the reporting party is the legal owner, ask if
they have the title or if they are still making payments. If the legal owner is still making
payments, ascertain if they are behind on any payments. If the vehicle has been
repossessed, the repossessor must notify Auto Stats as soon as possible. Officers should
check with Auto Stats if they believe the vehicle may have been repossessed. If there is
any doubt, officers should direct the owner to contact the Auto Theft Detail during normal
business hours to make the report.
VEHICLE MAY BE STORED OR IMPOUNDED
Before taking a stolen vehicle report, officers should check with Auto Stats and Records
to ascertain if the vehicle was stored due to parking violations or impounded as evidence
in a crime.
STOLEN VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A HIT AND RUN
During the investigation of a hit and run traffic collision with no suspect in custody,
registered owners or reporting parties may claim the vehicle involved in a hit and run was
stolen. When the registered owner is contacted by police or calls to report a vehicle stolen
after the vehicle is involved in a hit and run, the reporting party should be referred to call
the Auto Theft Detail to file a stolen vehicle report. Auto Theft Detectives should rule out
possible insurance fraud by the vehicle owner.
When an outside police agency contacts the Long Beach Police Department to confirm
the status (if the vehicle is stolen) of a vehicle involved in a hit and run collision, where
the registered owner claims the vehicle was stolen, the registered owner/reporting party
should be referred to call the Auto Theft Detail to file a stolen vehicle report. Outside law
28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures
47 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
enforcement agencies will not release the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS) hold on vehicles
impounded as a result of being involved in a hit and run.
VEHICLE TAKEN FROM A DEALER’S LOT
When an agent of a car dealership or lot gives a prospective customer permission to test
drive a car and the driver fails to return it within six hours, a stolen report should be taken.
If a prospective customer leaves a car with the dealer as security and the officer
determines that car to be stolen, file a stolen report as soon as possible.
RENTAL CAR AGENCY STOLEN VEHICLE
Officers dispatched to a rental car agency for a vehicle theft should investigate as to the
means the vehicle was stolen. Vehicles stolen from a rental car agency fall into four
categories:
• Fraud
• Stolen off the lot
• Stolen from the person that rented the vehicle
• Embezzlement (overdue)
The patrol officer should complete a stolen vehicle report (CHP180) for all stolen rental
vehicles unless involved in an embezzlement. When a patrol officer determines the
vehicle was embezzled, overdue, or not returned, the rental car agency representative
should be referred to contact the Auto Theft Detail during regular business hours.
VEHICLE TAKEN BY A RELATIVE OR CLOSE FRIEND
Vehicles that are community property cannot be stolen by either party. However, if a judge
in a divorce case awarded the vehicle to one of the parties and the other takes it without
permission, the victim party should be referred to the Auto Theft Detail to make the report.
A stolen vehicle report may be filed when a relative or a friend takes the victim’s vehicle
without the victim’s permission and the victim has never extended permission in the past
to this person. However, if the victim has extended permission for this person to use the
car in the past, the victim should be advised to contact the Auto Theft Detail. The same
rule applies in the case of an employee who takes a vehicle from their employer.
THE STOLEN VEHICLE REPORT
When filing a stolen vehicle report (Form PD 2310.010 rev.), legibly print the information
requested on the report, making sure to fill in all the boxes. Describe the color of the
vehicle by its basic color, clarifying by stating if it is light or dark. The narrative should
explain the relationship between the registered owner and the reporting party if the
reporting party is not present.
28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures
48 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If the vehicle contained valuables at the time of the theft, list them in the narrative. A
Property Report (Form PD 2240.009(A) should also be completed for a more detailed list
of stolen items of value, including property with serial numbers.
The victim/legal owner must sign the stolen vehicle report because it is important that
they agree to prosecute. If there is any doubt as to whether or not the reporting party has
the authority to agree to prosecute, or, if they do not wish to prosecute, they should be
referred to the Auto Theft Detail.
VEHICLE VALUE DETERMINATION
Officers should make every effort to determine the current market value of the vehicle.
Officers should inquire with the registered owner/reporting party concerning the purchase
price of the vehicle, recent modifications, or mechanical work (new engine, transmission,
paint, etc.).
METHOD OF REPORTING TO AUTO STATS
Once the report is finished and signed, the officers should immediately contact the Auto
Stats desk and relay the following information needed for a computer entry:
• License number and state
• Year and make of vehicle
• Model and color
• Location stolen from
• Any outstanding features of the vehicle
• Vehicle identification number
• Name and DID# of officer filing the report
If the vehicle was recently stolen, the officer should request communications broadcast a
description of the car. The first five bullets above are pertinent broadcast information.
CONCLUSION
Before completing the report, ensure the vehicle was stolen from the City of Long Beach,
then double check phone numbers, the vehicle identification number and the license
number for accuracy and legibility after the report is taken. We do not take reports on
stolen vehicles from other cities, even as a courtesy. If there is any doubt about filing the
report, refer the reporting party to the Auto Theft Detail.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
49 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 30 – Vehicle Handling Procedure –
Abandoned Vehicle
REVISED August 2001
VEHICLE HANDLING PROCEDURE - ABANDONED VEHICLES
INTRODUCTION
The following procedure is for those vehicles that are apparently abandoned or parked
for excessive periods on City streets and does not preclude the storing or impounding of
a vehicle for other criminal actions.
LEGAL AUTHORITY
§22523(a) CVC states "no person shall abandon a vehicle upon any highway, and (b) no
person shall abandon a vehicle on public or private property without the express or implied
consent of the owner or person in lawful possession or control of the property."
§22669 CVC allows for removal of any vehicle from a highway or public or private property
when an officer has reasonable cause to believe the vehicle has been abandoned.
Under a section like this, the officer’s biggest problem is the determination of "reasonable
cause". There are times when the owner of a vehicle will let his vehicle stand in front of
his house, or upon a vacant lot, for several weeks without moving it. The accumulation
of dust on top of the vehicle, the debris underneath the vehicle, would lead the officer to
believe that it is abandoned when in fact it is not.
The procedure used by this Department to remove abandoned vehicles and to eliminate
the storing of vehicles upon the city streets is as follows: Whenever officers locate a
vehicle which they have reasonable cause to believe is abandoned on a city street, they
should notify Communications. Communications will notify the Traffic Detail, which will
tag the vehicle for three-day removal.
STORING VEHICLES UPON CITY STREETS
The City of Long Beach also has an ordinance, LBMC §10.22.130, which prohibits the
parking of a vehicle on the streets for 72 or more consecutive hours. Such a vehicle may
not be considered abandoned, but it is being stored on a public street. Again, notify
Communications to advise the Traffic Detail. This ordinance does not apply to areas
leased to individuals or corporations such as the Marina, Harbor Department leases,
Municipal Airport, etc. Vehicles are sometimes parked in these areas for as long as a
month while their owners are away on a trip or on a cruise.
3- -- Vehicle Handling Procedure – Abandoned Vehicle
50 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
INFORMATION NEEDED BY TRAFFIC DETAIL
• Exact location
• Date and time noted by officer
• Description of the vehicle, and the vehicle license number
VEHICLE ABANDONED ON PRIVATE PROPERTY
Occasionally, officers are dispatched to situations where vehicles have been abandoned
or parked on private property. Though the Vehicle Code authorizes police to remove
obviously abandoned vehicles from private property, Department policy states that
officers will not remove vehicles from private property unless the vehicle is stolen
(§22651c) or there is a municipal code violation, for example, weed abatement.
The mere parking of a vehicle upon a person’s property is not a police problem. §22658
CVC allows property owners to remove vehicles abandoned or parked on their property,
after following certain guidelines. If a citizen is plagued with vehicles parking on his
property, officers should inform him of the provisions listed in §22658 CVC. Officers
should be reminded that the person owning or in lawful control of the property stores the
vehicle, not the Police Department.
If the parking situation is a code enforcement issue, like weed abatement, the reporting
party should be referred to public service. Public Service handles the removal of
abandoned vehicles from private property under authority of LBMC 8.76.010, abatement
and removal of vehicles.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
51 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 31 – Firearms Safety
REVISED February 2000
Reviewed January 2020
FIREARMS SAFETY
INTRODUCTION
Law enforcement officers are taught gun safety from the beginning of their professional
training. Firearms are one of the most visible “tools of the trade” for police officers and
handling them in a safe manner becomes second nature to most of us. If we do not remind
ourselves that they are to be handled as a deadly weapon and we become complacent,
a tragic accident could happen. When we take our guns home, we also expose our
spouses and children to possible disaster if we do not take the proper precautions to
ensure gun safety.
RULES OF FIREARM SAFETY
• Handle all guns as though they are loaded
• Never point a gun at anything unless willing to use deadly force
• Keep your finger off the trigger until your sights are on the target
• Be sure of your target and line of fire
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Always ensure that the one in possession of the firearm is responsible for it
• Establish good safety habits and abide by them
• Before handing a firearm to another person be sure that:
– The weapon is unloaded (rounds removed from the cylinder, magazine removed,
action open)
– Safety is on, if applicable
– Muzzle pointed away
• When dry firing, always point the weapon in a safe direction in case of inadvertent
discharge
LOADING AND UNLOADING FIREARMS
The following procedures apply to all situations except combat or an actual tactical event.
• Load and unload a firearm in a “safe area” (e.g., sand barrel, ballistic box, etc.)
• Visually inspect the firearm to make sure it is unloaded or properly loaded
• Remember that the four rules of firearm safety apply to all handling situations
CHILDREN AND GUNS
Children are constantly exposed to guns and gun activity on television and in the movies.
Often firearms are used and portrayed unrealistically in the media and children are led to
31 – Firearms Safety
52 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
believe that guns are less deadly than they are. A child’s curiosity may cause him/her to
want to touch or hold dad or mom’s gun, even if they are forbidden from doing so. They
may want to “show off” for friends, which could lead to tragic results.
Officers should place their gun in a secured location. Never assume that any secure
location other than a locked container is safe. Placing a gun on a high shelf out of reach
of a small child is not safe and violates P.C. §12036 (b), which makes it a misdemeanor
to leave a concealable handgun anywhere other than a locked container if a child may
have access.
GUN SAFETY – ON DUTY
A gun should remain holstered unless the officer needs to use it. The unnecessary
handling of any gun increases the possibility of an accident. If an officer must permit
someone else to examine his or her firearm, it should be unloaded first. Careful unloading
cannot be over emphasized!
CONCLUSION
An officer whose gun becomes a part of his/her clothing often has a natural but dangerous
tendency to become less cautious while handling firearms. Perhaps the saying,
“familiarity breeds complacency” should apply in the sense that most officers eventually
take their guns for granted. Even expert shooters and firearm instructors have had gun
accidents, not because they did not know the principles of gun safety, but because,
through familiarity, they lost the necessary respect for firearms.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Training Division
53 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 32 – Civil Disputes
REVISED February 2001
CIVIL DISPUTES
INTRODUCTION
An officer’s primary responsibility at the scene of a dispute is to keep the peace. In
addition to peacekeeping, the officer will often also be called upon to determine if a crime
has been committed, provide safety to individuals and property, attempt to find solutions
to the problem and be tactful.
KEEPING THE PEACE
In many civil disputes, e.g., landlord/tenant, repossessions, neighbor disputes, etc.,
emotions run high and a responding officer may arrive at a very heated situation.
Restoring order and diffusing the situation would be the first order of business. In many
instances, all that is required is the calming influence of the officer to resolve the dispute.
If the officer cannot resolve the dispute, he/she should not try to give disputing parties
legal advice. Rather, the officer should refer the parties to the civil court process or to
whatever community agency is best suited to the particular dispute.
• If the elements of a crime exist, e.g., vandalism, battery, domestic violence, etc., and
a citation or arrest will resolve the dispute, the officer should take the necessary action.
In the absence of a crime, the dispute is purely a civil matter
• Be concerned about your safety, the safety of other responding officers, disputants,
witnesses and significant others
• Always remember that the desired result is the peaceful resolution of the dispute. If
the officer can help the parties decide on a mutually agreeable resolution, then the
problem is solved
• The public will often take your personal opinion as law. You are not qualified to give
legal advice. Always advise parties that you are there to KEEP THE PEACE. Your
prime considerations should be ensuring the safety of individuals and property
LANDLORD/TENANT DISPUTES
In general, when a landlord and a tenant enter into a contract, it is one in which the
landlord gives the tenant temporary possession and use of the landlord’s property for a
specified amount of money for a specific period of time. Problems arise when one of the
parties is perceived by the other party to have violated some, or all, of the contract.
Relevant Laws
32 – Civil Disputes
54 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Tenant Lock Out §418 Penal Code – Every person using or procuring, encouraging or
assisting another to use, any force or violence in entering upon or detaining any lands or
other possessions of another, except in the cases and manner allowed by law, is guilty of
a misdemeanor.
Example: The tenant is behind in his/her rent. The landlord changes the locks in an effort
to prevent the tenant further use of the dwelling until the rent is paid. This constitutes a
use of force and is a violation of §418 PC. The landlord needs to let the tenant in and
attempt to resolve the dispute in court.
In the above example, if the landlord does not attempt to lock the tenant out, he/she may
attempt to seize the tenant’s possessions in payment for past due rent. This is also a
violation of §418 PC. A landlord must have a court order to be able to seize personal
property for past due rent.
Example: A landlord removes the doors and windows of a tenant’s dwelling in an attempt
to evict the tenant. Even though the landlord may be destroying his own property, courts
have held that the tenant has a property in the premises. Destruction of property and/or
removing the doors and windows can be a violation of §594 PC.
Example: A landlord enters a tenant’s premises without permission from the tenant. The
landlord’s purpose is to harass, snoop and otherwise annoy the tenant. This type of
conduct would be a violation of §602.5 PC, constituting a trespass.
Landlord’s Obligations for Property and Tenant
A landlord has a general legal obligation to keep the rental premises in a condition fit for
human occupancy and to repair all defects that make the premises uninhabitable. The
landlord must provide an apartment that has:
• Adequate weatherproofing, waterproofing and rodent proofing
• A workable plumbing system
• At least one working toilet, bathtub and bathroom sink
• At least one working kitchen sink
• Adequate heating facilities
• Safe electrical wiring
• Adequate garbage and trash storage and removal facilities
• At least one working telephone jack
The landlord cannot avoid these requirements by placing the burden to repair these
facilities on the tenant as part of the conditions of the lease. However, if the tenant brings
substandard conditions to the attention of an officer, the dispute is still civil. The tenant
should be advised to seek the counsel of an attorney or legal aid society.
EVICTION
If a tenant fails to comply in some way with his/her rental agreement, the landlord does
have the option of eviction. In order to lawfully evict a tenant, the tenant must first be
given written notice to pay his/her rent or correct whatever problem is violating his/her
32 – Civil Disputes
55 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
lease agreement. If the tenant does not comply with the notice, a landlord must bring a
civil suit, called an “unlawful detainer”. Once a judgment is ordered, only a marshal or
sheriff may actually evict the tenant and restore the landlord to peaceful possession.
Police officers cannot be the agents of eviction.
The point of this discussion is not to encourage arrests, but to try to solve the conflict by
explaining to the parties what conduct is not lawful and by suggesting alternative solutions
that are lawful. In many instances the landlord may not be aware he/she is violating the
law. Often a simple advisal by the officer that what the landlord is attempting to do is
illegal will solve the problem.
REPOSSESSIONS
A conditional sales contract exists when an article is purchased on credit and the article
is physically in possession of the buyer but the seller retains the title. Default on a
conditional sales contract will cause repossession. Again, when dispatched to a dispute
arising out of repossession, you are there to keep the peace, not to take sides.
The seller has a right to repossess, and the buyer (buyer’s spouse has the same right as
the buyer) has a right to protest or object to the repossession. If the buyer’s protest is so
strong that the repossessor cannot take the property back without using force or threats,
then the repossessor will have to resort to the legal process to regain possession of the
property. However, the buyer’s protest must be made before the repossessor has taken
possession of the object.
For cars and other vehicles subject to registration under the Vehicle Code, repossession
occurs when the repossessor gains entry to the vehicle or when the vehicle is connected
to a tow truck.
For property other than vehicles, repossession is complete when the repossessor
exercises complete dominion and control over the property. The repossessor does have
the right to go onto privately owned land to retake property, e.g., an automobile from a
driveway or furniture from an open porch. But, in no event is he/she authorized to enter
any building or enclosure without permission.
Remember that repossession is strictly a civil matter and in no event are you authorized
to give legal advice. Direct the parties to contact their respective attorneys for such
advice.
CONCLUSION
Civil disputes can be messy and emotional. The officer must remember to keep the peace
and remain a neutral third party. The ultimate goal is resolution without injury to any
involved parties or damage to any property.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
56 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control
REVISED November 2017
FUNDAMENTALS OF CROWD CONTROL
INTRODUCTION
Law enforcement officers are often required to manage large groups of people. When
performing this task, officers must remember that the United States Constitution
guarantees the right to lawful assembly and freedom of speech.
Additionally, officers must balance the rights of the group with those of the people outside
the group whose rights may be infringed upon. The goal is to manage a peaceful
assembly, preserve the public peace, and protect property and lives.
CROWD CONTROL
The following steps will help to effectively manage a crowd control incident:
• Identify the nature and the objective of the crowd and event;
• Plan for contingencies and try to establish liaison with crowd leaders;
• Have adequate officers available to handle the crowd, plus a reserve force for
emergencies;
• Set-up a command post away from the crowd;
• Have the necessary equipment and vehicles at the command post;
• Establish boundaries to control crowd movement and control ingress and egress;
• Isolate and quickly remove law violators;
• Establish a press information area away from the command post.
CROWD DISPERSAL
Once a crowd situation has escalated it must be contained and controlled, and if
necessary, dispersed. Officers should first respond to the command post where a plan of
action will be developed. This command post should be away from, and out of sight of the
crowd. Once a plan has been formulated, officers should be sent to positions where they
can control avenues of ingress and egress to the crowd. Once a crowd has been
contained, dispersal can begin.
IDENTIFYING DISPERSAL SECTIONS AND ROUTES
Dispersal should be accomplished systematically. The area should be divided into
sections and dispersed one section at a time. Once an area has been dispersed, it must
36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control
57 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
be controlled by an officer to prevent the return of the crowd. Tactics for dispersing areas
are dictated by the terrain and the nature of the crowd. It is important to have a clear
dispersal route(s) to allow the crowd to leave the area.
Set a reasonable time limit based upon the size of the crowd and the availability of
dispersal routes. Once the crowd begins to break up, separate those members who are
unwilling to follow the dispersal order from those who are following instructions. Do not
give a dispersal order unless you have the present ability to enforce it with arrests,
if necessary.
GIVING THE DISPERSAL ORDER
Before attempting to break up any crowd, it is necessary for officers to give a dispersal
order. The dispersal order provides the legal basis for any further action, and is one of
the elements necessary for arrest for California Penal Code § 409. The order and any
subsequent arrests should be viewed as a last resort when attempts to negotiate with
crowd leaders have failed. The order shall be given over a public-address system to
ensure that all crowd members are able to hear. When making the announcement,
officers should be staged at all areas of the crowd (front, back and sides) to ensure that
the announcement is audible. If the announcement was not audible in all areas it should
be repeated until it can be heard clearly. It is helpful, for prosecution purposes, to have
officers that can testify that the announcement was clear and audible. When possible, the
order should be given over the radio so the Communications Center can record the order.
If possible, tape record or video record the dispersal order.
A copy of the dispersal order is contained within the Field Reference Guide and is listed
below:
“I am (rank and name), a peace officer for the Long Beach Police Department.
I hereby declare this to be an unlawful assembly, and in the name of the People
of the State of California, command all those assembled at (specific location)
to immediately disperse, which means to break up this assembly.
If you do not do so, you may be arrested or subject to other police action. Other
police action could include the use of force which may inflict significant pain or
result in serious injury.
Penal Code section 409 prohibits remaining present at an unlawful assembly.
If you remain in the area just described, regardless of your purpose, you will be
in violation of Penal Code section 409. The following routes of dispersal are
available (routes). You have (reasonable amount of time) minutes to disperse.”
PASSIVE DEMONSTRATION ISSUES
A crowd composed of passive demonstrators poses a different problem to law
enforcement. Passive demonstrators will not offer active resistance to officers. The goal
of a passive demonstrator is to gain publicity and sympathy for their cause from the media.
They will typically try to gain attention through a staged demonstration. Passive
demonstrators may try to interfere with lawful business or block a major thoroughfare.
36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control
58 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The demonstrators will attempt to occupy a large volume of police resources for as long
as possible and culminate the demonstration through one or more arrests.
Once authorities decide that business has been disrupted, or one or more laws have been
broken, it is necessary to give a dispersal order. After giving this order and eliminating
the possibility of negotiations with the crowd's leaders, officers must be prepared to make
mass arrests. If it becomes necessary to make arrests, an emergency field booking unit
should be in place.
Before making arrests, officers should isolate the demonstrators; this can be done
through the placement of officers, barricades and barrier tape. Isolating demonstrators
makes the task of arresting passive demonstrators easier; as the demonstrators will be
unable to receive outside support or reinforcements.
Once the decision is made to make arrests, officers should be formed into arrest teams
and, as needed, separator teams. Separator teams, composed of two to three officers
and a supervisor should be skilled in the use of weaponless control techniques. The
separator team will identify the next demonstrator to be arrested. If the demonstrators
are linked together and are resisting, officers will separate them, using pain compliance
techniques.
Arrest teams will ideally consist of two officers and a supervisor. However, if a supervisor
is not available, three officers will suffice. More officers may be added as needed to
facilitate the carrying of demonstrators who refuse to walk. The role of the supervisor is
to contact each demonstrator before his or her arrest and try to persuade the individual
to cooperate with the arrest. There is no hurry in this arrest process; it is important that it
appear as orderly as possible. It is also helpful to provide the media with a vantage point
to observe these arrests. The public must view the actions of the officers as reasonable
and professional. Arrestees, once in custody, will either be escorted or carried to the field
booking area.
EQUIPMENT
Law enforcement officers at a crowd control scene require specialized equipment to
perform their mission safely. These equipment items include the following:
• Full uniform with badge and nametag;
• Ballistic vests offer protection from blunt force trauma caused by thrown objects;
• Baton, either a standard or a riot baton;
• Handcuffs or flex-cuffs for arrests;
• Department issued safety helmet with face shield; and,
• Department issued gas mask.
USE OF POLICE SERVICE DOGS
Police service dogs (K-9) can perform valuable functions in assisting officers at the scene
of crowd control incidents. The primary benefit of the K-9 is the psychological advantage
that they provide. People in general are afraid of the K-9; this fear can be used to move
a crowd. The limitation of the K-9 is that it is only deployed when officer safety is a primary
36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control
59 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
concern. The on-scene supervisor makes the decision regarding the use of a K-9. The
handler has the final authority to decide when and how the K-9 is deployed.
EXAMPLES OF PROPER K-9 USE
In a crowd control situation, the K-9 can be used behind a squad or platoon skirmish line
to act as a back-up to the line. The threat of the K-9 prevents crowd members from
penetrating the line. Any crowd member penetrating the line is viewed as a threat to
officer safety and subject to K-9 apprehension.
In a crowd control situation, the K-9 can be used on the flanks or sides of a squad or
platoon formation. The threat of the K-9 prevents crowd members from moving against
the sides of the formation, or to the rear of the formation. Any crowd member moving
behind the formation is viewed as a threat to officer safety and subject to K-9
apprehension
In a riot situation, the K-9 can be used as described above. Additionally, the K9 can be
used as a less than lethal force tool on a directed apprehension for a specific target. The
use of a K9 is a use of force and must meet deployment policy criteria.
The goal when using the K-9 in crowd control is to enhance the effectiveness and safety
of the officers, not as an apprehension tool, unless absolutely necessary. The K-9 can
only be deployed to apprehend one member of the crowd at a time. Once the K-9 is
deployed to apprehend, its psychological deterrence against other members of the crowd
is greatly reduced, therefore use of a K-9 should be your last step for apprehension.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
60 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 37 – Drill Instructions
REVISED May 2017
DRILL INSTRUCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
Military drill has been utilized for hundreds of years to control large groups of personnel
in military parade and combat situations. These practices have been adapted by police
agencies for similar purposes. Basic drill covers a number of advantages, which include:
• Move a unit from one place to another in a standard orderly manner
• Provide simple formation, from which crowd control formations may be assumed
• Developing leadership skills by providing the opportunity to command troops
• Build teamwork by encouraging officers to work as a unit
• Create a uniform, professional appearance
COMMANDS
The unit leader always gives commands to a unit. The smallest unit normally used is that
of a squad. A squad is normally composed of eleven officers with a sergeant as squad
leader. Larger units, platoons, are composed of several squads working together. A
lieutenant normally commands a platoon. Unit leaders position themselves in a location
where they can best control their officers. Squad leaders are positioned at the front of
their squads if in a platoon formation.
Commands, or orders, given to a group of officers should be loud enough for all officers
to hear them and respond. It is the responsibility of officers to listen for commands and
be prepared to act upon them. Commands normally consist of separate parts. The first
part, the Preparatory Command, identifies the unit that the leader is speaking to and the
command that is about to be executed. The second part, the Command of Execution,
tells the unit to complete the command described during the preparatory command. For
example: to call a group to attention, the preparatory command is "Squad," and the
command of execution is "Attention." Because the preparatory command causes
anticipation, it is important that officers wait for the command of execution, and not
anticipate any movement. Verbal commands are accompanied with visual signals, which
are predetermined by the Long Beach Police Department.
POSITION OF ATTENTION
37 – Drill Instructions
61 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The position of attention is the basic military position. It indicates that the officer is alert
and ready to receive further commands. All commands are given from the position of
attention. Upon receiving the command "Attention" the officer will:
• Bring the left heel against the right. The heels will be on line and touching. The feet
will be turned out equally, at an angle of 45 degrees
• Legs will be straight, but not stiff at the knees. Weight will rest equally on both feet
• Hips and shoulders will be level, the chest lifted, and shoulders pulled slightly back
• Arms will hang naturally at the side, thumbs along the trouser seams, palms facing
inward toward the sides, fingers in a natural curl
• The head is erect, chin pulled in slightly
• The officer will stand still, not talk, and look directly ahead
When the squad leader wants to form the squad for the first time he will command "Fall
In." Upon receiving this command the squad will form themselves standing side by side,
one arm’s length distance between the officers, centered on the squad leader, and at the
position of attention.
ALIGNING THE SQUAD
To align the squad after falling in the squad leader will command "Dress Right Dress."
Upon receiving this command the squad will:
• The extreme right officer in the line will raise his left arm, straight out from the side,
parallel to the ground while looking straight ahead. This officer is the base of this
movement; the other officers will guide themselves on him
• The rest of the squad will also raise their left arm, but will look to the right and align
themselves with the officer to the right. Officers will close together until their right
shoulder touches the fingertips of the officer to the right. The officer at the left end of
the formation does not raise his arm
• The squad leader will move to the left end of the squad and look down the length of
the squad. He will direct squad member's movement, front to back, to improve the
alignment of the squad
• Once the squad leader has completed this movement, he will return to the front, take
a position three paces in front of the squad, face to the left and command "Ready
Front"
• Upon receiving this command, the squad will return their left arm to their side and look
straight ahead
If the formation is too long, or the squad leader wants a closer formation, he can command
"At Close Interval, Dress Right Dress." The procedure for this movement is the same as
described above except, instead of extending the arm straight out from the side, the squad
members will place the palm of their left arm flat on their hip, with the elbow straight out
from the side. Officers will close to the right until their right arm touches the elbow of the
officer to the right.
37 – Drill Instructions
62 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
POSITIONS OF REST
There are four positions of rest with which officers should be familiar. They are Parade
Rest, At Ease, Rest, and Fall Out. Rest positions are executed from the halt and only
while at the position of attention. These positions are described as follows:
• "Parade Rest": The preparatory command is "Parade" and the command of
execution is "Rest." Upon the command of execution, move the left foot twelve inches
to the left of the right foot. Keep the legs straight with the body weight resting equally
on each foot. Simultaneously, place the hands in the small of the back, palms to the
rear. The right hand should be on top of the left hand, the thumbs clasping, and the
fingers extended. Officers may not move in place, not talk, and must look directly
ahead
• "At Ease": Upon receiving the command "At Ease," the officers will keep their right
foot in place. Officers may move in place but may not talk
• "Rest": Upon receiving the command "Rest," officers are permitted to move about in
place, but the right foot must remain fixed, as in the "At Ease" situation. Otherwise,
officers may be relaxed and talk
• "Fall Out": Upon receiving the command "Fall Out," officers may break or leave ranks;
however, they must remain in the immediate area. During roll call inspection, officers,
unless directed otherwise, will proceed to their regular duty assignment
FACING MOVEMENTS
Facing movements are used to change the direction of a formation, while standing still.
The preparatory command is the direction of the movement, "Right, Left, or About," and
the command of execution, officers will do the following:
• "Right, Face": Raise the ball of the right foot and the heel of the left foot. Rotate 90
degrees to the right and then bring the left foot forward on line with the right foot.
Remain at the position of attention and await further direction
• "Left, Face": Raise the ball of the left foot and the heel of the right foot. Rotate 90
degrees to the left and bring the right foot forward and on line with the left foot. Remain
at the position of attention and await further direction
• "About, Face": Place the right foot to the rear and slightly to the left of the left foot.
Raise the heel of the right foot and the ball of the left foot and rotate 180 degrees to
the right. Once completed the heels should be on line. Remain at the position of
attention and await further direction
MARCHING MOVEMENTS
Marching movements are used to place the formation into motion, halt the formation, or
make changes in direction. These movements are as follows:
• "Forward, March": Upon receiving this command the formation will begin marching
with the left foot in the direction the formation is currently facing and in step
37 – Drill Instructions
63 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• "Route Step, March": Upon receiving this command the squad will begin marching
in the direction the squad is currently facing. While marching at the route step the
squad does not have to remain in step - only given while at the march
• "Column Right, or Left, March": This movement is used to change the direction of
movement of a formation, in column. Upon receiving the command of execution, the
first officer will make a 90-degree turn in the direction specified in the preparatory
command. The remaining squad members will continue to march forward until
reaching the original pivot point, where they will also pivot 90 degrees, and continue
to follow the lead officer
• "Right, or Left Flank, March": This movement is used to change the direction of
movement of the formation 90 degrees to the left or right. Unlike the column, the flank
causes all officers to pivot at the same time. This movement should only be used for
short distances as alignment is difficult to maintain
• "To the Rear, March": This movement is used to change the direction of movement
of the formation 180 degrees to the rear. Upon receiving the command of execution
each officer will continue marching forward until placing the left foot on the ground.
The officers will then rotate 180 degrees to the right and rear, and then continue
marching in the new direction
• "Squad/Platoon/Detail/Section, etc. Halt": Upon receiving this command all officers
will bring the left heel to the right heel assuming the halted position of attention and
remain at the position of attention
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
64 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
REVISED April 2004
SQUAD TACTICS AND FORMATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Officers deployed in small, well-organized teams, can be effective in controlling larger groups.
The squad is the smallest unit used in crowd control formations. The squad normally is composed
of twelve officers, consisting of a Squad Leader, an Assistant Squad Leader and ten squad
members.
SQUAD FORMATIONS
Forming a Squad
Normally, officers will initially move into an administrative formation at a command post or
assembly area in order to receive instruction, equipment, and an inspection by the squad leader.
Upon receiving the command "Fall In", squad members will stand side by side at close interval,
facing the squad leader at the position of attention and await further instructions.
When possible, the squad leader will select his two largest officers, who will serve as the lead
officers in the Squad Column of Twos formation. When possible, a basic knowledge of the
formations is a prerequisite for the lead officer assignment because these officers provide the
base of movement for future formations.
The squad leader should also assign linebackers. These officers assist the squad leader in
controlling formations and movements. These officers also serve as grenadiers when gas is
deployed, support Skirmish Line officers, and assist in the injured officer drill. Senior officers are
a good choice for linebacker because of their experience. Consider a left handed officer as a
linebacker because his baton swings will often conflict with right handed officers when on the
same Skirmish Line formation.
Squad Movement
All movements made from non-tactical formations to tactical formations and back are made at
double time. The squad leader will control movements by facing the squad and giving orders as
indicated in the following example:
Command
"First Squad" (Squad identity)
"Column of Twos" (Formation Desired)
"On Me" (Location Desired)
"Move" (Command of Execution)
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
65 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Simultaneously, with the verbal command, the squad leader will also show the appropriate hand
and arm signal. The squad leader will drop his arms to coincide with the command of execution.
Movements in non-tactical formations are normally made with the baton drawn and at the
positions of port arms. Movements made while in tactical formations are made with the baton
drawn, body placed in a position of advantage and baton in a thrust position.
Marching movements can be made at route step and are initiated by the squad leader
commanding "Route Step, Move." The drag step is only used when in close proximity to the
crowd. The squad leader commands "Drag Step, Move" and the squad members step forward
with the left foot, make a thrusting movement with the baton, drag the right foot up even with the
left foot and stop given further commands.
SQUAD FORMATIONS
SQUAD COLUMN OF TWOS (figure one)
• Function: A non-tactical formation used to move personnel from one place to another
• Advantage: Provides easy control for the squad leader, especially when moving over difficult
or crowded ground
• Command: "Squad One, Column of Twos, On Me, Move
• Arm Signal: Both arms raised straight up
Upon receiving the command of execution, the lead officers will move to a position directly in front
of and facing the squad leader. The other squad members will fall in behind them with the
linebackers being last. Other than the lead officers and the linebackers, there is not particular
order to the other positions.
Although this formation is not normally used for tactical purposes, it can be used to quickly divide
a squad into two equal parts to provide for lateral support to both sides of a Skirmish Line. It can
also be used to split a passive or cooperative crowd by marching down the center and dividing
the crown into two halves.
Figure one
Squad Column of Twos
Squad Leader
Lead Officers
Linebackers
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
66 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
SQUAD SKIRMISH LINE
• Function: A tactical formation used to move a crowd straight back or to deny access
to an area
• Advantage: A simple formation providing good mutual support for officers and easy
to maintain control and supervision
• Command: "Squad One, Skirmish Line, In Place, Move"
• Arm Signal: Both arms straight out from the body, parallel to the ground
The Skirmish Line is the most common crowd control formation and is the appropriate
formation for the majority of situations. If necessary, linebackers can be used to provide
additional officers on the line.
Skirmish Line in place (figure 2) Squad Column of Twos moving to Skirmish Line (figure
3)
Linebackers
Squad Leader Squad Leader
Movement to a Skirmish Line "In Place" from a Squad Column of Twos is done by the
lead officers picking up their interval and the other officers fanning out to the left and right
towards the crowd. Once in position, the squad will await further orders from the squad
leader. Intervals between officers are dictated by the make-up of the crowd but are
normally a baton plus one arm length (approximately five to six feet). For crowds that are
more resistant, spacing should be moved closer. For crowds that are easier to disperse,
spacing may be moved out to cover larger areas.
Another way to deploy a Skirmish Line is by the squad leader ordering "Squad One,
Skirmish Line, Fifteen Yards Out, Move." When this order is given, the squad will move
forward at double time, as a unit, in a Squad Column of Twos. When the lead officers
reach the designated distance, they will deploy, pick up spacing, and immediately begin
the route step towards the crowd. As the lead officers deploy, the other officers will fan
out to their positions at double time, pick up their interval and also begin the route step.
CROSS BOW TO A SKIRMISH LINE (figures 4, 5 and 6)
• Function: A transitional formation to move from a Column of Twos to a Skirmish Line
through an existing Skirmish Line
• Advantage: Rapid deployment up to a crowd
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
67 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Command: "Squad One, Cross Bow to a Skirmish Line, Ten Yards Out, Move."
• Arm Signal: Arms crossed, chest high, then straight out parallel to the ground.
This formation is used to move a squad in a Column of Twos forward and through a squad
deployed in a Skirmish Line. The squad continues forward of the first Skirmish Line until
reaching a point designated by the squad leader. The officers then deploy into a Skirmish
Line. There are now two squads deployed in a Skirmish Line, one in front of the other.
The rear Skirmish Line leader will now order his squad into a Squad Column of twos and
prepare to perform another Cross Bow if necessary. The advantage of this formation is
that it allows two squads to work in close cooperation and keep close proximity to a crowd
that is moving away.
Squad leader
Linebacker
As the squad moves forward to the rear of the Skirmish Line, officers should call out to
the other officers, "Coming Through," to warn the other officers of their approach.
Linebacker
Squad leader
Crossbow (figure 4)
Crossbow (figure 5)
Squad leaders
Linebacker Linebacker
Skirmish Line
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
68 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The Cross Bow is effective in moving close to a crowd. Its primary advantage is avoiding
chasing groups while deployed as a Skirmish Line. It should not be used to trap crowd
members between the two Skirmish Lines, because this is tactically unsafe.
Crossbow to a Skirmish Line (figure 6)
CROSS BOW TO AN ARREST/RESCUE CIRCLE (figures 7,8,9, and 10)
• Function: A transitional formation to move from a Column of Twos to an Arrest or
Rescue Circle through an existing Skirmish Line.
• Advantage: Rapid deployment into a crowd
• Command: "Squad One, Cross Bow to an Arrest Circle, the Man in the Red Shirt,
Move."
• Arm Signal: Arms crossed, chest high, then hands clasped over the head.
This formation is used to move a squad in a Column of Twos, through a second squad
deployed in a Skirmish Line, to effect an arrest or rescue. The squad continues forward
of the first Skirmish Line until reaching the subject designated by the squad leader. The
lead officers then take this subject into their custody, with the assistance of the squad
leader, if necessary.
Linebackers
Squad leaders
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
69 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Linebacker
Crossbow to an Arrest/Rescue Circle (figure 7)
The other officers continue forward and wrap around the lead officers, and squad leader,
forming a circle.
Linebacker
Crossbow to an Arrest/Rescue Circle
(figure 8)
Once the officers have completed the
wrap-around, they should be touching
shoulder-to-shoulder and facing
outward, providing three hundred sixty
degree security.
Crossbow to Arrest/Rescue Circle (figure 9)
Once deployed in the Arrest Circle, the squad leader must decide if the squad will wait
for the Skirmish Line to move forward and encircle them, placing them to the rear or if he
will order "Recover to the Skirmish Line" (preparatory), and "Move" (execution).
Squad leaders
Linebacker
Squad leader
Linebacker
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
70 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When receiving this command, the squad will move slowly towards the Skirmish Line,
taking six-inch steps. Officers must remain in their 360-degree security position. It is
important to maintain the integrity of the circle for officer safety. Officers inside the circle
may grasp the back of officers on the circle to assist in this procedure. Once behind the
Skirmish Line, the arrestee or rescued person can be turned over to an arrest team or
paramedics, as needed.
If, while forward of the Skirmish Line and in the Arrest Circle, members of the crowd move too
close, the squad leader has the option of ordering "Pulsate Move." Upon the command or
execution, "Move," circle officers will move forward using two drag steps, simultaneously
executing two baton thrusts, followed by a power stroke. Officers should then immediately move
back to their circle position.
If the Team is unable to take the suspect into custody, the lead officers should stop while the
remaining officers form a 360 circle.
"Pulsate, Move" (figure 10)
INJURED OFFICER DRILL
• Function: Response of Linebackers to an injured officer, who is deployed on a Skirmish Line
• Advantage: Rapid recovery, while maintaining the integrity of the Skirmish Line
• Command: "Officer Down."
• Arm Signal: None
Officers will occasionally be injured while deployed on a Skirmish Line. The natural tendency of
officers is to immediately rush to the injured officers aid. This can violate the integrity of the line
and jeopardize the safety of other officers. When an officer is injured, those officers that see it
should immediately yell "Officer Down, Officer Down." The nearest linebacker will move forward
and fill the hole in the line and the leader may order the squad to halt, if moving, while he evaluates
the situation and decides how to reorganize the squad.
38 – Squad Tactics and Formations
71 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Injured Officer Drill (figure 11)
FORMATIONS IN COMBINATION
Many situations will require the deployment of more than one squad of officers to handle
a situation. The formations provided within this Training Bulletin are designed to be
flexible to meet the needs of a variety of situations. A supervisor may, at his discretion,
deploy additional squads to assist with left and right flank support, arrest teams, or other
related functions. The only limitations are the imagination of the supervisor and the
tactical considerations of the problem
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
Linebacker Linebacker
Squad Leader
72 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics
Squad Vehicle Formations
REVISED May 2004
MOBILE FIELD FORCE TACTICS SQUAD VEHICLE
FORMATIONS
INTRODUCTION
The advantage of the Mobile Field Force is that it provides an organized, rapid response
to a variety of tactical situations. The Mobile Field Force formations that can be used to
disperse crowds or deploy officers are:
• In Trail
• On Line
• Bump
• On Line Skirmish
Although circumstances may dictate a different deployment strategy, these formations
are normally deployed in the order listed above. The progression of these formations is
such that the squad moves from one formation to the next, resulting in a greater degree
of influence and force being deployed against the crowd.
IN TRAIL (figure 1)
• Function - A formation used to move personnel from one place to another and to
patrol areas of disturbance
• Advantage - Provides easy control for the squad leader
• Command - "Squad One, In Trail, Execute"
After receiving the command of execution, vehicle number one begins moving in a
direction given be the squad leader. Vehicles number two and three then move in behind
vehicle number one. The three vehicles will remain in this formation until given further
instructions.
The squad leader may at his discretion, give the command, "Code Three, Execute." Upon
receiving this command the drivers will activate their red lights and siren. This tactic is
especially useful when the squad is approaching a crowd. The use of the red lights and
siren may cause the crowd to disperse without any further tactics.
40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations
73 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
IN TRAIL (figure 1)
ON LINE (figure 2)
• Function - Used to bring the squad from "In Trail" to "Abreast." Used to clear a non-
resistant crowd from an area
• Advantage - A simple formation that provides good strength to the front, allowing
officers to move a crowd straight back
• Command - "Squad One, On Line, Execute."
ON LINE (figure 2)
When a crowd fails to disperse when faced with a squad In Trail, the squad leader has
the option to move to the next formation, "On Line." Upon receiving the command of
execution, vehicle #1 will continue forward at approximately 25-40 miles per hour. Vehicle
40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations
74 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
#2 will accelerate and move to the side of vehicle #1, at least one car width away. Vehicle
#3 will also accelerate and move to the right of vehicle #1.
The three vehicles will continue forward, abreast, at 25-40 miles per hour, toward the
crowd. It is important that the vehicles shall have their red lights and siren on. If the
crowd fails to disperse as the squad approaches, the squad leader will command, "Brake,
Brake, Brake." All three vehicles will brake rapidly, remaining On-Line," and stop
approximately one car length from the crowd.
BUMP
• Function - Used to move a resistant crowd back
• Advantage - Allows controlled movement of police vehicles to cause intimidation to
the crowd and create dispersal
• Command - "Bump, Execute"
If a crowd fails to disperse when faced with both the "In Trail" and "On Line" formations,
the "Bump" formation should be used. The "Bump" formation is initiated while displaying
red light and siren in the "On Line" stopped position. Upon the command of execution,
vehicle #1 rapidly accelerates and brakes, moving forward one car length. After vehicle
#1 completes this move, vehicles #2 and #3 simultaneously accelerate and brake quickly,
moving forward one car length, catching up with vehicle #1.
Once vehicles #2 and #3 stop, vehicle #1 again accelerates and brakes quickly, moving
forward one car length. This leap frog movement continues until, at the discretion of the
squad leader, the squad leader commands either "On Line" or "In Trail." It is not the
intention of the "Bump" movement to strike any member of the crowd. Should any
member of the crowd be accidentally struck and injured by a police vehicle, it is the
responsibility of the squad leader to return to the scene when practical, render aid to the
citizen, and then file appropriate reports.
BUMP (figure 3)
ON LINE SKIRMISH (figure 4)
• Function - Used to move a resistant crowd back
40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations
75 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Advantage - Combines the use of officers and police vehicles to disperse an
extremely resistant crowd
• Command – "On Line Skirmish, Execute"
Crowds may fail to disperse, even when the "Bump" movement is deployed. If this occurs,
the squad leader should deploy officers onto the "On Line Skirmish." This movement is
executed when the squad vehicles are stopped. Upon the command of execution, all
officers, except the drivers and squad leader, will exit their vehicles and deploy at double
time into a Skirmish Line immediately in front of their vehicles.
The squad leader will use the vehicle public address system to control the squad. The
squad leader can move the squad forward at either the route step or drag step. After the
crowd is dispersed the squad leader commands "Recover to Vehicles, Execute."
ON LINE SKIRMISH (figure 4)
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
76 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics –
Citizen Rescue
REVISED July 2004
MOBILE FIELD FORCE TACTICS – CITIZEN RESCUE
INTRODUCTION
Officers at the scene of civil disorder are often faced with the task of rescuing innocent
citizens and downed officers that have been overcome by members of a mob. Many
times officers will not have sufficient numbers available to move into an area and
completely control the situation.
This type of situation requires the use of specialized tactics involving the use of a squad
of well-trained officers, who move quickly to the scene of a trapped citizen or officer, use
aggressive tactics to temporarily put the crowd at bay, quickly rescue the citizen, and
rapidly move out to a safe area. Equally important to the rescue is the need to close
routes into a troubled area to prevent the continuing need to expose officers to the
hazards of the crowd while attempting to rescue citizens or other officers.
THREE CAR CITIZEN RESCUE (figure 1)
• Function - A formation used to move into an uncontrolled area quickly, rescue citizens
or officers and then quickly move out of the area to safety
• Advantage - Rapid deployment, coupled with precise timing and execution, allowing
for rescue in an uncontrolled area
• Command - "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute"
(Figure 1)
Three Car Citizen Rescue
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue
77 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
A trained squad can rapidly accomplish this formation, without a great deal of planning.
It is important, though, to have rehearsed this prior to attempting it. Each officer has a
special function and area of responsibility that must be covered in order to make this
movement as safe as possible. All citizen rescues are somewhat unsafe, in that they
require officers to enter uncontrolled areas. This danger is reduced by both the elements
of surprise and speed of the movement.
This operation begins away from the rescue scene with officers inside their vehicles in a
squad column. The squad leader, who is in the first vehicle, commands over the radio,
"Squad One, Code Three, Execute," and then "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute."
The squad moves towards the rescue scene in column. As the squad approaches the
rescue scene, the squad leader will evaluate the scene and determine where the majority
of the crowd is located. The squad leader will direct his driver to drive to the side of the
victim where most of the crowd members are located, thus separating the crowd from the
victim. (figure 1)
Vehicle #1 will drive close to the victim and then turn in front of the victim. Vehicle #2, the
rescue vehicle, will drive along the same path as vehicle one, but will stop alongside and
close to the victim. It is important the vehicle is not too close to the victim, as it will hamper
the rescuing officers from exiting the vehicle. Vehicle #3 will follow vehicles #1 and #2
into the scene but will stop immediately behind the victim. Distances will vary depending
upon the location, but vehicles #1 and #3 should be approximately one to one and one
half car lengths from the victim. Vehicle #2 should be approximately one car width from
the victim.
Once the vehicles stop, rescuing officers will exit their vehicles and perform the following
duties:
Vehicle #1
• Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction
of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the
rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are
in the vehicles, drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the
area
• Squad Leader/Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam
area. Survey the scene and decide whether the squad will exit to the front, the
preferred method, or to the rear. Once decided, signal with your arm, pointing the
direction of exit and also tell the squad verbally either: "Front Exit" or "Rear Exit." Once
the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene
• Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You
are responsible for squad security for the left side of the vehicle, from front to center
of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene
• Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area.
You are responsible for squad security for the right side of the vehicle, from front to
center of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue
78 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Vehicle #2
• Driver – Remain in the vehicle; once the squad leader has designated the direction
of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the
rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are
in the vehicles, drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the
area.
• Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. Watch the
squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your
officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene
• Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the door
open. Move quickly to the victim with the first officer going to the victim's furthest
extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to
vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second
officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to
either vehicle #3, front exit, or vehicle #1, rear exit, and enters the back seat
• Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim's side of the vehicle, leaving the
door open. Move quickly to the victim with the first officer going to the victim’s furthest
extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to
vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second
officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to
either vehicle #3, front exit or vehicle #1, rear exit, and enters the back seat
Vehicle #3
• Driver – Remain in the vehicle; once the squad leader has designated the direction
of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the
rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are
in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the
area
• Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. Watch the
squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your
officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene
• Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You
are responsible for squad security for the left side of the vehicle, from front to center
of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene
• Right Rear Passenger – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You are
responsible for squad security for the right side of the vehicle, from front to center of
the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue
79 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Three Car Citizen Rescue
(Figure 2)
TWO CAR CITIZEN RESCUE
• Function - A formation used when a full squad is not available, move into an
uncontrolled area quickly, rescue citizens or officers and then quickly move out of the
area to safety
• Advantage - Rapid deployment, coupled with precise timing and execution, allowing
for rescue in an uncontrolled area
• Command - "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute"
This rescue is performed when a full squad of three vehicles is not available, but necessity
requires immediate action. Many of the techniques and training for the two-car citizen
rescue are similar to those for a three-car rescue.
This operation is started away from the rescue scene with officers inside their vehicles,
and vehicles in a squad column. The squad leader, who is in vehicle #1, commands over
the radio, first: "Squad One, Code Three, Execute," and then "Squad One, Citizen
Rescue, Execute."
The squad moves toward the rescue scene in column. As the squad approaches the
rescue scene, the squad leader will evaluate the scene and determine on which side of
the victim is the greatest amount of the crowd is located. The squad leader will direct his
driver on that side of the victim, thus separating the crowd from the victim.
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue
80 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
TWO CAR CITIZEN RESCUE
(Figure 3)
Vehicle #1 will pull forward and stop alongside the victim.
Vehicle #2 will pull alongside and stop on the opposite
side of the victim. Distances will vary depending upon the location, but vehicle #1 and #2
should be approximately one to two width from the victim.
Once the vehicles stop, rescuing officers will exit their vehicles and perform the following
duties:
Vehicle #1
• Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction
of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the
rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are
in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the
area.
• Squad Leader/Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb
area. Survey the scene and decide whether the squad will exit to the front, the
preferred method, or to the rear. Once decided, signal with your arm, pointing the
direction of exit and also tell the squad verbally either: "Front Exit" or "Rear Exit." Once
the rescue is complete, enter the vehicles and leave the scene.
• Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area.
You are responsible for squad security for the left side of the squad. Once the rescue
is completed, enter the vehicle and leave the scene.
• Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area.
You are responsible for squad security for the right side of the squad. Once the rescue
is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene.
Vehicle #2
• Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction
of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the
rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are
in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the
area
#1 #2
41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue
81 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area. Watch the
squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your
officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene
• Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the door
open. Move quickly to the victim, first officer goes to the victim's furthest extremity.
Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to vehicle #2.
The first officer pulls the victim inside and on top of himself, while the second officer
places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to vehicle
#1 and enters the back seat
• Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the
door open. Move quickly to the victim, first officer goes to the victim's furthest
extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to
vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second
officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to
vehicles #1 and enters the back seat
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
82 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 42 – Impact Weapons
Revised April 2020
42 – Impact Weapons
IMPACT WEAPONS
Revised April 2020
The police baton, sap and police utility type flashlight are authorized for use as an impact
weapon. Impact weapons are an intermediate force option and can be used in
circumstances that do not necessitate the use of deadly force but require officers to apply
more force than can reasonably be applied with weaponless control techniques.
USE OF IMPACT WEAPONS
The use of impact weapons carries with it the significant risk of injury and can lead to the
perception of excessive force by members of the public. Therefore, use of impact
weapons should be proportional to the seriousness of the suspected offense or the
reasonably perceived level of actual or threatened resistance.
An impact weapon is used to gain control of a suspect and is of little value if not carried
with you. Facts tending to justify the use of an impact weapon include, but are not limited
to:
• The physical stature of the suspect as compared to the officer.
• The suspect assumes an aggressive stance.
• The inability to control the suspect by lesser means.
• The need for immediate control of the suspect or situation due to a tactical
consideration.
• The officer's perception of the suspect's knowledge or apparent knowledge of a martial
art form.
• When an officer is a member of a tactical squad in a crowd or riot control formation, a
baton may be used to move, separate, disperse or deny a person access to a structure
or through an area.
BATON TECHNIQUES
Baton techniques are designed to allow the officer to move from one technique into
another. This becomes particularly important in situations where you are faced with more
than one suspect. Whether you use these techniques individually or in combination, they
are techniques you will use every time when the baton is the proper weapon for the
circumstances. The following are Department trained techniques:
• Upper cradle
• Two-hand low defense
• Two-count modified
42 – Impact Weapons
83 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Two-count striking hand
• Three-count from the ring
• Five-count thrust baton
• Baton retention and release
Use only those portions of a baton technique that are appropriate and sufficient to control
the situation. Although each technique is taught as a sequence of movements, they do
not have to be used that way. Use your own good judgment. If you start a technique
consisting of three counts, but your aggressor discontinues the assault at count 1 or 2,
do not continue the technique. Stop, search, and handcuff. Your intention must never
be to punish; it is only to control and defend.
For further practical training application of the technique, refer to the Training Division.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic
Behavior
REVISED January 2024
RESPONDING TO INCIDENTS INVOLVING PERSONS
EXHIBITING ERRATIC BEHAVIOR
OVERVIEW
Officers periodically encounter individuals exhibiting erratic, unpredictable, or violent
behavior when handling calls for service or when patrolling in the community. These
behaviors are often the result of an underlying medical condition such as physical illness,
mental illness, disease, head trauma, alcohol intoxication, drug impairment or a
combination of these factors. Officers should exercise caution when contacting individuals
exhibiting these behaviors and should ensure they are using appropriate tactics and
training to minimize the risk of injury to the members of the public, the individual, and
themselves.
SIGNS AND BEHAVIORS
Officers contacting these individuals should be aware of the signs and behavioral
indicators that these individuals exhibit so they can determine which resources can be
utilized to safely address the situation. Some of the signs and behaviors the individual
may exhibit are:
• Aggressiveness
• Agitation
• Apathy
• Attraction to glass
• Confusion
• Hallucinations
• Heightened strength
• Hyperactivity
• Incoherent speech
• Paranoia
• Rage
• Rambling speech
• Shouting
• Sudden calmness
• Sweating
• Unaware of surroundings
• Unresponsive to painful stimuli
• Muscle rigidity
• Destroying property
• Violence
Officers should not attempt to diagnose these individuals but should be mindful of the
dangers these signs and behaviors present to the officer, members of the public, and the
individual exhibiting these behaviors.
43 – Persons
Exhibiting Erratic Behavior
85 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
DISPATCHER ROLE
When the Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Communication Department
(Communications Center) receives a call involving an individual exhibiting the described
behaviors, the call should be dispatched as a 647V-Intoxicated Person Potentially
Violent or 5150V-Violent Mentally Ill Person. The dispatcher should initiate a dual
response of both LBPD and Long Beach Fire Department (LBFD).
This allows the individual to be medically treated quickly for any underlying issues
contributing to the observed signs and behavior indicators.
SCENE MANAGEMENT
When officers respond to calls that involve individuals displaying these signs and
behaviors, officers should use their training and tactics to maintain the safety of the
public, the officer, and the individual. Officers should recognize that these individuals
are often in need of immediate medical treatment. Officers should coordinate a rally
point with fire resources and whenever possible, officers should wait for fire resources
to arrive prior to taking action. Avoid staging fire resources since any delay in medical
treatment could have more serious implications for the individual being detained.
OFFICER ROLE
When an officer encounters a subject exhibiting these signs and behaviors it is important
to obtain medical assistance for the individual as soon as possible. An officer should
request EMS/Fire and provide dispatch with the objective signs and behaviors observed.
If the person does not pose an imminent threat to anyone's safety, contain the subject,
and maintain a safe distance. Remove others who might be harmed by the subject from
the immediate area and attempt to gain the person’s cooperation. If the officer determines
it is appropriate to take the person into custody pursuant to Welfare and Institutions Code
Section 5150 and/or for criminal conduct, one or more of the following tactics may help in
gaining the person’s cooperation:
• Attempt to talk to the person in a conversational and non-confrontational manner while
projecting calmness and confidence. The statements should include reassurance that
the officer is trying to help. If possible, determine if the person can answer simple
questions, which will give the officers an idea of the person's level of coherence.
• Remember that the person’s mind may be racing, or they may be delusional and/or
suffering from hallucinations. Statements and questions may need to be repeated
several times as the person may be fearful and extremely confused based on their
psychological state. If the subject is contained and does not appear to pose an
immediate threat, there is no rush. It may take some time for the subject to calm down.
• Attempt to have the individual sit down, which may have a calming effect.
43 – Persons
Exhibiting Erratic Behavior
86 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Refrain from maintaining constant eye contact, as this may be interpreted by the
person as threatening.
• If a family member or another person who has a rapport with the individual can safely
participate, enlist their assistance in attempting to gain the individual’s cooperation.
People experiencing these signs and behaviors are often prone to overexertion. Efforts
should be made to minimize the intensity and duration of any physical struggle. If
circumstances allow, officers should consider the use of hands-on techniques by multiple
officers in a coordinated manner to restrain the subject.
Officers should request that EMS/Fire respond directly to the scene when reasonably safe
to do so rather than staging at a different location. Having EMS/Fire on scene allows
officers to develop a coordinated plan to detain and quickly provide medical aid to the
person.
In the event fire resources are still enroute, monitor the person’s breathing and position
the person to maximize their ability to breathe (e.g. avoid lying the person on their
stomach or applying excessive downward pressure on the upper torso).
Remember, the officer’s role in these encounters is to gain control of the subject in
accordance with the law and agency policies. Officers are not medical professionals and
should not attempt to influence the decisions of EMS/Fire personnel in any way. Officers
may relay their objective observations to EMS/Fire personnel but should not request a
specific course of treatment.
DOCUMENTATION
In adherence with 24402 H&S, “A peace officer shall not use the term excited delirium to
describe an individual in an incident report completed by a peace officer. A peace officer
may describe the characteristics of an individual’s conduct, but shall not generally
describe the individual’s demeanor, conduct, or physical and mental condition at issue as
excited delirium." The law also prohibits the use of other terms to describe an individual’s
behavior including, but not limited to, “Excited delirium syndrome, excited delirium,
hyperactive delirium, agitated delirium, and exhaustive mania.”
When documenting an incident involving an individual exhibiting these signs and
behaviors, officers should describe their observations, the individual’s behavior, and the
individual’s response to officers and members of the public during and after the incident.
Officers may gather and document information that may be useful to the investigation
regarding medical and mental health history, prescription medication use, and excessive
or illicit drug use. Officers should not attempt to make any medical diagnosis.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
87 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 45 – Crime Lab Field Unit Requests
REVISED January 2003
CRIME LAB FIELD UNIT REQUESTS
INTRODUCTION
Police Officers have a responsibility to crime victims and to the Department to request a
Crime Lab Field Unit when appropriate. A proper request leads to a proper response,
which in turn will insure that all relevant evidence is collected and increase the probability
of a quick solution to the crime.
Under normal staffing conditions, there will be at least one Crime Lab Field Unit in the
field during Watch II (0730 - 1600) and Watch III (1600 - 0030) every day. Each routine
crime scene takes approximately one hour or more to process. Due to the caseload, the
Crime Lab Field Unit will respond only to crime scenes where there is possible evidence
that can lead to prosecution or aid in an investigation.
GUIDELINES FOR LAB TECHNICIAN REQUEST
• Felony crimes
• All window entries
• All cases where ransacking has taken place
• All cases where the suspect has handled articles suitable for obtaining latent prints
• All cases where pry marks, footprints or tire marks are present
• All burglaries, robberies – other Part 1 crimes with suspects in custody
• Malicious mischief of a high grade nature - $5,000 felony
• Cars where photographs are required, such as car jackings, drive-by shootings and
felonies where a vehicle was used in the commission of a crime
When a Lab Technician should NOT be requested:
• For public relations only
• Where entry is questionable (e.g., door unlocked, no ransacking, unknown loss)
• Where the articles or surfaces handled by the suspect are unsuitable for obtaining
latent prints (e.g., concrete, rough, dirty, scaly wood, cloth or uneven surfaces, except
where photographs can be used)
• Where the article or surfaces handled by the suspect(s) have also been handled by
other persons (e.g., door handles, drawer handles, counter tops, etc.).
INCIDENT REPORTS
45 – Crime Lab Field Units
88 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
All Incident Reports contain a check off box indicating whether a lab unit has been
requested or has responded to the crime scene. When the box is checked on the Incident
Report, the detail assigned to the case is informed that the officer taking the report
requested a Crime Lab Field Unit. Checking this box is not a request for a lab unit to
respond. The filing officer, after checking the box on the face sheet of the report, must
notify Communications that a Crime Lab Field Unit is needed, otherwise, no lab unit will
respond.
NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE
In all instances, the investigating officer will fill out PD form 3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99),
“Request for Services”, when those services are needed. Forward or deliver the
completed form to the Crime Lab. Officers will also notify the Communications Center to
place the request on the computer lab request list. The only exception to this is when the
investigating officer knows that the Crime Lab Field Unit has already responded to the
scene. Lab units are available for dispatch between 0730 and 0030 hours. After that
time, if the call meets the criteria for a call out stated in Section 8.3.1 of the Long Beach
Police Department Manual, refer to the Lab on-call duty roster through Communications.
Under no circumstances advise the victim that a Crime Lab Field Unit will be right out or
respond by a certain time. Crime Lab Field Units are dispatched by a department
approved priority criteria and it is not possible to give a victim an exact time of arrival.
PRIORITY LAB REQUESTS
All priority lab requests require a Watch Commander or laboratory supervisor approval.
Examples of priority lab requests include:
• Major crime scenes such as homicides, officer involved shootings, traffic fatalities,
CPD, etc.
• Where photographs are needed prior to removal of victim, suspects or evidence
• When evidence or scene cannot be preserved or protected by reasonable means
• When there is a significant loss (Minimum of $10,000)
Priority calls need an explanation so that the Crime Lab Field Unit can evaluate if any
special equipment may be needed at the crime scene (especially when the lab unit must
respond to a remote area). Priority requests should not be made for vehicle processing.
A suspect in custody, in itself, does not justify a priority lab. It is justified only if the crime
scene cannot be preserved.
Watch Commander approval is required prior to Communications notifying laboratory staff
for all requests:
• After normal business hours (0030 to 0730) which require overtime and/or a callout
• When more than one Crime Lab Field Unit is needed at a crime scene
POLICE OFFICER ASSISTANCE
45 – Crime Lab Field Units
89 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Many police officers and most K-9 officers have been trained to print vehicles and take
photographs of domestic violence crime scenes. They may be requested through
Communications to assist the filing officers on all watches.
REQUESTS FOR PROCESSING VEHICLES
If a vehicle is impounded for a felony, chalk the window with "hold for prints" and the
invoice number. Note on the Impound Report Form that the vehicle is to be held for prints.
It is the responsibility of the investigating detail to file a "Request for Services" PD form
3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99) to assure that the vehicle is processed.
If the vehicle is not drivable, the Crime Lab Field Unit will process the vehicle at the
location. The officer should call the Communications Center and request to have the call
put on the computer lab list and/or by completing a "Request for Services" form, PD
3000.002(A) (Rev 04/99) and forwarding the form to the crime laboratory.
If a vehicle has been burglarized and meets the processing criteria, the victim should be
instructed to call the Crime Lab at (562) 570-7205 and make an appointment. A Crime
Lab Field Unit is usually available between the hours of 0730 and 1530 Monday through
Friday for an appointment to process the vehicle at the laboratory.
Vehicles involved in automobile burglaries will be processed only under the following
circumstances:
• When there is a suspect in custody
• When the victim or witness obtained a license number or positive suspect identification
• When property taken is positively identifiable by serial numbers or other identifiers
• If the tow sheet is marked "Hold for Prints" (for 10851 CVC recovery only) is completed
• At the request of an investigator or supervisor
In cases where officers contact the victim in the field, PD form 3000.002(A) (Rev 04/99)
will be filled out even if the victim indicates a willingness to drive to the laboratory. If the
report is taken after regular business hours, the victim should be advised to protect the
vehicle from outside contamination (foggy and inclement weather) and to call (562) 570-
7205 for an appointment.
“REQUEST FOR SERVICES” FORM PD 3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99)
The Request for Service form was designed to provide essential service request
information to the Crime Lab Field Unit. In cases where the articles, which might contain
prints and must be used by the victim in the course of his/her business, such as a cash
register, this information should be listed under “Special Instructions” on the written form
so that the Crime Lab Field Unit can prioritize the field call. Be sure to include site
information regarding back entry, upstairs, security doors, or other details that will assist
the Crime Lab Field Unit properly handle the call.
INFORMATION TO BE GIVEN TO VICTIM
45 – Crime Lab Field Units
90 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If the Crime Lab Field Unit is not requested, inform the victim that the technician will not
be requested and explain why. If a lab technician is requested;
• Advise the victim to have someone at the scene to provide access for the Crime Lab
Field Unit
• Do not tell the victim that a Crime Lab Field Unit will arrive at a certain time unless a
definite appointment has been made
• Do not tell the victim the Crime Lab will call them. If the victim has questions or
concerns relating to the field call, they can call the crime laboratory at (562) 570-7205
• Do not advise the victim to call the laboratory for an update on their case
If, in the officer’s opinion, there are possible latent traces, he/she should advise the victim
that there might be prints, so the victim will not smudge or destroy them. The officer
should not tell the victim that there are fingerprints. Do not write in a report there is no
chance of locating latent prints.
CONCLUSION
Before leaving the crime scene make sure the victim will protect and preserve the crime
scene after investigating officers leave the scene. Officers should assist the victim in
preserving articles to be processed for prints (smooth, hard, non-porous objects).
Officers should not bring any evidence to the station to be fingerprinted unless it is an
article that was left at the scene by the suspect and does not belong to the victim. There
are possible exceptions, but generally we cannot immediately return articles to the victim
and evidence can usually be better preserved if left at the scene.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
91 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 48 – Collection & Packaging of
Physical Evidence
REVISED October 2008
COLLECTION AND PACKAGING OF PHYSICAL EVIDENCE
INTRODUCTION
Physical evidence recovered at a crime scene may lead to the identification of the
person(s) involved in the incident. The evidence may provide useful information during a
criminal investigation and can also indicate how, when, and where a crime was
committed.
Officers need to secure, preserve, protect, and collect the evidence. Once the evidence
is carefully collected it must be properly packaged, documented and stored in Department
approved locations. All evidence that cannot fit into the Departmental evidence lockers
must be taken to the Evidence Control Section. If this occurs after hours, request
Communications Division to notify the on-call Evidence Control Sergeant.
CRIME SCENE EVIDENCE
The first responding officer on scene must secure, preserve, and protect physical
evidence as soon as they are able. Once the first task of identifying and protecting
evidence is complete, it is equally important that the evidence be recovered, packaged,
and stored correctly.
Evidence could be accidentally overlooked or destroyed by the first officers to arrive at a
crime scene. The following items are examples of evidence that officers should look for
and be cautious of at a crime scene:
• Latent prints
• Tools and tool marks
• Weapons, casings, bullets and fragments
• Broken head lamp, glass, and paint chips
• Narcotics
• Biological fluids, including blood, semen and saliva
• Bite marks
• Trace evidence, including hairs and fibers
• Duct tape
• Torn clothing and broken buttons
• Tire tracks and shoe impressions
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
92 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If there is a suspect present at the crime scene, the suspect should be immediately
removed from the crime scene. Bringing a suspect back to a crime scene, may
contaminate evidence and diminish or eliminate its value.
It is the responsibility of the officer in charge of a crime scene to secure the crime scene,
safeguard potential evidence, prevent unnecessary handling of evidence, and to exclude
all persons (sworn and non-sworn) from the area who are not directly involved with the
investigation.
DOCUMENTATION
In order to be admissible in court, evidence must:
• Be relevant
• Be properly identified
• Be properly collected
• Be properly documented
• Be properly preserved
• Have a documented and continuous chain of custody
• Not be collected in violation of a person’s constitutional rights
The Report of Property must contain:
• What type of evidence it is (including physical description of each item)
• Who found the item
• Where was it found (Be specific. Do not just state recovered from suspect)
• Biohazard or other appropriate safety warning
When evidence is collected it must be carefully handled as to not contaminate or destroy
any trace, biological, or latent print evidence. Officers should not mark on the actual
evidence that is to be examined for latent prints, or DNA, to preserve evidence that cannot
be readily seen.
The officer should place the evidence item(s) into an appropriate sized envelope, bag, or
box, then label it with the case DR number and the item number and properly seal it with
evidence tape. All evidence packages (paper bags, boxes, and envelopes) must be
sealed with evidence tape. Openings must be sealed from end to end to prevent loss or
tampering. When initialing the evidence tape, the officer’s initials and badge number
should be written on the evidence tape that overlaps onto the actual packaging. The
officer will be able to identify the evidence by the packaging that they have initialed. The
Evidence Control Section and the Crime Laboratory cannot accept improperly sealed
evidence.
In court, the officer who found the item of evidence will testify to the identity of the
evidence and the chain of custody. This testimony is needed to confirm that the item
introduced is actually the item that was recovered. The officer will need to be able to
describe where the evidence was found and what condition it was in. Complete and
accurate reports will result in complete and accurate testimony. Anyone who handles the
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
93 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
evidence will become part of the chain of custody and documented proof of every transfer
is required.
Crime Laboratory personnel will not automatically examine evidence. A request form
must be completed and sent to the Crime Laboratory to initiate any examination process.
Any special instructions should be clearly indicated on the request form. Requests for
Crime Lab Field Unit response should be made through the Communication Center.
LATENT PRINTS
When an officer at a crime scene observes objects having a solid, non-absorbent surface,
such as glass, plastic, porcelain, metal or semi-absorbent surfaces, such as paper or
cardboard, the officer should attempt to ascertain whether or not these items were
touched by the suspect(s).
Employees should wear protective gloves when searching, handling, and collecting
evidence that potentially contain latent prints. When items containing latent prints must
be picked up, touch as little as possible. Try to handle the areas least likely to contain
identifiable latent prints, such as rough surfaces, edges, and cloth/fabric surfaces.
Even when using latex gloves, fingerprints may accidentally be placed on the evidence.
Gloves or other articles used to pick up evidence will frequently wipe off or smear any
latent prints originally present. Careful and limited handling is required during the
collection and packaging of the evidence.
Even when latent prints are not visible, officers should collect the potential evidence or
request a Forensic Specialist as directed by Department policy.
Mark the box “Prints” on the Report of Property so all involved in the chain of custody
minimize the unnecessary handling of the evidence. Marking this box does not mean the
evidence will be processed by the Crime Laboratory. The Detective handling the case
must submit a written request to the Crime Laboratory for processing.
NARCOTICS AND DANGEROUS DRUGS
When recovering large amounts of cash or narcotics, attempt to contact a member of the
Narcotics Section. If no one is available, process all narcotics and dangerous drug
evidence as directed by policy and this Training Bulletin.
If drugs are loose, place them in a sealed coin envelope, Ziploc bag, or other small sealed
envelope to prevent them from spilling out into the evidence envelope. Drugs that are
loose in a narcotics evidence envelope are at risk for being lost.
Multiple controlled substance evidence items from a single case can be placed in a single
narcotics evidence envelope or package (size permitting). For example, a Ziploc bag of
methamphetamine does not need to be packaged separately from a Ziploc bag of
cocaine. Suspected narcotic evidence in liquid form must be packaged in a leak-proof
container, such as a vial. Make sure the vial is capped tightly.
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
94 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The court requires that a photograph of the narcotics be brought to court instead of the
actual evidence. Officers should complete the top portion of a narcotic photograph
identification card and place it in the narcotic envelope or packaging. When the laboratory
takes the photo, the identification card is included in the photo so the case can be easily
identified. Only one photo card is necessary per evidence package. Do not fill out a
photo card for each piece of evidence.
Separate drug paraphernalia (especially glass pipes/glass tubes) from other suspected
controlled substance evidence. Glass pipes easily break and have jagged edges; they
should be placed in a heat-sealed plastic bag or smaller envelope before being placed in
an evidence envelope.
Property reports need to be completed to specifically indicate the evidence description
and location where it was recovered. For example, Item – 1: One blue Ziploc bag
containing plant material recovered from suspect’s shirt pocket. Clear descriptions allow
Criminalists to distinguish multiple items in case.
The Detective handling the case is required to submit a request to the Crime Lab for
controlled substance analysis. Narcotic evidence is not automatically analyzed.
NEEDLES AND SYRINGES
Needles/syringes must be packaged in a plastic syringe tube so that those handling the
evidence will not be injured. Needles and syringes are particularly dangerous due to the
potential of biohazard contamination. Clearly mark the evidence package as containing
“sharp/bio-hazard”. OSHA requires that a biohazard sticker be placed on the outside of
the packaging. Indicate that the evidence is sharp and biohazard on the Report of
Property form. Needles and syringes will not be accepted unless properly packaged.
Exposure to Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV), Hepatitis, and other fatal diseases
can occur from an accidental puncture to the skin.
BIOHAZARD EVIDENCE FROM BODY CAVITIES
Evidence found in any body cavity (including the mouth) must be carefully packaged and
sealed to prevent biohazard exposure. Other forms of biohazard evidence include
evidence recovered from a trashcan, toilet, underwear, or evidence with blood or other
biological fluids on it. The package must be clearly marked BIOHAZARD using either a
biohazard sticker or writing in obvious large letters on the package. Specifically write on
the package or the Report of Property which body cavity the evidence was found. All
biohazard evidence removed from body cavities must be packaged separately so it does
not contaminate other evidence. DO NOT place gloves or paper towels used in evidence
collection inside evidence packaging.
BLOOD ALCOHOL AND URINE SAMPLES
Blood/urine specimen collection kits are available at all Intoxilyzer stations
(Booking and Youth Services) and the Crime Lab. Always collect specimens with
LBPD kits. The LBPD lab may not analyze other collection containers.
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
95 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When the concentration of drugs in the blood need not be determined, urine samples are
sufficient evidence to prove elements of the crime 11550HS.
Make sure urine bottles are screwed on tightly to prevent leaking. Do not package urine
bottles or blood tubes in plastic. Do not seal the caps with tape. Seal the evidence in the
evidence envelope provided. Do not cover any written information with tape. Place
biohazard stickers on the lower front right-hand side of the blood/urine envelopes, where
they do not cover any written information.
Blood samples are needed to determine the level of intoxication from drugs. Always use
LBPD blood kits. Try to obtain blood samples for use-of-force, sexual assault cases, DUI,
or anytime drug intoxication of a suspect/victim is an issue. The law allows a peace office
to obtain a blood sample for DUI cases when drug intoxication is suspected (23612 CVC).
Always have the blood collection technician fill the blood tube completely. Toxicology
analysis, and portions provided to the defense, will deplete the sample quickly. Cases
will be dismissed if there is not enough blood to analyze.
Always follow the directions for collection printed on the blood/urine kits to ensure a valid
analytical result. Failure to do so may result in a case dismissal.
DS 267A forms are no longer required by the DMV for DUI arrests. The crime lab will use
the information listed on the blood/urine envelope to supply the DMV with an analytical
report. Make sure the envelopes are filled out completely.
ALCOHOL /BEVERAGE EVIDENCE
Beverages in unopened bottles or cans should be properly packaged and placed into the
evidence locker. Beverages in open bottles or cans that require a sample of the contents
for analysis may be placed in a tightly capped plastic container. These containers are
available in the LBPD booking area and at the each Division where evidence packaging
is stored. The original bottle or can should be packaged and placed into evidence after
the sample is obtained. Indicate in the report what type of container it was originally found
in and the approximate total amount of liquid. Place the properly packaged plastic
container and the original bottle in the evidence locker. Unopened alcoholic beverages
that have no bearing on a case can be placed into the person’s property. Open containers
not having any bearing on the case may be discarded.
BIOLOGICAL FLUID/DNA EVIDENCE
Biological fluid/DNA evidence is evidence that has blood or any body fluids on it (i.e.
semen, saliva, sweat). DNA evidence can be collected from virtually anywhere. Biological
evidence must be collected carefully due to the potential of hazardous pathogens and
contamination issues. DNA evidence can be contaminated when DNA from one source
gets mixed with DNA from another source. This can happen if someone sneezes or
coughs on the DNA evidence or mishandles the evidence. A Forensic Specialist or
Criminalist will assist with the collection of biological evidence at a crime scene such as
homicides, rapes or other sensitive investigations. Officers will also be involved with the
collection and packaging of evidence containing biological fluid.
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
96 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
All employees shall wear appropriate protection to prevent exposure to blood borne
pathogens and protect evidence from contamination. Protective items such as nitrile
gloves and surgical masks are appropriate. Even with this protection always clean up
and wash your hands after handling any biological material. Nitrile gloves must be
changed between handling of any suspect evidence and victim evidence.
Employees investigating crimes with biological evidence should use the following
guidelines:
• Items of evidence in which the fluid is dry should be individually packaged in paper
packaging (envelopes, boxes, bags) and identified for freezer storage by affixing tape
labeled Freezer on each item
• Items that are wet need to be marked with the officer’s initials for identification
purposes. Each item will be individually placed in an open paper bag, labeled and the
freezer tape affixed to the bag. Officers shall write AIR DRY on the outside of the bag
• Always keep the victim and the suspect items separate to prevent cross-
contamination. Each item; shirt, pants, shoe must be packaged separately
• The officer shall indicate on the Report of Property which items were packaged and
identified with freezer tape
− Once dry, the item must be properly packaged, sealed and frozen without delay
to prevent deterioration
− The freezer tape shall also be affixed to sexual assault kits. Evidence that is
saturated and dripping wet must never be placed in the Division storage
lockers. If it is during normal business hours, bring the evidence directly to the
Evidence Control Section. If the Evidence Control Section is closed contact
the Evidence Control Sergeant through the Communication Center.
CLOTHING
The unnecessary handling of clothing should be avoided to preserve any particles of
evidence that might be clinging to them, such as, paint chips, metal chips, hair or fibers,
or any dried biological fluids. Carefully fold clothing and place it in a paper envelope, bag
or box appropriately marked. It is important that each item that contains evidence be
packaged separately in order to prevent cross contamination. The victim’s, and
suspect’s, clothing must never be packaged together. Cross contamination of victim and
suspect clothing, shoes or other items will diminish or eliminate the value of evidence that
proves contact.
HAIR AND FIBERS
Place hair or fibers into a folded paper bindle or small envelope. Place the bindle into an
envelope and seal before placing in the evidence locker.
FLAMMABLE LIQUID
48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence
97 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Experience and good common sense should be exercised when handling explosive,
incendiary, flammable, caustic items or hazardous material. The Watch Commander or
field supervisor should always be contacted for appropriate disposition of these materials.
Never place gasoline or other flammable liquid in the evidence locker or evidence room.
Motorized equipment, such as lawn mowers, must have the gasoline removed for
Evidence Control to accept it. The Evidence Control Section cannot accept car batteries,
helium tanks, propane tanks, or fireworks. After normal business hours and on weekends,
the officer shall contact communications to call the on-call Evidence Control Sergeant.
FLAMMABLE EVIDENCE MATERIALS
Long Beach Fire/Police arson investigators are equipped to obtain and package samples
of flammable materials for evidentiary purposes. A sample of flammable material will be
collected by the arson investigator and placed into a sterile airtight collection container
for safe transport to the LASD Crime Lab.
TRAFFIC CASES
When a felony hit and run vehicle is located, impound it and request a Crime Lab Field
Unit to respond to process the vehicle. The suspect vehicle should be towed on a flat bed.
While at the scene collect any item(s) or debris, which may have come from the suspect
vehicle, for later comparison. Collect and place into evidence items, which may have
come from the suspect vehicle, such as glass and/or paint chips, or any item that may
have fallen out of the suspect vehicle. Note the damage to the cars involved, such as
paint transfer and the location of damage.
CONCLUSION
Before evidence is admissible in court, it must be relevant, properly collected and
packaged, and the chain of custody must be clearly documented. The proper handling
and documentation of evidence is critical for a criminal investigation. This will allow the
successful prosecution of the perpetrator and to exonerate the innocent.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
98 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 50 – Wellness Program
REVISED March 2021
WELLNESS PROGRAM
INTRODUCTION
The Wellness Program was implemented to encourage officers to monitor their individual
health and achieve their highest level of strength, flexibility, and cardiovascular
endurance.
OVERVIEW
The events in the Wellness Program are voluntary, and participants are monetarily
compensated according to their fitness level achievements in each category of the
evaluation. There are two phases in the evaluation and the monetary reward structure
allows officers to participate in both phases of the evaluation, or at least partially, in the
evaluation. All participants must complete Phase 1 before they perform the events in
Phase 2.
Phase I (Wellness) - The officer must complete an annual physical examination by their
physician a minimum of every two years to participate in the program. Each officer must
submit the Wellness-Fitness Medical Report completed by their physician indicating the
following medical history:
• Resting heart rate
• Blood pressure reading
• Total Cholesterol level
If an officer’s total cholesterol is 200 or lower, the Wellness-Fitness Medical Report may
be used for the next year’s evaluation, however, it will not have the 50 point value. To
get the full point value, a medical report must be done for the current year of participation.
Phase II (Physical Fitness) - The officer performs the following events to test their fitness
level:
• Body composition (given by the Department using a bioelectric impedance analysis
machine)
• Sit and reach – to test flexibility
• Sit ups – to test abdominal strength
• Pushups – to test overall body strength and endurance
• 1 ½ mile run/walk – to test cardiovascular endurance
50 – Wellness/Fitness Program
99 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Each event is worth a certain amount of points based on the level of achievement; the
highest level being Super Fit. The maximum score for both phases is 790 points. If the
Super Fit level is reached, the officer will receive an additional 100 points for a total of
890 points. The monetary value for points will be based on the budgeted dollar amount
and the number of participants and points earned.
CONCLUSION
Cardiovascular endurance, muscle strength/endurance, body composition/maintenance,
and flexibility are several major benefits of participating in regular physical exercise.
People who exercise regularly tend to lead healthier, happier lives. It is a worthy
investment for the officer, their family, and the Department.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
100 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
REVISED April 2002
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
INTRODUCTION
Vehicle theft is a tremendous crime problem. Each year vehicles worth more than
$31,000,000 are stolen in the City of Long Beach alone. On an average day in Long
Beach 15 vehicles are stolen and 10 are recovered. The purpose of this Training Bulletin
is to assist officers in the investigation of vehicle thefts by explaining the various places a
vehicle's identification number (VIN) is located and what the VIN should look like.
GENERAL
The first step officers take when they come across a suspected stolen vehicle is to check
the license plate number by running a 10-29 on the plate. In many cases, this is sufficient,
however, suspects often change license plates or alter the license plates on a stolen
vehicle. If the return received doesn't match exactly, the vehicle deserves a closer look.
A closer look may reveal a VIN switch or a stolen license plate.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
A positive way for the officer to obtain the most complete check on a vehicle suspected
as stolen is to obtain the VIN and check this number along with the license number when
running a 10-29. If the vehicle is stolen and has different plates, records will still indicate
it stolen by use of the VIN.
LOCATION OF VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
All US sold passenger vehicles since 1968 have the VIN placed on the driver's side
window dash area. Some exceptions are the 1968 Ford passenger vehicles in which
VIN's are located on the passenger side. As of 1981, all US sold light trucks have the
VIN placed in the driver's side window dash area. All US sold passenger vehicles prior
to 1968, light trucks prior to 1981, gray market vehicles (vehicles manufactured outside
the US, not conforming to our standards, then imported), special construction vehicles
etc., were not standardized regarding the location and the configuration of the VIN. In
addition, there are several US manufactured and foreign imports that have the VIN plate
affixed to the left side windshield post and top of the steering column, both visible through
the windshield.
Since 1970 the Department of Transportation has required that a sticker be attached to
vehicles manufactured or imported into the United States listing the date of manufacture
and certifying the vehicle complies with Federal standards. This sticker is the "self-
destruct" type and any attempt to remove it will result in an obvious attempt at altercation.
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
101 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
This sticker, commonly called the "Federal Safety Standard Label," lists the VIN of the
car. Comparison should always be made between the VIN and the Federal Safety
Standard Label.
Porsche
The Porsche VIN may be located in the following places:
• VIN plate is located on left door pillar post (through 1965)
• VIN plate is located in luggage compartment near the gas tank or hood opening
• VIN is die stamped into the floor of luggage compartment under the mat
• Engine number is located below the generator
Volkswagen
Effective with the 1970 model year, all VWs have 10-digit serial numbers in compliance
with Federal regulations. The first two digits of the serial number signify the model, the
third digit is the last numeral of the model year, and the fourth to tenth digits indicate the
consecutive production number within each type. The entire number is the VIN.
On 1965 through 1969 models, a nine-digit chassis number was used. These numbers
start with the first two digits of the model number, the third digit designated the model
year. The remaining digits comprise the production numbers. All models prior to 1965
feature a seven-digit chassis number.
• A sample VW VIN (1965-1969)
Model Production Number
117043266
Year (’67)
Included in this bulletin is a diagram and chart indicating the various locations of VINs on
vehicles. When in doubt of a vehicle's identity, complete a field interview card (FI) on all
occupants and contact the Auto Theft Detail.
VIN SWITCH
Method of Operation (salvage): A thief goes to a wrecking yard and purchases a totally
destroyed vehicle. When he makes the purchase, he receives the following items from
the wrecker:
• A bill-of-sale for the wrecked vehicle showing the VIN
• The actual vehicle containing the VIN plate and body frame containing the
stamped VIN
With these items, the thief is now ready to steal a like make and model vehicle and
transfer the identity of the salvage vehicle to the stolen vehicle. Now he is in a position
to sell it to some unsuspecting purchaser.
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
102 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When conducting an investigation on a suspected stolen vehicle, check the VIN to
determine if it has been switched, changed or altered. Compare VIN’s to determine if
there is a difference and run a 10-29. If there is no make on the VIN, and the vehicle is
still suspected to be stolen, complete an FI card on the occupants, obtain the engine
number and other numbers and file a memo to the Auto Theft Detail.
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
Recovering stolen motorcycles is more difficult than recovering automobiles. To be
successful in recovering stolen motorcycles, officers must develop personal knowledge
of motorcycles, motorcycle names and how to distinguish one from the other.
Additionally, officers must have a working knowledge of serial numbers or other
identification numbers on motorcycles.
Detecting Stolen Motorcycles
• Check for a valid registration
• Check and see if license number, frame number or any other identifiable number
matches the registration
• Look for any evidence of altered numbers
California Assigned VIN
For any motorcycle or any other vehicle where the identification number has been
destroyed or where a machine or motorcycle is rebuilt, a number is assigned by the
Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV). The number will start with the letters CA and
should be closely checked for proper ownership.
General Information
All motorcycles, except Harley-Davidson, are registered in Sacramento by the frame
number. Harley Davidson's, prior to 1978, are registered by the engine number.
However, inadvertently some dealers list the engine number on popular motorcycles,
such as Honda, on their report of sale to DMV. This can result in the motorcycle being
registered in Sacramento by this engine number. If in doubt, check both the frame and
engine numbers and run them both through Auto-Stats.
VIN Locations
The majority of VINs will be found on the headstock (point where the front wheel pivots).
Some manufacturers place the VIN on the lower frame. Older model Harley-Davidsons
place the vin on the side of the engine. For further see attached chart.
REPORTS
When taking an impound or stored vehicle report, do not rely entirely upon the registration
in the vehicle for the VIN. Check the VIN on the vehicle and compare it with the
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
103 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
registration. Be sure of the number before listing it on a report. Double-check this number
and the license plate number.
CALIFORNIA REGISTRATION
Forged certificates of ownership (pink slips) and certificates of registration (white slips)
have presented a serious problem in California. The descriptive data on genuine
certificates usually is printed by a special IBM machine. The characters on this IBM
machine are larger (type to the inch) than the characters on most typewriters in general
use. The appearance of printing done by the IBM machine differs from typing in another
respect: there is no visible depression on the paper. This makes the characters
themselves peculiar to the IBM machine that cannot be duplicated by a typewriter.
In some instances, however, valid registrations may be typewritten. Certificates for new
cars and for out-of-state cars registered in California for the first time are usually
typewritten. Duplicate certificates are also prepared on a typewriter. Officers should be
particularly careful in checking typewritten registrations prepared on the IBM machine. A
forgery may be detected by checking the seal in the upper left hand corner of the
registration. The seal on a valid registration is clearly defined. On many forged
registrations the seal is very dark and seems to be carelessly printed. The new rainbow
colored certificates of ownership will show 4 bears when held up to the light. This
indicates a good certificate.
Conclusion
It is imperative that a cooperative effort be implemented by all officers to reduce the
current increase in vehicle thefts. Knowing what to look for when a VIN is altered and
knowing where VINs are located is necessary if officers are to recover stolen vehicles
and hopefully reduce the number of thefts.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
Appendix follows
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
104 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
VIN Locations
AMC Rambler 1961-67 4
Avanti 1966-67 5
1963-64 2
Buick 1962-67 5
1961 5,7,11
Riviera 1964 7
1963 14
21 panel near hood lock
17 frame near front
15 inner fender panel
13 frame near axle
11 brace cowl to wheelhouse
9 steering column mast
7 firewall under hood
5 door hinge pillar post
22 DASH L/S
3 door lock pillar post
1 side-rail engine comp.
2 frame at front
4 top surface wheelhouse
6 inner side above spring
10 inner fender panel
12 cowl tab under hood
14 firewall under hood
16 glove box brace
18 top rear of transmission tunnel
20 interior brace rear taillight
8 frame between axle & cowl
19 frame cross member
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
105 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Cadillac 1965-67 2
1963-64 19
1961-62 17
El Dorado 1967 13
Checker 1965-67 7
Chevrolet 1961-1967 5
Camero 1967 5
Chevelle 1964-67 5
Chevy II 1962-67 5
Vans 1967 5
1962-66 3
Corvair 1965-67 1
1961-64 3
Corvette 1963-67 16
1961-62 9
Greenbrier 1965 3
1964 5
1961-63 3
Chrysler 1961-1967 5
Dodge 1961-67 5
Ford 1963-67 12
1961-62 8
Fairlane 1962-67 15
Falcon 1963-67 15
1961-63 11
Clb W & Bus 1967 18
1963-66 20
Mustang 1963-67 15
T-Bird 1967 12
1961-66 21
Bronco 1966-67 8
Imperial 1961-67 5
Jeep & Willys 1961-67 5,7,14
Lincoln 1966-67 6
1961-65 18
Mercury 1963-67 12
1961-62 8
Meteor 1962-63 15
Comet 1963-67 15
1961-63 11
Cougar 1967 15
1968-present 22
Oldsmobile 1961-67 5
Plymouth 1961-67 5
Pontiac 1961-67 5
Studebaker 1961-66 5
56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers
106 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Motorcycle ID Location
The Locations given above are general and may differ somewhat on certain models. They
represent VIN locations on most of the motorcycles sold in North America. The frame
and engine numbers may or may not be the same and depends solely upon the particular
make and model. The frame VIN is usually the number used for titling and registering
motorcycles.
Make Frame Location Make Frame Location
BMW 3
BSA 6,4,10
Benelli 4,5
Bonanza 4
Bridgestone 1
Bultaco 3
Capriola 7
Cimatti 1
CZ 3
Ducati 4
Guazzone 6
Harley Davidson 1,4,5
Hodaka 3,8
Honda 4,6,9
Husqvarna 3
Indian 4
Jawa 4
Kawasaki 4
Laverda 2,4
Maico 3
Marusho 3
MB (Moto Beta) 5
Montessa 4
Moto Guzzi 4
Moto Morini 1
Norton 6
Ossa 4
Parilla 4
Royal Enfield 4
Suzuki 3
Triumph 3,4,10
Velocette 2
Vespa 6
Yamaha 5,6
Yankee 6
107 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 57 – Automated License Plate
Recognition (ALPR)
REVISED January 2018
AUTOMATED LICENSE PLATE RECOGNITION (ALPR)
INTRODUCTION
A fundamental element of policing is finding vehicles that are wanted because the vehicle
is stolen, wanted in connection with a crime, or driven by a subject who is wanted or
suspected of committing a crime or otherwise of interest to law enforcement. The Long
Beach Police Department utilizes Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR)
technology to impact criminal activity directly. ALPR systems play an increasingly
important role in public safety by enhancing productivity, effectiveness, and officer safety.
ALPR systems can recognize, read and compare, motor vehicle license plates against
various “hot lists” much more efficiently than officers manually scanning and making
comparisons while on routine patrol.
THE ALPR SYSTEM
ALPR systems utilize specialized cameras designed to capture images of license plates,
either from static positions or mobile patrol vehicles. Factors which pose difficulty for
license plate imaging cameras include the speed of the vehicles being recorded, the
distance and angle of the vehicles from the camera, varying ambient lighting conditions,
headlight glare, and harsh environmental conditions. In order to address these difficulties,
the ALPR system uses infrared cameras operating in addition to visible light cameras.
The mobile ALPR systems are equipped with global positioning system (GPS) receivers,
allowing the mobile units to record the date, time, and location of the license plate images
captured. Data such as date and time stamps and GPS coordinates can be reviewed in
relation to investigations leading to critical investigative breaks, such as placing a suspect
at a scene, witness identification, pattern recognition, or the tracking of previously
identified suspects.
Images of vehicles and license plates are the primary form of information collected by the
ALPR system. Optical character recognition (OCR) is performed on these images, and
the alphanumeric characters on each license plate are rendered into an electronically
readable format. The information that is gathered from the ALPR system is not
considered personally identifiable information; the system collects only the public display
of a license plate which exists in part to assist law enforcement to more readily verify the
vehicle complies with the law.
Databases may contain plates of stolen vehicles, wanted felony vehicles, vehicles with
lost or stolen plates, vehicles wanted for a crime, missing persons, Amber Alerts or any
57 – Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR)
108 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
other lawful reason. Officers are also able to enter wanted plates into the ALPR system
manually. The ALPR system may assist in the investigation of any crime with an identified
license plate.
When the ALPR system scans and a vehicle is a match to a wanted vehicle, the system
will alert the officer with both an audible and visual alert. Images of the license plate and
vehicle, as well as a brief explanation of what the vehicle is wanted for, will be displayed.
This process is entirely automatic and takes less than a second.
ALPR ACCURACY
Many variables affect OCR accuracy. Poor image resolution, and thus poor character
recognition, can be the result of several factors. License plates can be too far away for
the capabilities of the ALPR camera to capture, and motion blur can also occur. Poor
lighting and low contrast due to overexposure, reflection, adverse weather conditions, or
shadows can also result in poor image quality. Occasionally, an object might obscure all
or a portion of the license plate and interfere with accurate OCR. Often the object is a tow
bar, dirt on the license plate, or a loaded bike rack.
Sometimes the letter D is mistaken for a Q or an O. Other times, the characters on the
license plate are sometimes cut off from the frame of the image; when this occurs, the
OCR software may incorrectly read an E as an F or a Z as a 7. Some colors, especially
reddish tones, may be difficult for ALPR system OCR software to read. Learning the type
of mistakes ALPR system’s OCR software might make, can help investigators run queries
on potentially misread license plate numbers. For these reasons, officers should visually
verify that the license plate on the vehicle of interest matches identically with the image
captured by the ALPR system, including both the alphanumeric characters of the license
plate and the state of issue.
CAPABILITIES
Officers should note that the ALPR system will not read all license plates. The system
only reads plates that it sees, plates must be in the field of view of the camera and the
infrared color spectrum. Specifically, to read the plate, it must have reflective
characteristics. The ALPR system may not read older blue California plates, extremely
dirty, mutilated, or obscured plates. The ALPR system can read out of state and
motorcycle, plates, but with reduced accuracy.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Administration Bureau
109 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 58 – Aircraft Accidents
REVISED January 2002
AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTS
INTRODUCTION
As the home of a major municipal airport, the City of Long Beach must be prepared for
the possibility of private, commercial, or military aircraft accidents. Police responsibilities
at the scene of an aircraft accident include prevention of further fatalities and/or injuries,
proper notification of concerned agencies, traffic and crowd control, area security, and
incident reporting. Aircraft include fixed wing, helicopters and airships.
Forced Landings
A forced landing is the landing of an aircraft at a location, other than a designated landing
place, which does not result in death, injury or property damage. While a forced landing
is not classified as an aircraft accident, it may require police action. Responding officers
should initiate traffic and crowd control procedures.
When advised of the forced landing of a civilian aircraft in our city, the Watch Commander
shall notify the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Duty Officer at (310) 725-3300. The
Duty Officer will need the following information:
• The location of the landing
• The type and serial number of the aircraft
• The pilot’s certificate number
• The aircraft’s home base of operation
They will dispatch an inspector to the scene immediately. Permission must be obtained
from the FAA before an aircraft may take off after a forced landing. Officers should remain
with the aircraft until the FAA inspector arrives, takes charge, and there is no further need
for crowd or traffic control.
Aircraft Accident: Operations at Crash Scene
As with any disaster scene, the first priority is officer safety and making a determination
of the extent of casualties. The first officers arriving at the scene of an aircraft accident
should assess the scene, assist survivors and determine the safest approach for assisting
emergency personnel.
58 – Aircraft Accidents
110 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
A Command Post should be established and officers should report initial observations,
secure the scene and request an air unit for reconnaissance. The Communications
Center will need the following information if available:
• The type of aircraft down
• Size of the impact area
• Type of damage present
• Number of dead or injured
• Presence of fires
• Rescue situation
• Any other pertinent facts concerning the crash
The Watch Commander shall notify the FAA Duty Officer, inform them of the downed
aircraft, and request them to notify the National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB). In
the case of any fatalities, the Watch Commander will additionally notify the Los Angeles
County Coroner’s Office at (323) 343-0711.
Site Security
Initially, the site must be treated as a crime scene and contained as quickly as possible
in order to preserve any possible evidence. Most likely, hundreds of pedestrians and
vehicles will converge at the scene. An ingress/egress route to the crash site should be
established and controlled to facilitate the movement of emergency vehicles and
authorized personnel.
All persons requesting access to the containment area shall be directed to the Command
Post to obtain authorization. The only exceptions to this are police, fire and medical
personnel that are providing emergency services, as well as representatives of the FAA,
NTSB, and Coroner’s Office.
The wreckage within the containment area should be guarded as evidence. Pieces of the
wreckage may be widely scattered and must not be moved without authorization from
NTSB personnel. Items such as papers and certificates should be secured and identified
as to where they were found.
The Coroner has the legal responsibility for directing and coordinating the recovery,
collection, identification, and processing of the dead and their personal effects. He also
coordinates press releases relative to the identity of the dead.
The Incident Commander may consider requesting a temporary flight restriction over the
crash scene. This request, made through the FAA Duty Officer, has three primary
applications:
• To ensure adequate levels of safety to persons and property in the air or on the ground
from an existing or potentially hazardous situation when the presence of low-flying
aircraft would increase or compound the hazard
• To provide a safe environment for the operation of disaster relief aircraft
• To prevent unsafe congestion of sightseeing aircraft in the area of an incident or event
58 – Aircraft Accidents
111 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
News Media
Aircraft disasters are major media events. California Penal Code §409.5 allows
accredited media representatives access to certain areas closed to the public, as long as
those areas are not deemed a "crime scene." Federal authority supersedes California
law and restricts anyone from entering the crash scene, including the media, without
consent of the NTSB investigator in charge [Title 49 US Code §1901: 49 CFR
831.10(a)(b)]. Local law enforcement acts as the investigator's agent and assumes
responsibility for restricting access until their arrival.
The accident must be considered a crime scene even though the crash may not have
been the result of an obvious criminal act. The Police Department must restrict media
access to the site pending the arrival of the NTSB investigator.
It is, however, the NTSB's policy to accommodate the media. Therefore, it is important
that a specific media area be designated as soon as possible, to afford news agencies
the best possible view of the site without compromising the scene.
Military Aircraft
Accidents involving military aircraft are under the jurisdiction of the respective military
authorities. Police response is primarily to protect the public and preserve the scene
intact until the military investigators arrive and assume control. With the exception of fire
and rescue personnel, the scene of a military aircraft accident is strictly off-limits to
civilians, including the news media. Requests for information or statements should be
referred to the proper military personnel.
A crashed military aircraft may present hazards not encountered with civilian aircraft.
Such hazards may include ejection seats, bombs, munitions, and jet propellants. Officers
should avoid approaching these aircraft head-on, where they may be in the path of
exploding cannons or rockets.
Reports
Primary investigation to determine the cause of an aircraft accident falls under Federal
jurisdiction. Our reports are aimed at assisting the Federal agencies in their complicated
task. Listed below are the various types of reports that may be filed:
• Special Accident (Forced Landing)
Filed when any aircraft, civilian or military, makes an emergency landing at a location
other than a designated landing place, with no damage to any other property or injuries
to anyone. Should include pilot's name, certificate number, passenger names,
witness statements, aircraft identification number, and aircraft's home base of
operations.
• Special Accident (Aircraft)
58 – Aircraft Accidents
112 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Filed when any aircraft, civilian or military, crashes within the city limits. If the crash
occurs at the Long Beach Airport, this report will be filed only when Airport personnel
call this Department to the scene. The report should be as complete as possible as
to the identity of the people involved, property, damage, aircraft identification number,
type of aircraft, destination and point of departure, and the name of the aircraft owner.
Witnesses are extremely important to the success of aircraft accident investigations.
Officers should identify witnesses and record statements as to their location during
the crash, aircraft direction in flight, fire or explosion prior to the crash, impact angle,
falling items from the aircraft, and removal of any items from the scene. When
possible, witnesses should remain until the arrival of FAA or NTSB representatives.
If a crash does occur at the airport, airport personnel will escort responding officers to
the accident scene. Caution must be exercised as it is likely runways and taxiways
will be in use in spite of the aircraft accident.
• City Property (Damage)
Filed when any city property is damaged as the result of an aircraft crash.
• Dead Body
Filed when civilian personnel are killed in an aircraft accident, or when military
personnel on a civilian aircraft or on the ground are killed. No dead body report will
be filed on military personnel aboard a military aircraft.
When the pilot or occupants of a civilian aircraft are killed, a single dead body report
should be filed, listing the pilot first and all others aboard the aircraft as additional
victims. Victims on the ground that die as a result of the crash should be listed on
separate, individual reports. Information should be as complete as possible as to
identification and locations where the victims were found.
CONCLUSION
Officers assigned to work at the scene of an aircraft accident must have a clear
understanding of their responsibilities. Although a scene of mass destruction and
casualties may seem overwhelming initially, having first responders trained in the Incident
Command System and employing the system effectively will result in a safe and
successful operation.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
113 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 59 – Firearms Evidence
REVISED May 2006
FIREARMS EVIDENCE
INTRODUCTION
Firearms evidence is frequently encountered in homicides, assaults and robberies; but
may also be found in any other crimes such as burglary, rape, or narcotics.
Examination of firearms evidence includes:
• Comparison of bullets and cartridge cases to a specific firearm;
• Comparison of a bullet and/or a cartridge case to evidence found at the same or
different crime scene;
• Firearm function and modification;
• List of possible firearms involved in an incident;
• Serial number restoration;
• Distance determination based on powder residue or shot pattern;
• Entry of bullets and casings into a nationwide firearms database for comparison,
identification and mapping to other firearms crimes
• Sequence of shots fired, crime scene analysis and trajectories.
FIREARMS EVIDENCE-HANDLING AND SAFETY
When securing or collecting firearm evidence, safety is the first and primary
consideration. Firearms are most often found loaded, without a safety on and possibly
cocked and ready to fire. Firearms may have a hair trigger, been modified or malfunction.
As an example, automatic firearms have been found modified so that a single pull of the
trigger will fire all the cartridges in the magazine. These firearms are extremely dangerous
and these modifications need to be anticipated. Rifles with a tubular magazine may have
a dent in the magazine that will temporarily hold back a live cartridge as the chamber is
cleared. The live cartridge can later become dislodged and loaded into the previously
cleared chamber. All firearms must be handled as if loaded, ready to fire and possibly
modified, damaged and left unsafe.
Although physical evidence is important, safety always comes first. The location and
condition of firearm evidence at a crime scene should be recorded. In addition to the
police report the need for photographs and/or diagrams should be considered. Prior to
recovering and securing evidence, firearms must be unloaded, and care taken to preserve
the evidence. Evidence includes fingerprints, blood, hair and fibers, revolver cylinder
halos, and debris in or on the weapon. The firearm should be handled in areas least likely
59 – Firearms Evidence
114 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
to retain latent fingerprints such as knurled or checkered areas and to preserve trace
evidence.
Unloading Revolvers
Pen or scribe marks need to be placed on the top of the cylinder along each side of the
top strap of the frame. The position of each cartridge and cartridge case should be
indicated on the property report as diagramed below. Cartridges and cartridge cases
removed should be handled carefully to preserve latent fingerprints. Each cartridge and
cartridge case should be packaged separately and listed on the property report. Do not
mark the actual cartridge or cartridge case. Markings should be placed on the package.
Facing Rear of Cylinder
Example Notes
Chamber Position Condition Cartridge Head stamp
1 Fired U.S.C. Co.
2 Fired REM-UMC
3 Fired WRA
4 Misfired D.C. Co.
5 Loaded WESTERN
6 Loaded PETERS
Unloading Single Shot or Auto Loading Firearms
Before securing the firearm, record the position and condition you found the safety,
hammer, and other control features. With the firearm pointed in a safe direction, remove
the magazine. Next clear the chamber by slowly drawing back the slide or bolt to the
rear, examine the chamber visually to ensure that no cartridge is in the chamber. If one
is found remove it. Separately package the magazine and/or extracted cartridges in
envelopes. These envelopes can then be packaged in the box with the firearm. Again,
take care to preserve any possible fingerprints and trace evidence. Do not remove the
cartridges from the magazine, or mark the cartridges themselves. Indicate in the police
report if the magazine was in the firearm, the number of cartridges in the magazine, and
whether or not there was a cartridge in the chamber.
59 – Firearms Evidence
115 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
TRACE EVIDENCE AND FINGERPRINTS
The Investigating Officer must submit a Long Beach Police Department Crime Laboratory
Request for Services PD 3000.002(A) (REV.04/28/99) for any firearm that needs to be
processed for trace evidence or latent print evidence.
FIREARMS AND CARTRIDGE CASES TO BE ENTERED INTO NIBIN
The Long Beach Police Department is a member of the National Integrated Ballistics
Information Network (NIBIN). When a firearm is fired, the cartridge case and bullet are
left with unique striations and/or tool marks that can be directly linked to a particular
firearm. Cartridge case and bullet evidence can be entered into the NIBIN database and
linked to other NIBIN cases where the same firearm was used. Crime scene casings and
bullets can be linked to the same firearm or a test-fired firearm can be linked to the entered
casings and bullets. NIBIN is an excellent investigative tool that assists in solving multiple
cases and linking recovered firearms to past crimes.
The Investigating Officer must submit a Long Beach Police Department Criminalistics
Laboratory Firearms Analysis & NIBIN Entry Request for a firearm, cartridge case or bullet
to be entered into NIBIN. Recovered firearms can be requested to be test fired and the
test fired casing and/or bullet entered into the NIBIN database.
NOTE TAKING AND EVIDENCE MARKING
When necessary a crime scene sketch should be prepared. A sketch provides
measurements of evidence found to a fixed or reference point. The distance between
objects and evidence at a crime scene may provide information that may be of value when
reviewing or analyzing a crime scene. Distance between a firearm and other crime scene
evidence may be important in cases such as homicides, suicides, cases with multiple
shooters, self -defense shootings and others. Photographs supplement the notes and
sketch.
BULLETS EMBEDDED IN WOOD OR PLASTER
Do not dig or pry a bullet out of a wall or other object. This could damage identifying
striations on the bullet that can link the bullet to the firearm. Remove the bullet by cutting
around the material in which the bullet is embedded, or cut around the adjacent area to
loosen the bullet. If necessary, package the piece of material containing the bullet.
FIRED CARTRIDGE CASES, WADS, AND PELLETS
Cartridge Cases: It may be possible to determine the approximate position of the shooter
by the location of ejected cartridge cases. In order to do this a sketch with ACCURATE
measurements of the fired cartridge cases must be recorded. Measurements should be
made against a common reference or fixed point. Photographs with a scale are also
helpful in this type of examination. When collecting cartridge cases package each item
separately.
59 – Firearms Evidence
116 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Shot Wads: When a shotgun is fired, the wads travel with the shot charge for a short
distance. In cases involving close distances, wadding may be found in either the victim’s
clothes or body. Location and distance of the shot wad to a fixed location may help
identify the location of the shooter. Shot wads can be used to determine the gauge and
identity of the shotgun. Package each item found separately.
Shot Pellets: Collect and handle shot pellets in the same manner as bullets. Shot
patterns may assist in determining the location and distance of the shooter. Collecting
items with the shot pattern and/or measuring the shot pattern distances from each other
and taking photographs with a scale will assist in determining the distance of the fired
firearm from the target.
Loaded Shells or Cartridges: Collect ammunition associated with the case. The
ammunition may have markings that indicate an attempt to fire or cycle it in a firearm.
Recovered ammunition can be used for test firing and distance determinations.
Duplicating ammunition used in the crime may be critical.
If the number of cartridges is relatively small, they can be handled in the same manner
as bullets and cartridge case evidence and packaged separately. If the quantity is large
(boxes of ammunition) then the cartridges may be left in their original container and
packaged.
GUN SHOT RESIDUE (GSR):
When a firearm is fired, gunshot residue gas and solids are discharged. The residue
escapes through the cylinder, barrel and other openings in the firearm. Residue can be
deposited on clothing, objects in close proximity and the hands of the shooter. The
actual amount of residue varies with the weapon, ammunition, and conditions of
discharge.
The analysis of gunshot residue from the hands of a shooter detects primarily trace
amounts of primer residue. Gunshot residue (GSR) deposits on the hands decline over
time. In practice, a shooter may not be found to have GSR on his/her person after six
hours. However, GSR may last for hours on victims that have died, or on objects near a
shooting. Sample collection procedures are critical.
GSR Precautions
Sampling for GSR should be performed on a live subject as soon as possible. Ideally,
samples should be taken immediately after contact with a subject in the field. If the
suspect is going to be transported to another location the hands must be bagged to insure
there is no cross contamination. One collection kit should be used per suspect. Prior to
GSR collection, visually examine the subject's hands and wrists.
The subject should not be allowed to wash or rub their hands prior to sampling. Do not
let the suspect put their hands in their pockets or touch other objects. GSR samples must
be collected prior to fingerprinting the suspect.
59 – Firearms Evidence
117 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
CAUTION! DO NOT TOUCH the hands of the subject in the areas to be sampled
for possible gunshot residues.
If possible, thoroughly wash your hands and wrists before proceeding to prevent
any transfer contamination to the hands of the subject. Put on the disposable
plastic gloves provided before handling sampling materials.
Clothing and other objects in close proximity to a discharged weapon may have gunshot
residue. Depending on the circumstances, these items may need to be collected.
The following directions provide a guide for GSR collection.
1. Put on the disposable plastic gloves;
2. Select a sample disc labeled RIGHT HAND. Remove the protective cover. Do not
touch the disc to anything but the subject's hands;
3. To collect gunshot residue from a person's hands, the exposed adhesive surface
of the disc is pressed firmly against the back right hand in a systematic pattern
until the disc loses its stickiness. Do not slide or rotate the disc on the skin.
Concentrate on the web area between the junction of the thumb and forefingers
and down the forefinger;
4. After the adhesive surface has been used and the hand sampling is complete,
reseal the disc in the container provided;
5. Repeat this process with left hand using the disc labeled left hand and reseal the
disk in the container provided;
6. Fill out ALL information requested on the GSR kit and ensure that the containers
are properly marked. Place the sealed containers in the envelope and seal.
Submit the complete kit to the Property Section with a police property report. If the
hands were bagged prior to sampling, seal and package each bag and submit
them to Property.
Any GSR kit that needs to be analyzed must be is sent to the Los Angeles County Sheriffs
Crime Laboratory for analysis.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
118 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 62 – Mentally Ill Persons
REVISED May 2023
MENTALLY ILL PERSONS
INTRODUCTION
Police officers often encounter or are called to assess if a person needs to be hospitalized
under the criteria of Welfare and Institutions Code (WIC) §5150 (adult) or WIC §5585
(juvenile). To achieve the best possible outcome, officers should use the safest, most
effective way to handle a person who is suspected of being mentally ill and still treat them
with respect.
LEGAL RESPONSIBILITIES
Mental illness is not a crime; WIC § 5150 provides that when a person, as a result of
mental illness, is a danger to themselves or others, or gravely disabled, they may be held
for treatment and evaluation in a County designated facility for up to 72 hours. Gravely
disabled is defined as an individual who is unable to provide for basic personal needs
such as food, clothing and shelter, due to a mental disorder. In the case of juveniles,
gravely disabled is defined as unable to utilize the food, clothing, and shelter provided by
others. Dangerous or gravely disabled persons may be detained for evaluation with or
without a court order.
WIC § 5150.05 - Officers shall “consider available relevant information about the historical
course of the person’s mental disorder," when considering probable cause for a 5150
hold. Officers need not personally observe the behavior leading to a determination that
a subject meets the criteria for a 5150 hold. Available relevant information can come from
the following:
• Prior police contacts (e.g., call history or the officer’s own knowledge)
• Mental health professionals or treatment providers responsible for the subject’s care
• Family and friends
Relevant questions to ask include, but are not limited to:
• Has the person experienced previous episodes, and what happened?
• Did the person become violent?
• What happened that compelled the calling party to call the police?
MENTAL EVALUATION TEAM (MET)
A Mental Evaluation Team (MET) is a unit comprised of a sworn police officer and a
licensed clinician that specializes in dealing with the mentally ill. When on duty, MET is
available to assist patrol units in the handling of calls involving the mentally ill. However,
62 – Mentally Ill Persons
119 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
MET services are not available at all hours. If a MET unit is not available, patrol units will
handle such calls.
FIELD RESPONSE
The following are steps to be taken when encountering mentally ill subjects in the field:
1) Ensure the scene is safe. If there are articulable facts indicating the subject is
dangerous or may be carrying a weapon, conduct a limited search for weapons.
Ensure the area is free of weapons and potential weapons the subject may be able
to reach. If there is any indication the subject will become violent, handcuff the
subject.
2) Request additional units if there are indications the subject may become violent.
3) Request paramedics if the subject needs medical care.
4) Request a MET Unit to respond to the scene if available.
a) Provide the MET Unit with a Field Interview card that contains the subject’s
social security number, diagnosis, medications, and health insurance information
if able.
ENCOUNTERS ON PRIVATE PROPERTY
When officers receive a call regarding an emotionally ill or mentally disturbed person, they
may be invited onto the premises by the property owner, a relative or a friend of the
subject. The mere complaint of a neighbor does not give officers authority to enter the
subject’s residence. However, if the officer has an objectively reasonable basis to believe
that the subject is seriously injured or imminently threatened with such injury, then entry
is allowed in order to render emergency assistance.
CONDUCTING AN INVESTIGATION
When a MET Unit is not available, officers may be called upon to investigate. The
investigation should include the following:
1) Contact the calling party to find out the reason they called for assistance. If possible,
obtain the following information:
a) Description of the subject’s behavior now and in the past
b) Psychiatric history including any psychiatric diagnosis
c) Medications taken by the subject
d) If the subject is treated by a psychiatrist, psychologist, counselor, or other physician
e) When the subject was last hospitalized and at what hospital
2) Interview the subject
3) Determine if the person meets the criteria for a 5150 hold
Interviewing the subject may be the most important part of your investigation. The
subject’s degree of cooperation may be determined by your demeanor and interviewing
techniques. Your ability to be calm, confident, and an “emotional buffer” who exudes
patience and concern is key.
Make sure that you have eye contact. Many schizophrenics hear loud voices in their
heads; they need to know which voice is your voice. The “command voice” does not
usually work with the mentally ill and may make the subject more paranoid.
62 – Mentally Ill Persons
120 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When interviewing a mentally ill subject:
• Call them by name.
• Ask open ended questions like, “what happened?” This allows the subject to express
what is going on in their own words.
Officers are not expected to diagnose a mental disorder, but rather determine if probable
cause exists to believe that the subject is a danger to themselves, a danger to others, or
gravely disabled due to a mental illness. Questions should be asked which include, but
are not limited to, the following:
• Do you know what day it is? (day, month, year)
• Do you know what city you are in?
• Who is the President?
• Do you have a place to live? Where?
• Are you able to provide food for yourself?
• Do you have medical problems such as diabetes, seizure disorder, or hypertension?
What are they?
• Are you taking medication? Which ones?
• Have you ever seen a psychologist, psychiatrist or counselor? If so, did they give you
a diagnosis? If you ask questions too soon regarding the subject’s psychiatric history,
it may make them defensive.
• If we leave now, where are you going to go and what are you going to do?
Even if the person cannot or will not answer your questions, their behavior should be
documented in your report as to why the subject needed hospitalization.
CRIMINAL ACTS
When a mentally disturbed person commits a felony or serious misdemeanor, they should
be charged with the appropriate crime. The individual should, if possible, be booked at
the station for the relevant crime class. Once booked, the Booking Sergeant and Jail
Supervisor will determine whether or not the subject can be housed at LBPD Jail Facility
or should be transported to the Los Angeles County Jail. If the criminal charge is minor,
the subject may be released not booked on the charges and then transported to the
appropriate psychiatric facility for a 72-hour hold.
TRANSPORTATION
Transportation is necessary either when you determine that a person needs to be put on
a 5150 hold, or when you are dealing with a person who does not fit the 5150 criteria but
wishes to be hospitalized voluntarily. When a person wants to seek voluntary treatment,
they can be transported to a nearby psychiatric facility.
When transporting subjects to a psychiatric facility, certain steps should be followed to
ensure the safety of both the officer and the subject.
• Handcuff, safety belt, and hobble subjects, as necessary.
• A non-violent person being hospitalized voluntarily should not be handcuffed but
should be thoroughly searched for weapons.
62 – Mentally Ill Persons
121 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• With the exception of MET, who work with DMH Clinicians, all subjects being
transported to a psychiatric facility outside of the city for the purpose of a 5150 hold
should be transported by a two-officer police unit.
• Inform the subject of the detainment advisement as written on the 5150 application
form.
Transportation by the Long Beach Fire Department
For the purpose of a 5150 hold, the Fire Department may be requested to transport
persons with a mental illness by ambulance if:
• The person is violent and requires restraint to the extent that they must be transported
in a recumbent position to prevent injury.
• The person is injured or physically ill and needs immediate medical attention.
• The person is elderly or a young juvenile, where handcuffs or any physical restraint
may injure the patient.
• The person is non-ambulatory due to a medical condition.
Patrol units should advise dispatch the reason they are requesting an ambulance for the
purpose of a 5150 hold.
When a person is detained on a 5150 hold and transported by ambulance, at least one
officer should ride in the ambulance or follow the ambulance at request of the Fire
Department. The officer should remain with the patient until the hospital accepts the hold.
If the Fire Department arrives on scene of a mentally ill person and the patient does not
need to be transported by ambulance (i.e., medically cleared by Fire), the officer should
take over and transport the patient. This includes patients seeking transport for voluntary
treatment.
IMPORTANT LAWS
Health and Safety Code § 1799.11 states that any physician has the authority to detain
a person for up to eight hours, for the purpose of getting them a psychiatric evaluation.
In other words, there is no need for a police officer to respond to a hospital to write a 5150
application on a person who is a patient in that hospital. The emergency room physician
has the authority to detain the patient for evaluation by a psychiatrist at that hospital or
evaluated by a Psychiatric Mobile Response Team (PMRT) from another hospital.
Welfare and Institutions Codes § 8100 through 8104 gives you the authority to
confiscate any firearm or deadly weapon from any person placed on a 5150 hold. Note
the reason the weapon has been taken on the property sheet; this is a hold, NOT
safekeeping.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Community Services Bureau
122 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 65 – Communications Radio
Transmission Procedure
REVISED May 2017
COMMUNICATIONS
RADIO TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION
The Communications Division is a support unit under the Department of Disaster
Preparedness and Emergency Communications; and functions to assist officers in the
performance of their duty. The Communications Center consistently strives to provide the
best possible service and requires the cooperation of all field units. For the most efficient
radio transmission, it is necessary for officers using mobile radio equipment to understand
certain communications procedures.
THE ABCs of RADIO TRANSMISSIONS
Officers should adhere to the following principles to ensure the most efficient use of the
mobile radio equipment:
• Accuracy – A misspelled name may yield a response of “NO WANT” on a wanted
person.
• Brevity – Airtime is precious, there may be as many as 65 units on the same channel.
Plan your transmissions and keep officer safety in mind. Officers are reminded that
Manual Section 7.3.2 requires KDT use for routine communication in order to preserve
radio air time for emergency use.
• Clarity – Speak clearly, using codes and phrases.
• Courtesy – Teamwork requires courtesy. Phrases like “Please” and “Thank You” are
not necessary, however, officers and dispatchers will be courteous and respectful.
GENERAL TRANSMISSION PROCEDURES
Prior to transmitting, monitor the channel for a moment to avoid interfering with another
unit. Units cannot always hear the transmissions of other units. When using the fixed
radio in the vehicle, do not transmit before the red light on the unit illuminates. This will
indicate the equipment is operating properly. When using a portable radio, depress the
transmit button and wait two seconds before transmitting. When transmitting with either
radio, always say “unit” followed by the complete unit designator. This will decrease the
incidents of the unit designator being cut off by the identification signal the radio transmits
to the Communications Center.
When transmitting, the following practices will ensure that radio transmissions are clear,
concise and courteous:
• Hold the microphone or handheld radio at a 45 angle, approximately 4-6 inches from
your mouth;
• Speak in a normal tone of voice, yelling causes distortion;
65 – Communications Radio Transmission
123 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Try to keep your voice void of emotion;
• Avoid the use of humor or slang;
• Never use profanity;
• Speak slowly, approximately sixty (60) words per minute;
– Officers should remember that dispatchers must type the information broadcast by
the field units;
– Spell out names that are unusual, have difficult spellings or may be spelled more
than one way, i.e. Dixon, Dickson, Dicksen, etc.;
– Use the approved phonetic alphabet in this Training Bulletin;
• After each transmission, ensure that the transmitter is off;
– Check the red light on the control panel and place the microphone back in the
metal clip;
• Limit each transmission to no more than twenty (20) seconds;
– This allows the dispatcher to acknowledge the unit or let them know that part of
the transmission was missed;
– If necessary, this also allows other units on the frequency to make an emergency
broadcast;
– If a dispatcher is broadcasting, and a unit has emergency traffic, the officer can
initiate the broadcast and the dispatcher will hear them and discontinue
broadcasting.
REQUEST FOR CLEARANCE
When requesting clearance, the officer will broadcast the full unit designator and briefly
state the reason, e.g., “Unit 2C10, 10-28/10-29 a plate,” “Unit 3A52, warrant check,” “Unit
4B4, suspect information,” etc. This expedites the work of the dispatcher, who can then
bring up the correct format on the CAD screen, thus requiring fewer requests to repeat
the information and conserve valuable airtime.
BROADCASTING SUSPECT AND WANTED VEHICLE DESCRIPTIONS
The original broadcast of suspect and vehicle descriptions is for the purpose of immediate
apprehension. Officers broadcasting either suspect or vehicle descriptions from the scene
should limit the broadcast information to those facts needed to assist in the immediate
apprehension of the suspect or vehicle. Minute details, such as hair style, eye color, type
or color of shoes, speech characteristics, exact loss, or complete description of a weapon,
may be useful in the final identification or elimination of a suspect, but are time consuming
to broadcast during the first transmission. When broadcasting wanted vehicle information
provide as much of the following information as is available:
• Type of crime the vehicle is wanted for;
• Location of theft or crime;
• Time of occurrence;
• License number;
• Year, Make, Model;
• Color - top to bottom;
• Direction of travel;
65 – Communications Radio Transmission
124 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
WANT AND WARRANT CHECKS
When requesting a want or warrant check on an individual, it is important that all of the
information is given in the following order:
• Driver’s license number (indicate the state if not from California);
• Last name, first name, middle initial, suffix;
• Sex and race;
• Hair and eyes;
• Height and weight;
• DOB or age.
RECORD CHECKS
Record checks will not to be done over the air or Mobile Work Station. Officers are to
contact the Records Division, after the subject has been transported to the station. If
having the subject’s criminal record will have a bearing on whether or not they will be
arrested, the officers may contact the Records Division by telephone. Under no
circumstance will Communications Personnel broadcast this information over the air or
cause it to be transmitted via CAD; to do so is a violation of the Privacy Act.
VEHICLE CHECKS
Officers requesting a check on a vehicle license or identification number (VIN) will first
broadcast their full unit designator and briefly state the request, i.e. 10/28, 10/29, etc.
Upon acknowledgement by the dispatcher, the unit will broadcast their location followed
by:
• Type of plate, i.e. motorcycle, commercial, personalized, etc.;
• License number (and state if not from California);
• If the license plate is not available, use the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
REQUESTS FOR ASSISTANCE
When requesting assistance, provide the dispatcher with specific information as to what
type of assistance is needed, i.e., backup (what does the unit have and is backup needed
code 3 or regular code), fire, paramedics, tow truck, animal shelter, public service, etc.
EMERGENCY AIR BROADCAST
During any emergency situation officers should continue talking in a normal tone of voice,
remembering general transmission procedures. When in pursuit or traveling Code Three,
officers should roll up vehicle windows to help eliminate the background noise such as
the siren and wind.
In the event a suspect flees at the termination of a pursuit or for any serious crime that
has just occurred, utilizing the ABC’s of radio transmissions will help get the proper
information out to those who can use it the most, assisting units. The following format for
broadcast information is the most efficient:
• Type of crime;
• Type of premises and location;
• Time of occurrence;
• Number of suspects and brief description of clothing or outstanding features;
• Sex and race of suspect
• Direction suspect fled;
65 – Communications Radio Transmission
125 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Type of weapon, if any, was used.
INITIATING A CODE RED
It is the responsibility of a field unit involved in an incident to make the request for a code
red. The Communications Center Supervisor or dispatcher may initiate a Code Red when
they believe one might be necessary but was not requested by an officer.
Communications dispatchers are not responsible for initiating the Code Red.
• Unless a Code Red has been requested, dispatchers do not keep the air clear, instead
they continue to dispatch and handle routine radio traffic.
– The exception to the above will be upon receiving a transmission from a unit
indicating a 997, 998, 999, or Code 1000. Consideration should be given by the
dispatcher to halt routine traffic and initiate a Code Red.
CANCELING A CODE RED
A field unit or field supervisor at the scene is responsible for canceling a Code Red. The
cancellation of a Code Red does not mean the incident is Code 4. However, broadcasting
a Code 4 or a Code 4A will cancel a Code Red. Code 4 or Code 4A should be provided
by a unit that is in the field at the scene of an incident.
CHECKING IN- AND OUT-OF-SERVICE
At all times, all officers are required to check in-, or out-of-service. In most instances, this
can and should be accomplished by using the KDT. However, in instances where officer
safety is an issue, airing your location and status is appropriate.
NOTIFICATIONS TO AND FROM OTHER JURISDICTIONS
When requested, the Communications Center Supervisor, or their designee, shall notify
other jurisdictions when a unit may be entering their jurisdiction.
• When making the notification request, a field unit should specify if the request is for
assistance or notification only.
PHONETIC ALPHABET
A – Adam H – Henry O – Ocean U - Union
B – Boy I – Ida P – Paul V – Victor
C – Charles J – John Q – Queen W – William
D – David K – King R – Robert X – X-Ray
E – Edward L – Lincoln S – Sam Y – Young
F – Frank M – Mary T – Tom Z – Zebra
G – George N – Nora
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
126 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 67 – Arrest and Control Techniques
REVISED January 2017
REVIEWED January 2020
ARREST & CONTROL TECHNIQUES
INTRODUCTION
In today’s society a tremendous amount of responsibility is placed on police officers and
their ability to make decisions. When an officer is confronted with violence, he/she must
instantly decide what degree of force to use. Supervisors, lawyers, judges and the public
will review the officer’s decision. It is imperative that the decision an officer makes
conforms to the law, the standards of the Department and the expectations of the public
and profession.
California Penal Code §835a states that any peace officer who has reasonable cause to
believe that the person to be arrested has committed a public offense may use reasonable
force to effect the arrest, to prevent escape or to overcome resistance. As a companion
to §835a PC, §834a PC obligates a person who has knowledge, or should have
knowledge, that he/she is being arrested by a peace officer to “refrain from using force or
any weapon to resist such arrest”.
USE OF FORCE PARADIGM
Past training utilized a “use of force continuum”, which implies that there is a progressive
beginning and end to using force. Realistically, not all situations allow the luxury of
beginning at point A and ending at point B. The use of force paradigm allows officers to
utilize the degree of force necessary to control the situation.
CONTROL
Control is that degree of influence an officer must exert over a suspect in order to take
him/her safely into custody.
TYPES OF CONTROL
Officers must strive for control in everything they do. There are two types of control that
must be dealt with:
General Control is that degree of influence that an officer must exert over a suspect in
order to keep the peace and take him/her safely into custody. The key to understanding
general control is that the suspect still has the option to either conform to the expected
behavior, or resist. With general control, the suspect still has the freedom to move.
Physical Control is the application of a specific control hold or technique, which would
allow the suspect to move only in the direction and manner the officer chooses. The
67 – Arrest and Control Techniques
127 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
effectiveness of physical control depends greatly on the use of pain compliance and
leverage.
DEGREES OF CONTROL
Presence and Demeanor – Mere presence of a patrol vehicle or the uniform alone is
often adequate influence to control suspects.
Verbal – In certain situations, the appropriate use of voice commands is all that is
necessary to control the situation. An officer’s ability to persuade and communicate in a
clear and concise manner will in large part be a determining factor in the officer’s ability
to control most situations (for further see Training Bulletin 187 “Tactical Communication”).
Controlling force – Controlling force is the minimum amount of force needed to control
an individual when voice commands do not exert sufficient control over the situation, or
are inappropriate for the situation. Controlling force consists of physical control ranging
from exerting a firm grip on an individual to pain compliance control holds to an actual
physical hold or lock.
Injuring force – Injuring force usually involves the use of a baton or other impact weapon.
Injuring force should be used only after lower levels of force have been attempted and
failed, or are inappropriate.
Deadly force – Long Beach Police Department’s shooting policy, §6.8.5 of the
Department Manual, states that firearms shall be regarded as defensive weapons and
shall be used by an officer only in the absence of reasonable alternatives and the
presence of one or more of the following compelling circumstances:
Immediate threat – In self-defense or in defense of another when the officer
reasonably believes there is an immediate threat to life or of serious injury.
Substantial risk – To effect the arrest or prevent the escape of a felon or suspected
felon when the officer has reasonable cause to believe that:
– The crime for which the arrest is sought involved the use of or threatened use of
deadly force, or the infliction of serious bodily injury; and,
– There is substantial risk that the person whose arrest is sought will cause death
or serious bodily harm, if apprehension is delayed.
Officers who do not have control and/or confidence in their abilities tend to develop one
or more or the following compensating behaviors:
• Hesitation – Underestimating or belittling the situation and possibly justifying non-
involvement or hesitation in getting involved.
• Bluffing – Relying on the suspect’s fear of the uniform, badge and gun. Threatening
to use a level of force that is not justified by the situation.
• Verbal abuse – Insulting or belittling the suspect by using profanity, insults or both.
• Excessive force – Over controlling the situation. Losing perspective in the physical
arrest situation and overreacting without legal or moral justification.
Self-confidence is achieved when officers develop the knowledge, skills and abilities
necessary to perform the duties of their profession. Self-confidence eliminates the need
for the above mentioned compensating behaviors.
67 – Arrest and Control Techniques
128 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
ESCALATION AND DE-ESCALATION OF FORCE
When an officer applies force to a suspect in order to gain compliance, there is always
the possibility that the suspect may comply. As long as the suspect is compliant, there is
usually no further need for the level of force you have chosen. It is perfectly acceptable,
and encouraged, to lessen the amount of force being used when compliance is achieved.
Attitude and choice of the proper technique allows officers the flexibility to escalate and
de-escalate the amount of force used as the circumstance calls for it. Officers are held
responsible in deciding whether to escalate or de-escalate the amount of force needed to
arrest a violator.
MAKING THE ARREST
§836 of the California Penal Code authorizes police officers to arrest people with or
without a warrant whenever any of the following circumstances occur:
• The officer has probable cause to believe that the person to be arrested has committed
a public offense in the officer’s presence
• The person arrested has committed a felony, not in the officer’s presence
• The officer has probable cause to believe that the person to be arrested has committed
a felony, whether or not a felony, in fact, has been committed
Officers must remain professional at all times when dealing with the people they come in
contact with. People who realize they are going to be arrested react in a variety of
behaviors. Some arrestees may become sullen, angry or uncooperative. An arrestee’s
attitude toward the officer may change without warning. They may be cooperative one
minute and belligerent the next for no apparent reason. They may be sensitive to real or
imagined insults where even a casual remark by the officer may offend them.
Officers are encouraged to consider the use of tactical communication techniques
(TB187) during arrest situations to clarify their actions for arrestees and onlookers. For
example, phrases such as "please cooperate" and "please do not resist" can greatly assist
in the de-escalation of a potentially volatile situation. Make sure there is no doubt in
anyone's mind that you have made every effort to gain voluntary compliance with the law
and your requests.
An arrestee may try to discredit an officer by accusing him/her of illegal or unethical
behavior. It is impossible to prevent arrestees from voicing these unjustified complaints,
but officers may minimize the number and effect of such accusations by maintaining a
courteous and businesslike attitude in both action and conversation. Officers must refrain
from antagonizing the arrestee and avoid a show of emotion. Remember that a
cooperative prisoner is easier to arrest and transport than a belligerent one.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
129 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 68 – Prowlers
REVISED April 2001
PROWLERS
INTRODUCTION
Few occurrences frighten the average person like the sudden discovery that someone is
prowling at his/her door, yard, or peering in a window. For the responding officer, there
is no way of knowing what a prowler’s purpose may be. The suspect might be:
• A burglar
• A sexual psychopath or a “peeping Tom”
• An intoxicated person
• Someone seeking a place to sleep
• A jealous suitor or an ex-spouse
• A person committing malicious mischief or petty thievery
• A neighborhood child taking a short cut through the backyard
• Someone relieving him/herself
RESPONDING TO THE CALL
Most prowlers are opportunists and do not plan their actions in advance. They will walk
along the street until they notice a residence that suits their purpose. If discovered on the
premises, they seldom leave by the same way they entered. Instead, they will go over
back fences and through yards until another street is reached; however, many hide in the
immediate vicinity.
Knowledge of street locations, house numbers, alleys, etc. is essential in planning the
approach of the scene and will enable officers to anticipate possible avenues of flight the
prowler might take from a given location.
Don’t become complacent when responding to a prowler call. For officer safety, you
should consider a prowler as a potential burglar. Generally, prowlers are extremely canny
and familiar with routine police methods. Techniques the suspect does not expect will
work best to outwit him/her.
• As soon as you have acknowledged a “921” broadcast, formulate a plan. Treat the
call like a burglary in progress
− Form a plan
− Set a perimeter
• Assisting units should consider:
− How far away they are from the dispatch address
68 – Prowlers
130 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
− How old the call is, i.e., how long ago the prowler was seen
− Possible direction of escape the suspect took
• Reduce speed a short distance from the scene and observe persons on the street,
being careful not to overshoot the address. Turn corners slowly near the scene to
avoid squealing tires and avoid running over manhole covers or street debris
• Every person on the street in the vicinity of the call should be closely scrutinized
• Persons running or walking rapidly should be stopped and questioned. If stopping
someone delays your arrival on scene, notify dispatch immediately
• Upon arrival, stop a few doors down from the actual address
– Plan your approach, decide ahead of time where you will park
– Practice noise control, open and close car doors carefully. Tuck keys and whistle
into a pocket to prevent rattling and be aware of radio volume for both hand held
and car radio
– Listen for dogs barking or any unusual noises, look for any motion light being
activated
• Avoid searching without first contacting the calling party, if you want to do a cursory
search before knocking on the door, have communications advise the calling party
• Never search alone
• Obtain as complete a description of the suspect as possible and, if known, the route
of flight and notify dispatch
• Assure the reporting party that the danger has passed, and conduct a more thorough
search of the area
Searching the Area
A prowler may conceal him/herself anywhere; trash cans, sheds, beneath cars, under
porches, etc. Clever prowlers conceal themselves in places that are so simple and so
obvious that they may be overlooked. Therefore, when investigating a prowler call, after
conducting a quick initial search, check the area thoroughly, there is a good possibility
the suspect could still be in the general area.
Use of a Flashlight
• An officer can minimize the possibility of self-silhouetting by holding the flashlight away
and slightly in front of the body
• Avoid lighted backgrounds and keep low when passing windows so that you are not
silhouetted. This is a precaution against being seen by the suspect or shot at by the
occupant of the house or a neighbor who may mistake an officer for the prowler
• At the rear of the house, “sweep” the yard with a flashlight while listening for any noise
which might indicate the suspect’s location or route of flight
General Considerations
• Examine the lawn for evidence of recent movement. If dew has settled on the grass
and a light is shown across it from a low angle, footprints will appear as dark streaks
and may indicate the direction taken by the suspect. Damp footprints may also appear
on sidewalks or paths
68 – Prowlers
131 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Check fences for damage or debris, a suspect may leave shreds of clothing or
smudges. If a suspect leaps from a fence into soft dirt, deep footmarks may show
where he landed
• Windows and screens should be checked for holes, tool marks, fresh smudges on the
sills, or other evidence of an attempted entry
• The ground below each window should be carefully examined for footprints. Any
marks in the ground or disturbance of spider webs around crawl holes may indicate
that the suspect has hidden under the house
• Don’t overlook tree branches, shrubbery, and flowerbeds. Thoroughly search heavy
vegetation near fences and buildings
• Check sheds, garages, arbors, and the roofs of all outbuildings. Many prowlers have
been apprehended in garages and beneath workbenches
• Use K-9 if appropriate, i.e. a burglary, attempt burglary or some other felony crime has
been committed
Checking Vehicles
• Check vehicles in the area of the call for any occupants
• Check underneath parked vehicles, as many suspects hide under parked cars
• Investigate any vehicles with warm engines, especially those parked in front of a
darkened building. If it is registered to an address away from the neighborhood,
consider surveillance
• Many so-called “prowlers” are burglary, rape or theft suspects, and many will leave
their personal identification, clothing, shoes, and keys in their vehicles before prowling
an area. Others have been known to leave the engines of their vehicles running
Officer Safety
Before you hop over fences, take precautions to avoid hazards. Low branches and
clotheslines are not readily visible at night. Be alert for unleashed dogs. Listen for barking
dogs, as continuous barking may indicate the route of a fleeing suspect or the hiding place
of a suspect.
Assuring the Victim
• If the suspect is not located, advise the victim that periodic checks will be made on the
residence
• Advise the victim that if the prowler returns, to immediately notify the police and try not
to let the suspect know he has been detected, for example, by turning on lights
• Inform officers of the next watch of the circumstances so that they can check the area
periodically
• Flashlights or spotlights used during these checks will give the complainant a feeling
of security and may reveal the prowler’s presence if he returns
• If the prowler is not located, a good tactic to employ may be to make a show of leaving
the area only to return quietly after a few minutes. Generally about 15-20 minutes is
long enough to determine if a prowler is going to pop out of hiding and use the street
Suspects
68 – Prowlers
132 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• When a suspect is stopped away from the scene, carefully observe his/her face, hands
and clothing. Splinters and scratches might indicate he/she has been climbing fences
or going through hedges
• Clothing, particularly trouser cuffs and shoes, may have bits of shrubbery, spider
webs, or foxtails adhering to them or the shoes may be wet or muddy. These
conditions indicate the suspect has probably been going through backyards or vacant
lots
• Perspiration or heavy breathing might indicate that the suspect has been running
Many burglars know that prowling is merely a misdemeanor. If caught, they may admit
being on the property unlawfully; they may admit that they were “peeping”, or may claim
that they stopped to urinate. These admissions are often made to mislead officers so
they will overlook evidence of burglary.
Prowler Arrests
When a citizen or officer witnesses the prowling, and a suspect is arrested, the offender
may be booked for violation of Penal Code §647(h) Disorderly Conduct - Prowling. The
following elements must be present.
§647(h) PC “Any person who loiters, prowls, or wanders upon the private property of
another, at any time, without visible or lawful business with the owner or occupant thereof.
As used in this subdivision, “loiter” means to delay or linger without a lawful purpose for
being on the property and for the purpose of committing a crime as opportunity may be
discovered.”
Depending upon circumstances, a suspect may be charged with §647(i) PC Disorderly
Conduct - Peeking. To substantiate a charge under this section, the following elements
must be present:
§647(i) PC “Any person who, while loitering, prowling, or wandering upon the private
property of another, at any time, peeks in the door or window of any inhabited building or
structure located thereon, without visible or lawful business with the owner or occupant
thereof.”
Reports
When arresting a suspect for §647 (h) PC, it is only necessary to file an arrest report. The
following information should be included in this report:
• How you came to be on scene, dispatched, on patrol, etc.
• Statement that the prowler had been observed on the private property of the occupant
(observed by arresting citizen-occupant, or officer)
• Statement from the occupant that prowler did not have permission to be on property
(a statement from neighbor to this effect is not sufficient)
• Statement that occupant (victim) wishes to prosecute
• Statements of witnesses, if any
68 – Prowlers
133 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Statement that the suspect had been advised of his/her rights per PD form 1000.008.
Suspect’s response to these rights, either a positive or negative waiver
• Suspect’s statement; why he was on property, etc.
• Officer’s observations (condition of suspect’s clothing, e.g., no shoes, ripped shirt,
etc.)
• Include whether suspect had been drinking or not. If he appears intoxicated, a
Breathalyzer test should be administered
Field Interview Cards
Field interview cards should be filed whenever officers locate persons in the area of the
call, but are unable to connect them with the offense. These cards assist the Detective
Division in locating possible suspects for other crimes.
Conclusion
Because prowler calls are so frequent, officers should be familiar with the recommended
prowler call procedure:
• Plan approach
• Respond quickly, safely
• Observe persons in area
• Watch side streets
• Search the area
• Ease complainant’s fear
• If arrests are made, report factually; include elements
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
134 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 70 – Investigative Follow-up
Procedures
REVISED January 2011
INVESTIGATIVE FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURES
PURPOSE
The purpose of this training bulletin is to control, coordinate and document all follow-up
work, on any case, which has been assigned to a detective. The assigned detective shall
have control over decisions and investigative tactics utilized to bring a specific case to
conclusion.
This training bulletin is in no way intended to prevent officers from following up on crimes
that have just occurred and are fresh. This only applies to crime reports that have already
been "assigned" to a detective.
PROCEDURE
Patrol officers are encouraged to follow-up with as many clues/leads as possible after the
occurrence of a crime. Any pertinent information developed shall be documented in their
crime report or supplemental report by the end of their work shift. This includes
documenting all investigative steps. This also includes documentation of any photos
taken at the scene by Patrol or Lab.
Once the crime report is filed and routed to a specific detail, the case will be assigned to
a specific detective. All follow-up work after this point shall be coordinated through the
assigned detective. Examples of follow-up work would include, re-interviewing victims,
witnesses, or any possible suspects, conducting surveillances, or showing six-pack
photographic line-ups.
If information is developed during the course of a work shift, patrol officers should attempt
to contact the assigned detective for direction. If unable to contact the assigned detective,
the appropriate detail sergeant should be contacted. If circumstances require immediate
attention and detectives are unable to be contacted (weekends/nights), notify your field
supervisor.
All follow-up work that is done shall be documented in a supplemental report prior to the
end of the work shift. E-mails shall not be used in lieu of a supplemental report.
CONCLUSION
70 – Investigative Follow-up Procedures
135 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
This system is in place to control and coordinate investigations. Adherence to this
procedure will assist in our combined efforts to prosecute guilty parties.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
136 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 71 – Community Relations
REVISED February 2001
COMMUNITY RELATIONS
MISSION STATEMENT
The Community Relations Division exists to promote communication, education, and
mutual understanding between the Police Department and our community.
INTRODUCTION
The Community Relations Division is responsible for the coordination and presentation of
a wide variety of community programs and services for the Department. The primary
areas of responsibility within the Division include:
• Crime Prevention
• Coordinating Department functions
• Community Program requests
• Public Information/Press Relations
CRIME PREVENTION
The Department sponsors four major crime prevention programs:
• Neighborhood Watch – Educates citizens to recognize and report suspicious and/or
criminal activities. Residents are educated in Home Security, Personal Safety and
Emergency Communications and are encouraged to be the “eyes and ears” of the
Police Department since officers cannot be everywhere at once
• Apartment Watch – Enlists the aid of apartment managers/owners along with their
tenants in reducing criminal activity on and around their properties. Apartment
buildings are posted with “No Trespassing” signs and the managers/owners agree to
be the “victim on file” for any of these crimes
• Business Watch – Helps business managers/owners reduce crime on and around
their business properties. The organizational structure of this program is similar to
that of Apartment Watch
• Marina Watch – Provides a partnership between the Police Department, Marine
Patrol and boat owners. The Marina Watch is like Neighborhood Watch for people
who live on their boats
In addition to the above programs, the Community Relations Division also provides
handouts, videos, coloring books and stickers and other promotional items on a wide
71 – Community Relations
137 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
variety of crime prevention and safety related topics. Many of these materials are also
available in Spanish and Khmer.
DEPARTMENT FUNCTIONS AND COMMUNITY LIAISON
The Community Relations Division is responsible for coordinating Department functions
such as the Annual Awards Luncheon, Retired Officers Bar-B-Que, Police and Fire
Christmas Drive, and certain funerals. The Division is also responsible for coordinating
community programs such as Safety Fairs, the Chief’s Advisory Groups, Senior Police
Partners, Volunteer Program, Summer Youth Employment Training, Internship Program,
and Regional Occupational Program.
Community Program Requests
The Department receives numerous requests from the community for public relations
programs. All such requests should be routed through the Community Relations Division
where they will be directed to the appropriate Bureau for assignment. Some Program
requests include:
• Station/Communications Center tours
• Herbie the Talking Police Car
• Career Day presentations
• K-9 displays or demonstrations
• Narcotics
• McGruff the Crime Dog
• Heliport tours
• Personal safety presentations
• Safety displays
• Robbie the Robot
• Gangs
• Fingerprinting
PUBLIC INFORMATION/VIDEO PRODUCTION
The Department has established an excellent, positive, working relationship with the news
media. Effective communication can create citizen awareness, thus increasing the
apprehension of criminal offenders. Press Information Officers make every effort to:
• Notify media representatives of investigations that culminate in arrest, and/or recovery
of significant amounts of property/drugs
• Solicit media assistance in locating missing children, lost adults, and wanted suspects
• Solicit media assistance in relating specific criminal activities to the public
• Notify the media of major or unusual traffic collisions, hit and runs, etc.
• Solicit media assistance for purposes of informing citizens of crime prevention
measures
• Solicit media coverage of programs involving police sponsorship or participation, e.g.,
awards for valor, human-interest stories, etc.
• Disseminate Information through Channel 64-B
71 – Community Relations
138 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Create and assist in production of educational programs to be aired on the City of
Long Beach local cable channel such as “Behind the Badge”, Public Service
Announcements, and the Department Highlight Videos
CONCLUSION
Maintaining a solid, positive relationship with the public and the media is a critical
responsibility. The Department that supports the community will in turn receive support
from the community. The Community Relations Division is a vital link to the community.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Administration Bureau
139 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 72 – Gangs
REVISED February 2022
GANGS
INTRODUCTION
This Training Bulletin will include gang structure, characteristics, criminal behavior, and
identification of gang members. Gangs in the City of Long Beach are primarily organized
along ethnic lines and are composed of the following types of gangs:
• Hispanic
• Asian
• Black
• Pacific Islander
• White
COMMON GANG CHARACTERISTICS
Gangs in Long Beach are comprised mostly of male members from the same general
area, and range in size from about 30 to 200 members. Although the average age is
between 14 and 25, they may be found as young as 10 and as old as 40, sometimes
older. The older members are known throughout the gangs as “OG’s” (Original Gangster).
The OG’s are usually the shot callers or leaders.
Although each gang has its own unique characteristics, most gangs are involved in
criminal behavior such as drug dealing, committing auto thefts, extortions, firearms
violations, burglaries, home invasion robberies, witness intimidation, various degrees of
assaults, and murders. They frequently use weapons during the commission of these
crimes. Gangs have also become involved in high tech crimes involving identity theft and
counterfeiting credit cards and checks. The gangs reap more benefits from these
financial crimes without using violence, resulting in lighter jail sentences if caught.
Gang members will often admit to gang membership but, may also find it in their own
interest to deny membership. Other times, they may only claim to affiliate or “kick it” with
a certain gang. In some ways this gives them the benefits of being closely tied to the gang
(i.e., girls, parties, protection, excitement), without the risk of being identified as a member
by a rival gang or law enforcement. Affiliates should be identified as such by officers in
the field and their information forwarded to the Gang Enforcement Section.
Gangs may require a new member to be “jumped in”; a process in which the prospective
member fights one or more gang members for a specific amount of time. It is also
common today for new members to gain membership by committing a criminal act for the
gang. These crimes can range from thefts to drive-by shootings and murders.
72 – Gangs
140 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
After this initiation, a gang member is expected to be loyal to his gang, to the death. If he
is questioned by a rival gang member or “hit up”, he must never denounce his gang
membership. In many cases, generations of membership within a gang have blurred the
lines between gang and family to the extent that they are almost synonymous.
Female Gang Members – Female gang members practice territorial domination. The
female members are usually separate cliques of the larger male gang. There are no
known female gangs that are totally separate entities. They get involved in all aspects of
gang crime from fistfights to violent felonies, working together with the male members as
a team. The females are used in setting up ambushes by luring the rival gang members
into their territory. The females will on occasion drive the cars in a driveby shooting while
their “home boys” do the actual shooting.
Graffiti – Gangs tend to be largely territorial and usually mark their area of influence by
using graffiti. Typical gang graffiti will list the gang’s name and list the names of several
gang members who were either present or respected within the gang. A crossout is a type
of asterisk that covers the rival's graffiti. After a death, it is common to see memorial
graffiti listing the fallen member followed by R.I.P. (rest in peace). It proclaims to the
world the status of the gang and offers a challenge to rivals. Common gang terms for
graffiti are “plaquing”, “tossing”, “throwing up”, "the hood" or “varrio”.
Dress – Gang style of dress generally follows the current trends, making it easier to blend
in with the general population. They sometimes wear white T-shirts with pressed jeans,
and Polo-style shirts. Gang members will often wear certain colors to represent their
gang, or wear clothing their gang identifies with, representing professional sports teams.
Tattoos – Gang members tattoo their bodies to show their level of commitment to their
gang.
HISPANIC GANGS OF LONG BEACH
Hispanic gangs commonly wear Pendleton’s, clothing that is black and grey, or
representing Raiders, Steelers, Pirates, Nationals or Dodgers teams. Hispanic gang
members call their graffiti inscriptions "placebos " or "placa," meaning sign or plaque. A
cross out of a rival gang’s graffiti is referred to as a "put mark". Many times, the word
"puto" (whore) or "rata" (rat) are scribbled next to or close by crossedout graffiti as further
disrespect for the rival gang. A common tattoo for Hispanic gang members is three dots
on the web of the hand signifying “mi vida loca” (my crazy life).
The following Hispanic gangs regard areas of Long Beach as their home turf:
• Barrio Pobre (BP)
• Barrio Small Town (BST)
• East Side Longo (ESL)
• East Side Paramount (ESP)
• North Side Longo (NSL)
• Playa Large (PL)
• West Side Longo (WSL)
72 – Gangs
141 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Barrio Pobre
• Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Pirates, Philadelphia Phillies, Pittsburgh Steelers.
• Graffiti/Tattoos: BP, BP16th ST, Pobrero, Poor Town
• Area: Long Beach Blvd., Elm Ave., Hill St. to Anaheim St., Drake Park, 14th Street
Park, 16th St. & Linden Ave.
• Rival Gang(s): 18th Street, ESL, Asian gangs, Black Gangs
• Allies: BP Compton and Anaheim
• Cliques: 10th St. (Dime Block), 16th St. (Lokos), Mafiosos Chicanos-Compton,
Anaheim Barrio Pobre (ABP)-Anaheim OC
• Has sets in South Gate, Lynwood, Compton and Anaheim
Barrio Small Town
• Clothing/Colors: nothing specific
• Graffiti/Tattoos: Barrio Small Town 4th Street, BST TWS, (Tiny Winos), BST13
• Area: Broadway to 7th St., Magnolia Ave. to 710 Freeway, 4th St. & Daisy Ave.,
Chavez Park
• Rival Gang(s): ESL/ Playa Larga/ WSL /Black gangs
• Allies: None known
• Cliques: 4th street, Tiny Winos
East Side Longos - The largest and most violent gang in the City of Long Beach. Since
1981, ESL has been responsible for hundreds of gang related shootings.
• Clothing/Colors: Las Vegas Raiders, Los Angeles Lakers, Los Angeles Dodgers
• Graffiti/Tattoos: ESL, BV, MDS, PWZ, Stoners, LTPBZ
• Area: South and West Divisions east of the 710 Freeway Seaside Park, 14th Street
Park, Anaheim St./Hoffman Ave.
• Rival Gang(s): BST, BP, Asian and Black gangs, 18th St.
• Allies: WSL, NSL
• Cliques: Barrio Viejo, Malditos, Peewees, Latin Time Playboyz, 8th Street, Dukes, The
Stoners, 9th Street Locos, Lonely Boys, Midget Locos, Chico Malo’s, Crazy Latin Boyz,
Latin Thugs
• Females: Lil Night Owls, Primes, Lokas 14th Street, South Side Youngsters
East Side Paramount
• Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Pirates, Philadelphia Phillies, Pittsburgh Steelers.
• Graffiti/Tattoos: ESP, ES Paramount, ESP13, ESPX3, Eastside PRMNT
• Area: City of Paramount, North Long Beach, Artesia Blvd. to north city limits, Cherry
Ave. to Downey Ave., Indiana Ave./68th Street.
• Rival Gang(s): Paramount Dog Patch, Brown Nation
• Allies: None known
• Cliques: 67th Street, Dukes, Chicos, Tiny Locos, Pee Wees, Playboys, Termites
North Side Longos
• Clothing/Colors: Las Vegas Raiders
• Graffiti/Tattoos: NSL, NS Longo’s
72 – Gangs
142 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Area: Del Amo Blvd. to Harding St., Long Beach Blvd. to Paramount Blvd., Carmelitos
Housing Project
• Rival Gang(s): Black gangs/ Asian gangs
• Allies: ESL, WSL
• Cliques: Tiny Locos, Peewees, Cyclones, Youngster, Machos, Baby Gangsters
Playa Larga of Long Beach - One of the smallest Long Beach Hispanic gangs
• Clothing/Colors – nothing specific
• Graffiti/Tattoos: PL, PLR, Playa Larga
• Area: Anaheim St. to 7th St., Daisy Ave. to Pacific Ave., Electric Ct. to Anaheim St.,
Chestnut Ave. to Cedar Ave., Drake Park
• Rival Gang(s): BST, ESL, WSL
• Allies: 68th Street
• Cliques: Diablos (11th St.), Sick Assassins (21st St.), Vipers (VPs)
West Side Longos
• Clothing/Colors: Washington Nationals, Los Angeles Lakers, Las Vegas Raiders
• Graffiti/Tattoos: WSL, WS Longo, Corner Boys, S&C, LCCS, TMTS, 19th Street,
WSL13
• Area: PCH to Willow St., 710 Freeway to West city limits, Summit St./Canal Ave.
• Rival Gang(s): West Coast Crips, Dominguez 13, Sons of Samoa (SOS), West Coast
Islander (WCI)
• Allies: ESL, NSL
• Cliques: Summit & Canal, Cyclones or Corner Boys, Termites, Tiny Locos, 19th Street,
Stoners
• Female: Winas, Tiny Locas
ASIAN GANGS OF LONG BEACH
As the Asian gangs evolved in Long Beach, they began to take on the characteristics of
Black “Crip” gangs. They chose Crip colors such as blue or gray and avoided using the
color red. They formed a long-lasting truce with all Crip gangs and have rarely had any
conflicts with them.
The major Asian street gangs currently active in Long Beach are predominantly made up
of Cambodian males. Long Beach has one of the largest Cambodian communities in the
United States. Most of the members in the five primary Asian gangs of Long Beach listed
below are Cambodian, with the balance being Laotian, Thai, or Vietnamese. There may
also be a few Black, White, or Hispanic members scattered throughout these gangs. The
Cambodian street gangs share several of the qualities found in other Asian gangs such
as being very secretive, well organized, and capable of extreme violence.
Since the late 1980’s, the East Side Longo’s have waged a conflict with the Cambodian
gangs, especially the Asian Boyz and the Tiny Rascal Gang. This conflict has been fueled
by the fact that these rivals all share the same general turf and many of them have
attended the same schools. Over the years, the Asian/Hispanic gang conflict is
responsible for dozens of homicides.
72 – Gangs
143 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Asian gangs are highly mobile criminal enterprises that concentrate their criminal activity
primarily against their own community. Asian gangs are nontraditional when compared
to street gangs of other ethnic groups; they have national and international ties which
makes identification and prosecution more difficult.
Tattoos - Asian gang tattoos and burn scars are often an indicator of gang affiliation.
These tattoos are usually symbols of power such as dragons, tigers, eagles, sailing ships,
etc. Burn scars found on Asian gang members are usually a result of a cigarette burn.
These scars are usually found on the hands, wrists, forearms or the lower legs.
Long Beach has five primary Asian gangs:
• Asian Boys (ABZ)
• Crazy Brother Clan (CBC)
• Exotic Foreign City Crip (EFCC)
• Suicidals (SUIS)
• Tiny Rascal Gang (TRG)
Asian Boyz (ABZ) - Their gang color is blue, and they claim Crip. This Cambodian gang
is also associated with Asian Boyz-Van Nuys. ABZ has established a large presence
throughout California, especially Northern California. They also have a large presence in
Lowell, Massachusetts; Missouri, North Carolina, Pennsylvania and Utah.
• Clothing/Colors: Atlanta Braves, Anaheim Angels, blue handkerchiefs
• Graffiti/Tattoos: ABS, AB, ABZ,126
• Area: Anaheim Avenue corridor, 10th and Freeman, 1000 block E. 17th, 2200 block
Lewis Avenue
• Rival Gang(s): TRG, all Longo gangs
• Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip, and A-Asian
Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS)
• Clique: Rose, Bitch Killa, Crime Family Gangster Crip (CFGC)
Crazy Brothers Clan (CBC) - This Cambodian gang was transplanted from Modesto,
Fresno, Stockton and Sacramento area in the early 1980s.
• Clothing/Colors: carries a white rag and wears a white baseball-type cap
• Graffiti/Tattoos: CBC, 323
• Area: West Division, parts of East Division and North, Lime Avenue and 20th Street,
Orange Avenue and Anaheim Avenue
• Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs , TRG, Asian Boyz, EFCC, Suicidals
• Allies: None
Exotic Foreign City Crip (EFCC) – These members are primarily Cambodian, Laotian
and Thai teens. EFCC was formerly known as Exotic Foreign Creation Coterie, but later
adopted the name Exotic Family City Crip gang. The structure is similar to that of Black
gangs, and they adopted the Crip name.
• Clothing/Colors: blue
• Graffiti/Tattoos: EFCC, EFC, dove, heart
72 – Gangs
144 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Area: West Division, part of East Division, 1000 block E. 17th, Cal-Rec Park
• Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, TRG, CBC
• Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip and A-Asian
Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS)
Suicidals (SUIS) – This Cambodian gang consists of multi-race groups. The gang
originally took their name from the rock band “Suicidal Tendencies”. Original members
were associated with the Sons of Samoa gang. The structure is similar to that of Black
gangs, and they have adopted the Crip name.
• Clothing/Colors: blue
• Graffiti/Tattoos: SUI, SUIS, Suicidal Town, ST
• Area: West Division, New York and Atlantic Avenue, streets around Poly High
• Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, TRG, CBC
• Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip and A-Asian
Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS)
Tiny Rascal Gang (TRG) – This multi-ethnic gang formed into a criminal street gang from
several other gangs, including the Asian Boyz gang. TRG have established gangs
throughout much of California, as well as Lowell, Massachusetts.
• Clothing/Colors: traditionally carries a gray rag and sometimes wear red shirts and
hats to symbolize that they are not aligned with the other Asian gangs who wear
traditional Crip colors such as blue.
• Graffiti/Tattoos: TRG, RASCALS, TR, TRASCALG, 7126
• Area: West Division and part of East Division, 2200 block Lewis Avenue, Anaheim
Avenue corridor, 1468 Cerritos Avenue
• Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign
City Crip and A-Asian Boyz), CBC
• Allies: Orange County TRGs
BLACK GANGS
By the early 1980s, the Insane Crip Gang had become the largest Black gang in the city.
Because of a fight, a group of Insane Crip members broke off and formed their own gang
that became known as the Rollin 20s Crip Gang. Eventually, the Rollin 20s became the
second largest Black gang in the city. Over the past twenty years, the Insane Crips and
Rollin 20s Crips have become deadly rivals and participated in countless acts of violence
against each other. Today, there is less violence between the two gangs and more
cooperation, as members from each gang will sometimes collaborate with one another to
commit certain crimes such as drug transportation and sales.
Currently, there are more than a dozen active Black gangs in Long Beach. In addition,
there are also individual members from a variety of Los Angeles and Compton based
Black gangs scattered throughout the City at any given time.
Black Gang Structure – Black gangs have a rank structure that is more defined toward
the top of their leadership. The lower ranked members tend to follow others who have
72 – Gangs
145 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
earned the most status in the gang. Usually this occurs when a gang member shows a
willingness to “put in work” and is willing to shoot rival gang members, commit armed
robberies, transport and sell drugs, and participate in thefts and burglaries. The more
violent the deeds, or the more profitable the activity, the more status the gang member
will earn. As he “promotes” up the ladder, does jail or prison time, he may come to control
a “crew” of five or six younger members who will “put in work” as ordered. If he continues
to gain notoriety, he may become a “shot-caller”, which allows him to direct more than
one crew and call meetings to discuss strategy or direction.
Black Gang Dress – In the past, Crip gang members commonly identified themselves by
wearing blue, while Blood gang members commonly identified themselves by wearing
red. Today, colors are not as predictable. There are Crip gang members in Long Beach
who wear red. Blood gang members could wear any red collegiate or professional sports
team attire and the baseball cap symbolizing the letter “P” for Piru.
During the mid-1990s to the present, the traditional patterns previously followed by Black
gang members has changed. The clothing has changed from frequently wearing the
dominant gang colors to wearing casual clothing. Occasionally you may find a gang
member dressing down in their colors. Today’s gang member may not always look like
a gang member. Officers may find it necessary to check for possible clues such as the
subject’s language, tattoos, graffiti on school materials, belt buckles, etc.
Black Gang Terminology – Crip gang members commonly address each other by using
the word “cuzz”, while Blood gang members use the term “Blood”. Both gangs will use
the term “homeboy” or “homie”. Here are some other current commonly used terms:
• strap - gun
• strapped - carrying a gun
• hit me - call me
• donkey - male Hispanic
• hood rat - female available for sex
• po - police
• crab - derogative for Crip
• dove - derogative for Rollin 20s gang
• slob - derogative for Blood
• weak toast - derogative for West Coast Crip gang
Black Gang Hand Signs – Members of both Crip and Blood sets display hand signs to
identify their set affiliation to other gang members. The flashing of gang hand signs could
be used to intimidate or present a face to face challenge to another gang member. This
method of communication sometimes leads to confrontation with rivals, which may then
escalate into verbal and physical violence.
Black Gang Tattoos – Black gang members also use tattoos as another method of
communication or identification. Black gang members will tattoo themselves with their
street name(s), their set (gang), the names of fellow slain gang members, gang slogans,
girlfriends, mothers, and kids. Most Black gang members tattoo their arms, upper backs,
and chest areas.
72 – Gangs
146 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Black Gang Graffiti – Black gangs use graffiti to identify their territory and challenge
rivals. Graffiti done by Crip gang members will usually be in blue or black with all the
letter “Bs” and “Ps” crossed out symbolizing disrespect to Blood gangs. In Crip graffiti,
you may find the letters “BK” symbolizing “Blood Killers” and the number 187 indicating
death or murder. When one gang puts up graffiti, a rival gang may cross out that graffiti
while putting up their own tag.
BLACK GANGS OF LONG BEACH
Long Beach has eight primarily Black street gangs:
• Four Corner Block Crips (4CBC) (4CBC)
• Insane Crips (ICG)
• Mac Mafia Crips (MM)
• Rollin 20 Crips (R20s)
• West Coast Crips (WCC)
• Bricc Blocc Boys (BBC)
• Sex Money Murda (SMM)
• Naughty and Nasty Crip (2N)
Four Corner Block Crips
• Clothing/Colors: Milwaukee Brewers, blue and gold
• Graffiti/Tattoos: 4CBC, Four CBC
• Area: North Long Beach, West of 710 BTWN Artesia and Victoria St.
• Rival Gang(s): all Hispanic gangs, O-Hood, Sex Money Murda
• Allies: Blvd Mafia, Mac Mafia
Insane Crips
• Clothing/Colors: Cleveland Indians, Oakland Raiders, black, gray, red
• Graffiti/Tattoos: ICG, ICG 21st Street, YMS, YFC, 21, 19th Street, Babies
• Area: 21st Street, MLK Park, 17th and Alamitos Avenue, Burnett Street and Atlantic
Avenue
• Rival Gangs: all Hispanic gangs, Rollin 20s, Bricc Boys
• Allies: all ICG cliques including YMS (Young Murder Squad) and YFC (Young
Foundation Crips), 21st St., Baby Insane Gangsters (BIG or Babies), Dawgs, Filthy
Youngs (Filthys)
Mac Mafia Crips - Mac Mafia fragmented from ICG
• Clothing/Colors: University of Michigan, Maybach Logo, blue and gold,
• Graffiti/Tattoos: MMC, MAC MAFIA
• Area: Andy St./Downey Ave., Artesia Blvd., and Ramona Park
• Rival Gang(s): All Hispanic gangs, Naughty & Nasty, Rollin 20s, Sex Money Murda
• Allies: (MOBS) Mac Mafia, (O-Hood) Boulevard Mafia, Bricc Boy Crips
Rollin 20 Crips - one of the two largest Black gangs in Long Beach
• Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Steelers, black and gold
72 – Gangs
147 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Graffiti/Tattoos: RTC, R20, $20s
• Area: 15th Street and Peterson Ave., 10th Street and Myrtle Ave. 17th Street around
Alamitos Ave
• Rival Gang(s): all Hispanic gangs, Insane Crip Gang
• Allies: none known
West Coast Crips
• Clothing/Colors: Dallas Cowboys, blue
• Graffiti/Tattoos: WCC, West Coast, Rollin 80’s, West Coast 80s
• Area: West Division (Beat 1), 3385 Santa Fe Ave. and Springdale Apartments
• Rival Gang(s): ICG, WSL (Hispanic gang), Sons of Samoa
• Allies: Rollin 20s
Bricc Boys Crips (BBC)
• Clothing/Colors: Berkeley or UCLA attire, Boston “B”, CC (Chanel logo), Big Black
logo (upper case B’s back to back), blue and gold
• Graffiti/Tattoos: Bricc Boys, BBC, 52
• Area: North Division (Beats 21 and 24), Carmelitos, 52nd St and Orange
Ave., 67th/Indiana
• Rival Gangs: all Longo gangs, Naughty & Nasty, Sex Money Murda, ICG
• Allies: (MOBS) Mac Mafia, (O-Hood) Boulevard Mafia, Bricc Boy Crips and
Rollin 20s
Sex Money Murda
• Clothing/Colors: Chicago White Sox hat logo, green and white
• Graffiti/Tattoos: SMM, $MM, $, Sox
• Area: North Division (Beat 24), North Pointe (Parwoods), Langports (Seapoint),
Southfield (Ackerfields) Apts.
• Rival Gangs: all Longo gangs, Naughty Nasty Crip, Mac Mafia, Bricc Boy Crip
• Allies: none known
Naughty and Nasty
• Clothing/Colors: NY Yankees logo, brown
• Graffiti/Tattoos: 2NN, 2Ns, 2NGC, NY Yankees logo
• Area: Ramona Park, Artesia Blvd. from Atlantic Ave. to Downey Ave
• Rival Gangs: Sex Money Murda, Mac Mafia, Rollin 20s, Bricc Boys Crips
• Allies: USO Squad
Other than the listed primary Black gangs, there are numerous other Black gangs present
in Long Beach, most of which are Los Angeles or Compton based gangs. A few members
from each of these gangs may take up residence in Long Beach, but most of them will be
scattered throughout north Long Beach, especially in and around the Carmelitos Housing
Project. Others may be found in the central area, while a few can be found in East Long
Beach along the Anaheim Avenue corridor.
PACIFIC ISLANDER GANGS
72 – Gangs
148 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Pacific Islander gangs have been present in Long Beach for over 25 years. Traditionally,
they have been concentrated on the West Side of the city, along both sides of the Santa
Fe Avenue corridor. Their members include Samoans, Tongans, Fijians, Guamanians,
Hawaiians and Filipinos. Due to their skin tone, they sometimes are mistaken for Black
or Hispanic.
Pacific Islander (PI) gang members have learned to be territorial or “from Long Beach”,
versus turf (specific neighborhood) oriented. They deal in stolen cars, guns, and
narcotics. Both Long Beach PI gangs have traditionally aligned themselves with “Crip”
terminology and attire.
Pacific Islanders Gangs of Long Beach
• Sons of Samoa (SOS)
• West Side Islanders (WSI)
• Tongan For Life (TFL)
• USO Squad (USO)
Sons of Samoa (SOS) – The members are comprised primarily of male and female
Samoans, but they also include Black, Asian, and mixed-race members. They have
recently established a presence in other parts of California as well as Seattle,
Washington, Portland, Oregon and Honolulu, Hawaii.
• Clothing/Colors: Seattle Mariners clothing with the “S”, sports jerseys with the Number
“32”, blue clothing indicating Crip orientation
• Graffiti/Tattoos: SOS, Samoa, Sons of Samoa, Superman logo, Seattle ”S”, SA Gang,
Mighty S Gang
• Area: West Division (Beats 1 and 2), Silverado Park (32nd St/Santa Fe Ave.) and
Admiral Kidd Park
• Rival Gangs: West Side Blood Pirus, all Longo gangs, West Coast Crips, Tongan for
Life (TFL), Tongan Crip Gang
• Allies: Suicidals, Asian Boyz, EFCC, USO Squad (United Samoan Organization), East
Coast Crip
West Side Islanders (WSI) – This gang is primarily of Guamanian nationality.
• Clothing/Colors - blue clothing indicating Crip orientation
• Graffiti/Tattoos: WSI, WSI 34th St., WSI Sugar Cove Boys
• Area: Santa Fe Avenue corridor between Burnett Avenue and Wardlow Road
• Rival Gangs(s): West Side Longo’s, West Coast Crips
• Allies: None known
Tonga For Life (TFL) – Some claim TFL originated from the Tongan Crip gang out of the
Inglewood/Hawthorn area, but TFL claims they are independent and are founded by
members of the Eteaki and Hopoi families who moved into the north Long Beach area.
• Clothing/Colors: Milwaukee Brewers ball cap (depicting a ball glove with 4 fingers),
the Famous Stars and Straps logo “F”, ball caps depicting a “T”, blue colored
clothing indicating Crip orientation
• Graffiti/Tattoos: Tongan for Life, Foe life, TFL, T4L, NST4LGC, 4L
72 – Gangs
149 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Area: North Division (Beats 22 and 24), Ramona Park, Deforest Park, Houghton
Park
• Rival Gangs: Sons of Samoa, Fam Bam, Any Blood/Piru gang, Longo gangs (due
to complicated family relationships between Samoans and Tongans in Long
Beach, not all members are pre-disposed to violence towards members of enemy
gangs)
• Allies: Tongan Crip Gang
WHITE GANGS
Generally, White youth express their delinquent behavior in individual acts of crime not
within the traditional street gang sense. Those White youth who do join gangs many
times join other ethnic gangs such as Hispanic or multi-racial gangs already established
in the community.
The White race has virtually no exclusive street gang in Long Beach. The only “White
exclusive” gangs in Long Beach are the Skinheads and Peckerwood type gangs. Neither
of these are traditional street gangs, in that they do not claim certain streets, turf, or
territory, nor do they use graffiti or public displays as intimidation tactics against the
community or other gangs. Their motivation seems to be White supremacy, fighting, and
intoxication through alcohol consumption and narcotics usage and they tend to commit
narcotic and property crimes.
Skinheads
Generally, Skinheads are divided into two categories: racist or non-racist. Both
categories of Skinheads, and especially the racist, have been known to be extremely
violent. Racist Skinheads are known for their close ties to the White supremacist
movement and have been linked to the American Nazi Party, Ku Klux Klan, and other
militant racist groups.
In Long Beach we have a several dozen Skinhead gang members. Their structure as an
organized gang seems to be very loose and mostly involves narcotics use, primarily
methamphetamine. Subjects labeling themselves as Skinheads have been contacted in
the East and South Divisions.
Dress - Traditionally Skinheads wore their hair cropped or shaved. This was partially
done so their hair could not be pulled during a fight and they had little or no facial hair.
Today it is common to see them wearing long hair, mustaches, and goatees so they will
not be so recognizable by the police or their other enemies.
Clothing - The traditional clothing for Skinheads has been blue jeans, suspenders
(braces), Doc Marten boots, white tank tops or T-shirts, and black or olive-drab flight
jackets. The color of the suspenders and shoelaces are messages to other Skinheads
identifying the type of Skinhead they are or their beliefs. Traditionally, red means a more
militant Neo-Nazi and white means White power or neutrality in the case of non-racist
Skinheads. Skinheads may also wear pins, graffiti or other articles on their clothing related
to Nazi Germany, White power or White supremacy.
72 – Gangs
150 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Tattoos - Common racist Skinhead tattoos are used for decoration, identification purposes
and intimidation. They usually depict racial hatred slogans, references to Skinhead
musical groups, Nazi symbols and/or other references to White supremacy.
Peckerwoods
The term Peckerwood is slang used by some of the White criminal element to describe
themselves. Through time, Peckerwood was used by the White prison population to
distinguish themselves from other prisoners.
Most Peckerwoods have been through the state or county correctional system and
emulate prison gangs, primarily the Aryan Brotherhood (AB). Members arrested for
narcotic crimes are often overlooked as gang members. They will usually not admit to
being a gang member so they will not be identified as such.
The Peckerwood ideology is different than other White hate groups, as their objective is
monetary gain. Although Peckerwoods profess racist ideas, they are overwhelmingly
criminally orientated, not politically oriented.
Peckerwoods were primarily formed for self-protection and controlling White criminal
activity. In Long Beach there are several dozen Peckerwood-type gang members. They
are scattered throughout the city, mostly in east Long Beach, with a few in north Long
Beach. Peckerwood gangs include the L.A. Death Squad (LADS), Public Enemy Number
I (PENI), and PENI Death Squad (PDS).
Dress - Peckerwood dress can be closely associated with the Hispanic street gang style
or traditional parolee style. Hairstyles can range from clean-shaven to long and neatly
combed back. When in “a full stride” they will wear neatly pressed buttoned up shirts with
all of the buttons buttoned up, neatly pressed trousers and work boots or tennis shoes.
Tattoos - used for decoration, identification and intimidation. They will usually depict
racial hatred slogans, Nazi symbols, references to White pride and White supremacy,
Vikings, violence, and reference to the Odin religion.
CONCLUSION
Illegal gang activity poses a threat to public safety and it is important for officers to
accurately identify active gang members. Officers should obtain complete information
from suspected gang members encountered in the field. Completed Field Interview Cards
turned in to Reporting assist the Gang Enforcement Section in updating their databases.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
151 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 73 – Robbery – Arrival at Scene &
Broadcast Procedure
REVISED August 2001
ROBBERY - ARRIVAL AT SCENE AND BROADCAST
PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION
When a "211 now" or "just occurred" is broadcast, generally a large number of units will
respond. Multiple units arrive on scene within minutes and the responding units may
concentrate too much on the location of occurrence and miss a suspect fleeing the area.
Additionally, units piling up at the scene might enhance the suspect's chance of escape.
Intelligent deployment of assisting units and immediate broadcast of the suspect's
description greatly improves the possibility of apprehension.
RESPONSE TO THE CALL - GENERAL
When an "all units" 211 is broadcast, response by all available units in the area should
be made with as little delay as possible. If the call indicates the suspect is "there now",
assisting units should recognize that the search for the suspect begins not at the scene,
but in its vicinity. By quickly scanning the streets, sidewalks, doorways and automobiles
while the units are responding, the suspect may be located.
The handling unit shall respond code-3. A "code-3" response may be cancelled at the
discretion of the Watch Commander, field lieutenant or sergeant.
Two units at the scene are usually sufficient to handle a "211 just occurred". All additional
units should think about containment and concentrate their efforts in searching the area
for the suspect. This prevents an unnecessary congregation of units at the scene and
aids in the general search for the suspect. However, if the call is "211 now", all units will
be directed to proceed to the immediate location until code 4.
A "code-4" or "code-4A" should be broadcast once the scene is secure. Units still en
route can then slow down and survey the surrounding area. The unit on scene may then
be able to give a more complete description of the suspect and set up a perimeter, if
needed.
RESPONSE TO THE CALL BY ASSIGNED UNIT
The first unit to arrive at the scene should conduct a brief interview with victims/witnesses
and immediately broadcast a description of the suspect, and advise assisting units what
73 – Robbery
152 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
direction the suspect fled. It is essential that certain information be broadcast without
delay so that assisting units may conduct an efficient search for the suspect.
Additional time can be saved if the officer will transmit this data to the dispatcher in some
form of standardized sequence. By listing this information on a special page of his/her
notebook, an officer can readily refer to it when needed.
• Vehicle description, note if it was a car, bike or if suspect fled on foot
• Suspect description: sex, race, height, weight, clothing
• Specific direction of travel
• Weapon used
• Type of robbery
• Location of occurrence
• How long ago
• Number of suspects
SUPPLEMENTAL BROADCAST
A robbery suspect's chance of being arrested as he leaves the scene is in direct relation
to the completeness, accuracy, and speed of the initial and supplemental broadcast.
While non-assigned units are looking for the suspect on the basis of sketchy original
information, they may see many possible matches. Once they receive a detailed
description of the suspect and suspect vehicle, if any, they can then concentrate their
efforts on that information.
After the unit has made an initial broadcast containing a brief description of the suspect,
additional and more detailed information should follow in the form of a supplemental
broadcast as quickly as possible. This supplemental broadcast is to correct any initial
errors and to provide units in the area with additional suspect description and vehicle
information.
DESCRIPTION OF VEHICLE
Describe the suspect's vehicle as completely as possible. Include any identifying data
such as cracked windows, distinguishing stickers, the presence of a trailer hitch, etc. This
information, in addition to the make, color, model, and year of the car, can help to identify
the vehicle even without a license plate number.
INTERVIEW FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Victims, due to their nervousness and excitement, occasionally give erroneous
information and descriptions. Officers should attempt to locate any witnesses who were
not directly involved and can give more accurate statements.
TYPE OF ROBBERY
Frequently, a suspect will commit two or more robberies of a similar type in the same
immediate area in rapid succession. Therefore, it is essential that the robbery type; i.e.,
73 – Robbery
153 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
liquor store, service station, etc. be noted. When looking for suspects, most officers will
base their deployment tactics on this information. If the type of robbery is clearly
broadcast, valuable time and effort can be saved by effectively deploying officers to
proper search areas.
CONCLUSION
If the officers are alert, formulate a plan while approaching the robbery scene and follow
suggested procedures in broadcasting pertinent information, the possibility of
apprehending the suspect is enhanced.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
154 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 74 – Robbery – Deployment and Search
REVISED August 2001
ROBBERY - DEPLOYMENT AND SEARCH
INTRODUCTION
When arriving in the area of a robbery just occurred, keep in mind these things about the
suspect:
• He knows the police are looking for him
• He knows he needs to get out of the area quickly
• If he is trapped in the area he must hide or be extremely inconspicuous
In searching the area, the police officer needs to out-guess the suspect and anticipate his
moves in order to apprehend him.
DEPLOYMENT FOR SEARCH
Deployment of responding units should depend upon the method of escape used by the
suspect(s) and the time elapsed since the commission of the crime. Consideration should
be given to the distance a suspect in a car or on foot would be able to travel since the
crime occurred. This distance will vary depending on the density of pedestrian/ vehicular
traffic and weather conditions. These factors should allow the officers to calculate the
approximate distance the suspect might have traveled away from the scene. This
calculation will enable the officers to search or wait at a location where the suspect might
be or pass by.
Whenever a suspect is on foot, a perimeter should be quickly established. The perimeter
should be large enough to contain the suspect. Police Service Dogs and the helicopter
should be utilized whenever appropriate.
LOCATIONS OF SEARCH
Many criminals will attempt to conceal themselves by mingling with groups of people or
will remain in obvious locations hoping to remain unnoticed. Special attention should be
given to places where robbery suspects would be inconspicuous.
• Some suspects may seek concealment by sitting in lobbies or transportation waiting
rooms, mingling with large groups of people. The waiting room of a transportation
company is particularly useful in that it gives the suspect access to a means of
transportation to another part of the city or to another city
74 – Robbery
155 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Persons standing near bus waiting zones should be scrutinized for a possible
resemblance to the wanted suspects. Suspects have been apprehended while
standing at a bus-loading zone within a block of the crime scene
• Some robbery suspects seek concealment in business establishments and offices
near the robbery scene, under the pretense of transacting business. Watch people
entering or, if the interior is visible from the street, look at people inside who might fit
the descriptions of the suspect
• Bars provide good places of concealment because of their dimly lit interiors and
groups of people usually present
• Occasionally suspects will be found sitting in restaurants, usually in booths or at the
counter farthest from the door
When a suspect is apprehended while fleeing the area of the crime, the capture is not
often the result of chance alone. The officers who make the arrest do so because they
are able to anticipate the suspect's actions. They know their beats. They consider the
time elapsed and place themselves in positions where they can cover potential routes of
escape. When several units do this, the odds in favor of the suspect's escape are
significantly reduced.
CHECK POINTS
Robbery suspects fleeing from one part of the city to another along arterial routes often
must pass through intersections where two or more of these arteries meet; for example,
Pacific Coast Highway and Atlantic Avenue. A stakeout at such a location would be
advisable if the intersection is on the suspect's probable line of flight.
The topography of the city along the route of escape will often indicate other places as
"naturals" for the purpose of stakeouts. Bridges on heavily traveled streets, streets
bordering parks, or approaches to tunnels and freeways are examples.
EVASIVE ACTION
When searching for suspects in an automobile, officers should pay special attention to
any driver who takes any type of evasive action as he nears a police car. Such action
might be turning off onto a side street or traveling without lights in an alley at night. These
or any other unusual actions warrant an investigation.
STOLEN VEHICLES
A substantial number of the vehicles used as robbery "get away" cars are stolen. Usually
these cars are not reported stolen as they have been stolen just prior to the robbery. The
robbery is usually committed before the vehicle theft report is made. Whenever a vehicle
that contains possible robbery suspects is stopped, determine the ownership of the
vehicle.
The robbery of banks, supermarkets and loan company offices often result in the loss of
large sums of money. These robberies are usually planned and suspects may use as
74 – Robbery
156 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
many as three or four "get-away" cars. They may leave the scene in one car and change
to others at various intervals in an attempt to throw off pursuers.
Robbery suspects will sometimes use several different stolen license plates on their "get-
away" car. At intervals during their flight from the scene, they will change the plate.
Officers should be alert for cars with license plates that are loosely mounted or have two
plates on one bracket.
It is not uncommon in a planned robbery for suspects to use two vehicles. Suspects in
one vehicle will enter and rob the establishment. Immediately after exiting, they will drive
around the corner, pass all their outer clothing, the weapons used and proceeds to the
occupants driving a second vehicle.
Speedy initial radio broadcast, careful deployment, and thorough search patterns
immediately following a robbery will greatly increase the field officers chance of
apprehending the suspect.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
157 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 75 – Robbery – Corpus Delicti
REVISED January 2020
ROBBERY - CORPUS DELICTI
ROBBERY DEFINED
Every crime consists of a group of elements laid down by a statute of law defining the
offense. Every element must exist, or the statute is not violated. This group of essential
elements is known as the "corpus delicti" and must be included in the crime report. The
corpus delicti for robbery defined consists of:
• Taking the personal property of another
• From the person or immediate presence
• Against his/her will
• Intent to permanently deprive
• By means of force or fear
FORCE OR FEAR
Force – Must be more than that which is necessary to merely remove the property. There
must be additional force to overcome resistance, no matter how slight.
Fear – Must be present at the time the offense occurred and as stated in PC 212, may
be either:
• The fear of an unlawful injury to the person or property of the person robbed, or any
relative of his/her or member of his/her family, or;
• The fear of an immediate and unlawful injury to the person or property of any one in
the company of the person robbed at the time of the robbery.
CLASSIFICATION
Robbery reports may be classified as any of the following:
PC 212.5 (a) (First Degree Robbery) - Every robbery of any person who is performing
his or her duties as an operator of any bus, taxicab, cable car, streetcar, trackless trolley,
or other vehicle operated on stationary rails or on a track or rail suspended in the air, and
used for the transportation of persons for hire, every robbery of any passenger which is
perpetrated in an inhabited dwelling, house, or trailer coach, as defined in the vehicle
code, or the inhabited portion of any other building.
158 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
PC 212.5 (b) (First Degree Robbery) - Every robbery of any person while using an
automated teller machine or immediately after the person has used an automated teller
machine and is near the automated teller machine is robbery of the first degree.
PC 212.5 (c) (Second Degree Robbery) - All kinds of robbery other than those listed in
subdivisions (a) and (b) are of the second degree.
PC 214 (Train Robbery) - Every person who goes upon or boards any railroad train, car
or engine, with the intention of robbing any passenger or other person on such train, car
or engine, of any personal property thereon in the possession or care or under the control
of any such passenger or other person, or who interferes in any manner with any switch,
rail, sleeper, viaduct, culvert, embankment, structure or appliance pertaining to or
connected with any railroad, or places any dynamite or other explosive substance or
material upon or near the track of any railroad bridge or trestle, or who shows, masks,
extinguishes or alters any light or other signal, or exhibits or compels any other person to
exhibit any false light or signal, or who stops any such train, car or engine, or slackens
the speed thereof, or who compels or attempts to compel any person in charge or control
thereof to stop any such train, car or engine, or slacken the speed thereof, with the
intention of robbing any passenger or other person on such train, car or engine, of any
personal property thereon in the possession or charge or under the control of any such
passenger or other person, is guilty of a felony.
PC 215 (Carjacking) - Carjacking is the felonious taking of a motor vehicle in the
possession of another, from his or her person or immediate presence, or from the person
or immediate presence of a passenger of the motor vehicle, against his or her will and
with the intent to either permanently or temporarily deprive the person in possession of
the motor vehicle of his or her possession, accomplished by means of force or fear.
PC 487(c) (Grand Theft from Person) - When property is taken from the person of
another, and no other force was used other than what was necessary to remove the item
from the person (not a robbery).
On November 4, 2014, California voters approved Proposition 47. Which in part,
redefined numerous theft-related crimes that were previously felonies or “wobblers,” but
are now considered misdemeanors. Penal Code Section 490.2 PC has redefined petty
theft as any theft where the value of the money, labor, or property taken does not exceed
$950, “notwithstanding 487(a) PC or any other provision of law defining grand theft.”
• Grand thefts from a person require that the property taken directly from the person.
• The value of the item must exceed $950; if the item is valued at $950 or less, the crime
is petty theft (484(a) PC).
• However, if the suspect has certain felony convictions (sex offenses, murder,
conviction with a life sentence or is required to register as a sex offender, etc.), the
theft can be filed as a felony.
TYPES OF ROBBERY
159 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Armed robbery - a robbery where the suspect uses an instrument which could cause
great bodily injury, whether manufactured for that purpose or not; e.g. gun, knife, club,
piece of pipe, billy, dirk, etc.
Strong arm robbery - a robbery where the suspect uses bodily force and no instrument;
fists, feet, holding victim to ground, putting sack overhead, taping feet, hands, etc.
Purse snatch - If the victim’s strap broke when the suspect grabbed the purse, it is
sufficient force for a robbery. Similarly, if the victim’s purse handle broke when the
suspect grabbed the purse it’s also viewed as sufficient force for robbery.
Carjacking - a robbery where the suspect commandeers the victim's vehicle. This does
not include the hi-jacking or cargo theft of a semi-truck and its contents.
Estes Robbery - (People v. Estes 1983) In California, a robbery is not completed at the
moment the suspect obtains possession of the stolen property. It must also include the
element of asportation (carrying away). Escaping with the loss is considered as important
in the commission of the robbery as getting possession of the property. Accordingly, if
one has stolen property (such as a till tap or petty theft in a store) and uses force or fear
in attempting to remove the property from the owner's immediate presence, the crime of
robbery has been committed. If the thief uses physical force or a weapon to make good
on his or her escape or to prevent a recovery of the stolen property, after obtaining it, the
element of forcible taking is present for a robbery arrest.
Robbery Reports
Information regarding the correct filing of all robbery reports is addressed in Training
Bulletin 117. It entails the filing of a robbery report, proper listing of victims, and essential
information needed.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
160 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 76 – Burglary Investigations
REVISED November 2000
BURGLARY INVESTIGATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Burglary is one of the most difficult crimes to solve because the perpetrator is seldom
seen. The most important tools used for apprehension and prosecution are the officer's
initial investigation and the crime reports filed. The most frequent crime report taken by
officers in the field is residential burglary. The method the officer uses to investigate and
file the report is extremely important to bring the case to a successful conclusion.
BURGLARY DEFINED
Every person who enters any house, room, apartment, tenement, shop, warehouse,
store, mill, barn, stable, outhouse, or other building; tent, vessel, as defined in §21 of the
Harbors and Navigation Code; floating home, as defined in subdivision (d) of §18075.55
of the Health and Safety Code; railroad car, locked or sealed cargo container, whether or
not mounted on a vehicle Code; any house car, as defined in §362 of the Vehicle Code;
inhabited camper, as defined in §243 of the Vehicle Code, a vehicle as defined by the
Vehicle Code, when the doors are locked; an aircraft, as defined by §21012 of the Public
Utilities Code; or mine or any underground portion thereof, with intent to commit grand or
petty larceny or any felony is guilty of burglary. As used in this chapter, "inhabited" means
currently being used for dwelling purposes, whether occupied or not.
TYPES OF BURGLARIES:
COMMERCIAL
• Where entry is made to a business or industrial concern and intent is to commit a
theft or felony
• Entry into a commercial storage shed/bin business where customers rent the storage
sheds/bins on a monthly basis, is a commercial burglary
– In these types of crimes, the primary victim (Victim #1) is the customer who rents
the shed/bin. The storage business (Victim #2), (example: IN STORAGE OR
PUBLIC USAGE), should be listed on the crime report as the additional victim
• Entry made to a business or industrial establishment by breaking a window. (Window
Smash) Theft usually occurs by a suspect breaking a business display window to a
business and taking merchandise on display, such as a television, stereo, clothing,
etc.
• Hotel or motel-If the object of attack was primarily the property of the hotel or motel,
e.g. the office, storerooms or guest rooms whether rented or not, it is a commercial
burglary. If the primary object of attack appears to be the property of the renter of the
room, it is a residential burglary
76 – Burglary
161 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• A telephone booth has three walls, a roof, and a door. The theft or attempted theft
from such a booth would be commercial burglary. Such an act committed against a
pedestal-mounted pay telephone would either be theft or attempted theft
• Shoplifting is a commercial burglary when an establishment is open for business and
the suspect enters with the intent to commit a theft. Important elements to help prove
intent include:
– Presence of a booster device (large empty bags or purses) and/or baggy, loose
clothing that would help facilitate the shoplifting
– More than one entry into the establishment
– Statement or admissions by suspect under Miranda can be used to show intent
– Note where the suspect was stopped in relation to the cash registers
– If the suspect bought any items at all, book the receipt for those items
– Note if the suspect has other receipts on his/her person; an emerging scam is for
suspects to find receipts in the garbage and attempt to “return” merchandise never
purchased
All other thefts from open businesses are grand theft or petty theft shoplifts. (If a shoplifter
fights with the shopkeepers or security guards in attempting to escape with the goods,
this is considered a use of force and makes the crime a robbery)
RESIDENTIAL BURGLARY
• Entry has been made to a residence, apartment, hotel, motel or inhabited vessel with
the intent to commit a theft or felony
• Whether garage doors are open or closed, if entry is made with intent to commit a
theft or felony it is a burglary. If the garage is attached to the residence it should be
classified as a residential burglary. If unattached, garage burglary
• A storage shed (four walls and roof) on the property of a residence, whether directly
connected to a residence or not, is entered with the intent to commit a theft or felony,
it is a burglary
– A lean-to with an open front or wire for a roof would not be classified as burglary,
a theft report would be taken
• If there is FORCED ENTRY to a laundry room which is part of, or attached to, an
apartment house, it’s a residential burglary
• If there is no forced entry to the laundry room, this is still a burglary, unless detached;
then it is petty or grand theft laundry room
THE REPORT
• Describe the structure carefully; a single-family residence, an apartment unit, a tool
shed, a tent someone was living in, etc.
• Note any damage showing forced entry
• Note any signs of theft of items within, including ransacking
• Even if the suspect never fully entered the structure, if any part of him or any tool used
by him “broke the plane” of the structure, the burglary is complete
• Even insertion of an ATM card into an Automated Teller Machine built into a bank’s
wall is a completed burglary
MULTIPLE VICTIMS
76 – Burglary
162 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If several different units in an apartment building, hotel or motel are burglarized at the
approximate same time, a separate crime report is required for each victim.
In a situation where several businesses are burglarized and are all contained within one
building, i.e., professional building with numerous medical offices, a crime report will be
filed for each separate office. One crime report listing one victim and numerous additional
victims is incorrect.
ABSENTEE REPORTS
Many burglaries are discovered and reported by friends, neighbors or employees while
the victim or owner is away. In cases where the loss cannot be determined, the
responding officers will file a burglary report listing the reporting party and as much
information as possible, including the date the victim or owner is due to return. If
warranted, officers will file PD Form 400.010 - Request for Lab Technician, provided
someone will be available to allow the Lab Technician into the residence or business.
The report receipt may be given to the reporting party or left in plain sight at the crime
scene. Officers should also make arrangements for the building to be secured prior to
leaving the crime scene.
MISCELLANEOUS CRIMES
MALICIOUS MISCHIEF
The suspect enters a structure and commits malicious mischief without committing an act
of theft or a felony, a malicious mischief report will be taken, not a burglary report.
TRESPASSING
In the event of a forced entry with no evidence of intent to commit a crime or felony, should
be considered a trespassing, not a burglary.
FENCED AREAS
When a theft has occurred in a fenced off area, such as a junkyard, garden shop, etc., an
entry has not actually been made to a building, it is not burglary. Classify the crime as a
grand theft or petty theft, depending on the amount of loss.
CRIME LAB REQUESTS
A latent print technician should be requested whenever there is a window entry, a suspect
in custody, extensive ransacking, or a substantial loss involving identifiable property.
CONCLUSION
The proper filing of a burglary crime report requires that all elements of a burglary are
present and officers obtain the correct information. Crime scene integrity and a request
for the lab to obtain latent prints are essential for a successful prosecution. One should
draw upon common sense to request the lab, because physical evidence is most often
undetected by the naked eye.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
163 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 78 – Sex Crimes – Indecent Exposure
REVISED September 2022
SEX CRIME REPORTS
PART I - INDECENT EXPOSURE
DEFINITIONS
Indecent Exposure – A person who willfully and lewdly exposed their private or intimate
parts in a public place, or in the presence of others to be offended or annoyed by the
action, is guilty of a misdemeanor in violation of Penal Code §314.1. Mere exposure of a
private part is not enough to constitute indecent exposure. The exposure must be “willful”
and “lewd,” which can mean exposure for sexual gratification.
Willfully - An act was done intentionally, knowingly, purposely, and without justifiable
excuse.
Lewdly - Specific intent to direct public attention to one’s genitals.
Private parts (intimate parts) - Sexual organ, anus, groin, or buttocks of any person and
the breast of a female.
INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURES
An officer should make an arrest if the elements of the crime are present, the suspect is
detained, positively identified, and the victim is willing to sign a private person’s arrest
form.
If an officer observed the act but no victim comes forward, the officer can make the arrest,
and the officer should list themselves as the victim of the crime.
If a suspect is detained shortly after the commission of the crime, an officer should
conduct a field show-up using the following procedures:
• Complete the Field Show-Up Admonition Form and have the victim sign it.
• Transport the victim to the suspect for a field show-up and position the victim in a
way that allows them anonymity and to feel secure. Officers should not take the
suspect to the victim's location for identification.
• Record the victim’s statement of identification on the Field Show-up Admonition
form, and arrest the suspect.
NOTE: Misdemeanor citations will not be issued for sex crimes-related offenses,
for further, refer to Training Bulletin 123.
78 – Sex Crimes
164 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If the suspect is outstanding, obtain a complete physical description, including the
hairstyle, hat, glasses, facial hair, tattoos, scars, nationality, complexion, and detailed
clothing description.
If a vehicle is involved, include the year, make, model, color, license plate number, and
any additional features, such as accessories, significant dents, and scratches.
Additionally, note the interior of the vehicle, color of seats or covers, color of the dash, or
any other unusual items observed.
Officers should collect any photos or videos the victim or surveillance cameras captured
of the incident, upload it to Evidence.com, and document findings in their incident report.
DOCUMENTATION
Officers should document in an electronic incident report if the victim saw the suspect’s
private parts, any statement(s), comment(s), or gestures made by the suspect, related to
the incident (E.g., hand motions, pelvic movements, facial expressions). Ask the victim if
the suspect’s penis was erect or if there were other indications the suspect was sexually
aroused, as this will assist the court in determining if the act was lewd or lascivious.
RELATED CRIMES
Disorderly Conduct - §647(a) PC
If a suspect is engaged in lewd behavior by appearing to masturbate in public, but his
penis is not exposed, officers should file a disorderly conduct report. §647(a) PC states,
“Every person…who solicits anyone to engage in or who engages in lewd or dissolute
conduct in any public place or any place open to the public or exposed to public view” is
guilty of a misdemeanor.
Annoying or Molesting Children, §647.6 PC
When taking an indecent exposure report and the victim is a juvenile (under 18 years),
the crime could be classified as CPC § 647.6, Annoying or Molesting Children, which
states, "Every person who annoys or molests any child under the age of 18 years of
age,” is guilty of a misdemeanor.
If the suspect merely exposes himself where a child is present and leaves the scene, an
indecent exposure report would be the appropriate offense. If the suspect made it clear
a child was the intended victim via lewd remarks, continued exposure, following a child
victim, or other aggravating factors, an annoying or molesting a child report would be
more appropriate.
Urinating in Public - 9.25.010 LBMC
If a suspect is urinating in public, and the victim(s) does not provide statements indicating
they believe the act was willful and lewd, officers should file a urinating in public report.
This sections states, “No person shall urinate or defecate in or at any public place, except
at regularly provided toilet facilities.”
78 – Sex Crimes
165 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Nudity – 16.16.050 LBMC
If a suspect’s private parts are exposed and the victim(s) does not provide statements
indicating they believe the act was willful and lewd in nature, officers should file a public
nudity report. It is a violation of the Long Beach Municipal Code for a person to be in any
public park, playground, beach, or the adjacent waters in such a manner that their
private or intimate parts are exposed to public view. This Section shall not apply to
children under the age of ten (10) years.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
166 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 79 – Sex Crimes – Forcible Rape
REVISED September 2022
SEX CRIME REPORTS
PART II - FORCIBLE RAPE
INTRODUCTION
Oftentimes, victims of rape do not have a visible injury, making rape cases particularly
challenging to investigate. This means the investigation must focus on proving the sexual
act was committed without consent. Officers should not prejudge the victim based on their
statements or the conditions under which the rape occurred.
ELEMENTS OF FORCIBLE RAPE
§261(a)(2) PC - Forcible rape is an act of sexual intercourse accomplished with a person
who is not the spouse of the perpetrator, where it is against the person’s will by means of
force, violence, duress, menace, or fear of immediate and unlawful bodily injury on the
person or another.
VICTIM INTERVIEW
The only way to determine if the elements of the crime exist is to interview the victim
carefully. The officer must establish a rapport with the victim through a professional and
empathetic approach. Taking the time to use this approach can help the victim overcome
feelings of fear, anger, and guilt. The purpose of the initial interview is to establish the
elements of the crime, identify potential suspect(s), as well as identify and collect physical
evidence. If the incident involves a Sexual Assault Response Team (SART) response,
the detective will conduct a follow-up interview.
FORENSIC EXAMINATION
When investigating a recent incident involving rape, a Forensic Nurse Specialist must
conduct a timely forensic examination of the victim. If the incident occurred within 24
hours, officers should contact a Field Supervisor and request that SART be activated.
The victim should be transported to the SART location for the examination. Note: The
Communications Center will have the current City contracted hospital on file. For further,
refer to Manual § 8.7.6 SART.
When a suspect is arrested within 24 hours of the assault, they should be transported to
the SART location for a forensic examination. Officers should ensure the victim does not
encounter the suspect while at the SART location. Officers should coordinate with the
Forensic Nurse Specialist as to when and where the suspect’s forensic examination will
be conducted.
79 – Sex Crimes
167 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
While it does not meet the SART call-out criteria, if an incident occurred between 24 and
120 hours (5 days), officers may contact the Forensic Nurse Specialist if the victim
requests a forensic examination.
The Forensic Nurse Specialist’s examination may include the collection of the victims
and/or suspect’s clothing, urine, blood, and the sexual assault evidence kit samples. The
nurse will collect, seal, and initial each piece of evidence in accordance with evidence
collection procedures. Because of this, it is not necessary to repackage the evidence. The
officer should collect, document, and place the evidence in the appropriate evidence
refrigerator or freezer.
264.2(b)(1) PC requires a law enforcement agency to notify the local rape victim
counseling center whenever a victim of an alleged violation of sections 261, 261.5, 286,
287, or 289 is transported to a hospital for any medical evidentiary or physical exam. The
Field Supervisor is responsible for ensuring the counseling center is notified.
CRIME SCENE EVIDENCE
If the location of the crime is known, the area around the crime scene and escape routes
should be thoroughly searched for evidence. Suspects often leave valuable evidence
behind at the scene and/or when fleeing, including condoms (and wrappers), cigarettes,
matchbooks, wallets, fingerprints, etc. Officers should also look for DNA evidence on bed
sheets, blankets, clothing, and/or other paraphernalia (foreign objects used to commit the
assault). If items collected potentially contain blood, semen, or body fluids, officers should
photograph, collect, package (in paper packaging), document, and place in the evidence
freezer as soon as possible. Based on the circumstances, a priority lab may be requested
per Manual § 8.3.7.1.
VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN ACT (VAWA)
VAWA is the Violence Against Women Act of 1994. It allows victims, regardless of gender,
the right to a sexual assault examination at no expense and without having to cooperate
with law enforcement (SB-534 2011-2012).
If the victim chooses not to cooperate with the officer and/or answer any questions
regarding the assault, officers should follow the protocol for a VAWA Sexual Assault
Exam (see Manual § 8.7.8 and 8.7.8.1).
PUBLIC RECORD NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENT
Under Section 6254(f)(2)A) of the Government Code and Section 293 of the Penal Code,
officers must inform the victim their name will become a matter of public record unless
they request it not be disclosed. The notification and the victim’s response should be
documented in the electronic incident report.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
168 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 81 – Beach Operation - SUV/Quad/ATV
REVISED January 2007
BEACH OPERATION OF SUV/QUAD ATV VEHICLES
INTRODUCTION
With the growing number of citizens utilizing city beach areas, SUV’s (sport utility
vehicles) and Quad ATV’s (all-terrain vehicles) have become necessary tools for
effective policing. The use of such vehicles on the beach allows officers the ability to
drive in areas where conventional police vehicles are not practical. Although SUV’s and
Quad ATV’s can traverse sand, water and other hazardous terrain, great care and
consideration must be given due to ever changing conditions.
Officers must understand that although DIV. 3 CVC, Rules Of The Road sections do
not apply when operating these vehicles, Div. 16.5 CVC, Off Highway Vehicles
provides specific guidelines for the operation of these vehicles off highway. Beach areas
present the SUV/Quad ATV operator with hazards not commonly encountered during
normal street driving. Therefore, defensive driving techniques and awareness must be
implemented in order to avoid collisions under both emergency and routine beach
driving conditions.
SUV/QUAD ATV VEHICLES DEFINED
SUV’s are generally described as two or four-wheel-drive trucks or automobiles with a
higher center of gravity, often utilized for carrying passengers and/or cargo and moderate
towing. SUV’s are outfitted with large wheels and tires, heavy-duty suspension, and
considerable vertical ground clearance. SUV’s may be used on or off road.
QUAD/ATV’s are generally described as two or four-wheel-drive single rider
vehicles with handlebar steering, throttle, and brake controls. Quad/ATV’s are
authorized for off road use only. Quad/ATV’s are vehicles fifty inches or less in
width, suspended on three or more low-pressure tires. Quad/ATV’s may be utilized
for towing small trailers or carrying limited cargo, but should not be utilized for
carrying passengers. (Section 111 CVC)
TRAINING FOR QUAD/ATV OPERATORS
A qualified instructor working from a lesson plan approved by the AID-Fleet Safety Unit
shall provide training for officers assigned to ride Quad/ATV’s on beaches, parks, or
special events. DOT/SNELL rated helmets shall be worn during all aspects of training.
Training will consist of, but not limited to, practical application exercises in the following:
• Quad/ATV nomenclature
• Vehicle dynamics
81 – Beach Operations
169 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Operating and control procedures
• Rider safety and responsibility
• Proper speed and hazardous conditions recognition
• Balance and counter balance
• Emergency response tactics
BEACH AREA HAZARDS
Patrolling beach areas in SUV’s or Quad/ATV’s presents unique hazards for the
operator. Officers must use sound judgment in evaluating and adjusting for potentially
hazardous conditions. A beach hazard is defined as anything either natural or man-
made that has the potential to cause damage to property or injury to persons.
Natural Beach Hazards
Sand Berms- can obstruct a driver’s view when ascending or descending a berm. If it
is necessary to drive over a berm, give an audible signal (voice, horn, siren, PA system)
to alert anyone who may not be aware of an approaching vehicle. Attempt to drive at
angles, which will maximize the driver’s view. The edge of sand berms or gullies may
give way suddenly from the weight of a vehicle causing sudden weight transfer, thus
causing a vehicle to roll or become unstable. NEVER drive over an area that you can’t
see, get out and walk it first.
Gullies- or storm drain trenches cut paths through the beach and should be avoided.
The sides of the gullies can be steep and may cause a vehicle to become grounded
when attempting to cross. These can appear and disappear daily due to rain and water
runoff or routine beach maintenance.
Quicksand- can be exposed at low tide and may cause a vehicle to sink to the frame.
The east beach (peninsula area) in the area of 60th Place to 68th Place is most hazardous
due to the beach sand replenishment program.
Storm Debris- should be avoided as they can be kicked up under the vehicle and can
cause damage to a vehicle’s body and undercarriage.
Holes and Dips- in the sand can cause damage to a vehicle, especially at higher
speeds.
Sand Storms- and fog can reduce visibility, speeds should be reduced and vehicle
running lights turned on. Small gullies can easily be concealed by sand storms.
Water- Avoid driving in the water if possible. Salt water can affect braking and, if not
washed from the vehicle, becomes corrosive over time.
Man Made Beach Hazards
Wind Blocks- A wind block can be anything used to block the wind for a beach patron.
Trashcans, storm debris piles, canopies and sand berms may obstruct a driver’s view
81 – Beach Operations
170 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
of anyone who may be on the other side a wind block. Use great care while driving
near wind blocks or any uneven surface.
Holes- Children will often dig deep holes in the sand in an attempt to conceal
themselves. Be cautious when driving near these holes, as children may be startled by
the vehicle and run from the hole into the path of the vehicle. A vehicle entering a hole
may become disabled or damaged.
LBMC 16.08.440 Digging holes on beaches. - No person shall dig or cause to be dug,
holes exceeding a depth of two feet (2') in or along the beaches of the marinas. Any
person who digs or causes to be dug any hole in or along the beaches shall fill the hole
before leaving the beach area. (Ord. C-5625 § 4 (part), 1980: prior code § 7222.9).
Pier- When attempting to drive a vehicle under the pier, ensure that the path is clear of
beach patrons and that there will be enough vertical clearance. During high tide,
conditions may be such that it is unsafe to drive under the pier. Consider using the bike
path or surface streets.
Bike Path- Pedestrians, skaters and bicyclists frequent the bike path, which may become
congested during peak hours. Use caution when crossing the bike path near parking lot
areas, as bicyclists and skaters often fail to stop for cross traffic. Avoid driving or parking
vehicles on the bike path if possible, this will ensure a safe flow of traffic. If driving on the
bike path is necessary, drive on the downwind side to reduce the amount of sand blown
onto the bike path.
Volleyball Poles & Netting- can blend with the beach background.
Kite Surfers- Kite surfers can be blown across the beach by strong gusts of wind. When
this occurs, they have little control and can be blown into the path of vehicles. Kite lines
are often stretched across the sand, and may not be visible to the vehicle operator.
(Officer Safety Note! Kite control lines are made of Kevlar. This could cause
serious injury or even death if the line were to pass across or through the body.)
LBMC 16.16.010 Prohibited acts.
• (L). Leave any kite board control line laying on the beach when the parasail kite is
not in use. Control lines should be secured in such a manner so as not to create an
obstruction for any city equipment or vehicles, or for patrons of the beach.
• (M). Flying a kite within one hundred feet (100') of the bike path.
• (N). Allowing kite control lines to cross the bike path while flying a kite.
ROUTINE DRIVING CONSIDERATIONS
Speeds on or near beach areas must be adjusted for conditions. Attempt to keep
speeds below 15 MPH when within 50’ of beach patrons in accordance with section
38310 CVC, Prima Facie Speed Limit as it applies to off highway vehicles. DON’T
assume that beach patrons will hear or see a vehicle. DO assume that children will run
in front of a vehicle. Children often times don’t look, or may appear to make eye contact,
81 – Beach Operations
171 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
but run in front of the vehicle anyway. SUV’s should be driven on the sand in four-wheel-
drive if so equipped.
• When patrolling the beach, drive slowly. After stopping, always check under and
around the vehicle before moving
• Avoid driving through crowds or crowded areas whenever possible
• Always activate the vehicle headlights when driving on the beach
• Be alert and watch for hazards
• Use a course that will keep the vehicle furthest from beach patrons
• When making turns, make left turns whenever possible. This will increase visibility
for the operator
• Avoid backing the vehicle if possible
• Be aware of children and dogs, they may run in front of vehicles
• Watch for adults and children who bury themselves in the sand
• Be aware of dust from the vehicle and be courteous to all beach patrons; the slower
you drive, the less dust
EMERGENCY DRIVING CONSIDERATIONS
Beach operation of a SUV/Quad ATV (if properly equipped) during a Code-3 response
poses additional risks not typical to Code-3 street driving. Although beach patrons
should yield the right of way to a vehicle operating with red lights and siren, the operator
should recognize the need for greater care and patience when doing so. Vehicle
operators driving Code-3 on the beach must adhere to the Long Beach Police
Departments Code-3 policy, and must exercise due regard when responding Code-3 in
an emergency. Section 38305 CVC- Off Highway Vehicles Basic Speed Law states: No
person shall drive an off-highway motor vehicle at a speed greater than is reasonable
or prudent and in no event at a speed which endangers the safety of other persons or
property.
Remember:
• An emergency must exist (perceived, or actual)
• Use the lights and siren to give adequate warning
• Speeds during Code 3 operation must be appropriate for conditions
• Children may panic and bolt towards parents upon hearing the siren
• Some may disregard a Code 3 response and demand right of way
• Braking distance on sand will be increased as speeds increase
• Maneuverability on sand is severely compromised
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
172 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 82 – Operation of Emergency Vehicles
REVISED August 2000
OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES
INTRODUCTION
Today in law enforcement, traffic collisions claim nearly as many police officers’ lives as
do felonious assaults. Many officers believe that when they turn on the red lights and
siren they are exempt from harm and that every other driver within miles will automatically
stop and give them the right of way. While there are legal provisions to protect the officer,
they must learn to use caution and be prepared for sudden and unexpected encounters
with other vehicles. In addition, they must know the limitations of the vehicle and what it
can do under emergency situations. All officers must be well acquainted with defensive
driving techniques in order to avoid collisions under both emergency and routine driving
conditions.
AUTHORIZED EMERGENCY VEHICLE DEFINED
Vehicle Code §165 defines an authorized emergency vehicle as a vehicle furnished by
the City for the use of police officers in the performance of their duties. When an
authorized emergency vehicle is sounding a siren, and has at least one lighted red lamp
visible from the front of the vehicle, Vehicle Code §21806 requires that surrounding traffic
yield the right of way. But nothing in the Vehicle Code relieves the driver of the emergency
vehicle from driving with due regard for the safety of all persons using the highway.
LEGAL PROVISIONS FOR OPERATING EMERGENCY VEHICLES CODE THREE
Emergency Conditions
Vehicle Code §21055 provides that the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle shall
be exempt from the provisions of the Vehicle Code commonly referred to as the “rules of
the road”. However, the exemptions apply only when the vehicle is being operated under
one or more of the following circumstances:
• In response to an emergency call
• In the immediate pursuit of an actual violator of the law
• In the immediate pursuit of a suspected violator of the law
AND all of the following conditions exist:
• The vehicle driven is an authorized emergency vehicle
82 –Operation of Emergency Vehicles
173 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• A siren is being sounded in a manner that gives reasonable warning of the approach
of the vehicle
• One lighted red lamp, visible in normal atmospheric conditions for a distance of 1000
feet, is displayed to the front of the vehicle
No privilege to operate a vehicle in disregard of the “rules of the road” can be established
unless these conditions exist. Even after all these conditions have been met, the privilege
is denied if the driver of the emergency vehicle fails to show due regard for the safety
of all persons using the highway or arbitrarily exercises their privilege.
Emergency Response
Experience has shown that the use of the siren and red light does not always assure an
officer of immediate right of way. The human element is always present and under
emergency conditions, various motorists and pedestrians will react differently. An officer
is seldom, if ever, justified in traveling at a speed greater than the designated speed. A
phrase often heard is “code two” response, which is defined as “urgent-no red lights or
sirens”, and implies something less than code three but more than normal driving.
However, there is no excuse for violating any rules of the road when you are not
traveling code three. Certain circumstances might justify higher speeds while traveling
code three; but those circumstances must outweigh the additional hazards that
accompany higher speeds.
• Goal: arrive as quickly and safely as possible
• Keep the vehicle under control at all times
• Drive at a speed that will allow reaction to hazards
• Properly use the siren and red lights so that other motorists and pedestrians will be
given adequate warning
• Remember, a collision en route to the scene merely creates another police problem
and delays handling of the initial problem
• Obey the rules of the road if not exempted by a code three response
THE SIREN
Tests show that siren sound waves have a greater intensity ahead of as opposed to the
sides or behind a police unit. Sound waves measured at 45 degrees to the left rear of
the emergency vehicle were only one-third as effective as those measured directly in
front. Results indicate that motorists at right angles to an emergency vehicle with
activated lights and sirens will not normally hear the siren at the same distance as a
vehicle directly in front of the emergency vehicle. An officer must anticipate that a motorist
approaching an intersection from a side street may not stop as soon as distant motorists
directly ahead. Buildings can also deflect sound waves put out by a siren, which would
create a problem when a motorist is around a corner and at right angles to an emergency
vehicle. Motorists who have their car windows rolled up, or a radio, heater or air
conditioner on, will have difficulty hearing the siren.
An officer needs to take into account many variables when driving code three. The
following are prudent assumptions to make:
82 –Operation of Emergency Vehicles
174 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• All other motorists are deaf. The DMV does issue driver’s licenses to deaf persons
• Other motorists are inattentive to their driving and to other traffic
• The windows of other cars are rolled up and effective at blocking out sound
• Car radios are playing and/or conversation is taking place in other cars
• Other motorists will become confused and anything is possible when they hear the
siren
Passing and Following Other Vehicles
A police unit using a siren must pass traffic on the left, even if it may be necessary to
drive across the centerline of the roadway. The vehicle code directs other motorists to
pull to the right upon hearing an approaching siren and often motorists will swerve
abruptly to the right. Passing on the right cautiously is only an option if there is
absolutely no other course open.
A police unit should not closely follow another emergency vehicle that is traveling code
three in the event that a motorist, who has yielded to the siren by pulling to the right,
swerves back into traffic abruptly after the code three vehicle passes.
In conclusion:
• The use of a red light and siren does not guarantee all motorists will yield
• People react differently when they hear a siren and anything is possible
• Excessive speed is seldom justified and is a very dangerous practice
• In every situation, officer and citizen safety is the main factor to consider
CIVIL LIABILITY
Vehicle Code §17004 relieves a police officer from civil liability for personal injury to, or
death of any person, or damage to property resulting from the operation of an authorized
emergency vehicle in the line of duty. This exemption is provided if the vehicle is
responding to an emergency call or in the immediate pursuit of an actual or suspected
violator of the law. The section does not relieve an officer from possible criminal liability
such as manslaughter, nor does it relieve the City from civil liability. The City is only
protected when the siren is sounded and the red light displayed and the vehicle is
responding to an emergency call or in pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of
the law.
It is the duty of the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle to exercise that amount of
care that, under all the circumstances, would not impose upon others an unreasonable
risk of harm. Always ask the question, “What would a reasonable and prudent driver
do under all circumstances, including an emergency?”
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
175 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 84 – Defensive Driving Techniques
REVISED August 2000
DEFENSIVE DRIVING TECHNIQUES
INTRODUCTION
Once learned and applied, the following techniques of defensive driving will help prevent
collisions, no matter whether you are engaged in an emergency response, routine patrol
or chauffeuring the family. The purpose of this training bulletin is to outline five simple
rules pertaining to defensive driving.
GENERAL
The Smith System of driving was developed by Harold Smith, a veteran driving instructor
formerly with Ford Motor Company. The System is described as the “ultimate” in
defensive driving and it is a positive approach to protecting yourself from the irregular and
inconsistent actions of other motorists. Rather than relying on an indefinite series of
reactions to unanticipated movements of others, the Smith System provides you with a
positive plan for your own driving pattern.
Traffic can be described as a collection of individual drivers manipulating their cars, trucks
and buses in the confines of the roadway. The manner in which you handle your car,
your spacing and speed, directly affects the reactions and safety of everyone else in the
immediate area.
The Smith System is based on space and visibility. The more space and visibility you
have, the smoother and safer your driving will be. When you don’t provide proper spacing
between your car and the car in front of you, you lose the ability to see all that is up ahead.
And up ahead is where you are going. Space and visibility are not a system of car control
but rather a guide to techniques in driving which provide the closest thing to an accident
free driving guarantee that you will ever find.
RULE #1- AIM HIGH IN STEERING
Smith: “Your first consideration in Space Cushion driving is to find a safe initial path for
your vehicle, a place to put your vehicle and keep it moving in a safe steering path.” For
illustration purposes, compare driving with walking. When walking, rather then watching
your feet, you usually look about 25 feet ahead of your path. Walking speed is generally
only about 3 to 4 miles per hour. When driving a vehicle at 25 to 30 miles per hour, you
must have a steering path picked out several hundred feet ahead. When walking through
a doorway, you usually look beyond the doorway, not at either side of the door jam, and
84 – Defensive Driving
176 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
follow through with your walk. You can’t throw a ball at a target or ride a bicycle and keep
your balance unless you are looking at the place where you want the bicycle or ball to go.
That’s how it is with steering a vehicle. Give a frequent, quick glance well ahead of the
center of your driving path. Your car will travel on center in your lane. Aiming high in
steering is a comfortable and effective technique to find a safe driving path.
RULE #2-GET THE BIG PICTURE
The big picture is sidewalk to sidewalk wide and extends from your front bumper to a full
city block ahead on the street at city driving speed. The big picture contains your total
field of vision, which includes objects and ground. Ground is background and refers to
pavement, curbs, parking meters, poles, and unoccupied, parked vehicles; things that
won’t move. Most of the objects are likely to be people, people walking, riding bikes,
driving cars in all directions or sitting in cars parked at the curb. Other objects also include
traffic control devices.
In viewing the big picture, take note of objects up to one block ahead that will affect you
or be affected by you as you move down the roadway. Your eyes and mind must
consistently select those objects that will be affected by your vehicle’s movements.
• Eliminate physical barriers that would prevent you from seeing a full block ahead;
trucks, buses or any large vehicle blocking your field of vision
• Establish a minimum of six car lengths following distance in front of you:
– Allows you to comfortably ignore the vehicle ahead of you
– Allows you to scan a full city block, maintaining an eye lead time of 8-12 seconds
• The car or cars ahead of you should be viewed only as a small part of the big roadway
scene
RULE #3- KEEP YOUR EYES MOVING
A common excuse at accident scenes is “I just didn’t see him”. Their cell phone, other
vehicle occupants, eating, other traffic and tuning the radio can distract drivers. To avoid
a preventable collision, keep your eyes on the road, and keep them moving. When your
eyes stop moving and taking in what’s happening on the road, while your vehicle is still
moving, the chances of something or someone crossing your path unexpectedly increase
exponentially.
RULE #4- LEAVE YOURSELF AN OUT
Your vehicle should never travel ahead of your eyes. If you let your vehicle arrive
somewhere before you have checked out every conceivable avenue of surprise, you will
be surprised. An accident is almost always an unexpected event. “Space Cushion
Driving” is all about leaving yourself an out. You have a built in “out” that travels with you
wherever you go.
RULE #5- MAKE SURE THEY SEE YOU
Communication is important. To prevent other people, be they pedestrians, bicyclists or
motorists, from setting up a conflict with you, you must make sure they see you.
84 – Defensive Driving
177 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Communicate your intentions by the use of the horn, headlights, turn signals, hand signals
and eye contact. Employ these tools positively in a controlled approach so there is no
mistaking your intentions. The proper, friendly use of the horn in advance of a situation
will lend itself well with eye to eye contact. Another useful communication measure
includes soft brake taps to warn of slowing traffic ahead.
CONCLUSION
The Smith Driving System is useful only if you apply and practice the rules outlined. The
objective is to improve your driving awareness and your driving skill. The result will be a
higher degree of safety on the road for you and the public.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
178 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 85 – CNS Depressants
REVISED July 2000
CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DEPRESSANTS
INTRODUCTION
Central nervous system (CNS) depressants, which include alcohol, are the most widely
abused drugs. This category includes barbiturates, non-barbiturates, anti-anxiety
tranquilizers, anti-psychotic tranquilizers, certain anti-depressants and certain
pharmaceutical combinations that contain more than one type of CNS depressant.
Included in this category are benzodiazepines, chloral hydrate, methaqualone, lithium and
phenobarbital, to name a few. These drugs, commonly called “downers”, mirror the
effects of alcohol, but without the alcoholic odor.
EFFECTS
Central nervous system depressants produce relaxation, drowsiness, impaired balance
and coordination, slurred speech, a lowering of inhibition and an increase in risk-taking
behavior. They typically depress the vital signs such as pulse and blood pressure. They
generally produce nystagmus but do not affect pupil size. These drugs are very
dangerous when taken with alcohol. When prescribed by a doctor, they usually contain
a warning advising the user to refrain from driving, operating machinery and using alcohol
when taking the medication.
Central nervous system depressants slow down the operation of the brain. They first
affect those areas of the brain that control a person’s conscious or voluntary actions. As
dosages increase, depressants begin to affect the parts of the brain that control the body’s
automatic or unconscious processes such as heart rate and respiration. An overdose
can produce death.
COMMON DEPRESSANTS
Alcohol is the model for the CNS depressant category of drug. Alcohol is the most familiar
and most widely abused depressant. With some exceptions, all depressants affect
people in much the same way.
Some major sub-categories of central nervous system depressants other than alcohol
include:
• Barbiturates (a derivative of barbiturate acid) e.g., Secobarbital, trade name Seconal;
Phenobarbital, trade name Nembutal
• Non-barbiturates (synthetic compounds with a variety of chemical structures) e.g.,
Chloral Hydrate, trade name Noctec; Methaqualone, trade name Quaalude
85 – CNS Depressants
179 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Anti-anxiety tranquilizers e.g., Diazepam, trade name Valium; Alprazolam, trade name
Xanax
• Anti-depressants (prescribed to combat psychological depression, known as mood
elevators) e.g., Iscarboxazid, trade name Marplan; Amitriptyline Hydrochloride, trade
name Elavil
• Anti-psychotic tranquilizers e.g., Haloperidol, trade name Haldol; Chlorpromazine,
trade name Thorazine
• Combinations, e.g., Chlordiazepoxide and Amitriptyline, trade name Limitrol;
Perphenazine and Amitriptyline Hydrochloride, trade name Travil
METHODS OF INGESTION
Most users of this type of drug ingest their drugs orally. Although not a common practice,
some barbiturate abusers do inject their drugs intravenously. The injection paraphernalia
used by barbiturate abusers is similar to that used by heroin users, however a wider
gauge needle is used because the barbiturate solution is thicker than the heroin solution.
The injection sites will show large swelling and may develop ulceration resembling
cigarette burns.
UNDER THE INFLUENCE
As the name implies, central nervous system depressants tend to depress the nervous
system. For the most part, this will cause the pulse and the blood pressure to be lower
than normal. A person under the influence of depressants will appear “drunk” or
extremely drowsy.
Signs and symptoms of central nervous system depressant abuse
EYES
• Horizontal gaze nystagmus (this condition was once referred to as the “barb bounce”)
• Vertical nystagmus at high doses
• Non-convergence (can’t cross their eyes)
• Near normal pupil size
• Slow pupillary reaction to varying degrees of light
• Impaired smooth pursuit, (the eyeballs do not track objects smoothly from side to side)
• Droopy eyelids (appears as though the subject is falling asleep)
VITAL SIGNS
• Lowered blood pressure
• Lowered pulse
• Near normal temperature
OBSERVABLE PHYSICAL SIGNS
85 – CNS Depressants
180 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Drunken behavior
• Thick, slurred speech
• Gait ataxia; (inability of the person to walk a straight line)
• Impaired coordination
• Impaired balance
• Knee tremors
• Impaired divided attention (subject cannot do two things at once)
SYMPTOMS
• Disorientation
• Drowsiness
Methaqualone and alcohol will produce effects somewhat different than what you may
expect from other depressant type drugs. With methaqualone use, the pupils will be
dilated and the pulse elevated. With alcohol intoxication, the blood pressure and pulse
may be elevated. It is believed this occurs because the alcohol in the blood displaces the
oxygen, forcing the heart to pump faster and harder to keep what little oxygen is left in
the blood flowing to the brain.
CONCLUSION
Depressant type drugs effect people much the same way as alcohol. Overdose may
cause coma and then death. Be aware that many people abuse their prescription drugs
and may be under the influence when involved in activity such as traffic collisions, and
disputes.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
181 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 86 – CNS Stimulants
REVISED September 2019
REVIEWED September 2019
CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM STIMULANTS
INTRODUCTION
Central nervous system (CNS) stimulant drugs speed up the operation of the brain and
the spinal cord. They do not improve the operation of the brain but make the brain work
harder, which often leads to the person making more mistakes. After using a stimulant,
the user will experience an increase in heart rate, respiration and blood pressure. An
abuser will experience nervousness, irritability and an inability to concentrate or think
clearly. Continued use can lead to physical harm and death.
The following are the three major subcategories of central nervous stimulant drugs:
• Cocaine - rock, crack
• Amphetamines - methamphetamine, amphetamine sulfate, biphetamine, Desoxyn
• Others - Ritalin, Cylert
The two major types of stimulants abused in America are cocaine and the various
amphetamine compounds.
COCAINE
Cocaine is derived from the leaves of the coca plant, an evergreen bush that is native to
South America.
AMPHETAMINES
Amphetamines are synthetic drugs with a high potential for abuse. They were first
produced near the end of the 19th century for a number of legitimate uses that include the
control of narcolepsy, the control of hyperactive disorders in children, the treatment of
mild depression, appetite suppression and the treatment of Parkinson's disease.
The following are examples of pharmaceutical amphetamines and their associated street
names:
• Dexedrine - dexies or hearts;
• Benzedrine - bennies or whites;
• Biphetamine - black beauties.
Amphetamines are also manufactured illegally in clandestine laboratories. They are
known as methamphetamine and amphetamine sulfate. Some of the street names for
86 – CNS Stimulants
182 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
methamphetamine are; speed, crystal, meth, and crank. Methamphetamine is sometimes
known as methadrine.
There are several ways in which CNS stimulants are ingested. Cocaine can be snorted,
smoked, injected, and taken orally. Pharmaceutical amphetamines are produced in the
form of tablets, capsules, and elixirs, which are all taken orally. Illicitly manufactured
amphetamine sulfate usually is produced in tablet form, called mini bennies, and ingested
orally. Methamphetamine can be injected, snorted, ingested orally or smoked.
SIGNS OF ABUSE
Eyes
Subjects who are under the influence of CNS stimulants will have pupils dilated above
6.5 mm in normal lighting conditions. It is not uncommon to see the subject’s pupils
dilated to above 8.0 mm in darkness. The pupils will also be slow to react in varying light
conditions.
Vital Signs
The subject’s pulse and blood pressure will be elevated. Typically, the pulse will be above
100 beats per minute (BPM), with an increase in blood pressure. The body temperature
will also tend to rise.
Other Signs
The following are possible additional signs and symptoms of CNS stimulant use:
• Body tremors
• Restlessness
• Talkative, rapid, rambling speech
• Bruxism (grinding of teeth)
• Dry mouth
• Impaired balance and coordination
• Red and irritated nasal area
• Impaired divided attention
• Risk taking due to over confidence
• Agitation
• Increased alertness
• Anxiety
• Euphoria
• Insomnia
• Loss of appetite
• Paranoia
• Hallucinations
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
183 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 87 – Marijuana
REVISED September 2019
MARIJUANA
INTRODUCTION
Marijuana is the most commonly used drug in the United States. It is a dry shredded
green/brown mix of flowers, stems, seed, and leaves of the hemp plant cannabis sativa.
It is usually smoked as a cigarette (joint, nail), or in a pipe (bong) but is also smoked in
blunts, which are cigars that have been emptied of tobacco and refilled with marijuana,
often in combination with another drug. Marijuana can also be mixed into food or brewed
as tea. A more concentrated, resinous form is called hashish; as a sticky black liquid, it is
called hash oil.
Marijuana smoke has a pungent and distinctive, usually sweet and sour odor. There are
countless street terms for marijuana including pot, herb, weed, grass, widow, ganja, and
hash, as well as terms derived from trademarked varieties of cannabis, such as Bubble
Gum, Northern Lights, Juicy Fruit, Afghani#1, and numerous Skunk varieties.
RECREATIONAL MARIJUANA
In November 2016, the majority of California voters passed Proposition 64 – The Control,
Regulate and Tax Adult Use of Marijuana Act. California now joins several states
including Washington, Oregon, and Colorado where the personal possession and use of
marijuana is decriminalized. The State of California now permits adults 21 years of age
and over to possess up to one ounce (28.5 grams) and grow up to six marijuana plants,
at any one time, for recreational use.
Proposition 64 does not alter the Compassionate Use Act (Prop 215) or the Medical
Marijuana Regulation and Safety Act (MMRSA). Possession of recreational marijuana
will still be a crime if in violation of one of the newly added Health and Safety Code
Sections, which regulate the amounts individuals may possess, where cannabis may be
used, and the penalties for illegal use or possession.
Marijuana remains a schedule one illegal drug under Federal law. Any suspected
violations of illegal cultivation or sales of marijuana, however, should be referred to the
Office of Cannabis Oversight (OCO), in the Office of the City Manager, which regulates
the cannabis industry in Long Beach. The OCO’s role is to coordinate the implementation
of the City’s cannabis laws and regulations.
SYNTHETIC MARIJUANA
87 – Narcotics
184 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Synthetic marijuana is made of dried herbs and plants that are sprayed with lab-created
chemicals that attempt to mimic the effects of marijuana. Synthetic marijuana goes by
the name of K2, Spice, Fake Weed, Blaze, Bombay, Blue, Skunk or Dank and is normally
sold in foil type packets labeled as “incense” and “not for human consumption.” Because
synthetic marijuana is so new, nobody knows much about the long-term damage that it
can do to the brain and body. Some of the short-term effects that can appear immediately
after consumption are:
• Insomnia
• Hallucinations and delusions
• Paranoia
• Convulsions
• Suicidal thoughts
• Seizures
• Severe anxiety
• Increased heart rate
• Loss of consciousness
• Vomiting
• Lowered blood pressure and body temperature
Both sales, 11357.5(a) H&S, and possession, 11357.5(b) H&S, of synthetic marijuana
are considered violations of the law punishable as an infraction or a misdemeanor.
CONCLUSION
Since marijuana is the most commonly used drug in the United States, contact with those
under the influence or in possession of marijuana is not uncommon. As with any
investigation, document your observations and actions clearly and completely whenever
you make an arrest for under the influence of marijuana or any of other listed Health and
Safety Code violations.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
185 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 88 – Narcotic Analgesics
REVISED January 30, 2020
NARCOTIC ANALGESICS
(OPIATES)
DEFINITIONS
Narcotic - a drug derived from a species of flowering plant known as the opium poppy or
Papaver somniferum, Latin for "the poppy that brings sleep." Opiates relieve pain, induce
euphoria, alter mood, and produce sedation. Opiates can also be produced synthetically
without using the opium poppy.
Analgesic - a drug that relieves pain. It differs from an anesthetic, in that it lowers one's
perception of pain, rather than stopping nerve transmission.
Non-Narcotic Analgesics – medications such as aspirin, Tylenol (acetaminophen), and
Motrin (ibuprofen) relieve pain but do not produce sedation or alter mood.
CHARACTERISTICS OF NARCOTIC ANALGESICS
All narcotic analgesics share three distinguishing characteristics:
• Pain relief (analgesic).
• They produce withdrawal signs and symptoms when the drug is withdrawn after
chronic use.
• Their continued use will suppress the withdrawal signs and symptoms in the chronic
user. Any one of the narcotic analgesics can be substituted for each other to relieve
withdrawal symptoms.
CATEGORIES OF NARCOTIC ANALGESICS
ALKALOID - a substance that is found within another substance and can be isolated from
it. Common natural alkaloids of opium include:
• Morphine is the principal natural alkaloid of opium. It is used to treat severe pain and
is very addictive.
• Codeine is used to treat coughing and minor pain but can be almost as addictive as
morphine.
• Dilaudid is used to treat moderate to severe pain and persistent coughs and just as
addictive as morphine and heroin. Because it is commercially available, Dilaudid is
sometimes called "drug store heroin.”
OPIUM DERIVATIVES are unlike natural alkaloids in that they are not naturally occurring;
they are produced by chemically treating the natural alkaloid.
88 – Narcotics
186 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Heroin is probably the most well-known of all the derivatives made from chemically
treating morphine. It is the most commonly abused of all narcotic analgesics.
• Hycodan is made from the natural alkaloid codeine and used to treat coughs.
Sometimes hycodan is abused by addicts who are unable to get heroin or morphine.
• Percodan is made by chemically treating codeine. Percodan is one of the most
commonly prescribed narcotic analgesics. It is less addictive than morphine, but more
addictive than codeine.
SYNTHETIC OPIUM is artificially produced in a laboratory from non-opiate substances.
• Methadone is used in the treatment of heroin addicts because the withdrawal from
methadone is slower and milder than with heroin. It is also used to treat severe pain
and persistent cough. Methadone's effects are similar to morphine's except that they
develop more slowly and last a little longer.
• Demerol is used for sedation and treatment of pain. It is probably most widely abused
within the medical profession. It is said by some that when using demerol the person's
pupils will not constrict. There is no medical evidence to support this claim
• Darvon is commonly prescribed because of its low addiction rate. It has a low
analgesic potency and is generally prescribed for moderate pain.
• Fentanyl include several hundred designer synthetic drug analogs. The most abused
of the fentanyls is "three-methyl-fentanyl". It looks just like white heroin but is 50-100
times more potent.
• MPPP is illegally manufactured from Demerol and is very addictive. The production of
MPPP by "home chemists" often mistakenly produce MPTP; a chemical that produces
a paralysis similar to that of Parkinson's disease.
Powdered Opium, also known as "smoking opium", is not a derivative but is refined raw
opium. This drug is a favorite among the Asian communities and when smoked, is called
"chasing the dragon". When used medically, such as for treating diarrhea, it is taken
orally.
EFFECTS OF NARCOTIC ANALGESIC USE
Signs of Drug Use
An easy sign a person is a new or non-tolerant narcotic user is a condition known as
nodding off. While "on the nod,” the user is in a semi-conscious, sleep-like state that is
brought on by the sedative effect of the drug. While on the nod the user's eyelids become
droopy and their head will fall forward until it rests on his or her chest. Even though the
user appears to be asleep, the user can hear what is being said and will respond when
aroused. The user may nod off in mid-sentence and seem to be asleep for several
seconds, but once aroused the user may continue the sentence exactly where they left
off.
Narcotic users will experience certain physical effects immediately after using the drug.
These effects include the feeling of euphoria (a feeling of well-being), the relief from
withdrawal symptoms, and the relief of pain. Other physical effects will be evident after
five to 30 minutes. These effects may not be evident if the user is tolerant and has had
only their normal dose.
88 – Narcotics
187 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Tolerance
Tolerance plays a large part in what effects the narcotic user will experience and exhibit.
As the user develops tolerance, he or she will experience diminishing effects. Tolerance
develops very rapidly causing the user to feel very little or no effect from the drug after
taking their normal dose. If the user wants to continue to experience the same amount
of euphoria, the user will have to take larger and larger doses of the drug to get the same
effect. Users commonly become addicted to these types of drugs. When a user takes
their tolerant dose, the user may be able to drive a car properly and perform very well on
field sobriety tests.
Physical Effects
The below-listed physical effects may be easy to see and recognize with new or non-
tolerant users or the tolerant user who has exceeded their normal dose:
Sedation Constricted pupils
Being "on the nod" Cold, clammy skin
Poor coordination Low, raspy voice
Depressed reflexes Impaired divided attention
Slow and shallow breathing Gait ataxia
Dry mouth Facial itching
Flaccid muscle tone Track marks
Droopy eyelids Fresh puncture wound
For someone who is addicted to a narcotic analgesic, withdrawal signs and symptoms
will be evident as the physical effects begin to wear off, usually within 8-12 hours.
Withdrawal symptoms can become severe and will not be relieved until the user receives
another dose of the drug. At this point the user may appear as if they have a bad cold or
the flu. After 14-24 hours the user may develop tremors and dilated pupils.
Approximately 24-36 hours after the last "fix," the user will likely experience insomnia,
vomiting, diarrhea, weakness, depression and hot and cold flashes. The symptoms will
reach their peak after 2-3 days. At this point the user usually experiences muscular and
abdominal cramps, elevated temperature, and severe tremors and twitching. This
twitching known as a sign of "kicking the habit" is especially noticeable in the legs. The
user will be very nauseated and may gag and vomit repeatedly. The user may lose as
much as 10-15 pounds in 24 hours. Typical withdrawal signs can include the following:
Sweating Goose flesh
Hyperactive reflexes Yawning
Runny nose Watery eyes
Overdose
One of the narcotic analgesic user’s biggest problems is the danger of overdose. The
danger comes from the user being unaware of the strength of the drug ingested. If the
user ingests more than what the user is used to or tolerant of, overdose can result.
When a user begins to overdose, his or her breathing slows and becomes shallow. Death
is usually the result of severe respiration depression, when the user is unable to breath.
88 – Narcotics
188 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The user's skin may become clammy and the user may experience convulsions before
slipping into a coma.
Signs and Symptoms of Use
A person who is under the influence of a narcotic analgesic will have constricted pupils
smaller than 3.0 mm. There will be little or no noticeable reaction to light and the eyelids
may appear droopy. The pulse rate will be slow and the blood pressure and temperature
lower than normal. The user will appear sedated and may "nod off' in the middle of your
interview. The user will have poor motor skills with gait ataxia and depressed reflexes.
You may see the user scratch their face. This is due to the release of histamine, which
causes the capillaries to dilate and the face to itch. The user may have a dry mouth and
clammy skin. A user may request a drink of water and may lick their lips frequently. Their
voice may be low and raspy due to the relaxation of the vocal cords.
One evident sign someone is using drugs is a fresh puncture wound made by the needle
that is used to inject the drug into the body. A fresh puncture wound may appear to be a
small red dot and ooze a clear fluid. The puncture wound will heal after about 14 days,
but a user will try to inject in the same site as many times as possible to hide the evidence
of drug use. When the puncture wound heals it will develop scar tissue. After
approximately 100 injections the user will develop approximately one inch of scar tissue
along the length of the vein.
Most users generally prefer to inject the narcotic intravenously which will cause “track
marks” to develop. The examination of these track marks may reveal clues about the
user's drug habits. The user can inject the drug anywhere on the body where they can
locate a vein. Although the arms and wrists are the most common injection sites, users
may use the neck, feet, or ankles.
With the proliferation of AIDS, many new narcotic analgesic users prefer to smoke, ingest
orally, or inhale their drug. Many Mexican Nationals who use Heroin do not like needles
and prefer to inhale the drug by diluting the dose with water, then spraying the dose into
their nasal cavity like one would do with nose spray. This minimizes signs such as
injection sites and infections that often appear with injecting.
Conclusion
An addict will have to ingest the drug every 4-6 hours or start to feel the effects of
withdrawal. Drug habits are expensive to support on a daily basis, and most of this money
is commonly raised through other forms of profitable criminal activity.
Officers are reminded to use extreme caution when handling any unknown substance.
Improper handling can result in absorption through the skin or accidental inhalation of
airborne powder. Onset of adverse health effects, such as disorientation, coughing,
respiratory distress, or cardiac arrest is rapid and profound.
AUDIT RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
189 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 89 – Hallucinogens
REVISED November 2019
HALLUCINOGENS
INTRODUCTION
Hallucinogens, or psychedelics, are drugs that affect a person's perceptions, sensations,
thinking, self-awareness, and emotions. Hallucinogens include such drugs as LSD,
ecstasy, mescaline, psilocybin, and DMT. Some hallucinogens come from natural sources,
such as mescaline from the peyote cactus. Others, such as LSD or ecstasy (MDMA), are
synthetic. PCP and ketamine hydrochloride (Special K) can be considered hallucinogens
because they have some of the same effects. However, they do not fit easily into any one
drug category because they can also relieve pain or act as stimulants.
Hallucinogens are relatively inexpensive, domestically produced, and not part of a network
of distributors battling over markets or territory. The popularity of hallucinogens coincides
with the growth of underground dance parties, or raves that cater to those under 21.
Hallucinogens are often referred to as club drugs.
MOST COMMON DRUGS
LSD (lysergic acid diethylamide) – Manufactured from lysergic acid, which is found in
ergot, a fungus that grows on rye and some other grains. LSD was discovered in 1938
and is one of the most potent mood-changing chemicals. It is odorless, colorless, and
tasteless. LSD is sold on the street in tablets, capsules, or liquid form. It is usually taken
by mouth but can be injected. It can be added to absorbent paper, such as blotter paper,
and divided into small decorated squares, with each square representing one dose.
Ecstasy (Methylene dioxymethamphetamine or MDMA) – A synthetic methamphetamine
compound that produces both psychedelic and stimulant effects. MDMA was used
clinically until 1988 when the Food and Drug Administration reclassified it as a Schedule I
controlled substance (i.e., one with no approved use) because of its abuse potential.
MDMA is most often found in the form of tablets that sell for $5 to $10 per tablet.
Mescaline – Derived from the peyote cactus and although it is not as strong as LSD, its
effects are similar. Mescaline is usually smoked or swallowed in the form of capsules or
tablets.
Molly – Another name given to MDMA and marketed as a purer mixture than ecstasy.
Psilocybin – Derived from certain mushrooms. It is sold in tablet or capsule form so people
can swallow it. The mushrooms themselves, fresh or dried, may be eaten. The effects are
similar to LSD.
190 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
DMT (Dimethyltryptamine) – A psychedelic drug that acts like LSD though its effects are
said to be more powerful. It can be injected, smoked or sniffed and the effects begin almost
immediately and last for 30-60 minutes.
PCP (Phencyclidine) – In its pure form, PCP is a white crystalline powder that readily
dissolves in water or alcohol and has a distinctive bitter chemical taste. It contains
contaminants that cause the color to range from light to dark brown and has a powdery to
gummy consistency. It is available in the form of tablets, capsules, and colored powders,
which are taken orally or by insufflation (blowing into a body cavity). The liquid form of
PCP is dissolved most often in ether, a highly flammable solvent. For smoking, PCP is
typically sprayed onto a leafy material such as mint, parsley, oregano, or marijuana. PCP
may also be injected. Officers should use extreme caution while handling this substance
as PCP can be absorbed through the skin.
Ketamine (Ketamine hydrochloride, Special K) – A non-barbiturate, rapid acting
dissociative anesthetic used on both animals and humans. It is being abused by an
increasing number of young people as a club drug, and is often distributed at raves and
parties.
OBJECTIVE SYMPTOMS OF HALLUCINOGEN USE
The effects of psychedelics are unpredictable. It depends on the amount taken, the user's
personality, mood and expectations, and the surroundings in which the drug is used.
Usually, the user feels the first effects of the drug 30-90 minutes after taking it. The
following are possible symptoms of someone under the influence of a hallucinogen:
Perspiring
Warm to the touch
Blank stare
Difficulty speaking
Repetitive speech
Hallucinations
Violent
Dilated pupils
Dazed appearance
Uncoordinated
Nausea
Disoriented
Memory loss
Flashbacks
Appetite loss
Tremors
Sensations and feelings change too. The user may feel several different emotions at
once or swing rapidly from one emotion to another. The person's sense of self and time
change. Sensations may seem to cross over, giving the user the feeling of "hearing"
colors and "seeing" sounds. All these changes can be frightening and cause panic.
BAD TRIPS
Having a bad psychological reaction to LSD and similar drugs is common. The scary
sensations may last a few minutes or several hours and be mildly frightening or terrifying.
Sometimes taking a hallucinogen such as LSD can unmask mental or emotional problems
that were previously unknown to the user. PCP can produce violent or bizarre behavior
in people who are not normally that way. Behavior stemming from a bad trip can lead to
191 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
violent confrontations with police, death from drowning, burns, falls and automobile
accidents.
ARRESTS BASED ON OBJECTIVE SYMPTOMS
State in your report what you saw that led you to believe that the person was under the
influence. Include any detail that would be pertinent to the arrest (e.g. subject could not
walk a straight line, or subject claimed he could fly). Obtain a breath test to rule out the
presence of alcohol. Obtain a voluntary blood sample. For further, refer to Training
Bulletin 90 Under the Influence Investigations and Arrests.
LEGISLATIVE SUPPORT
11377 H&S – Unauthorized possession (Misdemeanor)
11378 H&S – Possession for sale (Felony)
11378.5 H&S – Possession for sale of designated substances including phencyclidine
(Felony)
11379 H&S – Transportation for sale (Felony)
11379.2 H&S – Possession for sale or sale of ketamine (Misdemeanor)
11379.5 H&S – Transportation, sale, furnishing, etc. of designated substances including
phencyclidine (Felony)
11379.6 H&S – Manufacturing, compounding, converting, producing, etc. (Felony)
11379.9 H&S – Death or great bodily injury of another person; use of methamphetamine
or phencyclidine (Felony)
11380 H&S – Adult using minor as agent; inducing minor to violate provisions; furnishing
to minor (Felony)
11382 H&S – Sale or furnishing substances falsely represented to be a controlled
substance (Wobbler)
CONCLUSION
The most common danger to law enforcement when confronted with persons under the
influence of hallucinogens is the unpredictability of the situation. Since the drugs affect
users differently, an officer is likely to observe a myriad of behaviors. Additionally, the
auditory and visual distortion resulting from hallucinogen ingestion can last for 10 to 12
hours. This can endanger the user who drives, their passengers, pedestrians and other
cars. The best defense is to be familiar with signs a hallucinogen user is likely to display
and treat the situation carefully with full regard for officer safety.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
192 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 90 – Under the Influence
Investigations and Arrests
REVISED September 2003
UNDER THE INFLUENCE INVESTIGATIONS AND ARRESTS
The impact of drug users/abusers upon society, both economically and criminally, is
apparent to the law enforcement community. Drug abusers often resort to crime sprees
to support their habits and officers see the impact in more calls for service, higher crime
statistics and greater victimization of innocent citizens. The incidence of motor vehicle
accidents involving impaired drivers often accounts for more injuries and more property
damage than incidents involving drivers not impaired.
All of this points to the fact that when officers arrest individuals they believe to be under
the influence of an illegal substance, it is imperative they include in the report all of the
elements necessary for successful prosecution. The City Prosecutor will evaluate the
totality of the circumstances surrounding an arrest for "under the influence" when
determining whether or not to file charges. To that end, following are important elements
that must be included in your report to enhance any effort to prosecute offenders.
Legal Justification for Initial Contact
It is essential that arrest reports include the legal justification for your contact with the
arrestee (consensual contact, reasonable suspicion for detention or probable cause
arrest).
• Was it a traffic stop?
• Was it a response to a dispatch?
• Were you investigating something?
• Was it a consensual encounter? (If consensual encounter, state what happened to
turn it to a detention. For example: “While talking to the subject, I noticed he had to
hold onto a fence rail to balance himself and his pupils appeared to be pinpointed. He
was exhibiting signs of narcotic influence”)
Arrest Based on Objective Symptoms
State in your report what you saw that led you to believe that the person was under the
influence. Include any detail that would be pertinent to the arrest (e.g. subject could not
walk a straight line, or subject yawned several times, etc.) There are seven main
categories of drugs. Each category will exhibit distinct and sometimes crossover
observable physical signs. The categories and some signs are:
Central Nervous System Depressants
90 – Under the Influence Arrests
193 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Drunken behavior
Thick, slurred speech
Impaired coordination
Impaired balance
Impaired divided attention
Disorientation
Drowsiness
Central Nervous System Stimulants
Dry mouth
Impaired balance and coordination
Red and irritated nasal area
Impaired divided attention
Body tremors
Restlessness
Talkative, rapid, rambling speech
Bruxism (grinding of teeth)
Insomnia
Hallucinations
Agitation
Increased alertness
Anxiety
Euphoria
Dilated pupils
Narcotic Analgesics (opiates)
Sedation
Being "on the nod"
Poor coordination
Slow and shallow breathing
Dry mouth
Flaccid muscle tone
Droopy eyelids
Constricted pupils
Cold, clammy skin
Impaired divided attention
Facial itching
Track marks
Fresh puncture wound
Inhalants
Residue around nose and mouth
Slurred speech
Disorientation
Lack of muscle control
Flushed face
Non-communicative
90 – Under the Influence Arrests
194 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Intense Headaches
PCP
Horizontal/vertical nystagmus
Perspiring
Warm to the touch
Blank stare
Difficulty in speech
Repetitive speech
Hallucinations
Possibly violent
Cannabis
Dilated pupils
Odor of marijuana
Marijuana debris in mouth
Body tremors
Eyelid tremors
Relaxed inhibitions
Hallucinogens
Dilated pupils
Dazed appearance
Hallucinations
Uncoordinated
Nausea
Disoriented
Difficulty in speech
Perspiring
Memory loss
Flashbacks
Statements
Statements made by the subject are important to your investigation. Officers often
develop a rapport with the subject and are able to obtain admissions on the type, quantity
and frequency of drug use. Many subjects state that they are taking prescribed controlled
substances. This would be an affirmative defense, but it falls on the defense to prove it.
Admissions, if obtained properly, are used to support your conclusions.
Training and Experience
List in the report your formal training and experience. For some officers this might be
academy training and time in the field. Combine this information with the number of
people you have seen, investigated and arrested who have been under the influence.
Some officers will have extensive training (DRE). Every investigation and arrest adds to
the depth of your knowledge and experience.
Chemical Evidence
90 – Under the Influence Arrests
195 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If you believe the subject is under the influence, obtain a breath test to either include or
exclude the presence of alcohol. Most officers who work these investigations on a regular
basis build a relationship with the subject, which makes it easier to obtain voluntary blood
or urine samples. To successfully prosecute these cases, the City Prosecutor is
heavily reliant upon the analysis of chemical samples. A urine sample is preferred,
but it does present a greater biohazard risk to the officer. If there is a jail nurse on duty,
the blood sample can be drawn at the station.
If the person is a driver and you suspect drug use. Implied consent law requires the driver
to submit to a breath test and, either a blood or urine test. Be sure to complete the DMV
Officer’s Statement form DS367 (located in booking) and read the subject the drug
admonition located on the back of the first page.
Conclusion
By adhering to these recommendations, we significantly increase the chances of
successfully prosecuting “Under the Influence” arrests. The City Prosecutor’s office
aggressively prosecutes 11550 H/S cases. While Proposition 36 provides for “drug
diversion” in lieu of prosecution in “Under the Influence” cases, the majority of cases are
still being prosecuted locally. Often times, arrestees are opting for prosecution with short
jail sentences, over lengthy diversion programs.
By continuing to aggressively arrest individuals for “Under the Influence” we can
potentially significantly impact crime within our community.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
196 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 91 – Citizen’s Arrest
REVISED May 2003
PRIVATE PERSON'S (CITIZEN'S) ARREST
INTRODUCTION
Under California law, private persons, whether citizens or not, have the right to effect a
"private person's arrest" under specific circumstances. It is an officer's responsibility to
be aware of these rights and to inform the complainant of the laws of arrest and post-
arrest procedures.
§837 PC - PRIVATE PERSON'S AUTHORITY TO ARREST
A private person may arrest another:
1- For a public offense committed or attempted in his/her presence
2- When the person arrested has committed a felony, although not in his/her presence
3- When a felony has in fact been committed and he/she has reasonable cause for
believing the person arrested to have committed it
§847 PC - A private person who has arrested another for the commission of a public
offense must, without unnecessary delay, take the arrested person before a magistrate,
or deliver him/her to a peace officer. There shall be no civil liability on the part of, and no
cause of action shall arise against, any peace officer acting within the scope of his/her
authority for false arrest and/or false imprisonment arising out of any arrest when:
• The arrest was lawful or when the peace officer, at the time of the arrest, had
reasonable cause to believe the arrest was lawful; or
• The arrest was made pursuant to a charge made, upon reasonable cause, of the
commission of a felony by the person to be arrested; or
• The arrest was made pursuant to the requirements of Penal Code §142, §838 or §839
§142 PC - (a) Any peace officer who has the authority to receive or arrest a person
charged with a criminal offense and willfully refuses to receive or arrest such person is
guilty of a felony/misdemeanor (wobbler).
(c) This section shall not apply to arrests made pursuant to §837 PC. (Amended Jan 1,
2003)
§838 PC - A magistrate may orally order a peace officer or private person to arrest anyone
committing or attempting to commit a public offense in the presence of such magistrate.
§839 PC - Any person making an arrest may orally summon as many persons as he
deems necessary to aid him therein.
91 – Citizen’s Arrest
197 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
MISDEMEANOR OFFENSES
Officers who are dispatched regarding a private person's arrest must keep in mind that
generally they do not have the authority to make an arrest without a warrant for a
misdemeanor not committed in their presence.
• Officers must confirm the arresting citizen actually witnessed the offense and
detained the suspect(s) at the time of the offense
• The arrest must be made contemporaneous to the commission of the offense and
not several days later
• Officers must also investigate and determine if the act(s) committed by the arrested
person constitutes a crime
Additionally, in virtually all situations involving a private arrest, the officer's duty is simply
to "receive" the arrestee and remove him or her from the scene. Once the arrest is
"received" there is always the option of a §849(b)PC release, even immediately right at
the scene, if appropriate.
§849(b) PC states an officer may release any person arrested without a warrant
whenever:
• There are insufficient grounds for filing a criminal complaint
• The person was arrested for intoxication only, and no further proceedings are
desirable
• The person was arrested only for being under the influence of a controlled substance
or drug, and such person is delivered to a facility or hospital for treatment and no
further proceedings are desirable
OFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY
Must an officer "accept" a person who has been placed under citizen's arrest for a crime
where probable cause does not appear to be present? No, officers may exercise their
judgment as to acceptance of questionable citizen's arrests, in order to reduce the risk of
federal liability, where probable cause does not appear to be present. If you do "receive"
the arrestee or otherwise take custody of him, you have three options:
• Book the suspect into jail (this is the typical disposition for a felony)
• Cite and release the suspect per Department guidelines
• Simply release (RNB) the suspect without issuing a notice to appear (This option is
the way to go when you believe there are "insufficient grounds for making a criminal
complaint")
Adhere to released not booked (RNB) policy (Manual §7.1.22).
If an officer accepts the arrested person, he/she must make it clear to all parties that
he/she is merely the transporting officer and the private person is the arresting party. In
the officer's presence, the arresting party should verbally advise the prisoner that he/she
is under arrest and identify the crime with which he/she is being charged.
91 – Citizen’s Arrest
198 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
In all citizen arrest cases involving the physical arrest or issuance of a
misdemeanor citation to an offender, officers must complete the Private Person's
Arrest Report, PD Form 4100.021. A copy of this report should be provided to the
arresting citizen.
FELONY CRIMES
If, after an investigation, the officer has reasonable cause to believe a felony has been
committed, the officer can arrest the person under the authority of §836 PC, which allows
a peace officer to make an arrest for a felony although it was not committed in his/her
presence. A private person also has broader powers of arrest on felony cases and,
if the citizen legally arrests the suspect, the officer has the duty to receive the
prisoner.
COMPETENCY OF PERSONS TO MAKE ARRESTS
It is important for the officer who receives the request to accept an arrested person to
consider the competency of the private person to qualify as a witness. If the case
depends on the testimony of a complainant who would not be a competent witness, no
arrest should be made.
Intoxicated or Mentally Ill Persons
An officer should "receive" but not book an arrestee from a person who, at the time the
act was allegedly observed, was mentally ill or intoxicated to the extent that he/she would
not be a competent witness. If a person in this category who wishes to make an arrest
confronts an officer and there appears to be some basis for an arrest, a memorandum to
the Deputy Chief of the Detective Bureau shall be filed. This memorandum should include
all pertinent information regarding the complainant and arrestee, a description of the
circumstances, and a statement explaining why the arrestee was not booked. This
information should remain on file in the responsible investigative Detail for one year in the
event the complainant contacts the Department at a later date.
Juvenile
Age, alone, is not necessarily a factor that would bar a person from making an arrest.
Successful prosecutions have been made when the arresting person was as young as 12
years of age. If the officer concludes that the victim would be a qualified witness and the
arrest is legal, it is his/her duty to accept the subject. If, however, the officer feels the
victim would not be a qualified witness or that the arrest is not legal, he/she should
"receive" the arrested person and then RNB them in the field. When there is any doubt
in the officer's mind as to effecting a citizen's arrest, an alternative is to file a complete
Incident Report.
COMPLAINT V. ARREST PROCEDURE
91 – Citizen’s Arrest
199 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Misdemeanor cases can often be resolved without the physical arrest of the offender.
The officer should inform the complainant that the matter can be presented to the City
Prosecutor's Office by making an arrest, issuing a misdemeanor citation, or filing an
Incident Report. When the misdemeanor is of a minor nature, the private person can file
an Incident Report with the investigating officer instead of making a physical arrest. The
report will be examined by the City Prosecutor's Office and, if justified, a complaint will be
filed and a warrant issued. This procedure may be followed when:
• The offender has a permanent address
• Public peace will not be further disturbed
• No further police investigation is necessary
• Cases of petty theft or drinking in public when the officer may release an offender with
a misdemeanor citation after he/she has been placed under a citizen's arrest
Refer to Training Bulletin 123 "Misdemeanor Citations" for those violations for which a
person will not be cited.
CONCLUSION
While every private person may have the right to effect a citizen's arrest, not every private
person knows and understands the laws of arrest. For this reason, when you, as a police
officer, are asked to receive such an arrest, you need to clearly understand your
responsibilities in the situation. It is important you know what to do with the arrest, and
what to explain to the arresting person.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
200 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 94 – DUI
REVISED December 2000
DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE
INTRODUCTION
Driving under the influence (DUI) is a very real problem for law enforcement and the
public, claiming on average nearly 30,000 lives each year throughout the U.S. and
causing nearly 31,000 injuries in California alone. It is sad but important to note, nearly
every officer reading this bulletin has either had a family member injured or killed by a
DUI driver, or personally knows of someone else’s family that has suffered because of a
DUI driver.
The term DUI has replaced “drunk driving” due to many social reviews. It is inaccurate to
believe a person must be “drunk” to be arrested for DUI, as drunk usually implies a person
who has difficulty with many motor functions and is visibly impaired. Anyone can walk
into a bar and after a few moments spot a drunk because they stand out so well. Impaired
is defined as someone who, because of their level of intoxication by alcohol or drugs,
cannot operate a motor vehicle safely. As a trained police officer, you are expected to
apprehend the impaired driver as well as the drunk driver. Current State law states that
it is illegal to operate a motor vehicle with a blood alcohol content (BAC) of 0.08% or
higher, regardless of impairment.
PURPOSE
Because of the widespread problem of people driving under the influence, making a traffic
stop and DUI arrest is a common occurrence for a patrol officer. Filing a DUI arrest report
has been perceived as very complex, both because of the different vehicle codes involved
and the number of report forms required. This training bulletin is designed to answer
most of the questions an officer might have about filing a DUI report and it includes a flow
chart of the paperwork required.
VEHICLE CODE SECTIONS AND PERCENT BLOOD ALCOHOL LEVELS
• §23152(a) CVC - Under the influence of alcohol, drugs or combination, when the BAC
is unknown (i.e. blood test) or not greater than 0.08%, but the level of impairment is
great enough to warrant the arrest (misdemeanor)
• §23152(b) CVC - The BAC is known at the time of the arrest and it is 0.08% or higher
(misdemeanor)
• §23152 (d) CVC – Commercial operator, while operating a commercial vehicle, with a
BAC of 0.04% or greater (misdemeanor)
94 – DUI
201 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• §23153 (a) CVC – Under the influence of alcohol, drugs or combination, when the
BAC is unknown (i.e. blood test) or not greater than 0.08%, but the level of impairment
is great enough to warrant the arrest, and the driver caused injury to anyone other
than themselves (felony)
• §23153(b) CVC – The BAC is known at the time of the arrest and is 0.08% or higher
and the driver caused injury to anyone other than themselves (felony)
• §23153 (d) CVC – Commercial operator, while operating a commercial vehicle, with a
BAC of 0.04% or greater and the driver caused injury to anyone other than themselves
(felony)
• §23550 CVC – Any violator who has 3 prior arrests for DUI (including charges reduced
to reckless driving) within seven years of the current arrest is able to have their charge
enhanced to a felony
• §23140 (a) CVC - Juvenile DUI (Under 21), BAC 0.05% or greater
• §23136 CVC - Enabling section allowing officers to confiscate the CDL of a juvenile
driver whose BAC is 0.01% or greater
• §40300.5 CVC - allows you to make an arrest for DUI following a traffic accident even
if you did not see the person drive. The specifics to this section indicate a suspected
driver must be in or about a vehicle blocking a roadway, or involved in a collision
Please note, §23152 (d) and 23153 (d) CVC refers to commercial drivers. Their BAC limit
is 0.04%. This level actually came from an American Medical Association (AMA) study.
The dangers of driving a large commercial vehicle are apparent and the Federal
Government chose to limit the BAC level of those operators. Our current BAC level in
California is 0.08% for the regular motoring public.
There are two types of felony DUI arrests. The first is when the DUI driver is involved in
a collision and causes injury to anyone else other than themselves. There are no criteria
for the level of the injury to effect the arrest. The second type of felony arrest for DUI is
similar to the three strikes law. Whenever a subject is arrested for DUI, a check of their
driver’s history will indicate if they have any prior arrests for DUI. If the subject has three
prior convictions for §23103 CVC, §23103.5 CVC §23152 CVC or §23153 CVC, within
seven years of the latest offense for DUI, they are eligible for the additional enhancement
of §23550 CVC. This enhancement section makes the fourth arrest a felony, and allows
a forced blood draw when necessary. If at all possible, have the booking Sergeant
provide you with a copy of the DUI driver’s record and include it with your report.
PROCEDURE
The complexity of a DUI arrest actually comes from the required use of several different
report forms. In reality, these are simple fill in the blank forms that only require repetition
of information. This repetition is necessary because the DMV process is civil in nature
and the actual reports we file are not usually available to the DMV hearing officers.
The initial contact of a DUI driver may be either accidental or deliberate on the part of the
field officer. A very intoxicated driver might be contacted because their level of
impairment is obvious, such as driving all over the road and committing several
infractions, or you may contact an intoxicated operator as a result of a single traffic
violation. Every driver is potentially DUI, and it is up to the officer to see the signs and
94 – DUI
202 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
symptoms consistent with the intoxicated driver. These signs and symptoms include, but
are not limited to:
• Odor of an alcoholic beverage on breath and/or person
• Open container of alcohol in the vehicle
• Bloodshot and/or watery eyes
• Slurred speech
• Difficulty with routine tasks such as removing a CDL from a wallet or papers from a
glove box
All of these, and more, are important pieces of your probable cause to arrest and should
be included in your arrest report along with your original reason for the traffic stop. Like
every other arrest, you must have probable cause, and since DUI is a traffic violation, all
other traffic violations are sufficient probable cause to begin your case.
Once you have determined a person is possibly impaired, you must get them out of the
vehicle to complete your field investigation. Case law has resulted in several benefits to
DUI investigation, one of which is the ability to ask questions of the driver without advising
him/her of their Miranda rights since your questions are investigative in nature. The City
Prosecutor’s office has worked with the Police Department to develop the questions
needed for prosecution and those questions are listed on the front of the DUI arrest form
under the heading of “Preliminary Interview”. Again, these questions need to be asked
at the onset of the investigation. If you wait until after the arrest, or the subject is already
in custody, then Miranda will be required before continuing.
Standard Field Sobriety Test
After conducting the preliminary interview, ask the driver to submit to the Standard Field
Sobriety Test (SFST). The tests to be given, in the order to be given and the physical
signs to look for during each test, are as follows:
• Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus (HGN)
• Rhomberg
− Unable to stand still or steadily with the feet together
− Body tremors
− Eyelid tremors
− Sway (estimate the number of inches that the suspect sways, front to back and
side to side
− Muscle tension (either more rigid than normal or more flaccid)
− Statements or sounds made by the suspect while performing the test
− Record the actual number of seconds that the suspect stands with the head tilted
back and the eyes closed
• Walk and Turn (eight validated clues of impairment for Walk and Turn)
− Can’t keep balance during instructions
− Starts walking too soon
− Steps off the line while walking
− Raises arms while walking
94 – DUI
203 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
− Misses heel to toe
− Stops walking
− Takes the wrong number of steps
− Turns improperly
• The One Leg Stand (four validated clues of impairment)
− Raising the arms
− Swaying
− Hopping
− Putting the foot down
• The Finger to Nose
− Diagram exactly where each fingertip touched the suspect’s face
− Indicate on the diagram which finger was actually used by the suspect each time
− Body sway
− Eyelid tremors
− Muscle tension
− Statements and sounds made by the suspect while performing the test
The instructions for the field sobriety test are included at the end of this bulletin. On the
second page of the DUI arrest report is a pictograph, which is designed to allow you to
write down the results and your observations of the SFST. Once the notes are made in
the pictograph, you will not be required to re-write them in the narrative of your arrest
report.
Once the SFST is completed, you must come to a conclusion as to the sobriety of the
driver. If you believe them to be impaired, make the arrest and advise the driver of their
chemical test obligations pursuant to §23175 CVC.
Implied Consent
Every person who has a driver’s license in California must provide either a blood or breath
sample when asked to do so by a police officer. This is called implied consent and the
basis whereby the DMV can suspend or revoke a driver’s license for a DUI violation,
independent of any action taken by the courts. Many other states have the same or similar
laws, so the rule of thumb is to treat the out of state driver as you would if they were from
California.
The test choices changed in 1999, and you are only required to offer the breath or blood
test. It is important to note the urine test is appropriate under certain circumstances. If
the subject, due to medical conditions, is not capable of completing the breath or blood
tests, a urine test must then be offered. An example of when the urine test would be
offered would be to a person who has asthma and is a hemophiliac. A person who has
this medical condition would take a urine test.
A urine test would also be offered if you suspect the driver is under the influence of drugs,
or a Drug Recognition Expert (DRE) requests you obtain the sample as part of their
investigation. To ensure a complete investigation, whenever you suspect a person is
under the influence of alcohol and drugs, or just drugs, the driver should be evaluated by
a DRE.
94 – DUI
204 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The Blood Test
When a person chooses to take a blood test, transport the person to the current contract
hospital and have the Licensed Medical Technician withdraw a blood according to
established practices. Pursuant to LBPD procedures, all blood samples for BAC
measurements must be placed into LBPD provided blood vials and then stored in the
evidence refrigerator located in the booking tunnel. Since a blood test is not time
sensitive, a sample can be obtained immediately upon arrival at the hospital, or up to, but
not exceeding, 3 hours after the arrest.
If the incident involves a felony arrest for DUI, then blood may be forcibly drawn from a
subject. This is a reportable use of force, and a supervisor must be notified. The rule of
law on a forcible blood draw is the procedure must “not shock the conscious” of the
average person. An example of an acceptable blood draw by force is at the hospital,
placing the subject in four-point leather restraints on a gurney and then using several
officers to physically hold the subject in place while a technician withdraws the sample.
Forcible blood draws are rare, but do require officers use common sense.
The Breath Test
When a subject chooses to complete a breath test, you must transport the person to a
facility where a Department breath test machine is available. The key to a useful breath
sample is 20 minutes of uninterrupted observation time before administering the
test. The observation time is meant to insure the driver does not drink, smoke or
regurgitate prior to completing the breath test.
The driver must be observed by the testing officer for the entire observation time and
cannot be transferred between other officers. Driving time cannot be included for a one-
officer unit because the officer should be focused on driving, not observing the suspect.
Once you have completed your observation time, administer the breath test pursuant to
established procedures and record your results.
At the completion of the breath test, you must advise the subject of §23157.5 CVC
(Trombetta), which allows for an additional test. The subject is not required to submit to
an additional test, but has the option of doing so. Make sure they know that the additional
test will be used against them in court. If the subject chooses to take a blood test, then
he/she must go to the contract hospital and a sample must be obtained as previously
described.
REFUSALS
If a subject refuses to complete any tests then you must remind the subject of their
obligation to do so. If he/she continues to refuse to take a test, you must advise him/her
verbatim from the backside of the current DMV Officer’s Statement form. This form seems
to change often, so look at the bottom left corner to verify the revision date is the most
current form. There are two separate refusal admonishments on this form. The top
section relates to alcohol influence only, while the bottom section is only to be used when
you believe a subject is under the influence of drugs and he/she has completed a breath
94 – DUI
205 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
test but is refusing any further tests. There are several check boxes. Make sure you
select the correct boxes that correlate with your arrest.
BOOKING
Once the chemical test is completed, it’s time to begin the normal booking process and
move into the DUI report forms. If your subject took a blood or urine test, you will need
to fill out DMV form, “Supplement to Officer’s Statement”. This is a very short form and
must be included with the sample in the refrigerator (filling out the top half of the form is
all that is required).
You MUST confiscate the subject’s driver’s license and attach it to your paper work once
your subject has either:
• Completed a BAC test with a result of 0.08% or greater,
• Completed a blood or urine test where you believe the BAC result will be 0.08% or
greater
• Refused to take a test, either initially or after the drug admonishment.
Accident Investigation Detail will forward the license to the DMV for processing. (Out of
state driver’s licenses are not to be confiscated). The driver should be instructed their
driver’s license has been suspended effective 30 days from the date of arrest. Their
temporary driver’s license is their booking sheet and the pink copy of the Officer’s
Statement form. The pink copy of the Officer’s Statement form should be placed into
prisoner property.
The last form to complete is the “Driving Under the Influence Arrest Report”. This form
has been designed to include all the information that might be needed in court. The form
can help you immensely in your preparation for court, if you have completely filled it out.
The next step is your narrative, which should include the following information:
• Probable cause to make the stop (This is usually a traffic stop or collision)
• Probable cause to have the driver exit their car (What did you see, smell, and hear?)
• Probable cause to detain and arrest, following the SFST (Did you come to a conclusion
as to the sobriety of the driver? Do not restate the SFST exam, just your conclusion.
You already drew a picture)
• The results of any chemical tests administered (Which test did they take?, what did
you do with it, and what were the results, if you know?)
• What you did with their car? (Did you tow it or park and lock it?)
• Any additional information you believe would help with the case
JUVENILES
Juvenile offenders have virtually the same paperwork as adults, with one addition.
Besides the juvenile booking sheet, officers must substitute the “Under age 21 Officer’s
Statement” DMV form for the adult “Officer’s Statement” form. Any person under 21 who
has any measurable amount of alcohol in their system, 0.01% or greater, is in violation of
§23136 CVC. This is not a citation or arrest offense, but instead is handled directly by
the DMV. The penalty is a one-year suspension of the offender’s driver’s license. This
94 – DUI
206 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
BAC reading can be obtained through a Portable Alcohol Sensor (PAS) device, or if one
is not available, by transporting the juvenile to a facility where a breath test is available.
All of the observation times must be followed. Forward these documents to the Accident
Investigation Detail.
If the juvenile has a BAC of 0.05% or greater, then they are in violation of §23140 CVC.
This is an arrest offense and the violator should be charged. If the juvenile has a BAC of
over 0.08%, or you believe them to be under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs, and
their BAC is over 0.05%, you may arrest them for §23152 (a) or (b) CVC. Remember,
the significance of 23152(a) is that the person is under the influence to the extent that
they cannot safely drive (under 0.08% and/or drug) or the BAC is unknown at the time of
booking (i.e. blood test). The 23152(b) section simply states that the subjects BAC is
known to be 0.08% or greater, regardless of impairment.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
207 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 95 – Tow Truck Requests
REVISED September 2000
TOW TRUCK REQUESTS
INTRODUCTION
Officers store and impound many vehicles during their shift and, after some time, it
becomes a routine procedure. This training bulletin will address the City’s Police Tow
Service, what their responsibilities are, and how officers can make requests for tow
services properly for the best service.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The City of Long Beach owns and operates Police Tow, located at 3111 East Willow
Street, for the purpose of taking care of the Department’s towing needs. All requests for
tow service will be made to Police Tow. (Exceptions as noted below) If Police Tow cannot
respond, they maintain contracts with other tow companies and will notify them if the need
arises. Police Tow has the following responsibilities and duties:
• Removal of wrecked, impounded and recovered vehicles
• Cleaning debris from the scene of accidents
• Availability on a twenty-four hour basis
• Maintenance of a storage area for all stored and impounded vehicles
• Security for all personal property found in or on the vehicles
• Provision for the release of vehicles between 8AM and midnight daily (and emergency
release if needed during off hours)
FEES
The owner of the vehicle towed or stored is responsible for all fees charged in connection
with services furnished. In addition to basic towing fees, other charges can accrue, such
as:
• Righting an overturned vehicle
• Disconnecting a drive shaft
• Removing a vehicle from a ditch or fence
• Anything that can be classified as a difficult removal
• Storage fees
The officer requesting tow service should apprise the dispatcher of the condition of the
car relative to towing. For example, all four tires are flat, or two vehicles are hooked
95 – Tow Truck Requests
208 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
together and need to be separated, etc. This will ensure that tow arrives with the proper
equipment.
REQUEST FOR TOW SERVICE
All requests for tow service will be made through a dispatcher who will notify Police Tow.
The exceptions to this are as follows:
• If the vehicle owner is an Automobile Club of Southern California member, or other
similar club member, the officer will contact a dispatcher who will contact the Auto
Club towing service
• If the vehicle owner or operator indicates they have a specific towing service request,
the officer will notify a dispatcher who will contact the tow service requested. However,
in such instances, the officer on scene shall take into consideration the length of time
involved in obtaining the requested towing service, as well as any hazards presented
by the situation at the scene, before granting the request. The dispatcher should
obtain an ETA from the tow service and relay that information to the officer on scene.
If the requested tow service is unavailable and the vehicle is a hazard, it will be
removed by Police Tow
Heavy Duty Requests
When heavy towing equipment is needed, (e.g., a big rig is involved in an accident), the
officer on scene will make that information known to the dispatcher who will notify Police
Tow. The tow yard has a contract with another tow service for heavy equipment and they
need to be advised of the situation as soon as possible so they can make the necessary
requests.
REPORTS
The investigating officer at the scene shall file the appropriate reports concerning the
removal of the vehicle and shall indicate whether the vehicle is “stored” or “impounded”.
All reports require DR#’s but most vehicle reports will use the same DR# as the main
incident with only a supplement required. For example, a vehicle towed from a traffic
accident will receive a supplement to the accident DR#. Likewise, a recovered Long
Beach stolen vehicle will receive a supplement to the original stolen vehicle DR#.
If, at the scene of an accident, a citizen makes the request for tow service from Police
Tow, a vehicle report form is not required. If the officer must order a tow because the
driver is incapacitated or otherwise unable to decide how best to remove the vehicle, a
Vehicle Report Form and DR# is required.
CONCLUSION
When dispatched to an accident scene, officers must give first consideration to caring for
injured persons, summoning paramedics or apprehending violators at the scene. Their
second concern should be arranging for the immediate removal of any vehicle causing
traffic congestion or creating a hazard. Knowing the procedures involved in summoning
95 – Tow Truck Requests
209 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
tow trucks will save valuable air time and enable officers to respond with intelligent
answers for citizens who have questions regarding such service.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
210 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 98 – Implied Consent Law
REVISED May 2003
IMPLIED CONSENT LAW
INTRODUCTION
Operating a motor vehicle in the State of California is a privilege, not a right. When a
peace officer legally detains a driver whom they have reasonable cause to believe is
impaired, the driver must submit to the request to a take a chemical test or face
suspension or revocation of their driving privilege.
Pertinent Vehicle Code Sections
§23612(a)(1)(A) CVC – “Any person who drives a motor vehicle is deemed to have given
his/her consent to chemical testing of his/her blood or breath for the purpose of
determining the alcoholic content of his/her blood, if lawfully arrested for any offense
allegedly committed in violation of §23140, 23152, or 23153.”
§13353(a) CVC – “If any person refuses the officer’s request to submit to, or fails to
complete, a chemical test or tests pursuant to §23612, upon receipt of the officer’s sworn
statement that the officer had reasonable cause to believe the person had been driving a
motor vehicle in violation of §23140, 23152, or 23153, the department shall do one of the
following:”
• Suspend the person’s privilege to operate a motor vehicle for a period of one year
• Revoke the person’s privilege to operate a motor vehicle for a period of two or more
years if the refusal occurred within seven years of separate violations of §23103.5,
23140, 23152, or 23153
Refusal of Chemical Test: The Violator’s Rights
When a person is arrested for drunk driving and refuses to take any tests to determine
the alcoholic content of his/her blood, it is the arresting officer’s responsibility to complete
the following:
• DMV Form DS 367/DS 367M (Rev 10/2002) Officers Statement; and,
• PD Form 4300.003 (Rev 02/2001) LBPD Driving Under the Influence Arrest Report
The officer will retain the driver's license to be submitted with DMV Form DS 367 and
shall issue the "pink" temporary driver's license to the violator. The license is to be
processed for return to the Department of Motor Vehicles.
The Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) in Sacramento will send an “Order of
Suspension” to the individual advising them that their driving privilege has been
98 – Implied Consent
211 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
suspended for one year. They have the right to request a hearing for the purpose of
submitting evidence and show cause why their driving privilege should not be revoked.
In order to exercise this right, the person must submit a letter to DMV Sacramento,
requesting such a hearing. The DMV will set a date for the hearing at a local DMV office.
Officers are subpoenaed to attend hearings in person or telephonically and their
testimony can be the determining factor in upholding the suspension of the individual’s
driving privilege.
PROCEDURES
The officer must be certain to clearly explain that the right to counsel and the right to
remain silent do not apply to the driver’s duty to submit to a chemical test to determine
the alcoholic content of his/her blood.
Problems in Advisement
Officers will not ad lib the Implied Consent advisement. Changing “will result in the
suspension of…” to “may result in the suspension of…” will create a loophole for the
defendant during the hearing. The DMV stresses that the officer needs to advise the
suspect verbatim that their refusal to take a test “will” result in a suspension of their
driver’s license. Read the implied consent admonition verbatim from DMV form DS 367
or DS 367M as appropriate.
Failure to Complete a Test
If the arrested person consents to a chemical test but fails to complete the test, claiming
he/she is physically unable and also refuses to submit to a second test, the officer must
present evidence of the lack of a good faith effort by the violator. The officer should be
able to indicate the condition of the violator at the time of the test to repudiate his/her
claim of physical inability. Also, stress the fact that the driver was offered a second test
and refused that one altogether.
Consent When Intoxicated
People who have refused a chemical test often raise the defense at a hearing that they
were too intoxicated to understand the officer’s advisement when requested to consent
to a test. Officers should be prepared to give factual evidence that would support a
conclusion that the arrested person understood the officer’s advisals when requested to
consent to a test. Include the responses of the suspect to questions, requests and actions
to the officer prior to the implied consent issue; e.g., response to sirens, red lights, request
for CDL and field sobriety test.
Proper Advisement of Tests
The officer should not request that the suspect submit to one test and only offer the other
test when the offered test is refused. In all cases the officer should advise the defendant
that he/she has a choice of two chemical tests, as provided by statute. If necessary, the
officer should explain how each test would be physically accomplished, i.e., going to the
98 – Implied Consent
212 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
hospital for a blood test or taking the breath test at the station. The defendant does not
have the right to have his/her own doctor administer the initial test. However, the
defendant can have his/her own doctor administer additional tests at his/her own
expense.
CONCLUSION
Just as it is a motorist’s responsibility to consent to a chemical test when stopped for
suspicion of DUI, it is the officer’s responsibility to make the Implied Consent advisement
clearly and correctly. The officer must document any refusal and the circumstances
surrounding the refusal. After following proper procedures and preparing clear notes, the
officer will be prepared for both a DMV administrative hearing and a criminal trial, if
required.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
213 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 99 – Traffic – Following too closely
REVISED May 2001
TRAFFIC: FOLLOWING TOO CLOSELY (§21703 CVC)
INTRODUCTION
Following too closely is one of the leading causes of traffic collisions. The Vehicle Code
§21703 CVC reads: “The driver of a motor vehicle shall not follow another vehicle more
closely than is reasonable and prudent, having due regard for the speed of such vehicle
and the traffic upon and the condition of, the roadway.”
ELEMENTS OF §21703
• Driving of a motor vehicle
• Following another vehicle (on a highway)
• More closely than is reasonable and prudent considering the:
– Speed of concerned vehicles
– Traffic on the roadway
– Conditions present (rain, fog, etc.) on the roadway
What does “reasonable and prudent” mean? How does this relate to the speed? What
must the traffic conditions be? To what extent must we allow for the condition of the
roadway? These questions are all important; however, the core of the problem is the
proven and tested physics of reaction time and stopping distance.
STOPPING DISTANCES
Stopping distance is predicated on unalterable natural laws affecting vehicles in motion.
• A vehicle moving at a particular speed is traveling a known exact number of feet per
second (1.467 ft./sec)
• A passenger vehicle traveling on a known type of surface at a known number of feet
per second and obtaining its maximum braking efficiency will always require a certain
minimum number of feet to stop (under ideal conditions)
The two elements of stopping distance are reaction time and braking distance. We
cannot question what constitutes braking distance because of the natural law involved. It
is also difficult to question reaction time because of the many controlled tests by
recognized experts who agree, with minor variations, that the average time a normal,
healthy, alert individual will require to lock his wheels is ¾ of one second.
When we convert these elements to figures, total stopping distance can be computed.
99 – Traffic – Following Too Closely
214 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
CONVERSION TABLE
REACTION *STOPPING DISTANCE
Miles
per
hour
Feet per second Time in
seconds
Distance
traveled in
feet
After
brakes
applied
Total:
(including
reaction
distance)
5 7.3 .75 5.5 1.2 6.7
10 14.6 .75 11.0 5.0 16.0
20 29.3 .75 22.0 20.0 42.0
30 44.0 .75 33.0 45.0 78.0
40 58.6 .75 44.0 80.0 124.0
50 73.3 .75 55.0 125.0 180.0
60 88.0 .75 66.0 180.0 246.0
70 102.6 .75 77.0 245.0 322.0
*Dry level concrete or asphaltic-concrete
Observe on the chart when miles per hour are doubled, feet per second and reaction
distance are also doubled but stopping distance after brakes are applied is increased by
the square. Few drivers recognize that when we double our speed, we need four times
as much stopping distance. Failure to realize this traps drivers into the belief that following
at two car lengths at 40 mph is as safe as it was at 20 mph.
Using the chart, when a driver traveling at a speed of 50 mph observes a vehicle stopped
160 feet ahead of him (8 to 9 car lengths) and there is no place to turn, he has no
alternative but to drive 20 feet into the stopped vehicle (180 ft. – 160 ft. = 20 feet).
ENFORCEMENT
The conversion table indicates that a vehicle traveling at 50 mph has to have 55 feet for
reaction distance. If it were following at a distance of less than 55 feet, it would be certain,
even if all other conditions were ideal, to collide with the lead vehicle in the event it
stopped suddenly. The driver who follows at an interval less than his reaction distance is
in what we will call the “disaster zone”. Put in another way, a vehicle following at the
equivalent of one foot per mile per hour will always be in this “disaster zone.
• Guideline #1 - A driver shall be stopped and should be cited when following at a
distance that is less than one foot per mile per hour of speed
Miles per hour Feet Car lengths
20 20 1
30 30 1 ½
40 40 2
99 – Traffic – Following Too Closely
215 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
50 50 2 ½
60 60 3
70 70 3 ½
• The safe following distance advocated by the Nation Safety Council and most
authorities on safe driving is one car length for each 10 miles of speed. A car length
is approximated as being 20 feet. For example: A car following at 50 mph should be
at least 100 feet behind. This 45 foot difference (over 2 car lengths) between the 50
mph disaster zone (approximately 2 ½ car lengths) and the acceptable safe following
distance (approximately 5 car lengths) is called the “danger zone”. Any vehicle
following within this “danger zone” may be following too closely.
• Guideline #2 - A violator should be stopped and may be cited when his/her vehicle is
following at a distance greater than indicated in guideline #1 if the prevailing
circumstances make the distance between the two vehicles unsafe and he/she has
the opportunity to adjust his following distance
– “Prevailing circumstances” may include rain, fog, wet and slippery streets,
inattentive driver, heavy loads, vehicles in a caravan, etc.
– The decision will be made by the officer in each situation in relation to the
circumstances surrounding the driver’s depth into the danger zone.
CONCLUSION
The rear end collision occurs far too frequently. Enforcement of §21703 will reduce injury
and property damage.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
216 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 100 – Financial Responsibility Laws
REVISED June 2001
FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY LAWS
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the Financial Responsibility Law is to ensure that drivers and owners of
vehicles using the streets and highways shall be financially responsible for damage or
injuries caused by an automobile collision, regardless of blame, and to remove financially
irresponsible drivers from the highway. Every driver or owner must meet the same
provisions of the law. If anyone suffers injuries or property damage, all drivers or owners
must satisfy the financial responsibility provisions of the law.
Legal Support
§16000 CVC – provides that the driver of every motor vehicle, who is involved in an
accident on the highway resulting in property damage in excess of $500, or in bodily injury
or death of any person shall, within 10 days, report the accident to the Department of
Motor Vehicles. The report will be made on DMV Form SR-1. The forms are available
directly from the DMV or from any police department sub-station.
§16004 CVC – provides for the suspension of driving privilege for the person who fails,
refuses or neglects to make a report of an accident of the type described above.
§16020(a) CVC – provides that every driver and every owner of a motor vehicle shall at
all times be able to establish financial responsibility and shall at all times carry in the
vehicle evidence of financial responsibility.
§16025(a) CVC – every driver involved in a traffic accident shall exchange name, driver’s
license number, current residence address, vehicle identification number, address of
registered owner, and insurance company to include policy number.
16028(a) CVC - upon demand of a peace officer every person who drives a motor vehicle
upon a highway shall provide evidence of financial responsibility for the vehicle that is in
effect at the time the demand is made. However, a peace officer shall not stop a vehicle
for the sole purpose of determining weather the vehicle is being driven in violation of this
subdivision.
§16070 CVC – whenever a driver is involved in an accident and fails to provide evidence
of financial responsibility as required in §16020 at the time of the accident, the DMV shall
suspend the privilege of the driver or owner to drive a motor vehicle, including the driving
privilege of a nonresident driver in this state.
100 – Financial Responsibility Laws
217 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Evidence of Financial Responsibility means any of the following:
• A form issued by an insurance company
• A certificate of self-insurance (§16052 CVC)
• An insurance policy or bond, which involves depositing a certain amount of cash with
the Department of Motor Vehicles (§16056 CVC)
FOREIGN VEHICLE REGISTRATION
Evidence of financial responsibility can be obtained during violator/officer contact when
requesting driver’s license, registration, or other means of identification. The requirement
may be satisfied by either oral or written proof if it is to the officer’s satisfaction.
PROCEDURE FOR RECORDING INSURANCE INFORMATION
• Write the insurance company name by policy number. Example: Nationwide/72pe
123456
• California Certificate of Deposit issued to self-insured companies or individuals by the
DMV. Example: DMV S/I 66
• Public Utilities Commission identifying symbol issued to a highway carrier. Example:
PUC ID TCP 1123456
• Name of the government entity which owns/operates the vehicle. Government entities
are considered self-insured. Example: LA City, Orange County, State of California
• Rental Vehicles – All major vehicle rental companies in California are covered by their
own fleet policy, example: Avis. Note: This procedure does not apply to leased
vehicles where the leaseholder may be financially responsible. It is recommended
that officers note on stats copy of citation how the violator advised the officer as to
written or oral confirmation of insurance as it will assist the officer later, in court
EMPLOYERS VEHICLE
Whenever a cited driver is operating a vehicle owned or leased by his/her employer, and
the vehicle is operated with the employer’s permission and the driver cannot provide
evidence of the employer’s financial responsibility, two citations shall be issued. One
citation will go to the driver for the original violation and one to the employer for no
evidence of financial responsibility. If all violations are owner’s responsibility, only one
citation shall be issued. §16028(e) VC permits a driver to sign the Notice to Appear on
behalf of the employer when the violation charge is failure to provide evidence of financial
responsibility. Officers should allow the driver to sign the citation if he/she so requests;
however, officers should not solicit the signature. When issuing two citations, one to the
vehicle owner, one to the driver, the citations should be cross-referenced to each other
by number in the narrative portion of the citation.
Drivers who sign owner responsibility citations DO NOT receive a copy of the citation. All
copies of the citation shall be submitted to the Field Support Division for processing
through the City Prosecutor’s office. Whenever a cited driver is operating a vehicle owned
or leased by another person who is not their employer but with that person’s permission,
and the driver cannot provide evidence of either his, her or the owner/lessee’s financial
100 – Financial Responsibility Laws
218 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
responsibility, only the driver shall be cited. Whenever the Department of Motor Vehicles
has determined that the motorist provided incorrect or false information, DMV will notify
the appropriate prosecuting authority.
REVIEW Responsibility
Patrol Bureau
219 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 101 – Traffic Hand Signals
REVISED September 2002
TRAFFIC HAND SIGNALS
INTRODUCTION
When directing traffic, it is the officer’s job to tell people how, when, and where they may
move, either in their vehicles or on foot. Officers must therefore pay attention to both cars
and pedestrians and insure they are all given a chance to move.
If officers are not on hand to make decisions and direct movements when hazardous
traffic situations occur, traffic jams would result and motorists and/or pedestrians could
be injured.
It is not possible for officers to direct each driver and/or pedestrian verbally. They have
to use a type of sign language that is clearly understood by everyone. There may be
several different ways to motion drivers to stop, start or turn. If several officers directing
traffic all used their own signals, entirely different from one another, the result would be
complete chaos and not the orderly dispersal of traffic generally desired.
Therefore, it is important in directing traffic for all officers to do it the same way. Equally
important, the gestures should be made where the driver can see them from a distance.
An officer’s most important task while directing traffic is to direct drivers and pedestrians
with clear, discernable commands. If the officer’s directions are misunderstood, more
problems may develop. Officers should consider the following instructions as guidelines
to help make their direction clear to motorists.
DIRECTING TRAFFIC BY HAND
• Let people know that you are in charge by standing where they cannot fail to see you.
This is usually right in the center of the crossing
• Use command presence. Motorists are responding to and complying with your
authority
• Stand straight with weight the same on each foot
• When not signaling with them, let your hands hang easily at your side
• Do not face vehicles authorized by you to move. Stand with your side toward them
To stop traffic, two motions are used:
101 – Traffic Hand Signals
220 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• First, point with your arm and finger and look straight at the driver you want to stop.
• Watch them and hold this point until they see you, or at least until they have plenty of
time to do so
• Raise your pointing hand (but not your whole arm) so that the palm is toward the
driver. Hold this until he/she stops
• Traffic must be stopped in both directions to give cross traffic a chance to move.
Because you cannot look both ways at once, stop the traffic coming from one side
first, then from the other side
• After you have halted traffic with one hand, hold that hand in the stop position and turn
to the other side and repeat the process
• Don’t lower either arm until cars coming from both ways are halted
To start traffic
• Place yourself so that your side is towards traffic to be started
101 – Traffic Hand Signals
221 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Point with your arm and finger toward the car you want to start. Hold it until you get
the attention of the driver
• And then, with your palm up, swing your hand up and over to your chin. Bend your
arm only at the elbow
• If you get the attention of the driver first by pointing you won’t have to make the signal
a second time
• After traffic has been started from one side, drop that arm and start traffic from the
other side in the same way
• Use the same signals to give the go-ahead to slow and timid drivers
Right turn
Signals for a right turn movement are not usually required at an intersection. When it is
necessary, the arm you signal with will be determined by the car’s direction. If it
approaches from the right, point toward the driver with your right arm. Give the driver
time to see your gesture and then swing your arm to point in the direction he/she is going.
Keep pointing in that direction until he/she begins to turn.
If the car approaches you from the left, point with your left arm. When the driver sees you
point, swing your arm in the direction he/she is to go. Because of your position you will
not be able to make a complete swing with your arm. If you prefer and find it more
comfortable, bend your left arm at the elbow and with your thumb and forearm indicate
the direction the driver is to take.
Left turn
• In helping a driver make a left turn you may first have to halt traffic in the lane or lanes
through which the turning car must cross
• If the car is approaching from your left, give the stop signal with your right arm to stop
traffic in the lane through which the turning driver is to pass
• Hold the stop signal with your right arm and then give the turning gesture with your
left arm
101 – Traffic Hand Signals
222 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• If the car approaches from your right, turn around so that you face toward the direction
the car making the turn is to go
• On a street with only one available lane in each direction, one driver wishing to make
a left turn can delay many cars behind him unless you handle his movement properly
• If traffic is approaching the left turn vehicle from the opposite direction, he/she cannot
make a turn until there is a gap in it. While he/she is waiting, give a signal to move
into the intersection close to you so that the cars behind can continue straight through
or make right turns. Point your finger and motion him/her forward and then point to
the place on the pavement where you wish them to stop. As soon as he/she begins
to move, signal cars behind to move straight through or turn right
• Permit the left turn when there is a natural break in the opposing traffic or stop the
opposing traffic and signal for the left turn
Two Officer Signaling
Sometimes there is a need for more than one officer at a busy intersection or control
point. One of the two officers must originate all signals and gestures. In other words,
one officer is leader and makes all decisions as to changes in traffic flow. His/her partner
assists by helping to make those decisions known.
101 – Traffic Hand Signals
223 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Signaling Aids
The whistle is used to get the attention of drivers and pedestrians. It is used as follows:
• One long blast with a STOP signal
• Two short blasts with the GO signal
• Several short blasts to get the attention of a driver or pedestrian who does not respond
to a given signal
Be judicious in the use of your whistle at all times. Whistle blasts directed to pedestrians
don’t need to be as shrill as those to command the attention of motorists.
The voice is seldom used in directing traffic. Arm gestures and the whistle are usually
sufficient. There are numerous reasons why verbal commands are not used. Verbal
orders are not easy to give or understand and often lead to misinterpretations that are
dangerous. An order that is shouted can antagonize the motorist.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
224 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 102 – Collisions – Metro A-Line
Revised March 2021
COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LIGHT RAIL VEHICLE
METRO A-LINE
INTRODUCTION
Since July 2017, the Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) has been contracted by the
Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority (METRO) to conduct law
enforcement services involving the Metro A-Line. Metro Transportation Detail officers are
responsible for taking all reports regarding criminal incidents and collisions involving the
Metro A-Line and the Light Rail Vehicles (LRV).
AREA OF RESPONSIBILITY
The LBPD area of responsibility spans south from the dividing line at Dominguez Street
east of Santa Fe Avenue, which is the North Division border with Rancho Dominguez.
The Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department (LASD) is responsible for all A-Line activity
north of this line at Dominguez Street. The LBPD area of responsibility includes the
following Metro A-Line stations and other Metro properties:
STATION ADDRESS
Wardlow 3420 Pacific Place
Willow Street 2750 West American Avenue
Pacific Coast Highway 1798 Long Beach Boulevard
Anaheim Street Station 1290 Long Beach Boulevard
5th Street Station 598 Long Beach Boulevard
1st Street Station 108 Long Beach Boulevard
Downtown Station 128 W. 1st Street
Pacific Avenue Station 498 Pacific Avenue
A-Line Maintenance Yard (Division 11) 4350 E. 208th Street
Inactive Bus Operating Division (Division
12)
970 Chester Place
METRO CONTACT NUMBERS
Metro Transportation Detail Lieutenant 562-570-5746
Metro Transportation Detail Sergeant 562-570-5167
Metro Transportation Detail Office 562-570-5166
Metro Rail Operations Control (ROC) Floor Manager 323-563-5022
102 – Collisions Metro A Line
225 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Division 11 – A-Line Maintenance Dispatch 310-816-5538
Division 11 – A-Line Maintenance Gate Guard 310-816-5554
LASD Bureau Communications Coordinator 213-928-8204
LAPD Transportation Services Division Watch Commander 213-922-1410
*IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTE*
An LRV is powered by a strong electrical current through a pantograph, which is an
apparatus mounted on the roof of an electric train to collect power through contact with
an electrically charged overhead wire.
Ensure the following is done PRIOR to any rescue attempt:
• The operator has lowered the pantograph
• The ROC has de-energized the overhead electrical lines
• All officers can make this request by conferring with the LRV operator or by requesting
dispatch to call the ROC and make the request
The Long Beach Fire Department is also trained to ensure the electrical lines have been
de-energized and the pantograph has been lowered from the overhead electrical wire.
INCIDENTS AND COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV
All criminal incidents and traffic collisions involving the A-Line occurring within the City of
Long Beach area of responsibility will be handled by LBPD officers in the Metro
Transportation Detail and will be dispatched as the primary unit to handle reporting. Patrol
units may be dispatched if a Metro Transportation Detail officer is not available.
The following are commonly dispatched incidents:
• LRV collisions anywhere along the Long Beach A-Line right-of-way
• LRV versus pedestrian collisions occurring anywhere along the Long Beach A-Line
right-of-way
• Crimes occurring on LRVs, platforms and right-of-way within the Long Beach A-Line
area of responsibility
• Contact a victim of a crime which occurred within the Long Beach A-Line area of
responsibility, even if the victim is in another jurisdiction
• Similar to other courtesy reports, the Patrol Watch Commander has the discretion to
approve or deny a request from either LAPD or LASD to take a courtesy report.
TYPES OF COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV
In-Transport Vehicle – An in-transport vehicle is defined as a vehicle moving people or
goods. An LRV is not a motor vehicle for the purposes of collision reporting. An LRV
versus vehicle collision is only reported if the collision involves a motor vehicle in-transport
and will be filed on an LBPD Collision Report – PD Form 4210.001.
Not In-Transport Vehicle – If an LRV strikes a vehicle not in-transport (parked), the
incident should be reported as a special accident.
102 – Collisions Metro A Line
226 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Pedestrian – When an LRV strikes a pedestrian anywhere along the A-Line right-of-way
the incident is reported on an LBPD Collision Report – PD Form 4210.001.
Pedestrian Suicide – When an incident is determined to be a pedestrian suicide, with
the pedestrian purposely walking into the path of an LRV, the incident is filed as a suicide.
The LBPD Homicide Detail may be contacted, however they are not required to respond
to a suicide incident.
For further information regarding fatality collision reporting refer to LBPD Manual §
7.4.1.2.
INVESTIGATING COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV
The LRV operator is exempt from most provisions of the California Vehicle Code and is
NOT required to show a valid driver’s license, registration, or insurance documents.
An LRV operator is not a “Driver,” and should not be listed as a driver on page one of the
collision reporting form. Include an LRV operator’s information either on page three as a
witness or list his/her information in the narrative. An LRV operator may make a written
statement after a collision.
Passengers, for the most part, are able to view what occurs on the sides of the LRV and
are less likely to see what happens at the front or rear of the LRV.
A Metro Rail Transit Operations Supervisor (RTOS) will respond to all incidents. The
RTOS should be consulted during the investigation. Additionally, the RTOS is
responsible for LRV movement and release. Should the RTOS release the LRV prior to
law enforcement response, the RTOS will be responsible for providing information for the
report.
It is the responding officer’s responsibility to release the LRV to the RTOS as soon as
possible. The officer should consider allowing the RTOS to have the LRV driven to the
A-Line Maintenance Yard, where the investigation can continue without further impeding
the A-Line system.
A Metro collision expert may be sent to the scene to conduct an independent
investigation. Metro Transportation Detail supervisors and/or patrol supervisors should
make every effort to allow the expert to conduct their investigation. However, the
independent investigation shall not interfere with the police department investigation.
In the event of a fatal incident, request that the Metro collision expert withhold his or her
investigation until the arrival of LBPD Detectives. The handling detectives determine
when it is appropriate for the Metro collision expert to begin their investigation.
The ROC may request a “Bus Bridge” be enacted to transfer passengers from the affected
LRV to another LRV or platform. A Metro bus will be called to assist. It is the Metro
Transportation Detail Officers’ responsibility to assist with this “Bus Bridge.” Metro
Transportation Detail Officers have portable ladders within their vehicles to assist with
102 – Collisions Metro A Line
227 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
this task. If a Metro Transportation Detail Officer is not available, patrol resources will
assist with the “Bus Bridge.”
LRV COLLISION REPORTING
Collision reports will be handled expeditiously so that Metro operations may be resumed
for the benefit of the riding public. Officers should consider marking the position of the
vehicles and then having the vehicles towed, stored, or moved off the tracks to allow
additional LRVs to proceed while further investigation is conducted. Officers should
consider requesting tow trucks as soon as possible after arrival at the incident location.
CVC § 22656 provides the authority to remove a vehicle which is upon or within 7 ½ feet
of the nearest rail.
VIOLATIONS APPLICABLE TO THE LRV OPERATOR
The following codes taken from the California Vehicle Code (CVC), Health and Safety
(H&S), Public Utilities Code (PUC), and the Penal Code (PC) are potential violations
applicable to the LRV operator:
21462 CVC – Must obey any official traffic signal applicable (I)
21806(b) CVC – Must yield to emergency vehicles (I)
2800(a) CVC – Must obey the lawful order or direction of a peace officer (M)
11550(a) H&S – Under the influence of a controlled substance (M)
7818 PUC – Intoxicated while operating an LRV (M); follow DUI arrest procedures and
use the appropriate DUI forms
7679 PUC – Intoxication while on duty causes injury or death (F)
7680 PUC – Causes a collision resulting in death on a street railroad (F)
192(b) PC – Involuntary Manslaughter (F)
LRV AND PLATFORM VIDEOS
A-Line Station platforms have at least two cameras with 24-hour video monitoring. LRVs
have cameras in the operator’s cab that monitor the operator side and forward views
outside of the cab. LRVs also have cameras covering the passenger compartments
within each LRV.
LRV and platform videos may be obtained for evidentiary purposes, but must be
requested utilizing the official Metro Application for Release of Video Footage form
available on Laserfiche in the Metro folder. The following information must be completed
for Metro to provide video footage:
• Fill out the form, ensuring that you list the LRV number and/or platform station name.
• E-mail the request form to the current Metro Detail Clerk Typist AND the current Metro
Detail Detective. .
• Metro Transportation Detail staff will process the request. Only Metro Transportation
Detail personnel can submit video requests to Metro.
• Submit a separate request for LRV video if you are requesting both LRV and platform
video.
102 – Collisions Metro A Line
228 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Metro provides video in thirty-minute increments; provide the proper thirty-minute time
frame. If an additional thirty-minute increment is required, complete a second request
form.
Officers should not contact the ROC or A-Line Controllers directly for video footage or
status updates; this is coordinated by the Metro Transportation Detail staff. This protocol
ensures chain of custody and prevents video footage from being improperly released to
the public.
An officer filing a DR or sergeants completing administrative investigations should make
the video request immediately as this data is time sensitive. LRV video is only available
for approximately three days and platform video for approximately two weeks.
WATCH LOG ENTRIES – A-LINE INCIDENTS
Metro Transportation and Patrol Sergeants should enter a Watch Log entry for all violent
crime, use of force incidents, LRV collisions, any incident that delays an LRV for an
extended length of time, or any other significant incident that occurs along the A-Line.
Utilize the title, A-Line Incidents, under the Event Type drop down bar. A use of force
incident should have a Watch Log entry in both Use of Force and A-Line Incidents
separately.
WARDLOW STATION SWEEPS
LRV operators are required to conduct a sweep of all LRV cars prior to retiring the LRV
to Division 11. The LRV conductor is required to exit the LRV at the Wardlow Station and
ensure each LRV car is void of passengers. If a passenger is on board and refuses to
exit, the operator is required to ask for assistance from Metro Security Officers or law
enforcement. The ROC will call LBPD Dispatch for assistance and Long Beach Police
response will be as follows:
• 0600 to 0130 hours – Metro Transportation Detail officers shall be dispatched to
assist the LRV operator. If a Metro Transportation Detail officer is not available, a
patrol officer can be dispatched to assist.
• After 0130 hours and up to 0600 hours – Metro Transit Security Officers should
already be on scene to assist the operators with their sweeps. Should the passenger
refuse to exit the LRV for the Metro Transit Security Officers, the ROC will call Long
Beach Police Dispatch for assistance. A patrol officer will be dispatched to assist the
LRV operator as a Priority 2 call for service. The call should be handled like any other
business requesting law enforcement assistance.
• Sweep Staging – A request from the ROC to pre-stage a unit for a sweep should not
be honored after 0130 hours.
METRO BUS LINES TRAVELING THROUGH THE CITY OF LONG BEACH
The LASD Transit Services Bureau has maintained responsibility for incidents, but not
Metro bus collisions within the City of Long Beach. An LBPD patrol officer should be
dispatched as the primary unit to handle any Metro bus collision within the City of Long
Beach.
102 – Collisions Metro A Line
229 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Currently, Metro has two bus lines that operate through the City of Long Beach. They stop
at the Transit Gallery on 1st Street between Long Beach Boulevard and Pine Avenue, and
on 7th Street across from the Long Beach Veterans Administration Medical Center (5901
E. 7th Street). Metro will contact LASD for incidents involving these bus lines. If LASD
has a lengthy response, LBPD patrol officers may be called to assist or handle the
incident.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 103 Public Transportation Safety
Revised March 2021
PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION SAFETY
Law Enforcement Officers must be aware of the dangers they may encounter while
conducting law enforcement duties involving the Metro A-Line and Long Beach Transit.
To keep themselves and the public safe, it is critical for officers to stay alert and follow
safety precautions specific to the Metro A-Line trains and platforms and Long Beach
Transit buses.
Metro A-Line
The following guidelines will help to ensure the safety of officers and persons on the Metro
platform or Metro Light Rail Vehicle (LRV) during law enforcement action:
• Exercise extreme caution when taking law enforcement action on a Metro platform
and on-board of a moving LRV.
• Always be alert and aware of your surroundings, footing, and the ingress/egress of
passengers on the platform.
• When an LRV is approaching the platform, always stand behind the yellow line, and if
possible, in the middle of the platform. DO NOT walk over the yellow line or approach
the LRV until it has come to a complete stop and the doors open.
• The safest location to contact a suspect or person to be detained is in the middle of
the station platform.
• When contacting or detaining a subject(s), officers should guide them away from the
LRV before beginning an investigation or dialogue and have them sit down on a bench
in the center of the station platform.
• A push, slip or fall onto the tracks could result in contact with the electrified contact
rail, or the possibility of being struck by an oncoming train.
In emergency situations officers may request to call the Metro Rail Operations Control
(ROC). This allows the ROC to advise incoming train operators to either hold outside the
platform or to enter slowly, keeping the train doors closed upon arrival at the platform.
Long Beach Transit
When contacting subject(s) on a bus:
• Be aware of tripping hazards, obstacles, and passing traffic.
• Before contacting subject(s) on a bus, ask the driver to do the following:
− Open all bus doors
− Lower the bus if appropriate
− Turn on the inside bus lights if it is dark
103 Public Transportation Safety
231 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
− Turn off the bus power if the subject(s) in question are displaying violent
tendencies or appear agitated
• Direct the subject(s) to step off the bus and guide the subject(s) to a safe area away
from traffic and other customers.
• Consider asking the subject(s) to sit at the bus bench if appropriate.
• Consider asking the driver to close the bus doors and leave the area if appropriate.
If the subject(s) refuses to exit the bus and is agitated or violent:
• Direct other passengers to exit the bus if possible.
• If needed, request the driver to lower the bus, open the doors, turn on the lights, turn
off the bus power, and exit the bus.
There is a potential for danger with every contact in a public transportation environment.
The actions and positions taken by an officer will vary according to the type of situation.
Knowledge of the Metro A-line and Long Beach Transit operations can assist the officer
in pre-planning their approach with subjects in these unique environments.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
103 Public Transportation Safety
232 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 104 – Crimes in International Waters
REVISED January 2004
CRIMES IN INTERNATIONAL WATERS
INTRODUCTION
In the spring of 2003, Carnival Cruise Lines began berthing its ships in the City of Long
Beach at a new terminal facility next to the Queen Mary. Since these ships travel to and
return from ports outside the United States, we will be faced with law enforcement issues
we have not had to deal with in the past. This department will receive an increasing
number of calls for service to respond to the cruise ship terminal to investigate assaults,
domestic violence, sex crimes, thefts, drug offenses and other violations.
In dealing with crimes at sea, location of the ship at the time the offense occurred is of
critical importance. It must be determined if the ship was in international waters or within
the jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach.
JURISDICTION
The jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach extends to the breakwater. The jurisdiction of
the State of California extends to three-mile belts seaward from the mainland and around
the perimeter of each of the islands. If a crime begins within the three-mile limit, this
department has full jurisdiction to investigate and make arrests. If the crime occurs
outside that three-mile limit, the jurisdiction falls to the Federal Bureau of Investigation
(FBI). For example, if a crime occurs mid-way between Long Beach and Catalina, the FBI
has jurisdiction. If the crime occurs within three miles of Catalina, the Los Angeles County
Sheriff’s Department has jurisdiction.
While the ships are in international waters or the territorial waters of another country (in
this case Mexico), the United States may exercise extraterritorial jurisdiction if certain
criteria is met. International law recognizes five theories of jurisdiction under which a
country is permitted to exercise extraterritorial criminal jurisdiction.
• Territorial jurisdiction, both subject and objective, based on the location where the
offense is committed or the effects of the act
• Nationality jurisdiction, based on the nationality of the offender
• Protective jurisdiction, based on the protection of the nation's interest, security, and
integrity
• Universal jurisdiction, which amounts to physical custody of the offender
• Passive personality jurisdiction, based on the nationality of the victim
103 – Crimes in International Waters
233 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Most of Carnival Cruise Lines ships travel south to Mexican ports. While cruising in either
direction, the ships are usually about thirty (30) miles off shore. It is imperative for officers
responding to a call for service to ascertain the time of the crime’s occurrence as close
as possible so that the ships position can be fixed by longitude and latitude coordinates.
The ship logs its coordinates and speed at regular intervals to assist in determining the
ships location at a given time.
Carnival Cruise Lines will contact the FBI directly if they believe the crime occurred in
international waters. The FBI may decline to respond due to the minor nature of the crime.
If FBI declines, our department may be called to conduct an investigation.
INVESTIGATION, REPORTING & INCARCERATION
If called, and it is determined that the crime was in-fact committed in international waters,
investigate the seriousness of the crime as to loss, violence, injuries, political
ramifications, etc. If warranted, take a courtesy report to be forwarded to the FBI for
consideration of presentation to the U.S. Attorney. Interview and interrogate all victims,
witnesses and suspects as thoroughly as possible, as they will be from all over the country
and difficult to interview at a later time.
Do not make an arrest, except as a last resort, and then only as a detainee for the FBI.
Keep in mind that the federal judicial system is not equipped to handle or house juvenile
suspects. We may be asked to assist in detaining a juvenile suspect even on cases being
handled by the FBI. LBPD can only detain minors for a maximum of six hours. The FBI
will have to make arrangements with Los Padrinos to detain a minor for a longer period
of time.
RESOURCES
• Carnival Cruise Lines Security is located in Miami, Florida, and can be contacted at
(305) 406-5011
• Agent Deirdre Emmes, FBI – Long Beach Office, is the specialist in “crimes at sea”
and can be reached at (562) 590-6657. The 24-hour FBI Duty Agent can be reached
at (310) 477-6565
• The U.S. Coast Guard Search And Rescue (SAR) Center can be reached at (310)
732-2046, to provide a ship’s location offshore, if given the coordinates
CONCLUSION
Officers should be very careful in making arrests for crimes occurring in international
waters and should do so only as a last resort with intention of transferring custody to the
FBI for federal prosecution.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
234 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 106 – Disturbing the Peace
REVISED March 2004
DISTURBING THE PEACE – PC 415
THE LAW
§415 PC – “Any of the following persons shall be punished by imprisonment in the
county jail for a period of not more than 90 days, a fine of not more than $400, or both
such imprisonment and fine.”
• Any person who unlawfully fights in a public place or challenges another person in a
public place to fight
• Any person who maliciously and willfully disturbs another person by loud and
unreasonable noise
• Any person who uses offensive words in a public place which are inherently likely to
produce an immediate violent reaction
“…Loud and Unreasonable Noise”
In determining what constitutes a "loud and unreasonable noise," the first step is to decide
if it is a "communication." "Communications" are words, shouting, or cheering that are
intended to convey ideas, and they are generally protected by the First Amendment
(freedom of speech). On the other hand, a loud noise such as a motorcycle revving at 3
a.m. is not communication. Neither is shouting which is done for the purpose of disruption.
A loud family fight during the night would also fit in this category. Although it technically
involves communication, it is not the type protected by the First Amendment.
“…Inherently Likely to Provoke an Immediate Violent Reaction”
Concerning what words are "inherently likely to provoke an immediate violent reaction"
under section 415 (3), courts held that profanity screamed by the defendant at his
neighbor as she drove by, was enough to constitute a violation. Additionally, racial slurs
would also likely suffice for prosecution under this section. The arrest report for an arrest
for offensive words needs to include the name of the offended party, the offensive words
communicated, the manner in which they were communicated, the reaction of the
offended party and any other acts that show the crime was malicious in nature.
Challenging an Officer to Fight and Offensive Words Directed at an Officer
On the other hand, if the "fighting words" are directed at a police officer, courts will
recognize that the officer is "required to exercise a higher degree of restraint than the
average citizen in reacting to verbal abuse." Obviously, if the officer is not in fact offended
106 – Disturbing the Peace
235 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
or provoked, there will be no violation. For example, at the scene of an accident a hostile
motorist calls an officer a "fucking asshole," and the officer is annoyed but does not feel
threatened or provoked in any way. However, a violation does occur if the officer feels
personally threatened such as when a non-arrested defendant expressly challenged the
officer to fight, and officer "felt it could turn into physical assault."
Disturbance of Peace with Unwilling Complaining Party
A police officer’s peace may be disturbed at a loud party if the officer can testify that the
noise was too loud as corroborated by evidence. The officer may make an arrest even if
the complaining party refuses to be a victim, however, the officer must then be prepared
to be a witness with corroborating evidence.
For example:
• At 0100 hours the noise was well above normal conversation levels and could easily
be heard 100’ away from the party location; or
• Neighbors were gathering outside at 0100 hours, looking at the party; or
• At 0100 hours there was bumper to bumper traffic because of party goers looking for
places to park
This does not mean that an arrest is called for in every situation. Officers are expected
to use good judgment and evaluate each situation on the basis of observable facts
Disturbance of Peace with Willing Complaining Party
Remember that a case is always stronger when a complaining party (CP) is willing to be
a victim. When dispatched to speak to a CP regarding a disturbance, always obtain their
name, address and full statement. Advise the CP that if the party cannot be quieted with
a warning that an arrest or citation will occur and the CP may be required to testify in
court.
The Report
When disturbance circumstances results in an arrest, the arrest report should indicate
any other conditions that affirm that the peace and quiet of the neighborhood has been
disturbed. Facts, which should appear in the report, include:
• Number and frequency of calls to the area
• Prior warnings, names of persons warned and names of officers giving prior warnings
• Homes in the vicinity have lights on at unusual hours as evidence of annoyance to
people who might normally be asleep
• Any pertinent statements from CPs
• Number of units required to handle the situation
Since malice is one of the elements of “disturbing the peace,” indication that the offence
was a continuing one would tend to establish the element. Officers should be alert for
any statement or other evidence that would tend to prove malice and incorporate this
information in the report.
106 – Disturbing the Peace
236 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
CONCLUSION
• Know the law
• Establish the elements of the offense
• Obtain names, addresses of victims and witnesses
• File a complete, concise report and include all information
• Don’t rely on your memory for later testimony
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
237 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 107 – Intoxilyzer 5000
REVISED February 2003
INTOXILYZER 5000 – BREATH INSTRUMENT
INTRODUCTION
The Intoxilyzer 5000 is designed to measure the percent of alcohol in blood through the
analysis of a person’s breath. It is widely accepted by the judicial system as a means of
documenting and determining the degree of alcohol intoxication.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Intoxilyzers operate on the principle of infrared energy (light) absorption, based on the
fact that alcohol absorbs infrared energy at a specific wavelength. It measures the degree
to which alcohol absorbs infrared energy; the more alcohol present, the greater the
absorption of infrared energy. A quartz lamp generates infrared energy that travels
through a single sample chamber containing the subject’s breath. Upon leaving the
sample chamber, a lens focuses the energy onto the chopper modulator containing three
optical filters that allow only specific infrared energy wavelengths to pass through. The
three wavelengths – one for alcohol, one for acetone and one for reference – are focused
into a infrared energy detector which converts the light into electrical impulses. An
electronic processor interprets the impulses and the percent of blood alcohol
concentration is displayed.
OPERATION
The intoxilyzer is fully automatic. By pushing a single button and inserting a card, the
intoxilyzer becomes operational. After the subject has blown into a clean mouthpiece
attached to the sample tube, test results, including date, time and instrument serial # are
printed on a three part evidence card. A complete test includes two subject tests that are
within 0.02% and three test blanks of 0.00%. If the test results are not within 0.02%, then
an additional card must be run. The procedure for operation is attached. Officers must
have two samples within 0.02% even if they are on separate cards. The Intoxilyzer
Precautionary Checklist must be completed for each subject tested. The test card is
stapled to the checklist and the test information must be placed into the user log. The
user log should be kept in the immediate vicinity of the intoxilyzer. All operators must be
trained and certified in its use by a licensed criminalist from the Crime Lab.
Deficient Sample
When the card reads “deficient sample,” this is not a sample and the test must be run
again. The machine will not differentiate between a deficient sample and regular test.
107 – Intoxilyzer
238 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Therefore it is up to the operator to make the distinction. Deficient sample cards must be
retained and included with the report.
If two valid subject tests cannot be obtained, either due to “deficient sample” or inability
of the subject taking the test, it will be considered a refusal unless the subject completes
another test, blood or urine.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
investigations Bureau
107 – Intoxilyzer
239 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
INTOXILYZER PRECAUTIONARY CHECKLIST
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBJECT LAST NAME FIRST INITIAL VIOLATION BOOKING NO.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PREPARING FOR TEST
1. ( ) Continuously observe the subject for twenty minutes prior to the test; during this time the
subject must not ingest alcoholic beverages or other fluids, regurgitate, vomit, eat or smoke,
2. ( ) Display is lit – instrument is to be left on at all times
3. ( ) Affix a new, clean mouthpiece to the breath tubing. Sanitary practices require a clean
mouthpiece for each subject tested. Prompt should read, “READY TO START.”
4. ( ) Momentarily depress the start button.
5. ( ) Insert card print side up attached edge in. Prompt should read, “INSERT CARD.”
6. ( ) Driving related offense require that the subject submit at least two breath samples that
agree within 0.020% BA (blood alcohol)
TEST PROCEDURE: FOLLOW DIRECTIONS ON THE DIGITAL DISPLAY
7. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed, the prompt should read “AIR BLANK ####”
8. ( ) Advise the subject to take a breath and blow into the mouthpiece until the tone stops.
The prompt should read “PLEASE BLOW INTO THE MOUTHPIECE UNTIL THE TONE
STOPS. PLEASE BLOW.”
9. ( ) If the sample is accepted the BA level will appear on the display. If not, follow the
prompt, “PLEASE BLOW” (Flashing “PLEASE BLOW” indicates an inadequate sample was
delivered. Have the subject blow again.”
10. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed. The prompt should read “AIR BLANK” ###”
11. ( ) Advise the subject to take a breath and blow into the mouthpiece until the tone stops.
Prompt should read, “PLEASE BLOW INTO THE MOUTHPIECE UNTIL THE TONE STOPS.
PLEASE BLOW.”
12. ( ) If the sample is accepted, the BA level will appear on the display. If not, follow
the prompt “PLEASE BLOW” (Flashing “PLEASE BLOW” indicates an inadequate sample
was delivered. Have the subject blow again.)
13. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed. The prompt should read “AIR BLANK ###”
14. ( ) IF the results of the two breath samples vary by more than .02%, repeat steps 11 ( ),
107 – Intoxilyzer
240 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
12 ( ), and 13 ( ).
15. ( ) Complete the card with; the subject’s name, Intoxilyzer unit number letter, time first
observed, operator’s name, location of instrument, attach the card to the precautionary
checklist.
16. ( ) Enter the following information in the appropriate Intoxilyzer log book with; the subject’s
name, instrument unit letter, date, time, operator’s name, and results. Complete the
precautionary checklist with; the operator’s name, photo #, date and unit letter.
17. ( ) Following proper sanitary practices, remove and discard the mouthpiece. The
instrument is to be left on.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
> <
>STAPLE STAPLE <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> ATTACH CARD <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
> <
>STAPLE STAPLE <
> <
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATOR OFFICER’S DID# DATE UNIT LETTER
241 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 108 – Special Incidents
REVISED October 2001
SPECIAL INCIDENTS
People are frequently injured accidentally, and while often there is no police related issue,
the police are called because of injury and/or property damage.
A complete "Special Incident" report shall be filed when certain incidents occur on City
property, whether or not an injury is sustained. These reports assist the City Attorney's
Office in the case of civil actions and also alert the City Department responsible for
reporting or correcting the property involved. A copy of this report is forwarded to the City
Attorney's office. An officer shall file a complete incident report entitled "Special Incident",
whenever dispatched to one of the following:
WHEN TO FILE A SPECIAL INCIDENT REPORT
• Any injury or non-injury accident, other than motor vehicle, which occurred on or in
any way involves City property; e.g., on streets, in parks, sidewalks, beaches, public
buildings, public trees, etc.
• Any injury or non-injury accident, other than motor vehicle, which occurred in the
harbor or marina area, such as boating accidents, injuries on piers, beaches, public
buildings, etc.
• Any injury or non-injury airplane accident or incident (see Training Bulletin 58 Aircraft
Accidents)
• Any injury where there is a possibility that such an injury was the result of criminal
means and a incident report was not filed
Note: Do not file a Special Incident Report on a motor vehicle accident. Any time vehicles
are in transit and an accident occurs, file a regular accident report.
Content of the Report
• The report should be composed on Long Beach Police Incident Report PD Form
2310.00(A). Use Crime Class Code "SPECACC", which is for Special
Accident/Incidents
• The information side of the form will include all data in the manner as a regular crime
report with the exception of the solvability factors and the MO portion. These boxes
will be left blank
• The narrative (body) portion of the report form will include all investigation conducted
by the officers: "How accident occurred, statements of witnesses, victims, etc." It
should include the responding paramedic unit or ambulance number, name of the
hospital and doctor, injuries sustained by the victim and treatment administered. The
108 – Special Incidents
242 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
doctor's observation should be included, if readily available. Officers should include
a statement from the victim regarding the incident and note whether the victim had
been drinking or not.
Private Property
A "Special Incident" report is not usually required if a person is injured on private property
such as in a residence, in a parochial school, schoolyard or private industrial property
(factory). However, if the officer feels there is a likelihood the City may become involved
civilly, a complete report entitled "Special Incident, Private Property", etc., should be
taken.
Discretion
Officers should use discretion. For example, a unit responds to a "man down" call and
finds an individual lying on the sidewalk. It appears that the man suffered a heart attack.
If officers feel that the subject sustained an injury from the fall, a "Special Incident" report
is in order. This will be of value to the City Attorney in case future civil action is filed. The
issue may be raised that the individual tripped on the sidewalk, injuring himself, causing
the attack. It is not uncommon to have a "Special Incident" filed under the above
circumstance and the person is later discovered to be victim of a strong-arm robbery.
Conclusion
• Know when a "Special Incident" Report is required
• File a complete report. List all the facts and conduct a complete investigation. (It is
difficult to go back six months later and obtain the facts) Try to locate witnesses and
include their statements
• Consult your sergeant when in doubt
REVIEW Responsibility
Patrol Bureau
243 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 111 – Juvenile Booking Procedures
REVISED September 2000
JUVENILE BOOKING PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to inform officers about the proper way to process
detained/arrested juveniles.
Booking Juveniles
All in custody juveniles, with the exception of some dependent and found children who
are described in Section 300 and 601 of the Welfare and Institution Code (WIC), shall be
taken to Youth Services Division at 1957 Pacific Avenue for processing.
Dependent Children (300 WIC) & Wards of the Court (601) WIC
Dependent and found children will NOT be temporarily housed in the Public Safety
Building or any other police facility, while awaiting final disposition by a County of Los
Angeles Department of Children and Family Services (DCFS) employee. All dependent
children as described in Section 300 WIC and taken into temporary custody under
authority of Section 305 WIC shall be delivered directly to DCFS in the manner prescribed
below.
• All found children who are in custody of the police may be released to their parent(s)
or legal guardian. If a parent or legal guardian cannot be found, the child shall be
released to DCFS. NOTE: Officers shall NOT allow a citizen who has found a
child to return the child to the parents. A police unit shall take charge of the
child
Police officers who take dependent children into custody must:
• Notify the Child Abuse Detail, Monday-Friday between 0700 – 1800 hours at 570-
7321. In the case of severe physical or sexual abuse, a Child Abuse Detective may
respond
• Notify Los Angeles County Child Abuse Hotline, 24-hour telephone number (800) 540-
4000, dial 9 (police only). Note the social worker’s name and the case reference
number and include in the narrative portion of the incident report
• Complete a Dependent Booking form and Arrest Report. All police reports should be
filed no later than end of watch and taken to 400 West Broadway as soon as possible
• Weekdays/Business hours 0900 – 1530: Dependent children shall be taken to DCFS,
4060 Watson Plaza Drive, Lakewood (562) 497-3500 or (562) 497-3776
111 – Juvenile Booking
244 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Give the DCFS Supervisor on duty the case reference number provided by the hotline
• If the officer is unable to obtain the case reference number while in the field, he/she
may transport the dependent to the facility and use their telephone to get the case
reference number
Non-business hours, holidays, weekends
• At this time there is no location in Long Beach to take dependent children after
weekday/business hours. After the officer calls the Child Abuse Hotline 800 number,
he/she shall call the on-duty hotline command post supervisor
− Sunday through Wednesday, contact the supervisor at (213) 639-4494
− Thursday through Saturday, the on-duty supervisor can be reached at (213) 639-
4492. Explain the abuse to the supervisor and he/she will make every attempt to
shorten the arrival time of a hotline caseworker
• If the officer can reach a relative of the dependent children who is willing to take
temporary custody, the on-duty supervisor has the authority to telephonically place
the dependent children. This is done by conducting a short background investigation
on the relative prior to giving permission for placement (this still requires a 300 WIC
booking)
300 WIC children who are taken by the Department of Children and Family Services
(DCFS), and not brought to 1957 Pacific, must still be processed through the booking
computer. These bookings may be accomplished in the booking facilities located at any
sub-station, the downtown Public Safety Building, or 1957 Pacific. Booking officers will
accept these bookings at 1957 Pacific and not refer officers to another facility for booking.
Wherever the booking is accomplished, arresting officers will be required to turn the
paperwork in at 400 West Broadway, as the Child Abuse unit will handle the processing.
300 WIC children who have warrants are to be brought through the front door of 1957
Pacific. Officers will contact the Youth Services officer at the front desk for further
direction. 300 WIC children shall not be detained with juveniles described as 601 WIC
violators, (incorrigibles, truants, runaways and juvenile loiterers) or 602 WIC violators
(violators of criminal laws). The arresting officers will keep 300 WIC children in constant
visual and auditory contact.
Officers will follow the procedures noted in Manual Section 7.1.25 (Protective Custody of
Dependents) for all 300 WIC children who do not have a warrant. On rare occasions
children under three years of age may have warrants. These children should not be
brought to 1957 Pacific. Officers will follow the procedures noted in Manual Section
7.1.25 when dealing with 300 WIC children under three years of age.
JUVENILE PRISONERS WHO CANNOT BE DETAINED AT 1957 PACIFIC
Juvenile prisoners cannot be booked at 1957 Pacific if the juvenile is:
• Intoxicated to such an extent that he/she poses an immediate threat to him/herself or
others (A juvenile who has been drinking but is cleared for booking by a doctor is the
exception)
111 – Juvenile Booking
245 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Psychotic, i.e. within the scope of 5150 of the WIC.
• Under the influence of PCP
• In need of immediate medical care at a hospital emergency room
• In need of continuing medical care or treatment
• Suicidal
• One who presents a physical control problem
• One who requires special handling, which may exceed the abilities of detention
personnel, i.e. a juvenile with serious medical or mental problems that significantly
increase department liability. If in doubt, call the Youth Services Division at 570-1425
If officers detain any of the above mentioned juveniles, they are to be transported to a
hospital or county facility according to Manual Section 6.5.5.2 (Arrestees - Emergency or
Injured) or Training Bulletin 62.
Arresting or transporting officers are responsible for searching their prisoners. All
arrested subjects shall be handcuffed while being transported to Youth Services Division
and during the booking process or until they are placed in a holding room.
Note: The only reason to un-cuff a juvenile outside of the holding room will be to fingerprint
or release the juvenile to a parent or legal guardian, or to facilitate the juvenile in signing
a citation or completing a writing sample.
• All officers who enter the booking area at the Youth Services Building are required to
secure their weapons in one of the gun lockers provided
• Officers will then enter the detention area. They will first pass through the 601 WIC
detention enroute to booking. Officers will ensure that 601 WIC violators do not have
direct contact with 602 WIC juveniles (contact being defined as communication either
verbal or by hand signals)
• Officers will contact a juvenile detective as soon as possible. The on duty Youth
Services Sergeant (or a YSD detective if no sergeant is on duty) will evaluate the
arrest and approve the booking
• If the booking is approved, officers will fill out a county booking form, a juvenile booking
form, and inventory the juvenile’s property.
• Detectives will again search the juvenile prior to placing him/her in a holding room. All
officers will follow the searching procedures noted in Manual Section 6.5.3
(Responsibility for Searching Prisoners) and 6.5.4 (Searching of Arrestees)
Intoxicated Juveniles (Alcohol and/or Drugs)
• Juveniles who are intoxicated from alcohol and/or drugs will be taken to the City’s
contract hospital for medical clearance before booking and before being released to
their parents or guardians, or to Juvenile Hall
• Juveniles who have possibly ingested dangerous quantities of a legal or any quantity
of an illegal substance will also be taken to the City’s contract hospital for evaluation
• Officers are reminded that some drugs that are taken may not take effect right away.
All juveniles who are arrested for intoxication must be constantly monitored for
possible life-threatening changes
111 – Juvenile Booking
246 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• If there is any doubt as to whether a juvenile’s level of intoxication is a danger or not,
the juvenile will be transported immediately to the City’s contract hospital. The above
guidelines are mandatory per Section 1431, Title 15, California Code of Regulations
Medical Care of Juveniles
• Arresting officers are responsible for the proper medical care of the juveniles they
detain. Juveniles who are bleeding, have open wounds, are complaining of pain, or
who are showing signs of medical distress must immediately be taken to the city
contract hospital (prior to booking)
• Juveniles who have any communicable diseases should be cited out whenever
possible. Officers will notify their immediate supervisor of the exposure and file
appropriate paperwork, if necessary
• Occasionally, a juvenile may need to be admitted to a hospital or there is a need for
continuous medical treatment of some type. If the juvenile being detained has
committed a murder or serious felony, he/she will need to be booked at USC Medical
Center. Juveniles who have committed minor offenses will be released, not booked.
Call Youth Services Division for guidance as soon as possible when these situations
occur
• The juvenile supplemental booking form contains a box regarding the juvenile’s
medical condition and the juvenile’s drug and/or alcohol consumption. These boxes
must be filled out prior to booking. Officers will notify the booking personnel of the
minor’s medical condition prior to booking
• Booking personnel are responsible for determining if the juvenile’s medical condition
is considered unacceptable for booking. It is the arresting officer’s responsibility to
ensure care and, if necessary, transportation of the juvenile
REVIEW Responsibility
The Investigations Bureau will monitor compliance with this Training Bulletin.
Jerome E. Lance
Chief of Police
Effective Date—September 27, 2000
247 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 112 – Juvenile Procedures Truancy
REVISED April 2000
JUVENILE PROCEDURES: TRUANCY
INTRODUCTION:
A particular aspect in dealing with youthful offenders is that they are capable of committing
"status offenses", which are acts or behaviors that are usually legal if committed by an
adult. Truancy, or an unauthorized absence from school, is an example of a status
offense.
Truancy Defined: California Education Code §48260
Any pupil subject to compulsory full-time education or to compulsory continuation
education who is absent from school without valid excuse three full days in one school
year or tardy or absent for more than any 30-minute period during the school day without
a valid excuse on three occasions in one school year, or any combination thereof, is a
truant and shall be reported to the attendance supervisor or to the superintendent of the
school district.
Enforcement of Truancy Laws: California Education Code §48261
Any pupil who has once been reported as a truant and who is again absent from school
without a valid excuse for one or more days, or tardy on one or more days, shall again be
reported as a truant to the attendance supervisor or the superintendent of the district.
Habitual Truant: California Education Code §48262
Any pupil is deemed a habitual truant who has been reported as a truant three or more
times per school year. The appropriate district officer or employee must make a
conscientious effort to hold at least one conference with a parent or guardian of the pupil
and the pupil himself, after the filing of either of the reports required by Section 48260 or
Section 48261.
OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITY California Education Code §48264
The attendance supervisor or his or her designee, a peace officer, a school administrator
or his or her designee, or a probation officer may arrest or assume temporary custody,
during school hours, of any minor subject to compulsory full-time education or to
compulsory continuation education found away from his or her home and who is absent
from school without valid excuse within the county, city, or city and county, or school
district. There are specific penalties outlined in § 48264.5, including mandatory truancy
prevention counseling, community service, suspension of driving privilege and fines.
112 – Truancy
248 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• An officer may transport the minor to the school in which he/she is enrolled during the
current school year, during school hours, while school is in session.
• Or, the minor may be transported to the truancy abatement center operated by the
school district. This option is best used when the student is truant from a district
outside of Long Beach. (Communications will have the current location of a truancy
abatement center on file)
• The officer will complete a report noting where the minor was observed, (truancy does
not have to occur in a public place) and submit the report to the attendance supervisor
• In the case of a habitual truant, the officer will follow the same procedure and add the
notation that the pupil should be referred to the School Attendance Review Board at
the individual school, or run by the school district.
Long Beach Municipal Code §9.58.020 (Truancy or daytime curfew)
Another tool Officers have to address the problem of truancy is Long Beach Municipal
Code Section 9.58.020. “It is unlawful for any minor under the age of eighteen years,
who is subject to compulsory education or to compulsory continuation education, alone
or in concert with others, to loiter, idle, wander, stroll or play in or upon the public streets,
highways, roads, alleys, parks, playgrounds, and other public grounds, public places,
public buildings, places of amusement and eating places, vacant lots or any place open
to the public during the hours of eight-thirty a.m. to one- thirty p.m. on days when said
minor’s school is in session.”
Youths violating this may be detained and cited. Officers must ensure the youth is not
away from school for one of the seven exceptions listed in the Section. Careful application
of the Section will help prevent the courts from eliminating this useful tool.
Seven Exceptions
• His/her parent, guardian, or other adult person having the care and custody of the
minor accompanies the minor
• The minor is on an emergency errand directed by his/her parent or guardian or other
adult person having the care and custody of the minor
• The minor is going to or coming from their place of gainful employment or in a public
place incidental to their place of employment
• The minor is going or coming to or from a medical appointment
• The minor has permission to leave campus for lunch or other school-related activity
and has in his/her possession a valid, school-issued, off campus permit
• The minor is in a place connected or required with respect to a business, trade,
profession or occupation in which the minor is lawfully engaged
• The minor is not required by his or her school vacation, track or curriculum schedule
to be in school
Whether the minor is cited, transported home or transported back to school, he/she shall
be released to a responsible adult.
REVIEW Responsibility
112 – Truancy
249 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Investigations Bureau
250 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 113 – Fraudulent Document Report
REVISED April 2001
FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT
The Fraudulent Document Report, PD form 3132.002(D), revised 10/31/97, will be the
original report filed in our Records Division and presented to the District Attorney for
criminal filings.
The Fraudulent Document Report will be used to report all check violations (non-sufficient
funds and account-closed checks and forgeries). However, there will be other forgeries
and fraudulent documents that will be filed on a regular Police Department Incident
Report; e.g., forgery of narcotics prescriptions, forgery of driver’s licenses, pink slips, etc.
Most business people file their check cases directly with the Forgery/Fraud Detail,
however, on occasion, patrol officers will be dispatched to assist the recipient of a
dishonored check.
FORGERY - ELEMENTS
• Every person who, with the intent to defraud, signs the name of another or of a
fictitious person knowing he/she has no authority to do so, or who
• Alters or counterfeits any documents which can be negotiated for profit, or who
• Utters or passes as true and genuine any forged, altered or counterfeit document, is
guilty of a felony
Laws of Arrest
Forgery is always a felony and an arrest can be made on probable cause.
Means of Accomplishing Forgery
• Signing the true name of another person, or
• Signing a fictitious name as endorser, maker or payee
• Passing a forged check, knowing it to be altered, forged, counterfeit or of a fictitious
making in the suspect’s own name as maker or endorser
Alters by:
• Raising the amount by erasure, eradication, or addition
• Changing the name of payee or maker
• Okayer’s name or initials changed or added
• Changing of date
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
251 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Utters or passes:
• Presents known forged item to be cashed to obtain money, merchandise or services
• No writing on the forged documents by suspect is necessary
• Knowledge of forgery can be deducted by circumstances supporting probable cause
PASSING OR POSSESSION OF UNFINISHED CHECKS, MONEY ORDERS OR
TRAVELERS CHECKS
§475(a) PC – Every person who possesses or receives, with the intent to pass or facilitate
the passage or utterance of any forged, altered or counterfeit items, or completed items
contained in subdivision (d) of §470 with intent to defraud, knowing the same to be forged,
altered or counterfeit is guilty of forgery.
§475(b) PC – Every person who possesses any blank or unfinished check, note bank bill,
money order, or traveler’s check, whether real or fictitious, with the intention of completing
the same or the intention of facilitating the completion of the same, in order to defraud
any person, is guilty of forgery.
§475(c) PC – Every person who possesses any completed check, money order, traveler’s
check, warrant or county order, whether real or fictitious, with the intent to utter or pass
or facilitate the utterance or passage of the same, in order to defraud any person is guilty
of forgery.
EVIDENCE
Primary items of evidence in any check case are:
• Check
• Invoice
• Forged document
Secondary items of evidence
• Driver’s license that includes signature and photo
• Other items of identification in suspect’s possession
• Description and license number of suspect’s vehicle which may lead to identification
or location of the suspect
Other items of evidence
• The vehicle used may be impounded at the discretion of the officer if the suspect is
arrested for a felony
• Handwriting Exemplars
– When an arrest is made for forgery, the Jail Division will request a handwriting
exemplar card (PD form 3134.001) be completed and turned over to the
Forgery/Fraud Detail
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
252 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
– If the suspect(s) refuses the exemplar, the investigator assigned can then request
a judge to order the suspect to fill out the exemplar
NON-SUFFICIENT FUND CHECKS (NSF CHECKS)
Fraudulent checks of this type are commonplace and are reported to the Police
Department in large numbers. Not all “NSF” checks are criminal offenses, and victims do
not consider them to be crimes in the same manner they regard theft or bunco/fraud.
§476 (a) Felony and (b) Misdemeanor PC – Elements of NSF
Any person who willfully and with the intent to defraud, makes or passes any check,
knowing at the time that there are insufficient funds in the account or knowing the account
to be closed, is guilty of a felony if the value exceeds $200.00.
• The arrest of a suspect for investigation of felony NSF checks can be made where
there is probable cause to believe that the suspect has any number of checks out-
standing which would together exceed a total of $200
− The probable cause exists when checks are from the same suspect to the same
victim (For example, a $100.00 NSF check written to Vons and a $100.00 NSF
check to Ralph’s would constitute two misdemeanors. In order constitute a felony,
the loss to either Vons or Ralph’s would have to be in excess of $200.00)
− The officer receives information from the Forgery/Fraud Detail or Records Division
regarding other checks written by the suspect and reported to the Police
Department
• A rule of thumb for criminal NSF check cases is the fact that something of value should
change hands at the time the check is accepted by the victim (cash, goods, or
services)
• The act of making and/or presenting a check or checks must be done in the presence
of the arresting citizen if the value is $200.00 or less as with any misdemeanor arrest
• Automobile dealers who complain of a purchase of a vehicle with a NSF check shall
be referred to the Forgery/Fraud Detail
CHECKS NOT HANDLED BY THE POLICE DEPARTMENT (CIVIL OR OTHER
AGENCIES)
• Rent Checks – A NSF check received by the landlord will be handled civilly, as if the
tenant had never paid his rent for that period (Unless the check is for the 1st month’s
rent, in this case file a fraudulent document report and refer to forgery fraud)
• Two-Party Checks – Issued by one party to another who in turn cashes with a third
party, forgeries included
• Payroll or Any Check Issued for Wages – Is by law the jurisdiction of the California
Labor Commission and must be reported to that agency. However, forgeries of such
checks are still handled by this Department
• Post Dated Checks – The suspect has, in effect, told the victim that there are
insufficient funds in the account at the time the check is presented
• Checks Issued to Make Payment of an Existing Debt – These are in the same
category as the rent checks. Such checks represent non-payment and are civil
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
253 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• NSF Checks 90 Days Old From the Date of Issue – This policy is based on the
premise that 90 days is sufficient time for a victim who is primarily interested in
prosecution to make a report
• Checks Accepted in Payment of an Illegal Activity – These include gambling
obligations and other such debts
• Checks on Out of State Banks – These can be prosecuted by using a legal form
known as a Protest Form (§476 (c) PC) however, this process is complicated and time
consuming and is only used in cases involving insistent victims or for serious felony
cases involving large losses
• United States Treasury Checks – These are investigated exclusively by the US
Secret Service
• Jurisdiction – Checks accepted outside Long Beach must be reported to the
appropriate jurisdiction
• United States Postal Money Orders – These should be reported to the Postal
Inspector
• Stop Payment Checks – Considered to be civil, unless intent to defraud can be
shown
• Checks Accepted in Bars (Forgeries Excluded)
REPORTING PROCEDURES
• Suspect not in custody – Most NSF checks are reported by the victims directly to
the Forgery Detail either by mail or by personally bringing them to the Detail. If an
officer is dispatched to assist a citizen who has received a dishonored check, and it is
of an infrequent occasion, the officer should assist the individual in filling out the
Fraudulent Document form, PD form 3132.002 (D), and attach the dishonored check
to the form. The form should then be forwarded to the Forgery/Fraud Detail where it
will be examined by detectives, assigned a number, and processed
• Suspect in Custody – There will be times when the officer is dispatched to a bank or
store where a suspect has been detained for attempting to pass a stolen and forged
check. At this time, the officer should complete PD form 2132.002 (D) and process it
like any other incident report. If the crime occurs while the Forgery/Fraud Detail is
working, the officer can call with questions
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT
The report form has numbered spaces corresponding with the below numbered
instructions. When filling out the Fraudulent Document Report, please print or type the
required information in BLACK INK.
NOTE: Completed Fraudulent Document reports to be sent to the Long Beach
Police Department MUST be on the PINK form designated as the original
report copy.
SECTION 1: INCIDENT INFORMATION
1) DR: Leave this space blank. A DR number will be added to the
report by LBPD.
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
254 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
2) SUPP: Leave this space blank.
3) DATE RPTD: The time report is mailed or hand delivered to LBPD.
4) TIME RPTD: The time report is mailed or hand delivered to LBPD.
5) CRIME CLASS: Leave this space blank. The specific crime title will be
added
to the report by LBPD.
6) LOCATION OF
OCCURRENCE: Street address where the check was accepted.
7) CITY: City where the check was accepted.
8) THROUGH 11: Leave these spaces blank.
12) OCCURRED ON
DATE: Specific time that the check was accepted.
13) TIME: Specific time that the check was accepted.
14) THROUGH 17: Leave these spaces blank.
SECTION 2: PERSON/BUSINESS
18) INVOLVEMENT: “V” – victim business.
19) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date the business accepted the check.
20) NAME: Business name.
21) THROUGH 31: Leave these spaces blank.
32) THROUGH 36: Victim address, city, state, zip, phone number, if the
victim is a firm or business, list the address of the firm
or business.
37) BUSINESS NAME: Leave Blank
38) TYPE OF BUSINESS: Type of business when victim is a firm or business.
(Example, record store, pizza parlor, department store,
food take-out, etc.). If victim is an individual, list
occupation such as doctor, plumber, laborer, lawyer,
etc., do not list self-employed.
39) THROUGH 42: Leave blank.
43) BUSINESS PHONE: The phone number of the business where the check
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
255 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
was accepted.
44) SUSPECT: Leave blank.
45) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: Leave blank.
46) REMARKS: The days and hours that the business is opened and
closed.
SECTION 3: PERSON/BUSINESS
47) INVOLVEMENT: R/P = Reporting person who is filling out this form
48) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date that the R/P is filling out this form.
49) THROUGH 65: The full name of R/P, giving last name first and all
other identifying information must be complete.
66) BUSINESS NAME: The name of the business that the R/P works for.
67) TYPE OF BUSINESS: Type of business if victim is a firm or business.
(Example, record store, pizza parlor, department store,
food take-out, etc.). If victim is an individual, list
occupation such as doctor, plumber, laborer, lawyer,
etc., do not list self-employed.
68) THROUGH 72: The business address where the R/P works, city,
state, zip code, and phone number.
73) SUSPECT INFO: Leave blank.
74) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: Leave blank.
75) REMARKS: The days and hours that the R/P works and can be
reached for further investigation.
SECTION 4: PERSON/BUSINESS
76) INVOLVEMENT: “S” = for suspect that passed the bad check.
77) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date that the suspect passed the bad check.
78) THROUGH 94: The name and address used by the suspect while
trying to pass the bad check. List physical description
of the person who cashed or presented this check.
Driver’s license number or California identification card
used by the suspect. List social security number, credit
card numbers, employer identification, etc.
95) THROUGH 101: Leave blank.
113 – Fraudulent Document Report
256 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
102) SUSPECT INFO: List age of suspect and clothing worn by the suspect.
103) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: List any physical oddities/ characteristics of the
suspect.
104) REMARKS: List other information pertinent to this check or the
suspect. Indicate if contact has been made with
suspect and the results.
SECTION 5: FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT
This section requires the acceptor’s name, the person who accepted the check, address,
and phone number, working hours, business address, sex, race and date of birth. This
must be completed.
The check information must be completed. Leave Package # blank.
Any identification used by suspect and vehicle used must be completed.
Any additional information concerning the passing of the check or of the suspect.
SECTION 6: VEHICLE SECTION
Generally, the same information as contained above in section 5.
COPIES OF THE PINK FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT FORMS CAN
BE OBTAINED BY SENDING A SELF-ADDRESSED STAMPED ENVELOPE
TO:
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
FORGERY DETAIL
400 WEST BROADWAY, Rm. 342
LONG BEACH, CA 90802
ANY QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE COMPLETION OF THIS FORM PLEASE
CONTACT THE FORGERY DETAIL AT (562) 570-7330.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
257 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
REVISED November 2022
CONDUCTED ELECTRICAL WEAPON (CEW)
INTRODUCTION
The Conducted Electrical Weapon (CEW) is a handheld, battery-powered device. It is
designed to override the sensory and motor nervous functions of the central nervous
system, and temporarily incapacitate potentially violent subjects by creating
uncontrollable muscular contractions. The CEW is a force option and is governed by the
Use of Force policy outlined in the Long Beach Police Department Policy Manual. While
other manufacturers of CEWs exist, the TASER CEW (AXON Enterprise, Inc.) is the only
device approved for deployment by the Long Beach Police Department.
NEURO-MUSCULAR INCAPACITATION (NMI)
TASER CEW technology is effective because it creates neuro-muscular incapacitation.
Unlike traditional impact weapons that focus mainly on pain compliance by overloading a
subject’s sensory nerves, the CEW affects the sensory and motor functions of the nervous
system. When the CEW is deployed, the subject experiences pain (through the sensory
nerves) while the subject’s muscles involuntarily contract due to the electrical pulse, thus
overloading the motor nerve functions.
This incapacitating effect is ONLY present while the CEW is being deployed and cycling.
It is for this reason that while a violent subject is incapacitated by the effects of the CEW,
and if it is reasonably safe to do so, the cover officer(s) should attempt to handcuff the
subject. Doing so may reduce the need for additional cycles, reduce the likelihood the
subject will roll during the cycle, and reduce the potential of injury to the officers because
the subject is incapacitated ONLY during the cycle.
ELECTRICAL OUTPUT OF THE TASER CEW
Neuro-muscular incapacitation (NMI) is achieved by the electrical output delivered from
the CEW. The CEW operates at a high peak voltage of 50,000 volts. This high voltage
operation only occurs when the electrical arc is required to jump a gap such as between
the electrodes on the end of the CEW, or when a probe lodges in loose clothing and must
jump the gap into the body. When traveling across the human body, the peak voltage
drops to approximately 1,200 volts.
When considering the effects of electricity on the human body, it is critical to understand
that amperage is dangerous and not voltage. Low voltage can be lethal if the amperage
115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
258 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
is high enough. However, high voltage will not injure a person if the amperage is low. The
CEW operates at an average current of 0.0021 amps.
The CEW can only be effective if both probes attach to the subject (skin or clothing). The
electricity must be able to flow between the probes to deliver an electrical charge and will
generally follow the path of least resistance. Generally, the greater the spread between
the probes on the target, the greater the effectiveness the CEW will have. Exposure to
water will not cause electrocution or increase the pulse generated by the device. The
electrical charge is fixed inside the CEW and will not significantly change with varying
environmental conditions.
The electrical charge of the CEW can arc through most clothing or other loose material,
including some bullet resistant vests. The electrical charge from the CEW will generally
not pass to others in contact with the subject unless contact is made directly between or
on the probes, or the wires are touched.
CARTRIDGE DEPLOYMENT VS. DRIVE-STUN
The CEW is capable of being deployed by either firing the probes from a distance or
delivering a “drive-stun,” with the cartridge removed, by pressing the end of the CEW into
contact with the subject’s body. The cartridges manufactured by AXON are color coded
to signify the type and distance of probe deployment available.
COLOR DISTANCE PROBE TYPE WHO SHOULD DEPLOY
Solid Blue 21 Feet Training Training Use Only - No Deployment
Solid Yellow 15 Feet Standard Civilian Use Only – No Deployment
Solid Green 25 Feet Extended/Heavier Any CEW Trained Officer
Solid Orange 35 Feet Extended/Heavier SWAT Officer
Cartridge Deployment
Firing the probes into the body of a subject is usually the preferred option for various
reasons. Even a close or point-blank range firing of the cartridge at the subject allows the
officer to disengage while still delivering the effects of the CEW for the full five seconds.
It also allows the officer the option of delivering a drive-stun away from the probes with
the cartridge still attached to create NMI.
When firing a cartridge at a subject, it is critical to remember that the 15, 21, and 25-foot
cartridges propel the bottom probe at an 8-degree downward angle. This downward angle
115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
259 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
contributes to approximately a 12-inch probe spread for each 7 feet of standoff distance.
A 12-inch distance between probes (“probe spread”) is optimal to reliably create NMI. A
probe spread under 12 inches may not create NMI, and probe spreads 4 inches or less
typically create pain effect only.
Drive-Stun
If a cartridge is not attached to the CEW, a drive-stun may be delivered to the subject.
However, the drive-stun feature will not create NMI. If used in this mode, the CEW should
be considered a pain compliance weapon only. Additionally, the drive-stun option is not
as effective because it is sometimes difficult to maintain contact with a combative subject.
Often, numerous drive-stuns must be delivered before a subject’s resistance can be
overcome, and a drive-stun deployment will usually result in more significant “signature”
marks on a subject’s body.
TARGET AREAS
Officers should avoid intentionally targeting sensitive areas of the body such as the head,
neck, upper torso/chest area, groin, or known pre-existing injury areas without legal
justification. Experts have identified the dart-to-heart distance as being the key
determining factor in whether the CEW can affect the heart. The further the CEW dart is
away from the heart, the lower the risk of affecting the heart.
When facing a subject, it is recommended that an officer deploy the CEW at the upper
abdominal area or below. By lowering the point of aim to the lower torso on the front of
the body by about four inches, the potential for NMI of the core muscles is often increased
by splitting the beltline of the body and targeting larger muscle groups. Aiming for the
lower torso reduces the risk of hitting some sensitive body areas and increases the dart-
to-heart safety margin distance.
A subject’s back is the most preferred target area when reasonably practicable because
it contains larger muscle groups and reduces the risk of hitting sensitive body areas. The
preferred target zone on the back begins just below the neck and extends all the way
down the legs. Additionally, bulky and loose-fitting clothing can create too large of a gap
for the electricity to jump, causing the CEW to be ineffective. Generally, the back is an
area where the clothing fits closer to the body and will minimize the potential for clothing
disconnect.
The following image illustrates the preferred target areas. The shaded areas are
preferred, while the lightly colored areas should be avoided.
115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
260 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS OF THE CEW
Although low, cardiac risk to a subject from a CEW exposure is possible. Officers should
avoid repeated or continuous exposures unless justified. Multiple applications or
continuous cycling of the CEW resulting in an exposure longer than 15 seconds (whether
continuous or cumulative) may increase the risk of serious injury or death and should be
avoided.
Officers should apply the CEW for only one standard cycle and then evaluate the situation
before applying any subsequent cycles. If the first application of the CEW appears to be
ineffective in gaining control of an individual, the officer should consider certain factors
before additional applications of the CEW, including:
• Whether the probes are making proper contact.
• Whether the individual has the ability and has been given a reasonable opportunity to
comply.
• Whether verbal commands, other force options or tactics may be more effective.
The use of multiple CEWs against a single subject should be avoided unless there is a
reasonable belief that the need to control the individual outweighs the potential increased
risk posed by multiple applications.
BATTERY LIFE/OPERATION
The TASER CEW operates on a Performance Power Magazine (PPM) manufactured by
AXON. This PPM contains three 3-volt lithium energy cells. The PPM has a 10-year shelf
115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon
261 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
life and will provide approximately 500 full 5-second cycles in normal environmental
conditions.
Upon turning the CEW to the “on” position, the remaining percentage of battery life will
display on the monitor under the rear fixed sights. A functioning battery should be
considered safe for duty use when the remaining battery life displays between 99% to
20%. When the battery life drops below 20%, an officer should bring the CEW to the
Advanced Officer Training Cadre to receive a replacement PPM. Batteries with a life
rating of 19% to 01% percent will be used for training.
It is essential that the CEW be stored with the PPM inserted at all times. Failure to do so
may result in software corruption and/or failure. A spark test should be conducted once
every 24 hours or prior to the start of an officer’s shift. One brief spark is adequate. As
long as the officer sees a visible spark between the electrodes, there is no need to extend
the duration. A spark test is required to verify the CEW is working, to verify the PPM is
performing and is adequately charged, and because there are components in the high
voltage section of the CEW that are more reliable when energized on a regular basis.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
262 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 116 – Terrorism – Homicide Bombers
REVISED February 2005
TERRORISM: HOMICIDE BOMBERS
September 11, 2001 illustrated to the world that terrorists would go to any lengths,
including suicide to commit mass murder. Several terrorist groups, including al-Qaeda
have targeted the United States due to our international foreign policy. Al-Qaeda sees
the West, and the United States in particular, as the enemy of Islam. This makes the
United States and Israel prime targets for a terrorist attack.
Recently, the use of homicide (suicide) bombers has significantly increased in the Middle
East, especially Israel. The term homicide bomber has come to replace what had been
called a suicide bomber, since the bomber’s intent is to commit homicide, not suicide. At
this time there has not been a successful homicide bombing (human body bomb)
conducted within the United States. However, in the interest of public safety and current
international trends, it is prudent to study these incidents and develop effective law
enforcement counter-measures.
Terrorist attacks take many forms, including bombs in cars, trucks, airplanes, boats,
motorcycles, or carried by humans as well as drive-by shootings and active shooters. This
Training Bulletin will narrow the focus to homicide bombers. The purpose of this Training
Bulletin is to assist officers in identifying a homicide bomber; provide tactical
considerations when attempting to interdict a homicide bomber, and appropriate response
to a detonated homicide bomb.
On New Year’s Eve 1999, an al-Qaeda trained terrorist planned to carry out an attack at
the Los Angeles International Airport by placing a large suitcase bomb at the Tom Bradley
International Terminal. The suspect was arrested prior to carrying out the bombing.
However, the threat still remains because al-Qaeda trained terrorists are mission oriented
and will continue to attack the same target until they are successful as they did with
attacks on the World Trade Center in 1993 and 2001.
Homicide bombers generally target areas of dense population or specific high profile
events. In Long Beach, this would include the downtown and harbor areas, and high
profile entertainment events that attract large assemblages of people as well as live media
coverage.
THE HOMICIDE BOMBER – BACKGROUND
Like the individuals involved in the September 11, 2001 attack, homicide bombers are
well trained to carry out their mission. Terrorist groups like Hamas and Hezballah have
been using homicide bombers for years against the civilian population in Israel. These
116 – Homicide Bombers
263 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
groups provide the best model of how homicide bombers are used against a civilian
population.
School age children are indoctrinated to idolize those who martyr themselves as homicide
bombers. Training camps located throughout the world teach terrorist tactics and
mentally prepare the bombers for martyrdom. Some terrorist organizations train
personnel for months in order to prepare for a single attack.
The rewards for martyrdom may include both religious and financial promises. The
resulting hero status and financial rewards supply a never-ending stream of recruits who
are willing to become homicide bombers.
TERRORIST TACTICS
An attack by a homicide bomber is well organized, and involves up to four distinct groups
to carry out the functions necessary for a successful attack.
The first group recruits and trains potential homicide bombers. This group conducts
interviews to determine the motivation of the martyr recruit and ensure that they have the
mental stability to complete the mission.
The second group determines the target and type of explosive device necessary. This
group accomplishes planning, surveillance, and reconnaissance of the target. Officers
should immediately contact the Office of Counter Terrorism if they encounter any
person they believe is engaged in this type of activity.
The third group assembles the bomb. The bomb is usually worn on the body in a belt or
vest, or carried in a bag or backpack. In most cases, additional fragmentation is added
to increase the lethality of the bomb.
The fourth group delivers the bomb to the homicide bomber. This group will then act as
a support team, escorting the bomber to the target. The support team will provide security
to the bomber, much like a “layoff man” at a robbery. The bomber does not normally
become aware of the target until the last possible moment. In order to maintain
motivation, only at the last minute is the bomber instructed on how to activate the bomb.
Officers need to be acutely aware of the presence of the support team if they
encounter a suspected bomber.
The body bomb is commonly worn on the upper torso in the form of a belt or vest.
Activating a toggle or rocker-type switch, which is either attached to the mid-section of
the vest or carried in the hand, easily detonates these devices. There may be a
secondary detonation system present to allow detonation of the device even if law
enforcement personnel interdict the bomber. Secondary timing devices may include a
timing system or a fuse that is lit when the bomber arrives within close proximity to the
target.
Officers need to be aware that a bomb can be placed in a backpack, briefcase, suitcase,
or any other large item that could conceal the explosives. Common items used in the
past to disguise bombs include guitars, computers, and even a watermelon. The majority
116 – Homicide Bombers
264 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
of these bombs are activated by the simple means of pushing a button or flipping a switch.
In some incidents, cell phones have been used to activate the device.
Once the bomber arrives at the target location, the bomber will attempt to move to the
center of the crowd to maximize the casualties. If confronted, the bomber will usually
detonate the bomb, rather than be taken into custody. Just before activation of the bomb,
the bomber will often raise both arms in the air to prevent any mitigation of the
fragmentation and shrapnel caused by the presence of the bomber’s own body parts.
CHARACTERISTICS OF A HOMICIDE BOMBER
The following list of distinguishing characteristics was compiled by analyzing recent
homicide bombing attacks in the Middle East. These characteristics are not all-
inclusive, but may be utilized to establish reasonable suspicion to identify and detain
potential homicide bombers.
Because patrol officers are highly visible, they need to be familiar with these
characteristics due to the potential for a chance encounter with a terrorist member.
Officers may receive a radio call of suspicious activity from a variety of sources. Terrorists
may be surveilling a target, renting a truck, or buying bomb-making components, which
may raise the suspicion of the public. Additionally, officers may observe a traffic violation
and during the encounter see photos, diagrams, or bomb components. The knowledge
and initial observations of the officer are critical to establish reasonable suspicion
to detain and probable cause to further investigate the activity. Officers should look
for more than one characteristic when making their initial observations before drawing
conclusions of reasonable suspicion of a homicide bomber. Characteristics include:
Biographical Data
• Mostly unmarried males, although recently some females
• Males between 16-40 years old
• Females between 16-25 years old
• Ethnicity may vary
Clothing Description
• The manner of dress is chosen to conceal a bomb
• Occasionally dressed as woman (pregnant)
• Inappropriate for warmer temperatures
• Will be baggy, ill fitting, unusually long or heavy
• Overly elegant
• Disguised to blend into community surroundings
• Stolen uniforms
Physical Description
• Blank stare, wide-eyed, unresponsive, perspiring or preoccupied
• Gaunt appearance (may look ill)
116 – Homicide Bombers
265 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Smiling or grinning (possibly due to thinking about the rewards in the afterlife)
• Muttering or talking to self (saying a prayer)
• Any other stress-related symptom associated with imminent death
The following peculiar characteristics may be present because of the concealed
bomb:
• Torso appears unusually bulky or inflated
• Unusual or suspicious bulges
• Torso appears stiff, or lacks flexibility
• Uneven gait, difficulty walking
• Visible explosive-laden belts, protruding from under clothing
• Carrying a heavy or unbalanced backpack, suitcase, box or knapsack
• Switch wire hanging from the sleeve
The following are less common, but also may be present:
• Possibly clean or freshly shaven – face and body, closely cropped hair. This is a
ceremonial religious act that has become less common since it makes homicide
bombers easy to identify
• Herbal or chemical smell emitting from the person due to the presence of poison(s)
added to the device
LEGAL REVIEW
It is important for responding officers to understand the legal and policy requirements for
reasonable suspicion, probable cause and the use of lethal force when attempting to
investigate a potential homicide bomber.
Reasonable Suspicion
• Unusual activity has occurred, is occurring or is about to occur
• Unusual activity is related to a crime
• The person detained is connected with the unusual activity
When developing reasonable suspicion, officers should consider the following factors: the
location, the manner of dress, the weather, the suspect’s overall appearance and actions.
For example, if the suspect looks inflated, is wearing a heavy trench coat in hot weather,
and walking towards a large crowded location, the officers may attempt a detention.
Probable Cause
• The state of facts that would cause a reasonable and trained officer (or person of
similar training and experience) to form an honest and strong suspicion that the person
to be arrested has committed a crime
Lethal Force (Manual Section 6.8.5)
116 – Homicide Bombers
266 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Firearms shall be regarded as defensive weapons and shall be used when the officer in
the absence of reasonable alternatives and the presence of one or more of the following
compelling circumstances:
• Immediate threat – In self-defense or in defense of another when the officer
reasonably believes there is an immediate threat to life or of serious injury
• Substantial risk – To effect the arrest or prevent the escape of a felon or suspected
felon when the officer has reasonable cause to believe that:
– The crime for which the arrest is sought involved the use of or threatened use of
deadly force, or the infliction of serious bodily injury; and,
– There is substantial risk that the person whose arrest is sought will cause death or
serious bodily harm, if apprehension is delayed
There is no exception to the law or use of lethal force policy when encountering a
suspected or confirmed homicide bomber. An Officer may not use lethal force to stop
someone who is “merely” suspected of being a homicide bomber. The officer must have
probable cause to believe the suspect is presenting an immediate threat to life before
lethal force can be utilized. If an officer observes an explosive device attached to the
suspect, and believes the suspect presents an immediate threat of death or serious bodily
injury to the officer or others, then lethal force is reasonable, since the officer is trying to
“prevent a crime where the suspect’s actions place persons in jeopardy of death or
serious bodily injury.”
TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
There is no precise formula for interdicting a homicide bomber. However, in all situations,
officer and public safety must remain paramount. When confronted by a possible
homicide bomber and in light of the totality of the circumstances, the following tactics
should be considered.
If the suspect is AWARE of the police officer(s) presence:
• Assume cover and maintain a tactical advantage
• Do not approach, if possible
• Maintain a reasonable (safe) standoff distance
• Request assistance; deploy responding officers to covered positions
• Order the suspect to stop all movement
• Warn bystanders in the area to leave immediately
If the suspect complies with the contact officer’s direction to stop:
• Have the suspect open the palms of both hands and demonstrate that nothing is
contained within them
• Have the suspect turn around and raise the outer garment to neck level
• Once the suspect’s hands and waist area are visible and nothing of a suspicious
nature is observed, the contact officer may order the suspect into a high risk kneeling
or high risk standing position until arrival of the Bomb Squad. Avoid the High Risk
116 – Homicide Bombers
267 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Prone Position, since bomb switches may be located on the chest or waistband area
of the suspect
• Officers should remain in a position of cover and evacuate any bystanders
• Request the Bomb Squad
If the suspect does not comply with the contact officer’s direction to stop:
• Continue to warn bystanders to leave the area
• Maintain a position of cover and monitor the actions of the suspect
• Based on the actions of the suspect, (i.e. the officers have established probable cause
to believe the suspect is in possession of an explosive device, Penal Code Section
12303) AND they believe the suspect represents an immediate threat of death or
serious bodily injury to themselves or others, officers may utilize lethal force to stop
the suspect
• If the suspect is believed to no longer present a threat, officers should stop and detain
the suspect and conduct an investigation
Historically, when confronted by law enforcement, bombing suspects will often detonate
the bomb, rather than be taken into custody. If officers inadvertently find themselves in
close proximity to the suspect, they may choose not to order the suspect to stop, and
instead they may grab the suspect’s arms to keep them away from the torso and
determine if there is a bomb. However, officers must be mindful of the Department’s Use
of Force Policy at all times.
If the suspect is NOT AWARE of the police officer(s) presence:
• Utilizing the element of surprise, officers may choose to surreptitiously approach the
suspect and grab both arms, keeping them away from the torso. The object is to
prevent the suspect from activating the bomb
• Once the suspect’s arms are secured, officers should verbalize with the suspect,
explain their actions and attempt to gain voluntary compliance. Officers should avoid
taking the suspect to the ground to avoid accidental detonation
• Unlike other high-risk situations, in this situation close proximity to the suspect may
be desirable to ensure quick contact and control
Using Lethal Force
Where lethal force is warranted and the suspect is believed to be wearing body armor, a
headshot may be necessary to stop the suspect; likewise, in a lethal force situation with
a homicide bomber, officers may be forced to attempt a headshot to prevent detonation
of the device by the suspect. Since homicide bombers may wear the bomb on the upper
torso in the form of a belt or vest, a shot to this area could trigger a detonation; therefore,
a headshot may be necessary under these circumstances.
When a suspect has been neutralized
• Do not approach the suspect
• Do not allow others to approach the suspect
116 – Homicide Bombers
268 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Immediately evacuate the area (the explosive device may still be detonated by other
means)
• Officers should maintain a minimum of 300 feet on all sides of the bomber
• Seek and maintain cover
• Await the arrival of the Bomb Squad
In the interest of public safety, it is imperative that law enforcement assumes a proactive
role in countering homicide bombers. Officers can help prevent attacks by remaining
vigilant to signs of terrorism, reporting suspicious activity, understanding trends and being
tactically prepared. As stated previously, there is no precise formula to be applied to a
homicide bomber incident. Police officer and public safety will always remain our highest
priorities.
POST HOMICIDE BOMBING INCIDENT
When a homicide bombing occurs, the post blast crime scene will be bloody and chaotic,
requiring officers to be emotionally and mentally prepared to take control of the incident.
Officers must remain focused because there may be a significant threat to rescue
personnel in the form of secondary devices, blood-borne pathogens, hazardous
chemicals, and the potential for structural collapse.
RESPONSE TO AN EXPLODED DEVICE
As with any bombing incident, officers must look for the presence of secondary devices
placed to kill rescue personnel. The initial bomb may have been detonated to draw rescue
personnel to the location where a second bomb has been planted. The explosive device
may be in the form of a car bomb or concealed in a trashcan or other item large enough
to hide explosives. Terrorists have used common items such as thermos bottles,
backpacks, and flashlights to disguise their bombs. The devices may be command
detonated by remote means such as the use of a cellular telephone wired into the firing
mechanism of the bomb, or by means of a timer. Terrorists may place secondary devices
at main points of ingress and egress, as well as possible Command Post (CP) locations,
to maximize the potential for injury and death to rescue personnel. If a possible secondary
device is located, the area around the device should be immediately evacuated a
minimum of 300 feet in all directions and then handled as any other suspected explosive
device.
Another hazard to rescue workers at the scene of a homicide bombing involves blood-
borne pathogens. Due to massive trauma caused by the explosion, there will be a
tremendous amount of bodily fluids and tissue present. These fluids and tissue can
contain human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis, or other blood-borne pathogens.
In recent attacks in the Middle East, homicide bombers have been found to be infected
with HIV and hepatitis, which can contaminate both bombing victims and rescue workers.
Anyone who might encounter body fluids or tissue should wear personal protective
equipment (PPE), including a mask, gloves, jumpsuit, apron and boot covers. A PPE kit
should be carried by every police officer on patrol.
116 – Homicide Bombers
269 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Do not approach the suspect or the suspect’s remains. In addition to the threat of
secondary devices, there may be un-detonated or partially detonated explosives present
on or near the suspect. Evacuate the area a minimum of 300 feet from the location of
the bombing. Body bombs can cause severe structural damage including downed
electrical lines and ruptured gas and water pipes. To ensure the safety of the public and
rescue personnel, officers should immediately establish a large crime scene perimeter.
A general rule for a post blast crime scene perimeter is to look for the furthest blast
debris/damage from the center of the explosion and then double that distance. Before
decreasing the size of the perimeter, the Incident Commander should contact the Bomb
Squad for advice.
It is the responsibility of officers on the perimeter to limit access in and out of the blast
area/crime scene. This will reduce crime scene contamination, and further injury caused
by a secondary device. Once the Fire Department has completed the rescue mission, no
one should be allowed to enter the post blast crime scene until the Bomb Squad has
cleared the area. Blast debris should not be moved or examined by anyone except Bomb
Squad personnel. The location of the debris can give clues as to the type of device used.
Because blast debris can spread in wide areas, vehicle tires and shoes can pick up key
blast evidence, so if possible they should be checked before leaving the perimeter.
The Incident Commander should assign an officer to record the hospitals where the
victims are transported. This can be coordinated through the Fire Department. Officers
should then be assigned to each hospital to gather victim information, record any
statements and preserve evidence pending the arrival of detectives assigned to
investigate the bombing. Remember that one of the injured may have been a participant
in the bombing. The Incident Commander should also assign someone to locate any
security cameras that may have captured the incident on tape. Security tapes should be
recovered as soon as possible to avoid any critical images being lost. All tapes of the
affected area that are available, regardless of the date recorded, should be recovered,
since they may show terrorists scouting the location weeks or even months prior to the
incident.
CONCLUSION
Officers must be mentally prepared to contend with the chaos and carnage caused by a
homicide bombing incident. Officers need to look for possible secondary devices and
wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment to reduce the risk to themselves or
others. By being prepared, the first officers on scene of a bombing incident will have the
knowledge to prevent further casualties, preserve crucial evidence, and assist in the
apprehension of additional suspects.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
270 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 117 – Robbery – The Report
REVISED August 2019
ROBBERY - THE REPORT
Although robbery is a crime against the person, we differentiate between robberies of
businesses and persons. Whenever a crime is perpetrated against a business, and the
property obtained belongs to the business, the primary victim would be that business. The
actual person who is robbed will be listed as an additional victim.
Long Beach Police Department files three types of robbery reports:
1. Robbery of a business – 212.5(c) PC
2. Robbery of a person – 212.5(c) PC
3. Robbery of a vehicle – 215 PC (car-jacking)
BUSINESS ROBBERY
The different types of business robberies include banks, markets, liquor stores, gas
stations, restaurants, bars, and all other miscellaneous businesses. When the victim is a
business, file the report as follows:
• List the name of the business as the primary victim and list the business address and
phone number.
• List the person against whom the act was committed as an additional victim (victim
#2).
• List the age, race, sex, home address, alternate addresses, e-mails, social media
accounts and additional phone numbers of additional victims.
• When more than one person is a victim, list them as additional victims.
• List the owner as an additional victim and note that he/she is the owner by placing the
word "owner" by his/her name.
Examples
• When a robbery is committed against the manager or employee of a Standard Oil
Company service station, in which company money was taken, the primary victim is
the Standard Oil Company. The additional victim is the manager or employee against
whom the robbery was committed.
• When a robbery is committed against a driver of the Yellow Cab Company, the
additional victim would be the taxi driver and the primary victim would be the Yellow
Cab Company. If the property obtained from the taxi driver belonged solely to the taxi
driver, the primary victim would be the taxi driver and not the Yellow Cab Company.
• A robbery occurs in a bar where there are several persons present. The suspects
hold up the bartender and the patrons. The suspects obtain the bar's money and the
117 – Robbery Reports
271 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
patron’s money. The primary victim would be the name of the bar and the additional
victims would be the bartender and the patrons.
ROBBERY AGAINST PERSONS
When a person is the victim of a street robbery, residential robbery, or carjacking of a
personal vehicle, file a report listing that person as the victim.
ROBBERY OF A VEHICLE (CARJACKING/TRUCK HI-JACK)
When a person is a victim of a car-jack or truck hi-jack and there is a company vehicle
involved, the business shall be the primary victim with the person robbed listed as an
additional victim. Whenever a person is a victim of a carjack and his own vehicle or an
acquaintance's vehicle is taken, that person against whom the act was committed is listed
as the primary victim.
Examples
• When a truck driver is driving a semi-trailer rig and the truck is hi-jacked, the truck
company should be listed as the primary victim. The driver and the cargo owner are
the additional victims.
• When a Postal Carrier is driving a US Post Office vehicle and it is taken in a carjacking,
the US Postal Service should be listed as a primary victim and the driver as an
additional victim.
• When a Postal Carrier is driving his own vehicle carrying US mail and that vehicle is
hi-jacked for the mail, again the US Postal Service is the primary victim and the postal
carrier is the additional victim.
MULTIPLE VICTIMS
Where there is one act of robbery with multiple victims, only one crime report should be
filed listing the primary victim at the top of the report and all other victims as additional
victims.
COMPOSING THE REPORT
Most robbery reports are taken at a time when the victim is in an excited or nervous state.
Often, they will be unable to give an accurate description of the suspect and may not
initially relay correct information. Officers should confirm the information they have
received from the victim is correct. When a complete, concise and accurate report is filed,
the possibility of apprehending and successfully prosecuting the suspect will be greatly
enhanced.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
272 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 118 – Solicitors
REVISED February 2002
SOLICITORS
INTRODUCTION
The patrol officer is often faced with citizen complaints regarding door-to-door sales.
These situations are invariably immediate in nature and do not lend themselves to the
referral action of investigators. This Training Bulletin will assist the patrol officer in taking
appropriate action.
DEFINITIONS
Door-to-door salesmen fall into two specific categories, listed and defined below:
• “Peddler” – any person going from place to place selling and making immediate
delivery of anything of value in the possession of the peddler
• “Solicitor” – any person going from place to place selling or taking orders for anything
of value for future delivery or for services to be performed in the future
GUIDES FOR LICENSE OR PERMITS REQUIRED:
• Peddlers/Solicitors using "charity" pitch (e.g., boys clubs, college funds, etc.): Any
Charitable Solicitation (CS) must have a CS permit: cite for violation of §5.28.050
LBMC
• Peddlers/Solicitors not using charity pitch: Business license required (must
specify "Peddler"). Cite for violation of §3.80.210 LBMC
• Religious Solicitations: No license or permit required
• Magazine Solicitation: Due to interstate commerce regulations, no license is needed
• Charitable Solicitors (any fundraiser): Any Charitable Solicitation (CS) must have
a CS permit: cite for a violation of §5.28.050 LBMC. Charitable organizations must
also register with the State of California Attorney General's Registry of Charitable
Trusts. Information can be verified by calling 800-952-5225, or you can go to their web
site at www.caag.state.ca.us
• Newspaper Peddlers or Solicitors: If the peddler/solicitor is an employee with the
newspaper/magazine company the employee does not need a permit. However, if the
peddler/solicitor is self-employed, the individual needs a business license: cite for
violation of §3.80.210 LBMC
• Photography Solicitors: Whether there is a fixed place of business or the individual
is a "free-lance" photographer with no fixed place of business, they must have a
business license: cite for violation of Section 3.80.210 LBMC
118 – Solicitors
273 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Service or Repair Solicitors: The business must be at a fixed location. The only
exception is that repair or service from a vehicle is limited to freeway service only. In
both cases, a business license is required. Cite for violation of Section 3.80.210 LBMC
General Information:
• Hours of Solicitation: Door-to-door peddling/soliciting is prohibited in residential
areas between the hours of 8:00 p.m. through 9:00 a.m. of the following day. Cite for
violation of Section 5.66.040(A) LBMC. Peddling goods within one block of a school
facility between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, is also
prohibited. Cite for Section 5.66.030 LBMC
• Peddling in areas such as tidelands, Queen's Way area and the Downtown area is
allowed only with a permit issued by the City Manager or his/her designee. For a
description of these areas, see Sections 5.66.050, 566.060 and 5.66.070 LBMC. Cite
for the preceding Sections depending on the exact area of the violation
• If you have questions, call the City of Long Beach Business Licensing at 8-6211 or
Vice/Permits at 8-7219
CONCLUSION
Although misdemeanor citations are generally preferable in the handling of violators in
most of the aforementioned situations, the decision as to whether a verbal advisement,
misdemeanor citation or physical booking will be effected, remains at the discretion of the
field officer. When a booking is made, the items being sold by the suspect, and any
money derived from sales, must be placed in evidence.
Remember that all business endeavors within the City require a license or permit issued
by the City of Long Beach. The only exceptions are persons engaged in interstate
commerce, First Amendment rights (i.e. newspapers) and religious solicitations.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
274 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 119 – Bunco Related Crimes
REVISED March 2001
BUNCO RELATED CRIMES
INTRODUCTION
This Training Bulletin will clarify the elements of bunco related crimes and show their
correct classification for the Incident Report. The proper classification of bunco related
crimes will insure the correct routing of the Incident Report.
DEFINITIONS
“Bunco” refers to a type of theft wherein the victim willingly gives up the loss, usually due
to false statements or sleight of hand tricks on the part of the suspect. It is not a crime
classification and the term should never be used in an Incident Report.
“Fraud” is a legal term generally used when referring to some form of deception. It is not
a special crime classification and should never be used alone on the crime classification
line. It may be used in the M.O. box.
TYPES OF INVESTIGATION BY THE FORGERY/FRAUD DETAIL
EMBEZZLEMENT
This type of theft is the taking or wrongful use of property entrusted to a servant, agent,
trustee or public servant. If the loss is over $400 dollars it is a felony; otherwise it is a
misdemeanor. The only exception is when the loss is public funds and then it is always
a felony.
When a patrol officer takes a report, the proper crime classification is either:
• 508 PC F (EMBEZZLEMENT)
• 508 PC M PETTY THEFT (EMBEZZLEMENT)
Patrol officers shall take reports of embezzlement in the same manner as any other theft
report, on a regular Incident Report.
THEFT BY FALSE PRETENSES
Theft by false pretenses is obtaining property from a victim who gives it willfully, due to
reliance on false representations made by the suspect. The victim must also intend for
the suspect to have permanent title to the loss.
119 – Bunco
275 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The sale of non-existent real estate, stocks, etc., are thefts by false pretenses. It is a
felony if over $400.00, otherwise it is a misdemeanor.
• 487.1 PC (F) Grand Theft Property, or
• 484/488 PC (M) Theft Personal Property
THEFT BY TRICK OR DEVICE
Theft by trick or device is the permanent retention of property, willfully but only temporarily
supplied by the victim by use of trick or device.
Pigeon drops, Jamaican switches, and the bank examiner cons are police slang terms
describing different thefts by trick or device. These terms should never be used on the
crime classification line, but may be used in the MO box.
PETTY THEFT DRIVE-OUTS
Drive-outs are thefts wherein the suspect obtains property such as gasoline for his car
and drives away without paying. They are almost always misdemeanors; however, if the
loss exceeds $400.00 it would be a felony.
Although the correct crime classification would be simply “484(A) PC Petty Theft”, the
addition of the descriptive term of “drive-out” facilitates the proper routing of the Incident
Report and is important due to the great volume of theft reports.
DEFRAUDING AN INNKEEPER
This refers to the failure to pay for food or lodging. This is not considered a theft, but
rather a separate and distinct violation. The offense is a misdemeanor if the amount of
money involved in the transaction is $400.00 or less and a wobbler if the amount is over
$400.00. The correct classification for these crimes is:
537(A)(1) PC – Defrauding an Innkeeper, under $400.00
537(A)(2) PC – Defrauding an Innkeeper, over $400.00
TAKING VEHICLE WITHOUT PAYING FOR SERVICE
The taking of a vehicle from a repair garage, gas station, etc., without paying for labor
and/or parts, is not a theft. This offense is covered by Section 3075 Civil Code and is a
misdemeanor regardless of the amount of loss. Further, the vehicle must have been
removed without the repairman’s consent and without any arrangement for credit. The
charge would be 3075 Civil Code, Surreptitious Removal of Vehicle from Lien Holder.
CONCLUSION
The above mentioned crimes are crimes against property. If a business is involved the
business should be listed as the victim. The victim would not be listed as the owner of
119 – Bunco
276 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
the business. These reports are filed exactly like commercial burglary and business
robberies.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
277 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations
REVISED September 2005
Bomb Scene Investigations
INTRODUCTION
This Bulletin will establish clear lines of responsibility for either exploded or unexploded
devices and will determine investigative responsibility, both on-scene and follow-up.
BOMB THREATS
A victim, who receives a bomb threat either by telephone or mail, usually reports the threat
to the Communications Center. The Communications Center will then dispatch a field
supervisor and patrol unit.
Field Supervisor Responsibilities
• Assume overall command of the bomb threat scene
• Arrange for crowd control if needed
• Ensure all necessary reports are filed
Patrol Unit Responsibilities
• Contact the reporting party or person in charge of the premises
• Interview the reporting party or person in charge and attempt to identify the caller or
establish the legitimacy of the call
• Advise the person in charge of the premises that they must make the decision to
evacuate. At this point, it is not a police decision
If a decision to evacuate is made:
• Notify the field supervisor of the decision
• Assist in the orderly evacuation of the premises
• Identify key personnel to remain and assist officers in conducting a search of the
premises; the search should begin in areas open to the public
• File all necessary reports
ACTUAL OR SUSPECTED BOMB IS LOCATED
Field Sergeant Responsibilities
Advise the Watch Commander that a potential bomb has been found.
Watch Commander Responsibilities
• Establish a field command post to coordinate information and to establish liaison with
Sheriff’s Bomb Squad when they arrive
120 – Bomb Scene Investigations
278 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Establish a safety perimeter at least 500' from bomb location
• Maintain radio silence except for emergencies
• Notify Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department Arson/Explosives Detail
Between 0800 and 1700 (562) 946-7222
Other hours (323) 526-5541 Sheriffs H.Q. Bureau
• Notify Violent Crimes Detail supervisor
• Notify Office of Counter Terrorism
• Notify Fire Department and request they respond and stand by once Bomb Squad is
on scene
• Notify Public Service. Advise of potential need for barricades and related equipment
Patrol Unit Responsibilities
• Under no circumstances touch the suspect package
• Protect the area in which the suspect package is found
• Evacuate the occupants to a point of safety, at least 500' from the premises
• Assist Bomb Squad personnel
• File all necessary reports
Violent Crimes Detail Responsibilities
The Violent Crimes Detail will be notified of all cases where an actual or suspected bomb
is found. The Violent Crimes supervisor or his/her designee will determine if detective
response to the scene is necessary.
• If necessary, the Violent Crimes investigator will report to the command post for
briefing and will assist the officer-in-charge as requested. The investigator will assist
the Bomb Squad personnel as required
• The Violent Crimes investigator will be responsible for all follow-up investigation and
case filing
Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail Responsibilities
• Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department will usually dispatch two investigators to the scene
• The Sheriff’s investigators will report to the command post for briefing and will
determine if additional deputies or equipment are needed
• Sheriff’s investigators will control the immediate area of the suspected explosive
device with assistance from LBPD
• Sheriff’s investigators will control all evidence found at the scene and their lab will
analyze evidence as needed
• Should the device be non-explosive, it will be turned over to Long Beach personnel
and placed into evidence
• Sheriff Department personnel will provide expert testimony if needed
Officer of Counter Terrorism Responsibilities
• Will be notified by the Watch Commander in all cases when an actual or suspected
bomb is found
• Will gather intelligence and provide expert assistance to the Violent Crimes Detail
• Will receive copies of all reports filed
120 – Bomb Scene Investigations
279 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Fire Department
• Will be notified by the Watch Commander when an actual or suspected bomb is found
• Will make a determination to respond with equipment and/or send a representative to
the command post
• Will institute their operational plan for suspected bomb findings
• Will send an Arson Investigator to assist the police
DETONATED DEVICE
Field Sergeant Responsibilities
Proceed to the scene for initial evaluation and assume responsibility for the following:
• Notifying the Fire Department of the tactical situation
• Establishing a command post and calling for required assistance
• Establishing an outer safety perimeter
• Re-routing traffic as required
• Informing the Watch Commander of the circumstances at scene and requesting that
the Watch Commander make necessary notifications
Watch Commander Notification Responsibilities
• Notify the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail
• Notify Violent Crimes supervisor
• Notify Office of Counter Terrorism
• Notify on-call Homicide investigator if the blast resulted in a death or probable death
• Notify Public Service. Advise of potential need for barricades and related equipment
Homicide Detail Responsibilities
• Will be the primary investigative unit in bomb explosions resulting in a death or
probable death
• Will be responsible for the activities previously listed for the Violent Crimes Detail
Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail Responsibilities
• The Sheriff will usually send three or more investigators to a post-blast scene
• Sheriff’s investigators will report to the command post for briefing
• As soon as practical, the Sheriffs will enter the bomb scene and assume control
Fire Department Responsibilities
• Will coordinate with the police command post
BOMB THREATS ABOARD AIRCRAFT
Any time the Department receives a threat of a bomb reported to be aboard an aircraft at
the Long Beach Municipal Airport, the response to that threat will be coordinated with
Airport Security. Airport Security will coordinate with the affected airline. The affected
airline will determine how viable the threat is. If the threat is viable:
• The FBI will be notified by the on-duty Police Department Watch Commander
120 – Bomb Scene Investigations
280 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• If the plane is on the ground the watch commander will also notify the Los Angeles
Police Department Bomb Squad. A plane suspected of containing a bomb can only
be searched by FAA-certified dogs, and LAPD is the closest agency with them
• If the plane is on the ground and occupied, Airport Security will coordinate with police
personnel to determine how best to evacuate passengers
• An aircraft suspected of containing a bomb will be moved (if possible) to a remote
portion of the airport, a location predetermined by Airport Security
• If a device is located on a plane and/or detonated, the investigation is the jurisdiction
of the FAA and the FBI
Patrol Officer Responsibilities
• Assist Airport Security
• File necessary reports; if a threat is made but no device is found, a report will be filed
Field Supervisor Responsibilities
• Notify Watch Commander
• Maintain liaison with Airport Security
• File an unusual occurrence report when:
- A plane is searched and nothing is found
- A device is found
- A device is detonated
Watch Commander Responsibilities
• Supervise the police response
• Make appropriate notifications, i.e. FBI, LAPD
• Notify the Violent Crimes Detail supervisor who will determine the need to respond to
the scene
Ultimately, the role of the Police Department during a bomb threat on an aircraft will be to
contain the scene, protect the public and assist the Bomb Squad handling the threat.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
281 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 121 – Explosives
REVISED January 2000
EXPLOSIVES
Purpose
The purpose of this training bulletin is to provide officers with a basic explanation of the
theory, classifications and effects of explosive materials.
Background
The use of explosives in criminal bombings has increased dramatically over the past (15)
years. The Federal Bureau of Investigations Bomb Data Center reports that bombings
and attempted bombings increased from 803 incidents in 1984 to 3,163 incidents during
1994. Bombing incidents decreased slightly in the three subsequent years for which
statistics are available, however, bombings still remain substantially above 2,000
incidents each year. The Long Beach Police Department responds to an average of 100
bomb threats per year and 12 actual explosive device incidents per year. The likelihood,
therefore, of officers encountering explosive devices while on the job is very high.
Explosive Theory
An explosive is any material that, when ignited by heat, shock or chemical reaction,
undergoes rapid decomposition or oxidation. The oxidation process releases energy that
is stored in the material in the form of heat and light, or by breaking down into gaseous
compounds that occupy a much larger volume than the original explosive material. The
expanding gases displace large volumes of air, often at speeds greater than the speed of
sound, thus creating a shock wave similar to a sonic boom. The generation and violent
escape of gases are the primary criteria of an explosion and are present in each of the
three basic types of explosions: mechanical, chemical and nuclear.
Classifications of Explosives
Explosives are grouped into the following general classifications based upon the
velocity of combustion that occurs in the material:
Low explosives (deflagrating explosives) burn at a rate that is less than sonic velocity.
When initiated, the fuel and the oxidizer in a low explosive combine to produce heat, light
and gaseous products. Common examples of low explosives are black powder,
smokeless powder (nitrocellulose) and flash powder.
Black powder is particularly dangerous to handle due to its sensitivity to heat,
shock, friction and static electricity. Black powder is frequently used as the
121 – Explosives
282 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
explosive filler in improvised explosive devices, such as pipe bombs, due to its
availability and ease of ignition.
Smokeless powder (nitrocellulose) is another common ingredient used in the
construction of pipe bombs and is both more stable and more powerful than black
powder. Smokeless powder may be ignited in improvised explosive devices with
an electrically heated bridge wire or a burning fuse. Although less powerful than
high explosives, low explosive devices are generally more dangerous to handle
due to their sensitivity to a variety of ignition sources.
Primary explosives (initiating explosives) are the most dangerous explosive compounds
in common use. Some primary explosives such as mercury fulminate will function as
either a low explosive or a high explosive. When functioning as a low explosive, the
primer merely burns. When functioning as a high explosive, a shock wave travels through
the primer material that is capable of initiating a quantity of relatively insensitive high
explosives. Common examples of primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide,
lead styphnate and tetracene.
High explosives are those materials that detonate at velocities between 3,300 and
30,000 feet per second. A detonation is caused by a shock wave that propagates through
a block of the high explosive material. The shock wave breaks apart the molecular bonds
between the atoms of the material, at a rate approximately equal to the speed of sound
traveling through that substance. Because high explosives are generally solids or liquids,
this speed can be much greater than the speed of sound traveling through air.
Unlike low explosives, the fuel and the oxidizer in a high explosive are chemically
bonded. A primer made from a sensitive high explosive is normally used to initiate the
detonation of a high explosive. When the primer detonates, it sends a shock wave
through the high explosive. This shock wave breaks apart the chemical bonds, and
the chemicals released re-combine to produce large volumes of hot gases. The
sudden and rapid escape of these gases from a confined space, accompanied by high
temperatures, violent shock and loud noise, are the primary effects of an explosion.
Some common examples of high explosives are dynamite, TNT, ammonium nitrate,
and RDX (the primary ingredient in C-4).
Effects of an Explosion
When an explosive material detonates, the typical block or stick of chemical explosive
material is instantaneously converted from a solid into a rapidly expanding mass of gases.
The detonation of the explosive will produce three primary effects and several secondary
effects that can create great damage in the area surrounding the explosion. The three
primary effects produced are incendiary/thermal, blast pressure and fragmentation.
1. The incendiary/thermal effect (fireball) produced by the detonation of a low or
high explosive varies greatly from one explosive to another. In general, a low
explosive will produce a longer incendiary/thermal effect than will a high explosive.
A high explosive will, however, produce much higher temperatures. The thermal
effect may range from 2,000 to 4,000 degrees centigrade (approximately 3,630 to
121 – Explosives
283 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
7,200 degrees Fahrenheit). Although the thermal effect of an explosion is
measured in fractions of a second, secondary fires frequently occur.
2. The blast pressure effect is comprised of a positive pressure phase and a
negative pressure phase. When an explosive charge is detonated, volumes of hot,
expanding gases are formed in a period of approximately 1/10,000 of a second.
These gases exert pressures of approximately 700 tons per square inch on the
atmosphere surrounding the point of detonation and rush outward from the point
of detonation at velocities of up to 13,000 miles per hour. This mass of expanding
gas, which rolls outward in a spherical pattern from the point of detonation, is the
positive pressure phase. As the positive pressure phase wave compresses and
pushes the surrounding air away from the point of detonation, a partial vacuum
exists in the area surrounding the point of detonation. When the positive pressure
phase wave dissipates entirely, the compressed and displaced atmosphere
reverses its movement and collapses inward to fill the void in the partial vacuum.
The reaction of the partial vacuum and the reverse movement of the air is known
as the negative pressure phase. The negative phase is less powerful, but lasts
three times as long as the positive phase. The entire blast pressure wave, because
of its two distinct phases, actually delivers a one-two punch to any object in its
path. The blast pressure effect is the most powerful and destructive of the
explosive effects produced by the detonation of high explosives.
3. The third primary effect of the detonation of an explosive is the fragmentation
effect. Primary fragmentation consists of pieces of the bomb itself, which are
transmitted by the blast wave. Secondary fragmentation consists of items near the
bomb that are picked up and transmitted by the same blast wave. Different types
of devices have different fragmentation potentials. A pipe bomb containing either
a high or low explosive will produce a quantity of fragmented material (many small
fragments with a high explosive and fewer, but larger fragments with a low
explosive). A bomb, which consists of dynamite, fuse and detonator would have
virtually no primary fragmentation, but by virtue of its explosive power, may
produce significant secondary fragmentation. It is important to recognize that
anyone or any combination of the primary effects of the detonations of an explosive
are capable of killing or seriously maiming anyone exposed to those effects.
Improvised Explosive Devices
Pipe Bombs
• Are the most commonly encountered improvised explosive devices by public safety
agencies
• Are made from a variety of readily available materials and configured in one of several
different fusing systems
• The most common configuration is a burning fuse ignition (hobby or safety fuse)
entering into a galvanized metal pipe section, enclosed with end caps, and filled with
a low explosive powder filler. Hobby fuse and commercial safety fuse burn at a
uniform rate (30-45 seconds per foot), thereby providing a time delay based upon the
length of the attached fuse. The advent of plastic pipe has provided bomb makers
121 – Explosives
284 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
with a safer and cheaper container for explosive fillers, especially when working with
sensitive black powder
• Additional shrapnel is frequently added to both metal and plastic pipe bombs in the
form of nails, bolts, screws, BB’s or buckshot in the pipe’s interior, or links of chain
wrapped around the exterior of the pipe
• Are also easily rigged with remote activation or motion activation (booby trap) systems
using pressure release or mercury switches, batteries, and electrically heated bridge
wires to initiate low explosive fillers
• Are considered to be particularly hazardous by bomb technicians due to their
configuration possibilities and the sensitivity of low explosive fillers to a variety of
ignition sources
Dry Ice Bombs
The device is constructed by placing a small quantity of dry ice in a sealable glass or
plastic bottle, and adding water. A process called sublimation occurs wherein the dry ice
(compressed and solidified carbon dioxide - CO2) vaporizes, producing a quantity of
carbon dioxide gas which ultimately exceeds the structural or tensile strength of the
container. At this point an explosion occurs which sends the glass or plastic, and any
surrounding shrapnel, out in a spherical pattern from the point of detonation. The quantity
of dry ice used and the thickness and tensile strength of the container will determine the
explosive strength of the device. The reaction time usually varies from 20 to 45 minutes
depending upon the above factors and the temperature of the water added to the dry ice.
Warm water accelerates the sublimation process thereby decreasing the delay time
between the activation and the explosion of the device. Dry ice vaporizes at -78.5
degrees centigrade.
• Have gained in popularity in recent years, particularly with juveniles engaged in
vandalism and revenge activities
• Are one of the simplest made devices under the general classification of chemically
reactive destructive devices
• Although thought of largely as prank devices, dry ice bombs have killed or injured both
intended targets and innocent bystanders in recent years, and are classified as
destructive devices under California Penal Code §12301
Hypergolic Devices
Hypergolic devices are chemical devices that spontaneously ignite when a chemical
reagent is mixed with a fuel and oxidizer. A common example is a glass bottle containing
a mix of gasoline and sulfuric acid. Attached to the bottom of the bottle is a section of
cotton gauze that is permeated with potassium permanganate. When the bottle breaks
open, the sulfuric acid in the mixture reacts with the potassium permanganate generating
extremely high temperatures which, in turn, ignites the gasoline. In the above example,
the sulfuric acid acts as the oxidizer, the gasoline is the fuel, and the potassium
permanganate is the chemical reagent creating the hypergolic effect. Many other similar
recipes exist in chemical applications.
121 – Explosives
285 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Hypergolic and other chemical reaction devices are also gaining in popularity due to
the proliferation of explosive recipes over Internet resources.
Modified Military Ordnance
Responding to calls involving military ordnance presents the problem of distinguishing
between harmless, inert ordnance, which is lawfully possessed for souvenir purposes,
and actual or modified ordnance, which presents a significant danger to law enforcement
and the community. Due to the possibility of modification, it is imperative that all military
ordnance be treated as potentially dangerous until qualified bomb technicians or military
explosive ordnance disposal technicians determine it to be otherwise.
• Military hand grenade practice casings are the easiest devices to obtain and convert
into dangerous anti-personnel explosive devices
• The practice casings need only to have the vent hole plugged in the bottom of the
grenade, a low or high explosive filler inserted into the grenade body, and an actual
or improvised fuse placed into the fuse well
• Black powder filler and short lengths of hobby fuse are frequently used to modify
grenades for criminal purposes
High Explosive Devices
Although high explosive devices are infrequently encountered, they have been employed
in criminal bombings in Long Beach in past years. Unlike low explosives, high explosives
do not have to be confined in a container in order to detonate. With a proper fusing
system, high explosives will detonate unconfined and produce significantly more damage,
pound for pound, than will low explosives.
• Are much less sensitive to ignition than low explosives and generally require a blasting
cap or detonator to shock the main charge into detonation
• Cannot be initiated with hobby fuse or electrically heated bridge wires which are
effective initiators for low explosives
• Are widely used commercially in construction, demolition, mining, agriculture, and oil
and gas exploration projects. Over six (6) billion pounds of explosives are used in the
commercial explosives industry each year which affords many opportunities for theft,
embezzlement, misappropriation and criminal applications.
• Commercial and military high explosives are manufactured in a wide array of forms
including: detonation cord, sheet explosives, sticks, cartridges, tubes, blocks,
canisters, slurries, prills (ANFO) and binary mixes
Letter and Parcel Bombs
Letter bombs and parcel bombs have become increasingly common since the first wave
of Palestinian Liberation Organization letter bombs were mailed to Israeli Diplomatic
Missions throughout the world in the early 1970's. Technological advances in
miniaturized electrical, mechanical and electronic components, coupled with the use of
powerful plastic explosives, have provided terrorists and common criminals the means
with which to construct effective letter and parcel bombs.
121 – Explosives
286 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The early letter bombs contained spring-loaded mechanical initiating devices employing
a coil spring, firing pin, a pressure lever, small arms ammunition primer, and non-electric
detonator surrounded in flattened plastic explosive. All of these components were
mounted within a strip of cardboard folded in half. The folded cardboard was then inserted
into an envelope addressed to the intended target. The bomb functioned when the folded
cardboard sprung open as it was removed from the envelope. Later devices employed
Polaroid Camera flat pack batteries wired to an electric detonator that was initiated by the
closure of an improvised loop-switch.
Parcel bombs afford the opportunity to use either high or low explosives since container
size is not a limiting factor. Two of our most recent serial bombers, Theodore Kaczynski
and Walter Moody, both used motion activated, electrically initiated low explosive
powders in pipe bombs concealed in mail parcels, book bombs or disguised road hazards.
Walter Moody’s mail bombs killed a Federal Appeals Court Judge in Alabama and a civil
rights attorney in Georgia. Theodore Kaczynski killed three people and injured twenty-
nine during his reign of terror between 1978 and 1996.
Based upon data derived from numerous mail bomb investigations, the Postal Inspection
Service has compiled the following warning list of letter and parcel bomb indicators:
• Excessive postage
• No return address
• Visual distractions
• Incorrect titles
• Rigid envelope
• Excessive weight
• Oily stains or discoloration
• Misspellings of common words
• Titles but no names
• Lopsided or uneven envelope
• Protruding wires or tinfoil
• Foreign mail and special delivery
• Restrictive markings: personal, confidential, etc.
• Excessive securing material: masking tape, strapping tape, string, etc.
Relevant California Statutes
§12301 PC-Defines Destructive Device.
§12303 PC-Possession of any Destructive Device. (F/M)
§12303.1 PC-Carry or Place Destructive Device onto Common Carrier. (F)
§12303.2 PC-Possession of Destructive Device in Public Place. (F)
§12303.3 PC-Possess, Explode or Ignite Destructive Device to Injure, Intimidate or
Terrorize. (F)
§12303.6 PC-Trafficking in Destructive Devices. (F)
§12312 PC-Possess Materials with Intent to Make Destructive Device. (F)
§12000 H&S-Explosives Defined.
§12305 H&S-Illegal Possession of Explosives. (F)
§12671 H&S-Possession of Illegal Fireworks. (M)
121 – Explosives
287 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
§12702 H&S-Possession of Illegal Fireworks, >7500 Grains. (F/M)
For questions or additional information, contact the Administrative Security Section,
telephone 570-7422.
References:
• FBI Bomb Data Center
• The Blasters’ Handbook
• The Anarchist’s Cookbook
• The Terrorist’s Handbook
• Army Field Manual FM23-30
• California Penal Code
REVIEW Responsibility
Investigations Bureau
288 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 122 – Traffic Collision Reporting
REVISED February 2002
TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTING POLICY
INTRODUCTION
The California Vehicle Code sets forth reporting requirements for traffic collisions. These
include all fatal injury collisions (reference 20008 CVC).
The reporting of non-injury collisions serves several purposes. These reports are used
by prosecuting agencies, courts, the Department of Motor Vehicles and other State
agencies, insurance companies, the City Traffic Engineer, and the Long Beach Police
Traffic Section for selective enforcement.
The City of Long Beach participates in the Statewide Integrated Traffic Records System
(SWITRS) and sends all traffic collision reports to the State for entry into this system.
A Traffic Collision Report shall be taken as follows: (on highway or private property)
• Fatality collision
• Injury collision
• Collisions involving pedestrians
• Collisions involving bicyclists
• Felony Hit and Run (20001CVC)
• Misdemeanor Hit and Run (20002CVC)
• Collisions where evidence tends to indicate potential liability by any public agency
• Collisions where at least one vehicle must be towed from the scene
• Collisions involving drunk drivers
• Collision where one driver requests that a report be taken
• Collision reports shall be taken, even if no report is desired, when any driver does not
have a valid driver's license or proof of insurance
The California Highway Patrol will take school bus collisions, as follows:
• When a bus is transporting at least one pupil on public or private property
• Vehicle vs. pupil who has just exited a school bus
• Vehicle vs. school bus driver escorting pupils across the street
All other school bus collisions will be reported as an injury collision or non-injury collision
by the Long Beach Police Department.
122 – Traffic Collision Reporting
289 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
NOTE: If a unit is dispatched to a collision, a report will be taken unless no report is
desired. If no report is desired, officers will assist in the exchange of information between
the involved parties, including verification and/or status of drivers' license and insurance.
Officers will ensure that all parties understand no report is being taken.
TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT FORMS
All collision reports must be taken on PD form 4210.001 (12/01), "Investigation/Injury
Collision" (long form), with these exceptions:
The CHP 555-03 Form (short form), "Traffic Collision Report - Property Damage Only,"
can only be used by officers when a traffic collision involves one or two vehicles. This
report form may be used on collisions with injuries when the subject is not transported
directly to a medical facility by paramedics or a private vehicle.
NOTE: This form shall not be used for City Property Damage, vehicle vs. bicyclist, or
vehicle vs. pedestrian collision.
Instructions for completing PD Form 4210.001 and CHP 555-03 Form may be found in
the “LBPD Field Reference Manual," Sections 9.24 through 9.24.5, and in the Collision
Investigation Manual (Highway Patrol Manual 110.5).
LATE REPORTED COLLISIONS
Section 20008 CVC requires that drivers involved in injury collisions file a report with
police within 24 hours. Late reported injury traffic collisions will be taken as follows:
• If this is the first contact with police, a report will be filed
• If a prior contact with police was made, either through Communications or by an
officer at the scene - and no report was taken and an exchange of information was
made or advised to be made, then no report will be made at a later time
• If a non-injury report has already been filed, no late reported injuries will be added
to the original report
• Non-injury collision: No report will be taken unless the collision is a Hit and Run
ISSUING CITATIONS AT SCENE
When a vehicle belonging to a public agency, being driven by an employee of that agency,
is involved in the collision, no citation (for a moving violation) will be issued to any of the
parties in the collision. However, citations may be issued for other than the primary
collision factor, such as 12500(a), 14601 CVC or any equipment violations.
Other than above, a citation shall be issued at the scene of every collision, whether injury
or non-injury, if the statements of independent witnesses and/or the facts warrant it. If a
violator is taken to a hospital and is unable to sign the citation, attach the unsigned citation
to the Collision Report and the Accident Investigation Detail (AID) may obtain a complaint
through the City Prosecutor's office.
122 – Traffic Collision Reporting
290 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Traffic citations should not be written when the violator is booked. Traffic violations will
be included in the booking charges. Exception: A citation will be issued to a juvenile
booked for a traffic offense.
Under no circumstances will a physical arrest be made of a driver who refuses to sign a
citation based solely upon evidence found at the scene and not actually witnessed by the
officers. In such cases, attach the unsigned citation to the report when filed, and AID may
obtain a complaint through the City Prosecutor's Office.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
291 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 123 – Misdemeanor Citations
REVISED March 2001
MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS
This TB is currently being revised.
Please see Watch Report issued 11/6/19 Non-Release Misdemeanor Arrest Form
INTRODUCTION
In recent years, our misdemeanor and moving violation citation books have evolved from
two separate books into one citation book. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to
explain the proper use and issuance of misdemeanor citations.
ISSUING MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS
§853.6(h) PC authorizes a peace officer to issue a citation for any misdemeanor offense
where an officer has arrested a person pursuant to §836 PC, or where the officer has
taken custody of a person pursuant to §847 PC (private person arrest).
Officers are urged to issue misdemeanor citations in lieu of arrest whenever possible. A
misdemeanor citation should not be issued if the person being arrested has any
outstanding warrants, a prior record of non-appearance, has been issued a bench
warrant, or is unwilling to sign the citation.
Misdemeanor citations will not be issued if the misdemeanor case involves:
• Sex crimes
• Domestic Violence
• Petty theft with a prior offense (second offense or more)
• Narcotic and drug violations (except 11357B H&S marijuana less than one ounce,
4140 B&P possession of a hypodermic syringe, 11364 H&S possession of drug
paraphernalia and 9.36. 010 LBMC loitering for drug activity)
• 647f PC arrests
• Resisting arrest
• Firearm violations
Other reasons a misdemeanor citation will not be issued:
• The officer has reason to believe there is a likelihood the suspect will not appear in
court
• The arrested person does not have proper identification (i.e. current California Driver’s
License)
• If exceptional circumstances are indicated, the suspect should appear before a judge
FILING A MISDEMEANOR CITATION
123 – Misdemeanor Citations
292 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If the officer feels the suspect should be fingerprinted and photographed, the officer must
fill out the “Booking Required” box. When the suspect appears in court, the judge will
order the suspect to go to the police station for booking before pronouncing sentence (in
accordance with 853.6(g) PC). This procedure provides our Records Section and the
Criminal Information Index (CII) with records of those who continually receive citations.
After issuing a misdemeanor citation, a Follow-up report must be filed. The Follow-up
report will include:
• The elements of the crime
• Suspect statements
• Witness statements
• Other facts pertaining to the offense
• If evidence is seized during the arrest, the “Evidence Seized” box will be marked
Follow-up reports and Evidence reports must be attached to the misdemeanor citation
when the citation is turned in to Reporting. The citation number will be included on all
reports filed with the misdemeanor arrest.
A Department Record (DR) number will be obtained and written in the “DR#” box on the
citation. Most misdemeanor citation arrests will be filed on a pink Misdemeanor Follow-
up form. However, if the crime would normally require an incident report, a yellow Incident
Report must still be filed. Although the suspect’s name and physical description is on the
citation, it must also be placed in the suspect block of the Incident Report.
All misdemeanor citation arrests not committed in the officer’s presence require a Private
Person’s Arrest (PPA) form. The PPA form is filed along with the misdemeanor citation
and the Follow-up or Incident Report. Each numbered citation must be accounted for.
After issuing a misdemeanor citation, if the officer decides to book rather than write a
citation, the officer must void the citation by filing a memorandum to the officer’s Division
Commander, explaining why the citation was voided. The misdemeanor citation and all
connecting reports must be time stamped and placed in the report review box located at
each division.
CONCLUSION
Misdemeanor citations allow officers to take necessary enforcement action and return to
duty more quickly. Officers should use their discretion and issue misdemeanor citations
in the field whenever possible. Prior to issuing a citation, a records check should be run
on the suspect for outstanding warrants or prior convictions. Take all precautions to
ensure suspects cited in the field will appear in court, avoiding the issuance of a bench
warrant.
REVIEW Responsibility
Patrol Bureau
293 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 124 – Credit Card Investigation
REVISED March 2001
CREDIT CARD INVESTIGATION
INTRODUCTION
The fraudulent use of credit cards has become a major problem for law enforcement.
There are over two billion credit cards in use in the United States. A portion of these
credit cards fall into the hands of criminals in a variety of ways; robberies, burglaries, theft
and lost cards. To some criminals the credit card is as valuable as cash. In the past,
credit card companies have handled most of the investigations regarding fraudulent use
of their lost or stolen cards. The current increase in credit card fraud, and the
corresponding crimes that result from the original loss of the cards, has caused police
agencies to become more involved in this type of field investigation. Officers should,
therefore, become familiar with the different crimes involving the use of credit cards.
TYPES OF CREDIT CARD CRIMES
The credit card sections are 484(d) through (I) of the Penal Code. Those sections that
always require an incident report are as follows:
• §484e PC - Unauthorized access cards or related information
• §484e(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, sells, transfers, or conveys
an access card, without the cardholder’s or issuer’s consent, is guilty of grand theft
• §484f PC - Fraudulent use of access card
• §484f(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, designs, makes, alters, or
embosses a counterfeit access card or utters or otherwise attempts to use a
counterfeit access card is guilty of forgery
• §484g(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, (a) uses, for the purpose
of obtaining money, goods, services, or anything else of value, an access card or
access card account information that has been altered, obtained, or retained in
violation of Section 484e or 484f, or an access card which he or she knows is forged,
expired, or revoked
• §484g(b) PC - Obtains money, goods, services, or anything else of value by
representing without the consent of the cardholder that he or she is the holder of any
access card and the card has not in fact been issued, is guilty of theft. If the things of
value obtained in violation of this section exceeds four hundred dollars ($400) in any
consecutive six month period, then the same shall constitute grand theft
• §484i PC - Every person who possesses an incomplete access card, with intent to
complete it without the consent of the issuer, is guilty of a misdemeanor.
INVESTIGATION
124 – Credit Card Investigations
294 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The Forgery Detail handles all credit card cases. When a field officer is dispatched to
investigate any of the above crimes, he/she shall take a crime report if a sales receipt is
available to be placed in evidence. If the person in possession of the receipt refuses to
relinquish the document to the officers, that person should be advised to contact the
Forgery Detail.
If a suspect is found to be in possession of a credit card determined to be lost or stolen,
and the officer has reasonable cause to believe that the suspect has used the credit card
and has signed the cardholder’s name, the suspect should be booked for Investigation of
Forgery.
If a suspect is found to be in unauthorized possession of a credit card and after an effort
is made to ascertain if the card is lost or stolen, the suspect should be booked for
Appropriation of Lost Property, a misdemeanor – §485 PC. A report should be made in
all cases.
The main victim on a crime report is the credit card Company – Bank of America Visa
Card, Texaco, JC PENNY, etc. The additional victims are the cardholders and the store
where the card was used.
Officers should remember that the credit card is not the property of the cardholder, but is
the property of the credit card Company and can be picked up when an officer feels there
is probable cause. If this is done and no arrest is made, the card, along with an
information and found property report, shall be filed to the Forgery Detail.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
295 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 128 – Homicide Investigations
REVISED March 2020
HOMICIDE INVESTIGATION
INTRODUCTION
The preliminary investigation at the crime scene is the most important and possibly the
most sensitive aspect of the investigation. The primary responsibility of a patrol officer at
a homicide scene is to protect and preserve the crime scene. The actions of the first
officer(s) on the scene can directly influence the outcome of the investigation. A small
detail could later prove to be a significant issue. The emphasis of any investigation is the
successful arrest and prosecution of those responsible.
THE CRIME SCENE
The first officer on scene assumes initial command and is responsible for the crime scene,
pending the arrival of a supervisor and detectives from the Homicide Detail. Other than
immediate safety concerns, an officer's first duty is to render aid to the victim(s) and
request paramedics. If the victim is deceased, paramedics make that determination;
however, note the name of the paramedic and the time determined. Upon determining
the victim is deceased, and after exiting the crime scene, officers should consider where
to place personnel to control access to the crime scene. Officers should note any
changes made at the scene; e.g., lights, switches, doors, windows, gates, etc. If
paramedics responded, record how they changed the crime scene; e.g., did they
reposition or remove clothing from the body, etc.
If the victim or suspect is transported to the hospital, one officer should be assigned to go
with them. If medical professionals remove the victim's clothing, the clothing should be
left undisturbed until collected by the Forensic Specialist; it is possible for bullets and
bullet fragments to get caught in clothing. Preserve any evidence the suspect or victim
may have left on their person.
Officers should immediately attempt to obtain information regarding the suspect, or arrest
suspects still at the scene. If the suspect is gone, obtain as much information as possible
and relay it to the Communications Center for a crime broadcast.
While at the crime scene, officers should remember the following:
• Exercise extreme care to preserve the scene;
• Be careful when walking in the crime scene to prevent accidental damage to the
scene;
• Coordinate a large perimeter;
• Request enough units to secure the crime scene;
128 – Homicide Investigations
296 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Notify a field supervisor, request Homicide and a Forensic Specialist;
• Cordon off the crime scene and exclude all non-essential persons from entering, this
includes supervisors, command staff, fellow officers, relatives, neighbors, friends,
landlords, etc.;
• Any unauthorized individuals who try to force their way into a crime scene are subject
to arrest under PC 148(a)(1);
• In the event of extreme circumstances such as high winds, heavy rain, fire, etc.,
officers may need to photograph and collect evidence prior to the arrival of crime
scene technicians to avoid loss;
– This should occur only if necessary, to preserve the evidence, and should be
documented in a police report;
• Remain alert – It is not unusual for a suspect or the suspect’s associates to return to
the crime scene and monitor the investigation.
SECONDARY CRIME SCENE
A secondary crime scene may be located nearby and should be protected and handled
in the same manner as a primary scene. If a suspect vehicle is located, wait for Homicide
detectives to provide direction prior to handling or searching unless the vehicle needs to
be cleared of suspects for officer safety.
WEAPONS
If a crime scene is secure, do not handle weapons unless directed by a Homicide
detective; this eliminates contamination and helps preserve evidence.
If a crime scene is unsecured, remember officer safety is the priority. If a weapon must
be collected prior to the arrival of Homicide detectives, officers should mark the location
where the weapon was initially discovered, this allows investigators to reconstruct the
crime scene.
If the weapon is a firearm, mark the direction of the barrel prior to collecting it. Carefully
pick up the firearm by the grips while wearing gloves and place it in a secure location.
WITNESSES
Once the crime scene is secure and notification has been made to a supervisor, officers
should locate witnesses. This should include a door-to-door search (knock-and-talks) in
the immediate vicinity of the crime; list the addresses contacted and indicate if anyone
was home.
When witnesses are located, officers should ask for a driver's license or other picture
identification. Witnesses should be separated and directed outside the crime scene
where an officer will stay with them.
Officers may be instructed to transport witnesses to the downtown station to be
interviewed by investigators. When considering the transport of witnesses to other
locations, please keep in mind the following:
128 – Homicide Investigations
297 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Seek consent to take the person to the station;
– Involuntary transportation of a person for any investigative purpose is a de facto
arrest requiring probable cause or a warrant;
• Run a warrant check to see if the person is subject to arrest;
• If a witness does not agree to go to the station or be interviewed, officers should
document the encounter and any identifying information obtained.
SUSPECT ARRESTED
If an officer arrests the suspect, the suspect should be removed from the scene as soon
as possible. If the suspect makes statements or confesses to the crime, also known as
spontaneous statements, allow the suspect to speak freely and document the
spontaneous statements. There is no need to interrupt a suspect making spontaneous
statements to advise them of the Miranda Warning. However, if you begin questioning a
suspect in custody, then advisal of the Miranda Warning is required. Ideally, do not
question or advise a homicide suspect of their rights, allow Homicide detectives to
interview the suspect. If a suspect makes spontaneous statements, ensure the
statements are included in your report.
When a firearm is suspected as the weapon, the suspect's hands should be placed in
paper bags as soon as possible to preserve evidence for a gunshot residue test (GSR).
Under the direction of the Homicide Detectives, officers will collect any physical evidence;
e.g., clothing and personal property.
THE HOMICIDE TEAM
Homicide Detail detectives will respond to the crime scene and assume control of the
investigation. Upon arrival they should be briefed by the Incident Commander and the
officer assigned to file the main report. The briefing should include the following:
• What officers observed when they first arrived on scene;
• How many involved parties (victim, witness, suspect) are on scene and where they
are located;
• Locations where knock-and-talks have been conducted;
• What areas have been searched for surveillance cameras;
• The location of the crime scene; and
• What evidence has been identified, and the estimated time of arrival for the Forensic
Specialists.
– Homicide investigators will direct the Forensic Specialists to take photographs,
examine, and collect evidence.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
298 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 129 – Stolen Aircraft
REVISED November 2003
IDENTIFICATION OF STOLEN AIRCRAFT
Because theft of an aircraft is unfamiliar to most officers, the proper identification numbers
and other information may be omitted from reports. When reporting an aircraft theft, use
the Incident Report Worksheet (PD Form 100000.00). This training bulletin lists the
information needed to place the stolen aircraft on the DOJ and NCIC Computers. Omitted
information will delay the entry of information into the computer and thus delay the
reporting of the theft, a critical mistake during these times of terrorist activities.
Officers filing a stolen aircraft report need to make two notifications:
• Auto stats must be notified and given the identifying aircraft information needed for
the intake form. If the information is unavailable to the officer while he is conducting
the investigation he should advise the victim to contact the Auto Status Desk (ext
7475), as soon as possible to report the identification numbers. Most of the
information can be obtained from the aircraft registration documents, which are
generally in possession of the operator of the aircraft storage area or the victim of the
theft
• The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) must also be notified when an aircraft theft
occurs
The following Information should be contained in the narrative of the Incident
Report:
Aircraft Registration Number
Civil Aircraft
Record the aircraft’s registration number. This number usually appears on each side of
the rear section of the fuselage or vertical fin (vertical part of tail assembly) of civil aircraft.
The registration number of aircraft registered in the United States is commonly referred
to as an “N” number, since “N” is the first character of the number and indicates the aircraft
is of United States registry. Registration numbers of foreign civil aircraft may consist of
all letters.
For example: N9101D
N505PF
N799K
CF-TVU (Denotes civil aircraft of Canadian registry)
Military Aircraft
129 – Stolen Aircraft
299 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
US Military aircraft registration numbers usually appear on the vertical fin of the tail
assembly. Verify with the military representative reporting the theft the correct number to
be used.
For example: 39766
2776
Military aircraft will also have a squadron number (VF-142-F111A). This should be listed
separately.
State License Plate - Indicate the designation “US” for all United States aircraft.
License Plate Year - List the highest year in which the aircraft’s registration certificate is
valid for those registration certificates requiring annual or periodic renewal. Indicate that
a registration certificate is valid for an indefinite period by entering two zeros (00).
For example: License plate year:
2000
2003
00: indefinite
This information is found on a sticker with the current year punched out (similar to a boat
registration sticker) or in an entry in the aircraft logbook.
License Plate Type - List the description associated with the best fitting definition of the
aircraft.
For example: License Plate Type
• Civil, passenger: includes all civil aircraft designed and/or utilized primarily for
transporting passengers, whether commercially or privately operated.
• Civil, non-passenger: includes all civil aircraft designed and/or utilized for purposes
other than transporting passengers
• Military: any type of military aircraft, regardless of design or primary use
Aircraft Vehicle Identification Number - Indicates the complete serial number of the
aircraft. Includes any letter that is part of the serial number. This number is usually found
on a metal plate in the cockpit.
Vehicle Year - The exact or a close approximation of the year in which the aircraft was
constructed. This is shown on the “Airworthiness Certificate” which is issued at the time
of manufacture.
For example: 2001
Aircraft Make - The complete identity of the aircraft make (including manufacturer’s
model number and name, when available).
For example: Beechcraft 35c Bonanza
Piper PA 24 Apache
Cessna 172 Skyhawk
129 – Stolen Aircraft
300 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Type of Aircraft - The appropriate description of the aircraft in one of the following
classifications. Also list the number of engines.
For example: Blimp
Sailplane (glider)
Propeller Driven: propeller driven aircraft are externally identifiable by
propeller being visible. Where jet engines and propellers are visible,
consider the aircraft to a be propeller driven and code “PRO.” E.g. turboprop
Jet propelled: Jet propelled aircraft are externally identifiable by jet engines
being visible, but no propellers being visible.
Helicopters and other Rotor-wing (or rotary blade) driven aircraft - Consider
an AUTOGIRO (AUTOGYRO) to be a helicopter
Aircraft Color – Use the same designations used for motor vehicles
CONCLUSION
As with any report an officer files, the information on a stolen aircraft report needs to be
recorded clearly and completely. The sooner the correct information is entered into the
system the sooner recovery becomes possible.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
301 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 131 – Counterfeit Currency
REVISED March 2001
THE DETECTION OF COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY
INTRODUCTION
Each year criminals who make or pass counterfeit currency, coins or other government
obligations victimize thousands of citizens. The problem of controlling this illegal activity
is aggravated by technological advances in printing, computers, and by copying machines
that enable persons with little or no skill to engage in counterfeiting.
As a result, this crime may be uncovered in the most improbable places. For example,
counterfeit operations have been found in the print shop of a state penitentiary, in
residential areas and in legitimate printing firms. The mobility of the modern criminal
permits him to pass the counterfeit currency hundreds of miles from its source.
TYPES OF U.S. CURRENCY
Since 1879, United States currency has been printed on a special quality paper. The
paper is manufactured by a process utilizing cotton and linen.
The red and blue fibers interwoven within the paper are characteristic of this process.
The mixture of the paper and fiber is one of the deterrents to counterfeiting, since
counterfeiters have been unable to duplicate either material. Consequently, the bogus
moneymakers have either ignored these fibers or attempted to simulate them by printing
red and blue lines on the paper. These latter marks can be removed merely by scratching
or erasing the surface.
The United States uses the same paper in the manufacture of all its currency. These
notes are of three general types:
• Federal Reserve Notes bear green serial numbers and Treasury seal
• United States Notes bear red serial numbers and Treasury seal
• Silver Certificates which bear blue serial numbers and Treasury seal are no longer
printed, but may be found in circulation
RECOGNIZING THE COUNTERFEIT BILL
One of the surest methods of recognizing a counterfeit note is to compare it with a genuine
bill of the same denomination and series. Good currency is made to exact standards by
a high quality printing process. Rubbing a bill will not prove whether it is genuine or
counterfeit, ink will rub off either type note.
131 – Counterfeit Currency
302 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The counterfeiter usually makes his/her product by copying a genuine bill through a photo
mechanical process. The finished product is the difference between genuine art work
and a copy. This comparison can further be extended to the texture of the paper and the
ink coloring. The counterfeit portrait is “lifeless”. Shading such as in the head and hair,
and the cross rules lines behind the portrait, lack sharpness and are often broken or
missing. When two bills are compared, look for the following differences or variations.
Genuine
• Portrait - Off center portrait with sharp, regularity of line, eyes are clear and distinct,
pronounced contrast and shading
• The Treasury seal – The saw-tooth points around the rim are identical and sharp
• Serial numbers – Distinctive style, firmly and evenly printed, the same color as the
Treasury seal
• Back of note – Distinct and sharp details, the shading lines easily noticed
• Watermark – Identical to the portrait, is visible from both sides when held up to the
light (not present on older money)
• Color shifting ink – The number in the lower right corner on the front of the note looks
green when viewed straight on, but appears black when viewed at an angle
• Security thread – A polymer thread embedded vertically on the note displaying USA
and the denomination
Counterfeit
• Portrait – Flat, dull, smudgy, background often merges into portrait, the lines are
irregular and broken
• Treasury seal – The saw-tooth points may be uneven and broken
• Serial numbers – May be a different printing style and poorly reproduced, badly
spaced or unevenly aligned
• Back of note – Numerous green details and shading lines missing or merged into the
solid green area
• Watermark – No visible watermark
• Color shifting ink – Green foil used for overlay does not change color
COUNTERFEIT COINS AND SLUGS
The counterfeiting of coins still continues on a limited basis. Usually a counterfeit coin is
a poor reproduction of the genuine and can be identified by observation. Comparing the
reeding (the corrugated outer edge) of a questionable coin with a known genuine coin of
the same denomination will establish the identity of the suspect coin.
Far more difficult to detect are those counterfeit coins or altered genuine coins made to
be sold to collectors for amounts much greater than their face value. A laboratory analysis
is often necessary to determine their true value.
PROCEDURE FOR REPORTING COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY
131 – Counterfeit Currency
303 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Officers receiving suspicious bills in the field shall file a Found Property Report with all
the necessary information pertaining to the incident. The following information should be
placed on the Property/Evidence Report when identifying currency.
− Example: Federal Reserve Note, twenty ($20.00), L12, 173, “name of issuing bank”
(name of bank not printed on new bills), series 1996, serial #AL95369975G.
• Type of note – located on the front of the bill above the portrait
• Denomination of bill ($20)
• (L12) is not explained and not required for identification
• Name of issuing bank – located in the Federal Reserve Seal on the front of the bill
(not printed on new bills)
• Series (1996) – located at the bottom of either side of the portrait
• Serial # (AL95369975G) – located on the front of the bill on both sides of the portrait
• Back plate number (173) – located on the backside of the bill in the lower right corner
STATUTES
Title 18 US Code
• §331 – Mutilation, falsification, possession, uttering, etc., of US coins (felony)
DENOMINATION
SERIAL #
TYPE OF NOTE
Issuing Bank
(not printed
on new bills) SERIES
Back Plate #
NO EXPLANATION
FOR THIS ITEM OF
IDENTIFICATION (L12)
131 – Counterfeit Currency
304 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• §333 – Mutilation of National Bank obligations (misdemeanor)
• §472 – Uttering counterfeit obligations or securities (felony)
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense
305 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 132 – Community Services Assistant
Incidents Involving Self-Defense
REVISED September 2023
COMMUNITY SERVICES ASSISTANT
INCIDENTS INVOLVING SELF-DEFENSE
INTRODUCTION
A Community Services Assistant’s (CSA) role in the Department is to respond to non-
emergency calls for service and conduct investigations not requiring the expertise of
sworn personnel. CSAs do not have the authority to arrest or use force against a person.
CSAs have been trained not to use force and to remove themselves from any situation
that appears to be escalating into a physical altercation. For further refer to Special Order
2023-7 Community Services Assistant.
The CSA’s limited authority, duties, and training should prevent the CSA from becoming
involved in a physical assault incident. However, if an incident occurs, the investigation
should be conducted in the same manner as any citizen physical assault complaint.
The purpose of this training bulletin is to provide guidance to CSAs, Patrol Officers, and
Supervisors when investigating incidents when a physical assault incident occurs, and a
CSA is an involved party.
INVESTIGATION
A CSA should not use force as part of their duty assignment, but they do have the same
rights as any citizen to defend themselves, including the use of a chemical agent (22810
PC). A CSA should only use force to defend themselves as described in CALCRIM 3470,
which states a person can only use force against another person in lawful defense of
themselves or another if:
1. The person reasonably believes that they [or] someone else was in imminent danger
of suffering bodily injury [or was in imminent danger of being touched unlawfully];
2. The person reasonably believes that the immediate use of force was necessary to
defend against that danger; and
3. The person only uses the force reasonably necessary to defend against that danger.
All investigations of physical assault that involve a CSA should be conducted in a fair,
unbiased, and thorough manner.
CSA Responsibilities
If a CSA is involved in a physical altercation, they should:
• Request a Police Officer to assist via radio.
• Request a Patrol Supervisor and CSA Supervisor to respond.
132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense
306 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Cooperate with the investigation, as necessary.
• Provide reasonable and appropriate medical aid to any involved persons.
Patrol Officer Responsibilities
The Patrol Officer should:
• Respond to the location, provide assistance as necessary, and render the scene
safe.
• Provide reasonable and appropriate medical aid to the CSA and any other involved
persons.
• Ensure a Field Supervisor has been notified.
• Investigate the incident, including victim/suspect/witness statements, collection of
evidence, and obtaining available digital evidence (i.e., photos/videos).
• File relevant electronic incident reports.
Patrol Supervisor Responsibilities
The Patrol Supervisor should:
1) Respond to the scene and ensure a detailed investigation is conducted
surrounding the incident.
2) Ensure photographs are taken of all injuries or lack of injuries to the CSA and
any other involved persons.
3) Notify the Watch Commander of the incident as soon as possible and no later
than the conclusion of the incident investigation.
4) Respond to the medical facility if the subject is transported.
5) Review the incident, arrest/supplemental reports related to the incident, and any
digital evidence (i.e., photos/video) available at the time.
CSA Supervisor Responsibilities
The CSA Supervisor should:
1) Respond to the scene and ensure a Patrol Supervisor has been requested.
2) Respond to the medical facility if the CSA is transported.
3) Complete required HR paperwork, such as the DWC-1.
4) Notify the involved employee’s Lieutenant.
Watch Commander Responsibilities
The Watch Commander should ensure the involved employee’s Lieutenant was notified
of the incident and ensure the incident is entered in the Watch Commander’s Log.
Involved Employee’s Lieutenant Responsibilities
The involved employee’s Lieutenant should:
1) Review the incident reports as well as any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video).
2) Notify the involved employee’s Commander.
3) Take corrective action if necessary.
4) Evaluate the incident to determine the need for future training.
Involved Employee’s Division Commander Responsibilities
The involved employee’s Division Commander should:
1) Review the incident reports as well as any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video).
2) Take corrective action if necessary.
132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense
307 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
3) Evaluate the incident to determine the need for future training.
REVIEW Responsibility
Community Services Bureau
133 – Security Guards & Private Patrol Operators
308 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 133 – Security Guards & Private
Patrol Operators
REVISED February 2003
SECURITY GUARDS AND PRIVATE PATROL OPERATORS
INTRODUCTION
The Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Security and Investigative Services
(BSIS) under the California Business and Professions Code regulate security guards and
Private Patrol Operators (PPOs), more commonly referred to as security guard
companies. Although local regulation is largely pre-empted by State law, local officers
may conduct inspection and enforcement. Field officers will frequently encounter security
guards and should be familiar with the regulations governing these individuals, who often
are uniformed, wear badges, and carry weapons.
GUARD CARDS
A security guard is a uniformed or non-uniformed person employed to protect people and
property or to prevent the theft of property. This includes security guards, bodyguards,
patrolmen, and watchmen.
A security guard who provides security for one employer, is listed on the payroll of that
employer, has wages paid directly by that employer, and only provides security for that
employer, is known as an “in-house” security guard. Included in this category are
bodyguards, bouncers, and doormen. In-house security guards do not need a State permit
(guard card) unless they carry any deadly weapons in the course of their duties, in which
case they must be registered with the BSIS and must obtain the appropriate weapons
permits.
Any security guard employed by a Private Patrol Operator is required to be registered
with the BSIS and must obtain a guard card and have it in possession while on duty.
Conversely, a security guard with a valid guard card may only work as an employee of a
licensed Private Patrol Operator. A security guard who contracts out his/her services on an
individual or freelance basis shall be treated as an unlicensed Private Patrol Operator.
Effective January 1, 2003, temporary security guard cards are no longer issued. A
security guard must possess a valid security guard registration or a screen printout of the
Bureau's approval from the Bureau website at www.dca.ca.gov/bcis, along with valid
photo identification. Temporary guard cards issued prior to January 1, 2003, are valid
until the expiration of the temporary.
133 – Security Guards and Private Patrol
309 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Officers should be aware that counterfeit guard cards (as well as firearm and baton cards)
are not uncommon. Officers are encouraged to note and verify guard cards through the
BSIS, either by telephone during business hours, or via the website listed below.
LICENSING
Security guards need no permits from the City of Long Beach. In regard to PPOs, under
the California Business and Professions Code (B&P) cities may collect a business tax and
a fee to cover the cost of regulation. However, regulation is effectively limited to enforcement
of State statutes relating to private patrol activity and reporting violations to the State for
administrative action against the licensee.
A person cannot obtain a Business License to operate as a PPO in the City of Long Beach
until they are properly licensed by the State of California. If a Private Patrol Operator is
observed doing business without a Business License to operate in the City of Long Beach,
they are in violation of 3.80.210 LBMC (business license required). Any advertisement,
whether by sign or circulation, will suffice as evidence of doing business (3.80.425.1 LBMC).
Other Sections:
§7582 B&P - Unlicensed security guard
§7583.3(a) B&P - Guard card not in possession (of licensed security guard)
§7582.3(a) B&P - Unlicensed Private Patrol Operator
§7582.3(b) B&P - Client (ex: apartment complex, nightclub owner) knowingly hire an
unlicensed operator
§7582.3(d) B&P - (False representations may be made by way of badge, ID Card, business
card, letterhead or any advertisement.) Person who falsely represents license by the State
or employment by a licensee
FIREARMS
Any security guard in possession of a firearm must also possess a valid Firearms
Qualification Card in addition to his guard card. A receipt for application for a Firearms
Qualification Card is not sufficient. A Firearms Qualification Card is not a permit to carry a
concealed weapon upon the person (as defined in section 12050 PC). Private security
guards who carry firearms without a valid firearms card may be arrested for carrying a
loaded firearm in the City 12031(a)(1) PC. Private security guards may not carry replica
firearms.
Sections:
§7583.3(b) B&P - Security guard in possession of a firearm must possess Firearms
Qualification Card
§7583.37(a) B&P - Security guard carrying replica firearm
BATON AND MACE
Private security guards may legally carry a baton and/or mace in the performance of their
duties if they are in possession of BSIS permits in addition to a guard card. Appropriate
Penal Code sections may be enforced whether or not the guard is registered with the State
or employed by a licensed PPO.
133 – Security Guards and Private Patrol
310 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Sections:
§7583.37(c) B&P and 12020(a)(1) PC - Security guard in possession of a baton without the
required permit card
§7583.37(d) B&P and 12420 PC - Carrying mace without a permit
UNIFORMS
Security guards must be in a distinctive uniform when carrying either a baton or an exposed
firearm. The uniform must have clearly visible patches on each arm that read "private
security" and include the company name, and a badge or cloth patch on the upper left breast
of the uniform. Badges or cap devices must bear the company name and an employee
identification number.
Per the City Attorney and the City Prosecutor, patrol officers should not enforce §9.08.010
LBMC, which prohibits private security guards from wearing uniforms that are not clearly
distinguishable from those of the Long Beach Police Department. However, patrol officers
may still enforce the following Business and Professions Code provisions:
§7582.27 B&P - Security guard uniform must have clearly visible patches on each arm that
read "private security" and include the company name
§7582.28 B&P - Badges or cap devices require company name and employee identification
number
§7582.27 B&P - Carry baton or exposed firearm when not in uniform or without required
patches
§7582.26(f) B&P - Security guard may not wear or use any badge, except while engaged
in guard work and wearing a distinctive uniform with required patches
ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION AGAINST PPOs AND SECURITY GUARDS
In addition to criminal prosecution, the Department of Consumer Affairs will take
administrative action against its licensed Private Patrol Operators and registered Security
Guards. Some offenses invoke disciplinary action such as suspension or revocation. Other
offenses invoke heavy fines. The Special Permits Detail is the liaison between the Police
Department and the State. They will maintain and track all information received from patrol
and coordinate with State and local agencies to obtain compliance or begin administrative
action against the subject license. Detailed documentation of violations involving PPOs or
their employees is as essential to an administrative action as to a criminal prosecution. Field
officers should forward a copy of any citation, crime or arrest report, and any follow-up
reports, to Vice Special Permits. However, if no citation was issued and no report was taken,
a memorandum may be filed that explains, in detail, any questionable activity.
For further information, you may contact the Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of
Collections and Investigations at (916) 255-4277. Additional information and a license
verification is also available at the Bureau of Security and Investigative Services website:
http://www.dca.ca.gov/bsis/index.html
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
311 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 134 – Firearms Qualification
REVISED September 2022
FIREARMS QUALIFICATION
Course of Fire for 50 Round Qualification Course:
25 - yard line: 5 rounds – draw from holster, 2-hand hold, 21 second time limit
15 - yard line: 5 rounds- draw from holster, 2-hand hold, speed reload, 5 rounds, 2-
hand hold, 23 second time limit,
5 rounds – draw from holster, strong hand only, 17 second time limit
10 - yard line: 3 rounds – low ready position, 3 second time limit (4 times)
7 - yard line 6 rounds – draw from holster, 8 second time limit
3 rounds – low ready position, 2 second time limit (2 times)
7 - yard line 2 rounds center mass, 1 round head – draw from holster, 4 second
time limit,
1 round head – draw from holster, 3.5 second time limit, (3 times)
Pistol/Combat Qualification Course:
The course of fire varies each qualification period based on the tactical scenario used.
QUALIFICATION
The minimum score for qualification will be 80%. Officers will be required to qualify with
the weapon that they carry while on duty.
COURSE OF FIRE FOR RETIRED OFFICERS AND BACK UP WEAPONS
The standardized course consists of:
Rounds – 25
Minimum score to pass – 80%
15 - yard line: 5 rounds two-handed hold
7 - yard line: 10 rounds two-handed hold
3 - yard line: 5 rounds left hand only
5 rounds right hand only
134 – Firearms Qualifications
312 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
DISQUALIFICATION
The Range Officer will have complete charge of the course of fire. He shall have the
option to disqualify any officer who:
• Fires more than the prescribed load from any point within a course of fire
• Fires the weapon after the command to cease-fire
• Fails to fire in the proper sequence
• Deviates from the prescribed course of fire
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
313 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 136 – Shoplifting Theft
REVISED September 2002
SHOPLIFTING THEFTS
INTRODUCTION
Shoplifting is the act of committing a theft from an open-for-business establishment,
taking merchandise of value, and leaving or attempting to leave without making an effort
to pay for the item. Officers must be able to prove asportation and that the suspect
intended to deprive the owner of the merchandise.
TYPE OF SHOPLIFTING THEFTS
There are four types of shoplifting thefts. Officers sh use the following classifications
when filing shoplifting reports to ensure proper distribution and assignment of reports.
• 484(a) PC PETTY THEFT SHOPLIFT – Occurs when the value of merchandise taken
is $400.00 or less
• 487(a) PC GRAND THEFT SHOPLIFT - Occurs when the value of merchandise taken
exceeds $400.00. When determining the value of merchandise, officers should not
include the tax as part of the loss. Tax cannot be stolen
• 459 PC COMMERCIAL BURGLARY SHOPLIFT – Occurs when there is reasonable
cause to believe that the suspect(s) entered an open-for-business establishment with
the specific intent of committing a theft. Statements, physical evidence, lack of money
or other means for paying for the merchandise, or other stolen merchandise in
possession of suspect(s) at the time of arrest can be used to establish intent:
NOTE: it is requested that officers no longer book shoplifting suspects for
Commercial Burglary. If you feel that you have an exception to the rule,
please consult with the Booking Sergeant. Continue to file detailed reports
with all the elements of commercial burglary, if applicable. The detective
assigned to the case will present the case to the District Attorney's Office
or City Prosecutor's Office with any additional appropriate charges
• 666 PC (FELONY) PETTY THEFT WITH A PRIOR PETTY THEFT CONVICTION
Prior to booking a suspect for 666 PC related charges, officers will check the suspect’s
CII record for theft related convictions. The suspect must have served at least one
day in jail after conviction in order for the section to apply:
– Priors should not exceed an eight to ten year time frame, as court dockets are
destroyed after that time
The Booking Sergeant shall monitor for compliance when approving theft related charges.
The Booking Sergeant shall confirm the CII record for the 666 PC booking.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
136 – Shoplifting Thefts
314 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Evidence
Nearly all-shoplifting arrests will involve some type of evidence. It is accepted procedure
to have the victim establishment retain the evidence. The arresting citizen should be
advised to place the evidence in a safe secure area. If for any reason the victim cannot
maintain the evidence, it should be photographed showing the incident report number
and/or the suspect(s) name and date of arrest.
Arresting citizens should be advised to put an identifying mark (such as initials or name
and date) on the evidence, as they may have to bring the evidence to court and testify
about it at a later date. When evidence is perishable, the victim(s) should be advised to
remove the tags, or labels and retain them for evidence. Officers shall take into evidence
any large empty purse, booster bag, etc., which was brought by the shoplifter to the store
for the purpose of shoplifting.
Officers often receive arrests from store security/loss prevention officers. In this case,
the police officer should be sure to record the personal information of the security officer,
e.g., a CDL#, DOB, home address and phone number in their report. Detectives have
difficulty locating security officers, therefore the security officer information is required.
Security officers do not have the “non-disclosure” of personal information that police
officers have.
All arrests involving a retail store where an “In house” arrest report is filed by a
security/loss prevention officer shall be placed into evidence. A copy of the report will do
if the original is not available.
Advisement of Rights
The arresting/transporting officer should advise the suspect of their Miranda Rights and
attempt to obtain a statement or confession.
Suspects Financial Situation
Officer's report should document the means the suspect(s) had, if any, to pay for the
merchandise taken. If the suspect had no money or other means for paying for the
merchandise taken, statements regarding this can be used during the prosecution.
Suspect Vehicle
It is extremely important for officers to make every effort to obtain a description of a
suspect vehicle. Many times, a suspect has shoplifted in other stores and the stolen
merchandise can be recovered if the suspect vehicle is located.
The suspect should be questioned as to how he arrived at the store. If the suspect vehicle
is located, it should be thoroughly investigated to determine if the vehicle is involved in
the crime. Any search of the vehicle should be consistent with current search and seizure
laws.
136 – Shoplifting Thefts
315 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS
Misdemeanor citations should be issued with discretion. If a citation is issued, the issuing
officer should check off the “Booking Required” box. This will allow the court to order the
suspect to report to the Police Department for booking, fingerprinting and a photograph.
The suspect will then be released. If the “Booking Required” box is not checked, then:
• The suspect will not have a local record of this citation for future reference
• The suspect will not be photographed or fingerprinted in connection with this citation
A Petty Theft Shoplift 484(a) PC incident report must be filed in addition to any citation
issued. The crime report shall include all details of the crime, including any statements
made by the suspect. It shall also include the date the suspect is to appear in court.
In any event, DO NOT issue a misdemeanor citation if the suspect has no identification.
490.1 PC CITATION
§490.1 PC is Petty Theft where value taken is under $50.00. Juveniles may be cited for
minor offenses such as petty theft shoplift using this section. This is an excellent tool to
minimize the time spent dealing with minor offenses committed by juveniles. A narrative
must be filed and attached to the citation. Also, a “Glady’s R” form is required on all
juveniles age 13 and under.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
316 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 140 – Bar Inspections
REVISED April 2004
BAR INSPECTIONS AND ABC LAW COMPLIANCE
INTRODUCTION
Enforcement of ABC laws is often necessary for the preservation of peace, the reduction
of drunk driving, and to maintain the quality of life in neighborhoods with ABC-licensed
establishments.
INSPECTION AUTHORITY
Long Beach Municipal Code §5.08.020 specifies that all Police Officers and certain
civilian employees are appointed inspectors of business licenses. Additionally, §25619
of the California Business and Professions Code specifically requires every peace officer
to enforce the provisions of the Alcohol Beverage control act. Accordingly, all patrol
officers are directed to make compliance inspections of ABC-licensed premises and to
file timely field inspection reports describing conspicuous and/or suspected vice
violations.
ENFORCEMENT
Patrol officers must check out “Code 6” on the radio or MDC when making an inspection
of any licensed premises and must check “10-8” immediately after leaving the premises.
The name and the address of the premises must also be given to Dispatch when checking
“Code 6.” This procedure will establish an official record for the officer’s and the
Department’s protection.
ABC inspections, when practical, should be directed toward voluntary compliance on the
part of the licensee. Officers shall report problems that cannot be resolved through
voluntary compliance, describing the conditions observed, citizen complaints received,
and enforcement action taken. File reports to the Deputy Chief, Investigations Bureau,
for transmittal to the Detective Division, Vice Investigations. Inspection forms may be
picked up from Vice, or a memorandum will suffice. The Alcoholic Beverage Control
Board will act on information filed through the Detective Division. Establishments that are
habitual violators will be investigated by the Vice Investigations Section or by ABC
investigators, acting on field intelligence reports filed by patrol officers and detectives.
Field inspection reports, along with citizens’ complaints, contribute to the basis for
additional personnel deployment by both the area Commander and the Commander of
the Detective Division.
140 – Bar Inspections
317 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
A “compliance inspection” (by patrol officers) is an entry and walk-through of licensed
premises. Officers should refer to the attached violation guidelines and become familiar
with possible violations that might be encountered.
Each officer should keep a log or notes on inspections made, containing all observations
and the names and addresses of persons contacted about violations or compliance. Any
logs or notes will include dates, times, and names of witnessing officers.
Performance of these duties does not require a citation or arrest for every violation
observed. Officers should use good judgment and discretion to bring about the preferred
method of enforcement, voluntary compliance.
GENERAL INVESTIGATIVE TECHNIQUES, suggested by ABC:
• Retain alcoholic beverage for evidence
• Mark bottles or containers of seized beverages for identification
• Immediately remove ice from mixed drinks and seal liquid in an evidence bottle
• Give a receipt for unopened containers that are seized
• Obtain complete identifying information of licensee or employees on premises
• Establish employee's shift schedules, length of association with the premises, and
length of experience in the liquor business
• Observe and record licensee’s/employee’s physical condition as to vision, hearing,
sobriety, etc., and a description of their clothing
• Examine all identification documents carefully. Seize any false identification as
evidence
• Present apprehended minors to alleged sellers as soon as possible, on a face-to-face
basis, for positive identification. Note results of the presentation and any
conversation/statements between them
• Note and include in your report the condition of the premises (lighting, size of crowds,
number of employees present, etc.) and list any witnesses present
• Be accurate about time if an after-hours case. Note the time on any clock on premises
and on employee’s watch; verify time with dispatcher
• Note method of identifying alcoholic beverages: smell and appearance, container
labels or beer tap spigot markers, statements overheard (what did patron order?),
admissions of licensee or employees
A thorough and detailed follow-up report to all arrests or citations will greatly enhance not
only the criminal prosecution, but also any administrative action undertaken by ABC
against the licensee.
Please contact Vice Investigations with any questions regarding violations or non-
compliance situations, or for assistance with an inspection. Officers are also encouraged
to go to the Vice office to file information with the Vice officers.
Attached are guidelines to violations designed to assist the field officer in making
compliance inspections of bars and ABC-licensed businesses. Many of the ordinances
are ABC related, but sections pertaining to security guards and municipal entertainment
ordinances may also be useful at ABC establishments.
140 – Bar Inspections
318 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
140 – Bar Inspections
319 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
VIOLATION GUIDELINES RELATING TO
BAR INSPECTIONS AND ABC LAW COMPLIANCE
Business & Professions Code Sections
23300 Alcohol sales without a license.
• Includes admittance tickets entitling purchaser to a drink
24046 License must be posted.
• no citation - memo to Vice only
25602(a) Sale to obviously intoxicated person.
• server must have opportunity to observe that person is obviously
intoxicated
• Arrest intoxicated person as well as citing server
5607(a) Unlawful possession on licensed premises (i.e., distilled spirits) on beer &
wine premises.
• Cite bar
• Cite patron if in possession
• Seize all non-permitted alcohol
25631 Sales/furnishing during restricted hours (0200-0600 hours).
• Service must be observed
• Server and patron are citable
25632 Consumption during restricted hours (check license for conditions)
• Actual consumption must be observed
• Mere presence of drinks is insufficient
25658(a) Sales, serving or furnishing to a minor
• Cite server
25658(b) Purchase/consumption by a minor
• Cite minor. See 25662 for mere possession
25658.5 Minor attempting to purchase alcoholic beverage (an infraction)
25660.5 Furnishing false identification to minor.
25661 Use/possession of false identification by minor.
• Regardless of whether on ABC premises, or in connection with
attempted purchase of alcohol
25662 Possession of alcohol by a minor
• On any street, public place, or place open to public
• Exception for making delivery at direction of parent, etc., or in pursuance
of employment
25663 Employment of minor in on-sale premises.
• Minors may not work in areas primarily designated for alcohol
consumption
• There are some exceptions. Consult with Vice Investigations
25665 Minor on public premises (nobody under 21 years of age permitted)
• Cite licensee, if present, and minor
7582 Unlicensed security guard
7583.3 (a) Security guard without valid guard card
7583.3 (b) Guard carrying firearm without permit
7583.37 (c) Guard carrying baton without baton permit
140 – Bar Inspections
320 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
7583.37 (d) Guard carrying tear gas without permit
7583.37 (a) Guard carrying replica firearm
Penal Code Sections
647 (f) Drunk in public
• Includes inside a bar
347(b) Putrid/contaminated bottles ("Buggy Bottles") -
• Mandatory citation if there are 5 or more bottles
• Seal and place the bottles into evidence
308 Sale of cigarettes to minor
308.2 Sale of single cigarettes
ENTERTAINMENT AND OTHER ISSUES
Long Beach Municipal Code Sections
3.80.210 Business license required
5.72.110A Entertainment permit required
• Not applicable at private residence
• Dancing by performers or patrons
• Live music by more than two people
• Amplified music, including DJs and karaoke
5.69.050A Pool hall permit required
• 3 or more pool tables
5.72.110B Entertainment for monetary gain at private residence prohibited
• Charging admission for party
9.20.010 Exposure of genitals, pubic hair, buttocks, etc., by waiter or waitress
prohibited
9.20.020 Exposure of female breasts by waitress or entertainer in
food/beverage establishment prohibited
9.20.030 Permit/procuring for public exposure
• owner/manager allowing nudity
9.20.050A Public nudity prohibited
• except in First-amendment protected expression
9.22.010 Transport/drink/consume alcoholic beverage in public
9.24.010 Gambling prohibited
9.24.060 Use of false ID to be admitted to place of entertainment
9.25.010 Urinating/defecating in public
9.30.025 Misdemeanor to enter public restroom designated for use by the
opposite sex
Labor Code
6404.5(b) Smoking prohibited in an establishment
140 – Bar Inspections
321 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
If the ABC license is a type 41 or 47 (bonafide eating place), they are required to serve
food, other than appetizers, during normal meal hours. If you observe such a violation,
please notify Vice Investigations.
322 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 141 – Security of Information
REVISED August 2001
SECURITY OF INFORMATION
The California Law Enforcement Telecommunications System (CLETS) is the most widely
used message switching system within the criminal justice system. Records obtained
through CLETS are a primary source of information vital to decision making and the
exercising of discretion concerning the processing of criminal suspects.
The Department of Justice continues to receive information relating to alleged
unauthorized access and misuse of information obtained through CLETS, primarily,
Criminal Offender Record Information (arrests and rap sheets) and Department of Motor
Vehicles (DMV) records. The importance of complying with the privacy and security
provisions of State law and DOJ regulations cannot be overemphasized.
Sworn and civilian employees who access and misuse CLETS obtained information risk
their careers, criminal prosecution and civil liability. Unlawful inquiries to any criminal
justice databases, such as a criminal justice employee who accesses a criminal record
for unauthorized agencies or citizens, is in violation of PC §502. This section contains
subsections defining computer-related crimes as either a misdemeanor or felony.
Unauthorized receivers of information include, but are not limited to the following:
• Private investigators
• Collection agencies
• Auto Dealers
• Friends and relatives
• Private business persons or corporations
• Sworn officers and civilian employees when they seek information for personal and/or
private use
Citizens may obtain vehicle registration information and driver’s license information
through the Department of Motor Vehicles.
CLETS provides all law enforcement user agencies with the capability of obtaining
information directly from Federal, State and local computerized information files.
• Any information transmitted or received via CLETS is confidential and for official use
only by authorized law enforcement or criminal justice personnel. Access to
confidential information is based on:
− A right to know
− A need to know
141 – Security of Information
323 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Police officers have a need and a right to access information. However, the information
must be accessed correctly and with the “need to know” reason being law enforcement
related.
• Accessing and/or releasing criminal justice information for non-law enforcement
purposes is prohibited and is subject to administrative action and/or criminal
prosecution
• CLETS terminals and information must remain secure from unauthorized access
• Information received from a CLETS terminal must be maintained separately from non-
law enforcement information
• A unique password must be assigned to each CLETS user
Examples of unacceptable messages for transmission over CLETS include:
• Personal notices, e.g.; social functions, pistol meets, funeral notices, retirement
announcements and holiday cheer messages
• Profane or obscene language for any purpose including that contained within the
description of a crime
• Excessive listing or detailed description of stolen property except that identifiable by
serial numbers or unique markings
Criminal History Inquiry
Police officers often “need to know” an individual's criminal history. Providing such
information is a function of CLETS. Law enforcement inquiries into Criminal Offender
Record Information (CORI) are audited by the Department of Justice. CORI inquiries are
not to be done on the mobile work station. They are generally completed in Records or
at a terminal inside the station. When inquiry screens ask for a “requesting officer” or
contain an “attention” field they must be filled in with the correct information. The proper
use of these fields will result in an audit trail to provide DOJ with the official law
enforcement reason to obtain information.
The “attention” or “requester” field must be completed for all inquiries. This field contains
up to 23 characters and must indicate the following:
• The name, initials or DID # of the requester
• The operator’s name, initials or DID # (if different from the requester)
• The specific reason for the request
• The requester’s unit information is optional
• The “reason” information is the tracking data, e.g., arrest #, booking #, case # or name,
citation #, incident #, warrant #, Department of Corrections (CDC) inmate #, etc.
• Generic terms such as “Investigation”, “Inquiry”, are unacceptable for use as an inquiry
reason
• The data must provide DOJ with sufficient information to justify the “need to know”
Proper usage of these fields ensures compliance with State and Federal law. The Police
Department will also conduct internal audits on the use of CLETS and the proper entry of
requester information.
141 – Security of Information
324 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The user restrictions for the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) and the Criminal
Information Index (CII), are generally the same as for CLETS. Authorized recipients of
information derived from these systems are:
• Peace officers
• District attorneys
• Probation officers
• Courts of the State
• U.S. officers
• Officers of other states, territories or U.S. possessions
• Peace officers of other countries authorized by the Attorney General
• Any public defender or attorney, who is representing a person in proceeding for a
certificate of rehabilitation and pardon
Persons other than those listed above are not authorized to receive information through
those systems. Should NCIC be able to verify improper use of the system by a requesting
officer or agency, they will take immediate action to discontinue service to the agency
until the agency can prove the situation has been corrected.
COUNTY WARRANT SYSTEM (CWS)
Sworn officers and civilian employees are bound to the same regulations and restrictions
that apply to information derived from CLETS or NCIC.
RELEASE OF LAW ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION
§6254(f) of the California Government Code requires that certain information be made
public:
• Crime Reports. Certain information will be made available to:
− The victim of the incident
− An authorized representative of the victim (attorney of victim’s designee)
− An insurance carrier against which a claim has been or might be made
− Any person suffering bodily injury or property damage as a result of the incident
Categories of crime reports subject to release under this section are:
• Arson
• Burglary
• Explosion
• Fire
• Larceny
• Robbery
• Carjacking
• Vandalism
• Vehicle theft
141 – Security of Information
325 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Violent crimes
Information is not released if the disclosure would endanger the safety of a witness or
other person involved in the investigation or would endanger the successful completion
of the investigation or a related investigation. In some cases certain information is not
released such as informant information and conclusions of the investigating officer.
The following information pertaining to an incident shall be released to the public:
• Time, substance and location of all complaints or requests for assistance
• Time and nature of response to the extent that such information is recorded:
− Time, date and location of occurrence
− Time and date of the report
− Name, age and current address of victim
− The factual circumstances surrounding the entire incident or crime
• General description of:
− Any injuries involved
− Weapons involved
− Property involved
The name of a victim of any crime defined by §220, 261, 261.5, 262, 264, 264.1, 273a,
273d, 273.5, 286, 288, 288a, 289, 422.6, 422.7, 422.75, or 646.9 of the Penal Code may
be withheld at the victim’s request or at the request of the victim’s parent or guardian if
the victim is a minor. When a person is a victim of more than one crime, information
disclosing that the person is a victim of a crime defined by any of the above-mentioned
Penal Code sections may be deleted at the request of the victim, (or the victim's parent
or guardian if the victim is a minor), when the report of the crime, or of any incident
accompanying the crime, is made available to the public in compliance with the
requirements of this paragraph.
The current address of every individual arrested by the agency and the current address
of the victim of a crime will be released, where the requester declares under penalty of
perjury that the request is made for:
• Scholarly,
• Journalistic,
• Political or governmental purposes, or,
• Investigation purposes by a licensed private investigator
The address of the victim of any crime defined by any of the aforementioned Penal Code
sections shall remain confidential.
§841.5 PC - No law enforcement officer or employee of a law enforcement agency shall
disclose to any arrested person, or to any person who may be a defendant in a criminal
action, the address or telephone number of any person who is a victim or witness in the
alleged offense.
ARREST REPORTS
141 – Security of Information
326 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The following information will be made public:
• The full name, current address, and occupation of every person arrested by the
agency (except juvenile offenders)
• Arrestee’s physical description including:
− Date of birth and sex
− Eye and hair color
− Height and weight
• Date and time of arrest
• Date and time of booking
• Location of arrest
• Amount of bail set
• Factual circumstances surrounding arrest
• Time and manner of release or location where the arrestee is being held
• All charges subject is being held on including outstanding warrants and
probation/parole holds
Any of the aforementioned information shall be released to the public, except to the extent
that disclosure of a particular item of information would endanger the safety of a person
involved in an investigation or would endanger the successful completion of the
investigation or related investigation.
Nothing in §6254 (f) requires the release of information by which a juvenile offender’s
identity may be disclosed. Juvenile information can only be obtained through the Superior
Court juvenile system.
REVIEW Responsibility
Investigations Bureau
327 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 144 – Clandestine Laboratories &
LAIMPACT Clandestine Lab Team
REVISED September 2019
CLANDESTINE LABORATORIES & LAIMPACT CLANDESTINE
LAB TEAM
INTRODUCTION
Clandestine drug laboratories are found throughout Southern California and range from
small processing operations, to large-scale operations that produce hundreds of pounds
of illicit drugs, such as Methamphetamine, PCP and Butane Honey Oil. Makeshift pill
mills, pill presses, and capsulation processes are also found in laboratory environments
producing narcotic analgesics, opioids, and Fentanyl. All clandestine laboratories pose a
danger to the law enforcement officers who discover them.
Clandestine laboratories are often found by patrol officers or by narcotics detectives
during unrelated investigations. Indicators of drug laboratories may include an explosion,
fire, chemicals, odor, glassware, containers with liquids or powders, injured persons, or
statements by witnesses or suspects. Labs, chemicals & equipment may be found in
vehicles, motel rooms, mobile homes, sheds, yards, garages, houses, apartments or
businesses.
When a clandestine lab is discovered or suspected, specific dangers must be kept in
mind. The chemicals used in a lab can cause fires, explosions, toxic exposures, and the
release of poisonous gases. Clandestine lab operators are known to dump dangerous
chemicals in surrounding areas and extreme caution must be exercised.
Lab operators are often heavily armed and at times have elaborate security systems.
These systems include video cameras and alarm systems, which may be operated by trip
wires or other detection devices and can include various types of booby traps.
Another concern for officers is encountering suspects who may throw chemicals on them.
Additional problems occur if the suspects have visible contamination on their clothing, or
if an officer becomes contaminated. Except in emergency situations, individuals who may
have been exposed to chemicals or other contaminants should follow approved
decontamination procedures prior to leaving the area of exposure, or contact with other
people, objects, or food. Whenever practical, all contaminated persons should be isolated
at the scene for decontamination procedures.
PROCEDURES
144 – Clandestine Labs
328 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When a lab is suspected, or found, a Field Supervisor and the Fire Department should be
notified as early as possible. Patrol officers have the primary responsibility of containing
and controlling the lab scene pending the arrival of the Fire Department and Drug
Investigations Section (DIS). Officers should have as little contact as possible with the
actual laboratory and, when necessary, evacuate the lab location, neighboring buildings
and area. Do not allow entry of any persons into the secured area unless the individual
is authorized, properly trained, or must perform an emergency function.
DIS should be notified, if not already on scene. A DIS detective will be assigned as case
agent and may prepare a search warrant, if necessary. Lawful entry may be gained due
to the exigency and a hazardous materials cleanup could lawfully be done. However, to
ensure a successful prosecution, a search warrant is the preferred approach. DIS
detectives should conduct suspect interviews, follow-up investigations, and filing the case
with the District Attorney.
When a public health hazard or chemical waste disposal is suspected, the Fire
Department will assess the need for response by the City Department of Health and
Human Services Hazardous Materials Specialists and are responsible for making the
notification.
Patrol officers may transport and book any suspects, except under circumstances such
as contaminated or injured prisoners. Contaminated suspects will be decontaminated at
the scene and their clothing will be retained as evidence or disposed of appropriately.
The suspects will be provided with disposable clothing to wear to the booking area.
Arresting officers should notify Jail personnel that the suspects were arrested inside a
clandestine laboratory and have been through a decontamination process.
The dispatched officers may need to prepare an Arrest Report including probable cause
and exigent circumstances, if any, which led to the arrest and lab seizure. A Property
Report should be filed listing all items of uncontaminated evidence retained by LBPD.
LAIMPACT RESPONSIBILITIES
The Los Angeles Interagency Metropolitan Police Apprehension Crime Task Force
(LAIMPACT) is composed of County and local law enforcement officers. The mission of
the LAIMPACT Lab Team is to investigate, seize and dismantle clandestine drug
laboratory operations, and target illicit drug distributors who acquire their source drugs
from clandestine laboratory operators in Los Angeles County.
The goals of LAIMPACT are as follows:
• Provide investigative and technical expertise to Los Angeles County law enforcement
agencies by responding to and targeting clandestine laboratories and operators;
• Initiate and investigate clandestine laboratories, specifically targeting respective
clandestine laboratory operators;
• Identify, target and investigate illicit drug distributors who acquire the source drug from
clandestine laboratories;
144 – Clandestine Labs
329 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Provide clandestine laboratory enforcement and safety training to law enforcement
agencies and the citizens of Los Angeles County.
Notifications to LAIMPACT can be made directly to the Los Angeles Clearing House
(LACLEAR) by the Field Supervisor or case agent, or through the Communications
Center. LAIMPACT can be contacted through LACLEAR 24 hours a day at (800) LA-
CLEAR ((800) 522-5327).
Upon arrival, LAIMPACT will take over any site safety issues and conduct a thorough
search of the crime scene. Evidence will be inventoried, photographed, sampled, and
fingerprinted where appropriate. Contaminated suspects will be decontaminated by
LAIMPACT and provided with disposable clothing, when necessary.
LAIMPACT will notify the California Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC) who
will issue an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) number for this event and arrange
for a hazardous materials disposal company to complete the cleanup. LAIMPACT will
notify a criminalist from LASD who will respond to assist with the collection of chemical
evidence. LAIMPACT will prepare the appropriate DOJ reports, property inventory, and
State reports.
SUMMARY
Clandestine laboratory investigations are unique among crime scenes. Most of the
evidence at these scenes is too hazardous to retain and must be destroyed. Therefore,
the actions of those present at the crime scene must be proper to ensure safety and a
successful prosecution of clandestine laboratory operators.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
330 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 145 – Vehicle Stops
REVISED March 2005
VEHICLE STOPS
INTRODUCTION
Vehicle stops are a potentially dangerous undertaking. Because of the routine nature of
vehicle stops, officers must avoid becoming complacent. This training bulletin is a
guideline, emphasizing that common sense, flexibility, and safety are needed to
effectively conduct a vehicle stop.
TYPES OF VEHICLE STOPS
• Enforcement/Traffic violation
• Investigative stop, based on legal cause
• High risk stop, refer to Training Bulletin 146
PRE-STOP CONSIDERATIONS
• Identify the type of stop and your reason for the stop (i.e. specific violation, legal
justification)
• Advantageous location for the stop, considerations
– Traffic flow
– Hostile locations
– Lighting
– Escape routes
• Broadcast information:
– Reason for the stop
– Location of the stop
– Vehicle license number
– Basic vehicle description
– Number of occupants
– Needed backup
• Ensure your handheld radio is on and tuned to the proper frequency
• Roll down the front windows and unlock the vehicle doors for easy access in an
emergency
• Be prepared to respond if the suspect stops abruptly at a location advantageous to
them
• Be ready to exit your unit before you stop
• Maintain constant visual contact with the suspect(s) and vehicle
• Maintain the proper distance with the suspect vehicle
145 – Vehicle Stops
331 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
INITIATING THE VEHICLE STOP
• Activate the overhead emergency lighting equipment and use the siren, horn, and
public address system as necessary
• Use lighting equipment to your advantage. Focus high-beams, takedown light, and
spotlights onto the suspect(s) vehicle to illuminate the interior at nighttime
• Position your vehicle at least 1 1/2 to 2 car lengths behind the suspect vehicle, offset
to one side, creating an approach corridor to the suspect vehicle. With motor homes,
semi-trucks, or larger vehicles, you may not be able to safely offset your vehicle
• Turn your wheels to the left
• Exit your vehicle prior to the suspect exiting his/her vehicle, taking and maintaining a
position of advantage. Be aware of passing traffic
• Maintain visual contact of the driver, occupants, vehicle, and surrounding area. Don’t
get tunnel vision
METHODS OF APPROACH
• Driver’s side approach
• Passenger side approach
• Non-approach, calling the driver back to you
Approach Considerations
• Perceived officer safety risks
• Location of the stop
• Driver/occupant actions
• Escape route
• Location of cover
• Attention to passing traffic
• Keeping your gun hand free
GUIDELINES FOR APPROACH
• Prior to making the approach, consider instructing the driver to turn off the motor if
they have not done so already.
• Know how you will escape and where cover is in the event that the driver or occupants
of the vehicle engage you.
• If a cover officer is present, consider his/her function and abilities. The cover officer’s
purpose is to protect the primary officer from any outside interference, to
“cover”, and support the primary officer. Always maintain the advantage.
Consider a simultaneous approach, a staggered approach, or a single officer
approach using the cover officer as a distraction.
• The approach is the most dangerous portion of any car stop. Be prepared to
respond to any threat or attack
• Have something in your weak hand, a ticket book during the day or a flashlight at
night, to toss at the suspect as a distraction if engaged at the window
145 – Vehicle Stops
332 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
CONSIDERATIONS WHEN CONTACTING THE DRIVER
• Standing behind the driver offers you:
– A position of advantage
– Vision into both compartments of the vehicle
– Protection from being struck by the door if it’s suddenly opened
– Allows you to maintain your balance
– Allows for an easy escape, if needed
– Forces the driver to turn in his/her seat to observe or attack you
• Don’t bend or crouch down to the driver/passenger window:
– This places the driver at an advantage, and you at a disadvantage
– You are within easy reach of the suspect
– You will need to regain your balance prior to movement or effective defense
• Instruct the driver to turn the motor off
• Obtain the driver's license, registration and insurance information
• Confirm the driver's address and compare the picture to the driver
WRITING THE CITATION
• Write the citation at a location where you can observe the driver and/or vehicle while
staying aware of positions of cover if the need should arise
• Constantly be aware of traffic conditions and your surroundings
• Utilize a cover officer, if necessary
VEHICLE SEARCHES
• Do not search a vehicle that is still occupied
• Utilize a cover officer to watch the vehicle occupants outside of the vehicle while you
conduct the vehicle search
RE-APPROACHING THE DRIVER/VEHICLE
• Do not drop your guard but maintain the same safety procedures as with the initial
approach
• After the driver signs the citation, return the driver’s license and registration
TERMINATION OF THE VEHICLE STOP
• Keep the driver and vehicle in view until the vehicle stop is completed
• If necessary, assist the vehicle back into traffic
NON-CONVENTIONAL VEHICLE STOP
145 – Vehicle Stops
333 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Motorcycles:
• Consider their increased acceleration and maneuverability capabilities
• Consider the driver’s access to weapons
• Consider the helmet being used as a weapon against you
Consider calling the drivers of motor homes, campers, vans, semi-trucks and buses back
to you due to:
• The potential for a larger number of passengers
• Reflectorized windows and the inability to view the interior of the vehicle
• High-profile vehicles giving the occupants an advantage over an officer on foot
• Increased ability to conceal weapons and other people/suspects
• Increased ability to maintain cover/concealment
CONCLUSION
Patrol officers will stop numerous vehicles during their tour of duty. However, due to its
repetitive nature, vehicle stops carry the inherent danger of becoming routine. Officers
must adhere to basic training principles, eliminate shortcuts, and apply sound tactics while
remaining professional and flexible.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
334 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 146 – High-Risk Vehicle Stops
REVISED October 2004
HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOPS
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to describe the method and tactics that should be
utilized by officers when conducting high-risk vehicle stops. High-risk vehicle stops are
made when officers believe that any occupants of a vehicle are a serious threat, armed,
or have committed a felony. This is intended as a guideline. Officers should be flexible
and adapt their tactics for the specific operational objective.
PRE-STOP CONSIDERATIONS
Radio Transmission:
• Direction of travel/location
• Nature of the stop
• Suspect vehicle license plate and description
• The intended stop location and direction of travel, safe routes to approach
• Number of occupants and descriptions, if possible
• Knowledge of suspect weapons
• Officer's intentions or special instructions to assisting units; i.e., block side traffic, etc.
• Requests: Sergeant, K-9, Fox, Code Red, etc.
Suspect Actions:
• Abrupt stops
• Attempts to flee
• Stopping at locations of tactical advantage
• Ambush
Tactical Advantage:
• Additional units (increased firepower)
• Containment
• Tactical resources (i.e. less-lethal, K-9, AR-15, Ballistic Blanket, Helicopter)
Stop Location:
• Possible escape routes
• Cover
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
335 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Hostile locations
• Citizens
• Shooting background (i.e. industrial area vs. residential)
• Traffic conditions
VEHICLE STOP
Unit Readiness:
• Unlock doors and lower windows to:
− Improve communication
− Assisting officer access to vehicle
• Unlock shotgun
• Position spotlights
Unit Positioning (Diagram 1):
• Primary unit
− Two and one-half car lengths or approximately 45 feet, directly behind the suspect
vehicle
− Allow enough distance for adequate reaction time and communication
• Secondary unit (Arrest Vehicle)
− Directly left of the primary unit and slightly angled away from the suspect vehicle
− Leave enough room between both units to open the doors
• Third unit
− Directly right of the primary unit, pointed at the suspect vehicle
(SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK)
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
336 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
(Diagram -1)
Approximately 45 feet
Additional unit positioning (Diagram 2):
• To the rear of the vehicle stop to:
− Allow officers to move up and support the vehicle stop
− Block traffic
• On parallel streets in case the suspect(s) runs
(Diagram – 2)
(Perimeter Unit) (High-Risk Stop) (Perimeter Unit)
2 3 1
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
337 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Lighting:
• Officers should utilize lighting to maximize their tactical advantage, while being
cautious of the following:
− Back-lighting
− Blinding assisting units with the overhead strobe lights
− Masking suspect movements with strobe lights
OFFICER DEPLOYMENT
Incident Command:
• The primary unit is in charge of the stop
• The primary unit should ensure the following:
− Adequate back-up has arrived on scene
− Back-up officers are properly deployed before exit commands are given
− Minimum arrest team of two officers has been deployed
− Necessary resources are deployed (i.e. AR-15, shotgun, less-lethal, K-9, ballistic
blanket, helicopter)
Officer Positions (Diagram – 3):
• Officers should maintain cover positions behind the doors of their vehicles
• If the passenger side of units 1 and/or 3 are vacant, assisting officers should fill these
positions and cover the suspect vehicle
• Arrest team should deploy to the driver’s side of the arrest vehicle (vehicle 2)
Diagram - 3
Arrest
Team
2 3 1
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
338 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Arrest Team Responsibilities:
• The arrest team should consist of a minimum of two to three officers
• One officer will cover the suspect(s) during the arrest procedure
• One officer will handcuff the suspect(s)
• A third officer will cover the suspect vehicle during arrest procedures
• Additional officers will form at the rear of the arrest vehicle and consider the following:
− Be available to take control of individual suspect(s) after being handcuffed
− Perform thorough searches of suspect(s) after being handcuffed
− Securing suspect(s) in supporting units behind the stop
− Be available with EAT resources such as ballistic blanket, less lethal, K-9, etc.
Additional Officer Responsibilities:
• Once the positions depicted in Diagram 3 are filled, additional assisting officers should
consider the following:
− Supporting the primary unit with necessary resources
− Perimeter
− Blocking traffic
− Crowd control
SUSPECT COMMANDS/CONTROL
General Communication Considerations:
• Language barriers
• Public Address (P.A.) system versus un-amplified voice commands
• Closed or open windows on suspect vehicle
• Background noise (i.e. traffic, weather conditions, helicopter, etc.)
• Microphone feedback
Suspect Command Considerations:
• Primary officer should give all commands until arrest team takes control of suspect(s)
• Give clear and simple commands
• Specifically address individual suspects by position in vehicle and/or clothing
• Give specific action commands such as:
− Suspect(s) place your hands on your head
− Driver turn off the vehicle
− Driver place the keys on the roof of the vehicle
Suspect Removal Considerations:
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
339 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Determine which side of vehicle suspect(s) will exit
• Order suspect(s) to exit from same side of the vehicle
• Order suspect(s) to exit one at a time
• Secure each suspect(s) in a police vehicle(s) before giving the next suspect exit
commands
Suspect Arrest Considerations (Diagram 4):
• After exiting, order the suspect to face you and raise his/her hands in the air
• Direct the suspect to walk toward the arrest vehicle (Vehicle 2)
• Once in front of the arrest vehicle, the arrest team should:
− Assume verbal commands
− Order the suspect onto their hands and knees
− Crawl the suspect(s) to the driver’s side of the arrest vehicle
− Order them to a prone position, behind the engine block, well short of the driver’s
side door
− Handcuff and conduct a cursory search for weapons
Securing the Suspect(s):
• Once handcuffed:
− Walk suspect(s) to rear of arrest vehicle
− Ensure a thorough search of the suspect(s) is conducted
− Secure suspect(s) into the rear of assisting units
(Diagram – 4)
2 3 1
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
340 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
SUSPECT VEHICLE CLEARANCE
Tactical Considerations (Diagram 5):
• Interview in-custody suspect(s) regarding suspect(s) still hiding in suspect vehicle
• Consider a “bluff” call out of any additional suspect(s)
• Consider the following:
− Forming a clearing team
− Using the police vehicle and ballistic blanket as cover for the clearing team
− Ballistic blanket
− K-9 to clear suspect vehicle before clearing team moves up
− Pie the suspect vehicle from behind cover (i.e. police vehicle, ballistic blanket)
• Once vehicle is cleared, clear the trunk utilizing cover
(Diagram – 5)
Finding Additional Suspect(s) Considerations:
• If the searching team finds an additional suspect(s) they should consider the following:
− If possible return to their original stop positions
2
3 1
Ballistic Blanket
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
341 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
− Consider the outstanding suspect(s) as barricaded
− Utilize K-9, negotiations, SWAT
HIGH RISK VAN STOPS
Tactical Considerations:
• The solid doors may offer better cover to the suspects
• The solid doors may deny officers a view of the interior
• A van may also contain more suspects than a normal vehicle
Unit Positioning for Van Stops:
• Basic vehicle deployment should still be used
Distance Considerations:
• A slightly greater distance between the suspect van and police units (approximately
three car lengths), allowing for greater reaction time if the back doors of a panel van
are quickly opened in an ambush-type attack
SUSPECT COMMANDS/CONTROL FOR VAN STOPS
Direct the driver to:
• Exit the van with the keys in his/her possession
• Direct the driver to keep his/her hands visible and walk to the rear of the van and open
the back doors exposing the interior to officers
After the rear door are open:
• Direct driver as previously described
• Direct any additional passengers out of the van in the normal manner
HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOP CONTINGENCY CONSIDERATIONS
Officers should constantly evaluate circumstances and be ready to adapt their tactics to
respond to:
• Officer-involved shooting, suspect(s) down
• Reassure the remaining suspects that if they follow your instructions, they will not be
harmed
• Continue the stop, adapting your tactics to cover the downed suspect(s) and consider
using a secondary operational area for any other suspects
• Space limitations, such as in a small alley
• Leave enough room for the clearing officers to approach and return from the suspect
vehicle
146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops
342 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Extreme heat, asphalt too hot to reasonably expect suspects to lie down upon, or
flooded due to rain
• Direct suspects to kneel facing away from you for handcuffing as opposed to prone
• Children/Elderly in the vehicle who can walk and appear not to be a threat
• Direct them to an officer on the outer edge of the stop, keeping them out of the field
of fire
• A center console or other objects that a subject cannot climb over
• Have the subject exit from the right side
FIELD SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
• Respond to the high-risk vehicle stop location, supervise the stop and take command,
if needed
• Supervisors should not assume assisting officer responsibilities
• Communicate with the primary officer. Assist in coordinating movements and
assigning responsibilities. Anticipate the needs of the primary officer and other
officers directly involved
• If the affected area is a crime scene, secure as needed and maintain integrity
• Beware of public perceptions and misperceptions regarding your actions. Use the
incident as a positive public relations tool by explaining what occurred to witnesses
and onlookers
• DEBRIEF, prepare for the next similar incident. Objectively review the incident with
participants and offer constructive criticism in an attempt to improve performance,
teamwork, and officer safety
CONCLUSION
High-risk vehicle stops require coordination, cooperation, flexibility, and practice. Field
officers and supervisors should review these techniques and regularly practice them
together. This will allow maximum effectiveness and minimize risks in actual high-risk
stops in the future.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
343 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 147 – One Officer Patrol Unit
REVISED January 2003
ONE OFFICER PATROL UNIT
INTRODUCTION
Working a one-officer unit requires that an officer learn to exercise a large degree of self-
reliance, to be aware of personal limitations and to pay greater attention to detail.
Immediate help is not sitting next to you in the form of a partner. Casual factors that have
resulted in injury or death to police officers working alone, include, but are not limited to:
• Failure to request back-up when required
• Failure to safeguard officer's own weapon
• One officer foot pursuit, particularly into dark, secluded or hostile areas, crowds
• Underestimating the suspect
• Overestimating yourself
PREPARATION TECHNIQUES
Mental Preparation - Law enforcement requires planning and preparation. Mental
preparation is important for all officers, particularly those working marked one-officer
units.
Prior to logging on, inspect your equipment:
• Your weapon; is it loaded and operational?
• Your back-up weapon
• Handcuffs
• Keys
• Vest and leather
Planning - An important part of mental preparation is planning. During the Academy,
training officers detailed the significance of planning in relation to officer safety. When
working with a partner scenarios and options can be discussed and plans verbalized.
Now that you are working a one-officer unit, do you still prepare mental plans? Many
officers in the field rely on experience, which works in most daily scenarios, but consider
the "non-routine" problems. Whatever the situation, plan ahead for an alternative course
of action. Ex-convicts and criminals plan every day. They are counting on predictability.
Plan what you will do regardless of the scenario. When the pressure is on, people
subconsciously resort to training and prior mental preparation.
147 – One Officer Patrol
344 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Technique - Knowledge of technique is useless without proper execution. Be familiar
with the techniques that you rely on and continually use:
• Drawing your weapon while standing, sitting, walking, running, lying down etc.
• Returning your weapon to the holster without looking
• Loading the shotgun without looking
• Drawing your baton, your strikes
• Drawing your back-up weapon
• Searching and handcuffing
Vehicle Preparation - is as important as mental and physical preparation. The following
are suggestions for preparing the vehicle and personal equipment:
• Lock three doors - This will keep unwanted individuals from getting in your vehicle and
obtaining your equipment
• Passenger window - Roll it down four or five inches to allow you access to unlock your
passenger door for protection during traffic stops
• Spotlights - Adjust the passenger side spotlight so all that is necessary is to simply
turn it on
• Kits - Place your kit or briefcase on the passenger floorboard. This will allow you
access to ticket books, spare rounds, miscellaneous equipment and paperwork. If
your equipment is readily accessible, you will not have to remove your eyes from a
suspect to go to the vehicle trunk
• Seats - When you check your passenger seat, pre-set the seat belts. Make sure that
buckles are easily accessible. It is helpful to extend the strap completely and truck
the buckle above the seat. While the majority of prisoners will be seated and belted
in the back of a caged vehicle, this step will assist you if for some reason a prisoner
must be seated and secured in the passenger seat
• Inspect Personal Equipment - Equipment inspections are important to perform before
every shift. Consider carrying the following equipment:
− Back-up gun
− Spare car keys, handcuff and shotgun keys
− Two pairs of handcuffs
− Extra ammunition
− A spare flashlight
VEHICLE STOP FACTORS
Vehicle stops are covered extensively in Training Bulletin 145, "Vehicle Pullovers," and
146 "High Risk Vehicle Stops," and the safety techniques discussed there apply to single
officer units. Additionally, single-officer units need to carefully consider certain specific
risk factors before activating the light bar to effect a stop. Assess risk factors by asking
the following questions:
• Why are you making the stop? (Red light, possible DUI, possible felony invest, etc.)
• What danger signs are present?
• How many individuals are in the vehicle, are you comfortable you can maintain control
over them? Included in this, what type of individuals are in the vehicle, gang members,
college students, or, senior citizens?
147 – One Officer Patrol
345 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Where are you, a main street or a back alley? How is the lighting, is it dark or well lit?
Are there businesses nearby by or gang or drug locations?
• What are the occupants of the vehicle doing? Do they appear nervous or under the
influence of alcohol or drugs?
• What type of vehicle is it, a sedan, van, pick-up? Can you clearly see all of the
occupants or are the windows tinted too dark? Do you feel comfortable approaching
the vehicle without a cover officer?
• Do you perceive the stop as a low risk stop, or citation only?
If these questions are answered to your satisfaction and you make the stop, don't stop
assessing factors as the stop progresses.
• Are the vehicle occupants cooperative? Do they appear unusually nervous?
• Do you observe evidence of criminal activity, drug paraphernalia, weapons, etc?
The aforementioned signs are easily observable, particularly to an experienced officer,
and there are innumerable other danger signs you may observe. The point is how do
these danger signs affect your actions? Some officers will retreat while others will
advance. As a one-officer unit, you must be continually aware of potential danger. What
may have been routine as a two-officer unit could be hazardous for one-officer. Don't
hesitate to ask for back-up if something about the stop makes you uncomfortable.
If the traffic stop escalates to a detention for further investigation (e.g., 11550HS, Grand
Theft Auto investigation), consider requesting back-up. If back-up is not available and
the suspect appears cooperative, detain him/her handcuffed in the passenger seat of your
patrol vehicle. Consider removing the patrol unit keys and setting the parking brake.
Avoid making multiple suspect arrests without sufficient back-up and control. If you must
deal with more than one occupant, control their movements by ordering each individual
out of the vehicle, one at a time. If sufficient reasonable suspicion is present, pat down
each occupant and handcuff them (you may want to carry flex cuffs). There may be an
occasional safety exception, but it is always better to wait for back-up before you begin
any type of searching.
From the moment you decide to stop a vehicle, maintain constant observation of the driver
and occupants until you have completed the stop. Use caution in your approach.
Concentrate on what is going on around you and be aware of anything out of the ordinary.
Use the driver's rear and side-view mirrors to observe the facial expression of the driver.
If he/she displays fear, panic or over interest in what you are doing, use added
precautions. Consider retreating back to your patrol vehicle and ordering the driver out.
You should always think tactics and have an action plan prior to making the traffic
stop.
What you do in a critical situation will generally be a reaction to a perceived threat.
Training plays an important role in your ability to handle a potentially life threatening
encounter.
Pedestrian Traffic Stops
147 – One Officer Patrol
346 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Visually scan the pedestrian for weapons prior to your approach
• Attempt to approach the pedestrian from the rear
• Attempt to keep something between you and the pedestrian to maximize reaction time,
if required, until you are reasonably sure it is safe to approach
• If the pedestrian's hands are in his/her pockets, direct the pedestrian to face away
from you prior to removing their hands from their pockets. At this point consider
changing positions to another position of cover. Ask the pedestrian to remove his/her
hands from his pockets and hold them out to his/her side so you can maintain a visual
on his/her hands
• When conducting a warrant check, place the subject in a position of disadvantage
(e.g., sitting on the curb near the patrol unit's front tire).
• When dealing with multiple subjects consider requesting back up
− Watch the subject's hands at all times
− Keep the subject's from talking to each other
− Allow or keep obstacles between you and the subjects until you need to close
the distance
− Exercise control of the stop through verbal commands. Do not assume
anything
For further see Training Bulletin 191, "Hazards of Approaching Suspects, Position and
Interview."
Communication Skills
Most situations can be handled through effective communications. Advising a suspect of
your actions while maintaining a professional demeanor will generally result in
compliance. Using Tactical Communication Techniques may assist you in generating
voluntary compliance.
Occasionally, an officer is required to resort to more forceful commands to gain
compliance. Command presence, self-confidence and clear and concise instructions will
usually convince a suspect that you can manage the situation to conclusion.
Every effort should be made to gain the suspect's compliance through verbal direction.
However, without compliance, escalation of force may become necessary.
• Use of Force - Officers are expected to use that force which is necessary to overcome
a suspect's resistance.
− The most compromising and dangerous situation that a single officer may become
involved in is an incident that requires him/her to use force against a suspect. It is
far more dangerous for the officer to engage in a struggle than it is to avoid the
confrontation, even if back-up is en route. One on one, the officer has far more to
lose than the suspect
− Do not believe for a moment that you are fighting with an unarmed suspect. Once
you engage in a physical altercation, your weapon becomes your greatest concern.
How often do you hear of an officer who was killed with their own gun?
147 – One Officer Patrol
347 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
− If you think the traffic stop you are involved in may lead to a fight, back off and
immediately request back-up or assistance. Maintain your distance from the
suspect. If a confrontation escalates to a struggle, use every bit of force necessary
to stop the suspect's attack. Be quick and forceful
− Keep in mind that deadly force will be justified if the suspect:
• Uses or attempts to use deadly force against you
• Attempts to take your weapon
• Repeatedly attacks you, and even if unarmed, you fear they will overpower and
kill you
Hot Calls/Crimes in Progress
• Do not take independent action, wait for back-up
• Be aware of available resources; k-9 units, motors, helicopter, plain cars and the
hostage negotiation team
• Drive safely and slow down, if you do not get there, you cannot help anyone
• Remember the five "C's": Command, Control, Contain, Communication and
Coordinate
• The most important factor to remember in handling hot calls or crimes in progress, is
to remain calm. Remaining calm will enable you to think and communicate clearly
• As the handling unit, take control and coordinate assisting units. As an assisting unit,
give an estimated time of arrival to allow the handling unit to assess the potential for
danger. If you are required to move your location due to a tactical situation advise the
handling unit
• Remember, maintain discipline and continually evaluate each situation for changes
requiring a different course of action
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
348 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 148 – Parking Citation Books
REVISED January 2002
PARKING CITATION BOOKS
Parking citations are an integral part of controlling the manner and time in which vehicles
are parked in the City of Long Beach. The owner of a vehicle who has not paid their
parking citations may not register their vehicle until all citations are paid.
When filling out parking citations, it is extremely important to write the information clearly,
accurately, and legibly. Parking Enforcement Section personnel must enter parking
citation information into the computer and if the citation is illegible, the wrong registered
owner may have a lien placed against their vehicle license plate at DMV and the City
could be held liable. The instructions for filling out parking citations properly are as
follows:
• Date: Use the current date when issuing the citation
• Time: Use military time only (e.g. 0900, 1300, etc.)
• DMV: This is the filing code used by the Department of Motor Vehicles in checking for
registration classification. Use one letter only, e.g. A= Automobile, C= Commercial,
M= Motorcycle, L= Environmental, etc.
Legibility Instructions
• Print using all capital letters and black ink. Use heavy pressure so all copies are
legible
• Be careful in recording the date, DMV code, vehicle license, vehicle make, violation,
and ID fields
• Minor discrepancies can be corrected by lining out the error and inserting the
correction. Do not write over the erroneous information
• Be aware of problem characters and take extra care to ensure they are legible:
– U, V, Y - Use square bottom 'U' to distinguish them from V's. Put a tail on Y's so
they don't look like V's
– C, O, 0, L, Q - Don't close your C's. Enter a slash across the number 0 to
distinguish it from the letter O. Make L's with straight lines so they don't look like
C's. Make Q's with a small tail so they don't look like the number 0 or the letter O
– Z, 2, 7 - Enter a horizontal mark through the middle of the Z to distinguish it from
the number 2. A number 7 should not be written with a horizontal mark through
the middle
– 5, S, - To distinguish a number 5 from an S, it is very important the number 5 is
formed using two straight lines at a right angle
– 1, I, J, L - Print the number one and the letters I, J and L carefully so they are not
confused
148 – Parking Citation Books
349 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Registration File Codes
A = Regular automobiles, historical and classical vehicles, members of the legislature
and disabled persons
B = Boats
C = Commercial - pickups, vans, etc.
E = Exempt - both automobiles and motorcycles
F = Off highway vehicles
H = Ham operator plates
L = Environmental (personalized) plates
M = Motorcycles
P = Commercial trailers
V = VIN and identification numbers
T = Trailers, horseless carriages, press photographers
X = Out of State license plates - all types of vehicles
Vehicle Make
Alfa Romeo ALFA
American Motors AMC
Audi AUDI
BMW BMW
Buick BUICK
Cadillac CADI
Chevrolet CHEV
Chrysler CHRYS
Citroen CITRON
Datsun DATS
Dodge DODGE
Renault RENAU
Rolls Royce ROL
Saab SAAB
Subaru SUBA
Toyota TOYT
Triumph TRIU
Volkswagen VOLK
Volvo VOLVO
Fine Schedule
Always take care to clearly and correctly record the proper bail or fine amount for the
violation. Make sure your ticket book is up to date as fines change periodically.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
350 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 149 – Child Abuse
REVISED September 2022
CHILD ABUSE
INTRODUCTION
The Child Abuse and Neglect Reporting Act was enacted to protect children from abuse
and neglect. A child abuse investigation focuses on the criminal investigation and the
physical and psychological needs of the child to prevent further harm.
REPORTING
One main goal of reporting child abuse is to ensure the child’s safety and well-being. The
law requires that a mandated reporter ensure a report is generated whenever they, in
their professional capacity or within the scope of their employment, have knowledge or
observe a child whom the mandated reporter knows or reasonably suspects has been the
victim of child abuse or neglect (CPC § 11165.7(a)).
A mandated reporter who fails to report suspected or actual child abuse or neglect is guilty
of a misdemeanor and may be found civilly liable for damages. Persons legally required
to report child abuse have immunity from criminal or civil liability for reporting as required
(CPC § 11172(a)). Officers should contact the Department of Children and Family
Services (DCFS) to report an incident of child abuse within 36 hours (CPC § 11166).
Officers should take a child abuse report regardless of jurisdiction unless the call can be
immediately transferred to the agency with proper jurisdiction (CPC § 11165.9).
If an officer has already contacted the family, it is the Department’s practice for the officer
to take the report regardless of the ability to transfer the call to the proper jurisdiction
immediately. It takes a lot of courage to disclose child abuse, and officers should make
every attempt to investigate the incident. Re-directing victims and families of child abuse
to report to another jurisdiction may discourage them from following through with the
reporting. This may also allow the victim(s) to remain in the dangerous environment,
where the abuse is likely to continue. Immediate intervention by law enforcement can
ensure safety for the victim(s) of child abuse and apprehension of the suspect(s).
WHAT IS CHILD ABUSE?
California law defines child abuse as a physical injury inflicted by other than accidental
means on a child by another person. It includes emotional abuse, sexual abuse, neglect,
or abuse in or out of home care. Child abuse does not include a mutual fight between
minors, reasonable and necessary force used by a peace officer, or spanking that is
reasonable, age-appropriate, and does not expose the child to risk of serious injury. For
further refer to CPC § 11165.6 and WIC § 300.
149 – Child Abuse
351 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Child abuse is categorized as sexual abuse, physical abuse, psychological abuse, or
neglect.
Sexual Abuse
Child Sexual abuse offenders are frequently related to or known to the victim. Family
members may not report sex crimes because of personal shame, misguided loyalty, fear
of public exposure, embarrassment, or outright guilt. The child may not report the abuse
to anyone because they are naively obedient, fear retaliation, do not want to hurt the
family, or are unaware that an offense has been committed.
Interviewing a victim of sexual abuse is a difficult task that calls for sensitivity and patience
from the officer. A child’s sense of time is gained gradually as they mature and experience
life. Depending on their age, a victim may have difficulty with dates and times. As you
interview a child, try to find references they can relate to, such as school hours, holidays,
special occasions, or parents’ working hours.
These cases may represent long periods of chronic sexual abuse between the suspect
and child. The child may maintain genuine affection for the offender, although they have
negative feelings about the sex acts.
A health care providers cannot disclose sexual assault allegations to a minor’s parents if
they are 12 years old or older (CFC § 6927, HS §§123115(a)(1)). Victims of sexual assault
have a right to confidentiality and law enforcement cannot disclose a person was a victim
of sexual assault without their consent (CPC § 293). If a minor victim does not want their
parent to be notified of a sexual assault or specific details of the investigation, officers
should use discretion when determining if it is appropriate to inform the parents and err
on the side of confidentiality. When making this decision, an officer should consider a
victim’s safety and risk of being re-victimized.
Physical Abuse
Physically abused children may display characteristic injuries or traits that can act as
indicators for an officer who suspects child abuse or neglect. However, the fact that a
child has characteristic injuries does not necessarily mean they have been abused.
Officers should familiarize themselves with the below-listed characteristics and traits
when investigating child abuse, although it is not all-inclusive:
• History of repeated injuries and/or delay in seeking treatment
• An injury the parent cannot explain or discrepancies in the explanation of the injury
• A child who has more than one injury or has injuries in various stages of healing
• Bruises, especially widespread bruising
• When children fall or collide with objects, bruising may occur on the front of the
body or head where the bone is close to the surface. Children are less likely to
have bruising injuries to soft tissue areas like the abdomen, throat, buttock, and
thighs
• Any fracture in a child under the age of one should be further investigated.
• Fractures of the upper leg bones (seldom accidental in young children)
149 – Child Abuse
352 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Psychological Abuse
All forms of child abuse involve psychological abuse. However, psychological abuse can
occur by itself. The victim may be subjected to humiliating forms of discipline or ridiculed
in front of friends, neighbors, or relatives. Unless the parent's behavior becomes socially
unacceptable, a child experiencing psychological abuse may be overlooked. Law
enforcement must rely on teachers, neighbors, and cooperative relatives to perform a
thorough investigation.
Neglect
Lack of supervision is a common form of neglect. No specific age permits a child to be
left without parental supervision. However, at the age of fourteen, a child is generally
capable of staying alone temporarily. The investigating officer should always consider the
number of children left alone when deciding. Questions like, “Can the oldest child care for
the youngest?” should be considered. A decision regarding lack of supervision is always
one of judgment.
Unfit homes must be evaluated based on the totality of the circumstances. An untidy home
may or may not constitute an unsuitable home. An officer should consider the severity of
the situation and be mindful that a single aggravated condition listed below may or may
not constitute neglect. However, the combination of conditions listed below strongly
indicates neglect.
• Cleanliness of the home
- Infested with cockroaches, rats, spiders, or other vermin
- Dirty or urine-soaked bedding
- Human or animal feces present
- Little food or spoiled food accessible to the children
• Utilities in the home
o Inadequate heating, electricity, or water
o Plumbing does not work, i.e., sink, tub, or toilet clogged or inoperable
o Unvented heaters
o Bare electrical wires
o Exits from the home are blocked, creating a fire hazard
• Other dangerous conditions
o Guns, knives, razor blades, drugs, drug paraphernalia, locks on the outside of
bedroom/closet doors, or poisons are readily accessible to the children
PROCEDURES
If a child is hospitalized due to abuse, officers should contact the DCFS and advise them
of the situation. If warranted, the DCFS will ensure the child is not placed back into the
care and custody of an abuser.
When called upon to investigate suspected child abuse, the officer should:
• Arrange emergency medical treatment, if needed
• If the child's safety is endangered, take them into protective custody
• Notify the Child Abuse Detail if it meets the CART criteria per LBPD manual § 8.7.9.1
• If the child is capable, interview them away from their parents
149 – Child Abuse
353 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Examine the child for injuries
- Remove clothing and check the body for old or new injuries, have a witness present
during this exam
- Take overall pictures of the child and their injuries. The officer should activate their
Body Worn Camera (BWC) in unfit homes and take photographs. Photographs are
often the most critical evidence in these cases.
• Take photographs of the location and circumstances
• Notify the Department of Children and Family Services at 1-800-540-4000 (Penal
Code §11166(k)), unless abuse occurred at a licensed facility (E.g.,
Daycare/Preschool), then notify the California Department of Social Services (CDSS)
Community Care Licensing at 1-844-538-8766 (Penal Code §11666.1)
• File the appropriate crime reports and upload photographic evidence. Include
complete statements from the victim, suspects, witnesses, and a detailed description
of injuries and living conditions. The officer should describe unusual odors, unusual or
excessive noises, inoperable appliances, lack of food, running water or other utilities,
and any other factors that led them to believe child abuse or neglect occurred.
CONCLUSION
The primary purpose of a child abuse investigation is to protect the child. The secondary
purpose is juvenile/family court action and possible criminal prosecution. A thorough
initial investigation can ensure that a child is protected and/or removed from a dangerous
situation and that the appropriate resources are provided for the child and family.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
354 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns
REVISED April 2002
FLARES AND FLARE PATTERNS
Flares are used to warn approaching traffic of a hazard in the roadway. The hazard may
warrant the re-routing, diverting or stopping of highway traffic. The purpose of this
Training Bulletin is to provide guidelines for the safe, correct use of flares.
LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS
Vehicle Code §2818 - “It is unlawful to traverse a flare pattern, cone pattern, or
combination thereof, provided for the regulation of traffic, or provided in any situation
where public safety personnel are engaged in traffic control or emergency scene
management.” To successfully prosecute violators of this section, you will be required to
prove that your flare pattern was understandable. A flare pattern that creates more
hazards, rather than solving one, may open the Department up to civil liability.
After voluntary assumption of a duty, one is liable if his/her failure to exercise due care
increases the risk of harm, or the harm is suffered because of the other’s reliance upon
the undertaking.
HAZARDS
• Do not place flares near combustible material (gas, oil, etc.) or in hazardous
environmental conditions (grass fields, high winds)
• Do not breathe flare fumes
• Do not place flares where fumes may drift toward incapacitated individuals
• Do not hold flares in such a way that when striking, (lighting) the splattering material
from the flare may come in contact with skin or clothing
• Do not place flares with other environmental concerns (rain spattering, Botts dots –
a.k.a., round non-reflective raised pavement markers)
• Do not channel vehicles into additional hazards
Lighting Flares
• Remove cap to expose strike plate
• Hold at arm’s length
• Contact and hold flare against strike plate
• Turn face away from strike area
• STRIKE FLARE AWAY FROM YOUR BODY
• Do not hold flare longer than ten seconds
150 – Flares and Flare Patterns
355 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Extinguishing Flares
• Pick up at non-burning end only if at least three inches remain
• Tap/scrape the side of the burning end against pavement until extinguished
• Do not throw (or kick) lit flare
• Properly dispose of all unburned ends, do not leave on the street
APPROPRIATE SITUATIONS FOR FLARE USE
• Hazard expected to last sufficient time to warrant taking the time to place flares
• Nighttime hazards on the shoulder or side of the road
• Obstruction in a traffic lane (night or day)
Flare Placement for Channeling Traffic
• Give traffic advance notice, and a safe merge channel
• The maximum spacing between channeling devices in a taper, should be equal in feet
to the speed limit
• Under emergency conditions, give as much warning as possible. Increase to these
standards (below) as soon as sufficient resources are available
Approach Speed
(MPH)
Taper Length
(feet)
Number of
Cones/flares for
taper
Cone/flare
spacing along
taper (feet)
25 125 6 25
30 180 7 30
35 245 8 35
40 320 9 40
45 540 13 45
50 600 13 50
55 1000 21 50
• Cones may be used as a substitute for flares in daytime situations
• Illuminated cones may be used as a substitute for flares in nighttime situations
• Barricades may be used for long term situations
FLARE PATTERNS
Good traffic direction dictates that flare patterns be laid out in such a manner that
motorists approaching, even at high speed, can instantly determine what is expected and
react appropriately. For example, flares closely spaced in a straight line across a highway
perpendicular to the centerline obviously indicate a closed highway. Closely spaced
flares in a line starting at the left side of a lane and gradually moving right are obviously
intended to channel traffic to the right. Flares scattered randomly across the highway
may indicate a hazard, but they will not control traffic flow and may add to the confusion.
To block a street completely:
150 – Flares and Flare Patterns
356 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Set flares across the entire width of the street well ahead of the hazard. If possible,
block the street just after an intersection so traffic can be diverted onto the cross street
with minimum confusion
• Set two warning flares on each white line. Set the first warning flare 75 to 100 feet
before the blockading flares to warn approaching drivers of the blockade and a second
warning flare approximately 180 feet from blockade. Place blockading flares across
the street a maximum of 15 feet (5 paces) apart.
To direct traffic from one lane to another:
• Set flares so oncoming traffic can detect and react to the new lane of traffic set by the
flare pattern
• Flares should be placed every ten yards and extend up the roadway far enough to
give drivers ample time to adjust their speed and turn to maneuver in traffic.
On Street or Freeway Emergency
• Approach the emergency
• Park the police vehicle between emergency and oncoming traffic if possible
• Use all emergency lights on police vehicle including high beams
• Determine the nature of the emergency
• Place flares according to the hazards present (gasoline, fumes, etc)
• If no unusual hazards or conditions exist, place the nearest flare approximately 100
feet (30 paces) behind the police vehicle
Place additional flares approximately 15 yards (15 paces) apart to divert traffic.
• Place 4 flares 15 yards (15 paces) apart parallel with traffic lane towards oncoming
traffic. Place these flares out to the side of the emergency to allow a working area to
the side of the emergency
Blockading flares approx. 15' apart
1st warning flare
75-100' from
blockade
2nd warning flare
180' from blockade
150 – Flares and Flare Patterns
357 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Place other flares tapering toward lane to be diverted. Place one flare for each 10
mph (or fraction thereof) of the speed limit of roadway at intervals of 15 yards (15
paces)
•
Flares burn for a duration of 15 minutes. If the flare pattern is to be used for a longer
period of time, place a second flare near the end and over the top of the first. This will
ignite the second flare as the first flare burns out.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
Emergency
Police Vehicle
30 paces
First four flares
15 yards (15 paces)
15 yards (15 paces)
30 Paces
358 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 151 – Licensed Health Facilities
REVISED January 2002
LICENSED HEALTH FACILITIES
Licensed health facilities include acute general hospitals, psychiatric facilities, nursing
homes, board and care homes, convalescent centers and clinics. These facilities are
licensed and regulated by the Health Facilities Division of the Los Angeles County Health
Department. The Health Facilities Division is charged with the responsibility of insuring
that patients are not abused or neglected and that the facilities are maintained and
operated in a safe and clean manner in conformity with County regulations.
The Health Facilities Division has the authority to cite violators or initiate criminal action
against the facility operators and/or individual members of the staff. These actions by the
Health Facilities Division may result in the closure of the facility and the possible
imprisonment of the operators or staff members.
When officers are called to licensed health facilities they may be required to investigate
crimes, make arrests, or investigate the disappearance of a patient. This Training Bulletin
will inform officers of their obligations and the action to be taken when criminal actions or
other violations in licensed health facilities are encountered.
Patients in licensed health facilities occasionally have been the victims of crimes. Officers
encountering criminal activity in licensed health facilities are to take appropriate
enforcement action. Enforcement by the Department is not altered merely because a
crime occurred in a licensed health facility.
UNSAFE OR UNSANITARY CONDITIONS
Generally, it is not necessary for officers to be aware of the specific Health and Safety
Code sections violated. For purposes of telephonic notification to the Long Beach Health
Department (562 570-4132) an unsafe or unsanitary condition in the opinion of the
observing officer usually is sufficient. Examples of these conditions are: rotting food,
insects, rodents, fecal matter on floors or patients, hanging plaster and broken glass.
An occurrence with which most officers are familiar is the lost adult. The ability of an adult
to wander away from a facility may indicate that the facility does not exercise the proper
supervision over its patients. This lack of supervision may place the patients in unsafe
circumstances. Notification of these conditions should be made to the Health
Department.
The reporting of unsafe and unsanitary conditions should definitely be made in cases
where there is neglect or mismanagement of the elderly or mentally ill. There are cases
where nursing homes and board and care facilities may not keep accurate records, or
may not keep track of patient's medical records. There are also cases where there are
151 – Licensed Health Facilities
359 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
chronic elopements from certain facilities. It is recommended that notifications to Adult
Protective Services be made in cases involving the elderly. For cases involving board and
care facilities serving the mentally ill, notify the County Department of Mental Health.
Adult Protective Services can be reached at 1-(800) 992-1600 or (213) 738-2600 and the
Department of Mental Health at 1-(800) 854-7771.
NOTIFICATION TO HEALTH DEPARTMENT
An officer who receives information that a person has been physically abused in a health
facility shall, in addition to filing the appropriate crime report, telephonically notify the Long
Beach Health Department, (562) 570-4132, as soon as practicable. In order for the Health
Department to cite violators, revoke licenses, or initiate criminal prosecutions, the
Department must be informed of the violations or criminal activity. For this reason and to
aid in the protection of those unable to protect themselves, officers are to notify the Health
Department of incidents where facility personnel are arrested, or a police report is taken
as a result of being called to a health facility. Additionally, patient abuse or neglect, and
unsafe or unsanitary conditions are to be reported to the Department.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
360 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 152 – DV Restraining Orders
REVISED November 2021
DOMESTIC VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS
INTRODUCTION
The law provides for several types of restraining orders designed to protect victims of
domestic violence, their children and family members. These orders are issued to stop a
batterer from having contact, which includes, assaulting, threatening, and harassing the
victim and those living with the victim. Protective orders do not provide a barrier of
protection for victims; however, they give peace officers the ability to act if an order is
violated.
DOMESTIC VIOLENCE ORDERS
Emergency Protective Order (EPO) – An EPO is an order issued by a judicial officer
under Family Code §§ 6250 and 6241. EPOs restrict a restrained person from specified
activities. A victim of domestic violence may need short-term, immediate protection after
a batterer has been arrested or left a residence/location. An EPO is available 24 hours a
day, even when court is in session, and can only be obtained by a peace officer. For
further on how to obtain an EPO see TB 153 Emergency Protective Orders.
Domestic Violence Temporary Restraining Order (DV TRO)
• TRO – A victim in a civil action may request, directly with the courts, an ex parte
restraining order. The most frequently obtained ex parte restraining order is a DV
TRO. This order, issued by Civil Court, is a temporary restraining order (TRO) issued
without prior notice or hearing, and is usually valid until an Order to Show Cause
(OSC) hearing.
• OSC – An OSC is a hearing, held to determine if an ex parte TRO is justified and
meets the requirements for issuance of an Order After Hearing (OAH).
• OAH – An OAH is the restraining order issued at the OSC hearing and is enforceable
up to three years.
Criminal Protective Order (CPO) - A criminal protective order is an order requested by
the District Attorney or City Prosecutor, issued by the criminal court as a part of a criminal
case, to prevent violence or intimidation by the defendant. These orders are issued to
protect a victim or witness and are effective for the duration of criminal proceedings, which
may include any sentence or probation issued to the defendant. Judges may order the
defendant to stay away from the victim or witness in the criminal proceeding, however an
order to stay away may not be a part of a CPO; therefore, officers should read the terms
of the order closely to determine if a violation exists.
152 – DV Restraining Order
361 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
OTHER RESTRAINING ORDERS
While domestic violence restraining orders are the most common orders presented to
officers, there are other orders available. The following are other non-domestic violence
restraining orders that officers may encounter:
Family Law Act (FLA) Restraining Order - An FLA restraining order is an order issued
during divorce or custody proceedings.
Uniform Parentage Act (UPA) Restraining Order - A UPA restraining order may be
issued to unmarried parents with a child in common.
Civil Harassment Restraining Order and Injunction – A civil harassment restraining
order is an order requested by one person (i.e., neighbor vs. neighbor) to prevent another
person from a specific type of behavior or harassment.
CONFIRMATION OF RESTRAINING ORDERS
Whenever an individual advises an officer of the existence of a restraining order, officers
need to verify the following:
• The order is valid,
• The order has been served, and
• The terms and conditions of the order.
The status of an order can be verified in the following ways:
• The order is on file with the Records Division,
• The order is in CARPOS, or
• The protected person has a valid copy of the order. The following can be used to
check the validity of the order:
- A court stamp,
- A case control number,
- The expiration date,
- The names of the protected and restrained parties,
- The judge’s signature,
- Proof of service.
PROOF OF SERVICE
A Proof of Service is a document signed under penalty of perjury that an adult who is not
a party to the action has personally served a copy of the order to the individual listed as
the restrained person.
In order to enforce an order, officers need to confirm proof of service. Proof of service
may be confirmed by one of the following:
• The restraining order with proof of service is on file with our department,
• The protected party presents a valid copy of the order with proof of service,
• The order shows as issued and served in CARPOS.
152 – DV Restraining Order
362 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
When officers cannot verify proof of service or prior knowledge of the order by the
restrained party, ensure the following is completed:
• Inform the restrained party of the terms of the order,
• Admonish the restrained party of the order, that the suspect is now on notice and
any violation of the order will result in arrest,
• Make an arrest if the restrained party continues to violate the order,
• Document the officer’s name, date, and time of service,
• Complete a Proof of Service form and submit it to the Records Division for entry into
CARPOS.
ARREST CHARGES FOR RESTRAINING ORDER VIOLATIONS
Arrest and booking charges for a restraining order fall under the following California Penal
Code Sections:
• 273.6(a) Any intentional and knowing violation of a protective order is a
misdemeanor.
• 273.6 (d) A subsequent conviction for a violation of an order, occurring within seven
years of a prior conviction for a violation of an order and involving an act of violence
or “a credible threat” of violence.
• 166 and §166(c)(1) A willful and knowing violation of a protective order or stay-away
court order shall constitute contempt of court, a misdemeanor. Use this section for
any Criminal Protective Order (CPO).
OUT OF STATE ORDERS
Certification by an out-of-state court is not necessary to enforce an out-of-state order.
Out-of-state protective and restraining orders are valid and fully enforceable if an officer
can confirm the following on a copy of the out-of-state order:
• Court in which it was issued,
• Judge’s signature,
• Case number and expiration date,
• Names of protected and restrained parties,
• Listed prohibited actions,
• Proof of service, shown either by the order indicating that the restrained person was
present in court or a completed proof of service form.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
363 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 154 – DMV Re-Examination
REVISED April 2001
DMV RE-EXAMINATION OF LICENSED DRIVERS
The Department of Motor Vehicles may re-examine drivers who have been brought to
their attention. Medical reasons are the primary cause for re-examination.
Patrol officers and Accident Investigation Detail (AID) investigators assigned to Field
Support Division (FSD) have been the primary sources of information on drivers who
appear unable to drive competently.
The Department of Motor Vehicles has developed a form to assist police personnel in
reporting a driver who, in the officer’s opinion, should be re-examined. The forms may
be obtained from AID. Completed forms shall be forwarded to the AID office. It shall be
the responsibility of the Accident Investigation Detail to forward the form to the
Department of Motor Vehicles El Segundo Office: 390 N. Sepulveda 2075, El Segundo,
CA 90245.
The following conditions must be present when considering completing a re-examine
form:
• The driver must have committed a violation of §'s 21000 through 23336 of the
California Vehicle Code. The driver does not have to be cited or arrested for one of
these sections
• The driver must show evidence of incapacity. Incapacity is defined as a serious
physical injury or illness, mental impairment, or disorientation which leads the officer
to "reasonably believe" that a clear or potential danger or risk of injury to that person
or others exists if allowed to continue driving
• The incapacity must immediately affect driving safety
Check the appropriate box on the form
PRIORITY RE-EXAMINATION
Serve the notice to the driver by giving them the pink copy at the time of the contract. The
driver does not need to sign the form. Direct the driver to follow the instructions listed on
the reverse of the form.
REGULAR RE-EXAMINATION
Can be completed at a later time. The completed form with all copies attached should be
submitted to AID.
154 – DMV Re-Exam
364 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Examples of drivers who may require re-examination include:
• A motorist who commits a number of violations that appear unintentional, has not been
drinking, and has no explanation for his/her actions.
• A motorist who appears not to have the faculties to safely control his/her vehicle
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DRIVER
The officer should tell the driver to:
• Read the printed information on the form
• Immediately telephone a Driver Safety Office listed on the back of the form for an
appointment
• Bring their copy of the form to a Driver Safety Office within five (5) work days and
complete a re-examination or be suspended from driving
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
365 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 155 – Child Abductions
REVISED October 2022
CHILD ABDUCTIONS AND ATTEMPTED CHILD ABDUCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide a framework for competent, productive,
and thorough child abduction or attempted child abduction investigations.
FIRST RESPONDER
The following checklist provides recommended actions, considerations, and activities for
first responding officer(s):
• Turn on body-worn camera(s)
• Interview the reporting party
• Interview the parent(s)/guardian(s)
- Verify child custody status
- Identify the child’s zone of safety. This refers to the geographical area the parents
and child are comfortable with, for the child’s age and developmental stage.
- Inquire if the child has access to the Internet and evaluate its role in the
disappearance (e.g., Instagram, Snap Chat, social media accounts, e-mail, etc.)
- Ascertain if the child has a cellular telephone or other electronic communication
devices and if the location of the device is known.
• Determine who was the last person to see the child and when/where they saw them
- Interview the individual(s) who had the last contact with the child
• Obtain a detailed description of the missing child, abductor, and any vehicle(s) used
- Provide a detailed description to the Communications Center for broadcast and
notification to surrounding agencies
• Identify the circumstances of the disappearance
- Make an initial determination of the type of incident (i.e., non-family abduction,
family abduction, endangered runaway, lost, injured, or otherwise missing)
• Secure the scene and area of the child’s home
- Conduct an immediate, thorough, and legal search of the missing child’s home
even if the child was reported missing from a different location
▪ Try to obtain a signed consent to search. If signed consent cannot be obtained,
determine whether exigent circumstances exist or evaluate the need for a
search warrant.
▪ Secure evidentiary items (including the child’s personal articles such as a
hairbrush, diary, photographs, and items with the child’s fingerprints, footprints,
or teeth impressions)
▪ Preserve items which may be used to locate and/or identify the child.
155 – Child Abductions
366 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
▪ Evaluate the contents and appearance of the child’s room/residence; if
possible, utilize your BWC and/or photograph these areas and any items of
importance
▪ Determine if any of the child’s items are missing
• Obtain a recent photograph of the missing child and/or the abductor
• Determine the need for additional responding personnel
- Brief and update all assisting personnel
• Extend the search to surrounding areas, including vehicles and other places of
concealment
- Treat areas of interest as potential crime scenes
- Identify surveillance or security cameras in the vicinity that may have captured
footage of the incident
• Interview other family members, neighbors, friends, and associates of the child/family
separately. The following questions may help develop leads:
- When and where did you last see the child?
- Did the child mention being approached by anyone?
- Does the child use chat apps on their cellphone?
- What are the child’s social networking accounts, usernames, and passwords?
- Has the child mentioned meeting anyone online?
- What is your relationship to the child and/or abductor?
- What do you think happened to the child?
• Review sex-offender registry (Megan’s Law) to determine if individuals designated as
sexual predators live, work, or might otherwise be associated with the area of the
child’s disappearance. Additionally, consider calling in the on-call Homicide, Sexual
Abuse Response Team (SART), and/or Child Abuse Response Team (CART)
detective to review past lewd conduct in public reports and annoying or molesting a
child reports in the abduction area.
• Ensure information regarding the missing child is immediately entered into the
National Crime Information Center’s (NCIC) Missing Person File, and any information
about a suspected abductor is entered into the NCIC Wanted Person File. Carefully
review NCIC categories before entering the case and be sure to use the Child
Abduction flag whenever possible.
• Ensure all required notifications are made to the appropriate detective detail based on
the nature of the investigation (E.g., Homicide, Domestic Violence, Sex Crimes,
Robbery, etc.)
FIELD INVESTIGATOR
• Obtain briefing from first responder and evaluate all available information and
evidence collected
- Verify the accuracy of all descriptive information, recent history of family dynamics,
and other details developed during the preliminary investigation
- Correct and investigate conflicting information and inconsistencies by witnesses
and other individuals
• Ensure the child’s latest medical records, dental records, and items suitable for DNA
collection are secured
• Utilize California Sex and Arson Registry (CSAR) database to investigate potential
persons of interest in the area
155 – Child Abductions
367 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Conduct a criminal history background check on all principal suspects, persons of
interest, witnesses, and participants in the investigation
• In collaboration with the Press Information Officer (PIO), establish a phone hotline for
receipt of tips and leads. Investigator can consider establishing an email address or
other methods of receiving electronic leads.
• Establish a system to track and prioritize leads to ensure each lead is reviewed and
followed up. Consider support from the National Center for Missing and Exploited
Children (NCMEC) for this role.
• Continue to keep the Communications Center apprised of developing information for
broadcast updates
• Prepare a flyer/bulletin with the child/abductor’s photograph and descriptive
information. Coordinate with Missing Persons personnel in conjunction with NCMEC
and the PIO to distribute flyer in appropriate geographic regions.
SUPERVISOR
• Determine if the circumstances of the child’s disappearance meet the protocol in place
for activation of an AMBER Alert and/or other immediate community notification
• Determine if additional personnel are needed to assist in the investigation
• Establish a command post away from the child’s residence and use the Incident
Command System components to effectively run the operation
- Assign a scribe to keep track of the incident, timeline, and to document efforts,
including all places searched
- Ensure coordination/cooperation among all law enforcement personnel involved in
the investigation and search effort
• Determine if additional assistance is necessary from:
- State Missing Children’s Clearinghouse
- FBI
- Specialized Units
- Surrounding agencies
- NCMEC’s Project ALERT/Team Adam
• Ensure all the required resources, equipment, and assistance necessary to conduct
an efficient investigation have been requested and expedite their availability
• Ensure all required department and other agency notifications are made, including
NCMEC
• Be available to make any decisions or determinations as they develop
• Through the Press Information Officer (PIO), consider disseminating information
appropriately to the public through media, television, and newspapers
AMBER ALERTS
AMBER Alert is a program managed by the California Highway Patrol that empowers law
enforcement, the media, and the public to combat abduction by sending out immediate
information that aids in a child's safe recovery. The AMBER Alert system broadcasts
information to the public via radio, television, Internet, highway information signs, and cell
phone networks to aid law enforcement in locating abducted children. Refer to the
AMBER Alert policy section for further (Manual Section 8.2.13.9).
155 – Child Abductions
368 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
NATIONAL CENTER FOR MISSING AND EXPLOITED CHILDREN (NCMEC)
The United States Congress created NCMEC as a non-profit entity to assist law
enforcement in investigating cases involving missing and exploited children. NCMEC
operates 24 hours a day with trained professionals, including current and retired law
enforcement, and agents from all branches of the federal government who are subject
matter experts in abduction investigations.
Federal law requires notification to NCMEC on all child abductions. NCMEC has access
to an extensive range of public and federal data systems.
CONCLUSION
Non-family child abduction cases do not occur with great frequency. However, statistics
show that immediate and proper investigative steps enhance a successful recovery.
RESOURCE
The Investigative Checklist for First Responders may be printed and used as a guide
when investigating missing or abducted children. Officers are not required to complete
or submit this form at the conclusion of their investigation.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
369 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 156 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1
REVISED March 2021
SEXUAL ASSAULT INVESTIGATIONS PART 1
INTRODUCTION
This training bulletin educates officers on the psychology and techniques available to
encourage victims to report sexual assault. These techniques may improve apprehension
and conviction of offenders, while providing support and compassion to victims.
BARRIERS TO PROSECUTION
The trauma suffered by a sexual assault victim may be so severe that it creates a mental
block, and a victim may be unable to recall details of the incident. Feelings of shame,
guilt, fear, or degradation may make a victim unwilling to share the details of the assault.
The victim may also be afraid to confront the assailant in court.
We may hear people say that the victim brought about their own sexual assault by the
company they keep, the places they frequent, the clothes they wear, or the way they walk
or speak. Sexual assault victims may be aware of these attitudes which can contribute
to their unwillingness to cooperate with an investigation.
FIRST OFFICER CONTACT WITH THE SEXUAL ASSAULT VICTIM
The first contact between an officer and the victim is critical. The first officer to have
contact with a sexual assault victim may have a difficult assignment. An officer should
identify themselves to the victim and attempt to reassure the victim of their safety and
express empathy and compassion. The officer's decisions and demeanor can affect the
physical and mental well-being of the victim. The officer needs to establish a relationship
of trust and cooperation with the victim in order to identify, apprehend and prosecute the
assailant. Officers conducting sexual assault investigations must convey that they are
genuinely interested in the victim’s well-being. The officer must first decide if the victim's
physical or mental condition requires immediate transport to a hospital for medical
attention. Officers should not prejudge the victim based on statements or the conditions
under which the sexual assault occurred. Sensitivity and professionalism are required
when taking sexual assault reports. You should appear confident when taking the report,
because your confidence will enhance the victim's feeling of safety and protection.
If two officers respond, one officer should conduct the initial interview. The victim may be
more comfortable discussing the incident one-on-one. The other officer should attempt
to locate witnesses, interview neighbors, and survey the scene for evidence. As with any
crime scene, officers should not touch or disturb the scene; they should take care not to
156 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1
370 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
destroy, alter or contaminate physical evidence like fingerprints, hairs, fibers, semen, soil,
blood or other trace materials.
Listen to the victim's account of the incident completely, then go back over the areas
where clarification is needed. Patrol officers should remember that the investigators will
have the time and the proper environment to help the victim recall further details. Do not
display avid curiosity in the crime, and do not act or make comments in a way that the
victim would interpret them as being "sexually oriented" - not even to be "humorous."
Deception does occur, and the possibility of deception must be considered while these
reports are being taken. However, never assume. No matter how inconsistent a victim's
story may seem, officers must presume, until evidence is established to the contrary, that
the victim is telling an accurate story. Victims of sex assault may be disoriented and may
give inconsistent stories, especially in the first few hours after the crime has occurred. If
a victim feels as if they cannot trust the police, then their trauma may be heightened, and
the officer’s opportunity to help the victim may be eliminated. Officers may also ruin the
opportunity to apprehend the subject.
CONCLUSION
Compassion and good judgment are the keys to investigating a sexual assault. Officers
who allow the victim to maintain their dignity, by showing a sincere desire to help, will
serve both the victim and society by ensuring a compassionate and effective
investigation.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
371 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 157 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2
REVISED April 2021
SEXUAL ASSAULT INVESTIGATIONS PART 2
INTRODUCTION
The information in this training bulletin will assist officers in the investigation of sexual
assaults. The techniques outlined below will help expedite the investigation while
maintaining efficiency and compassion.
INITIAL CONTACT WITH THE VICTIM
The first contact between an officer and the victim is critical. The first responding officer(s)
should use the following steps to assist the victim and ensure a complete investigation:
• Provide emergency medical and crisis intervention assistance to the victim,
• Secure and protect the crime scene,
• Obtain a suspect description for immediate radio broadcast,
• Gather physical evidence (i.e., victim's clothing, bedding or other items that may
contain evidence),
• Seek out and interview possible witnesses,
• Obtain the initial information regarding the time and location of the offense, basic
description of the suspect, modus operandi, vehicles used, and take appropriate
action to locate the suspect.
KEY INTERVIEW INFORMATION
The following information is needed to ensure a complete investigation:
Type of Sexual Assault
• Sexual intercourse
• Sodomy
• Oral copulation by victim or suspect
• Sexual assault with an object - includes anything other than a sex organ
• Sexual battery
• Spousal rape
Suspect(s)
• Complete description of the suspect's physical stature and the clothing the suspect
was wearing at the time of the incident.
• Was there more than one suspect?
- Description of additional suspect(s)
• Did the victim know the suspect? Explain relationship, if any
157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2
372 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
- Boyfriend or ex-boyfriend
- Casual acquaintance
• Prior to this incident, had the victim ever seen the assailant?
- Loitering near victim's home
- At work, social function, school
The Sexual Assault
• Exact time of assault
• Exact location of the offense
- Victim's home (which room?)
- Other residence or building
- Vehicle (victim's or suspects)
- Other area (street/park)
• How did the suspect make initial contact with the victim?
• What did the suspect say to the victim? (Actual words)
- Prior to the incident
- During the incident
- Following the incident
• Did the suspect produce a weapon?
• Did the suspect use any article belonging to the victim, or located in the victim's home
as a weapon?
- Scarf, carving knife, belt, bottle
- Other article
• Did the suspect strike the victim?
- Hands
- Weapon
• Did the suspect insert an object or fingers into the vagina or rectum of victim?
• Did suspect actually penetrate the vagina or rectum of victim?
• Did suspect perform oral copulation on victim or make victim copulate the suspect?
• Did suspect ejaculate?
- In vagina, rectum, or mouth of victim
- On bed linen
- On sofa
- On clothing of victim
- On carpet or floor
• Did suspect disrobe? Did the victim disrobe?
- Completely
- Partially
• If the assault occurred in the victim's home,
- What articles did the suspect handle while in the home?
- What rooms in the home did the suspect enter?
• Did suspect threaten to return?
• Is the victim wearing the same clothing that they were wearing at the time of the
assault?
- If the victim changed clothing, where is the clothing they were wearing at the time
of the assault?
- Did the victim wash?
- Did the victim douche?
157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2
373 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Did the victim injure the suspect?
- Scratches/Cuts
- Bites
- If suspect was injured, did he/she shed any blood and if so where?
A victim may not understand why officers need to know such specific details of the crime.
Explain to the victim that this evidence can help convict the suspect. Explain that
cooperation in detailing the actions of the suspect will be helpful in the search for physical
evidence. If the victim has not washed, she should be told not to do so, since there may
be blood, semen, hair, fibers or other trace materials beneath her fingernails and on her
body that can be linked to the assailant through analysis at the crime laboratory.
If she has douched before the arrival of the officer, and ultimately no semen is found in
her vagina, this does not negate the crime of rape, for seminal fluid is not all that is
necessary to show penetration. She may also have other signs of penetration.
FORENSIC EXAM PROTOCOL
If the victim is wearing the clothing that was worn at the time of the assault, they should
be advised to bring a change of clothing to the examination location if able. The
underpants worn after the assault shall be taken as evidence to be examined for seminal
leakage; any other clothing worn during the assault may be taken as evidence if they
show any evidence of force used such as blood, semen, rips, or tears.
The officer's report should detail in their own words what occurred and may also contain
observations of the emotional state of the victim, visible injuries, clothing tears or rips and
general condition of the scene. If officers collect physical evidence from the scene or
specimens from the hospital, this should be detailed in the crime and evidence reports.
If other police personnel obtained physical evidence and photographs, the officer(s)
should indicate their name(s) and DID#(s), and the time they took the photos.
Finally, the officer will inform the victim of rape crisis services or similar social services
available. Depending on the jurisdiction, such agencies may offer moral or legal support
and may provide needed emotional counseling. The investigation follow-up team should
also recommend counseling resources for the victim and victim's family. The rape hotline
emergency number is (877) 943-5778.
Officers should encourage the victim to call the Police Department if additional details are
remembered at a later time.
CONFIDENTIALITY
Any employee of a law enforcement agency who personally receives a report from any
person, alleging that the person making the report has been the victim of a sex offense,
shall inform that person that their name will become a matter of public record, unless they
request it remain confidential, per Government Code § 6254.
CONCLUSION
157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2
374 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Sex crimes are extremely sensitive, emotional and personal crimes that have a profound
effect on the victims. The victim is likely to feel an overwhelming sense of helplessness,
guilt, embarrassment, and anger. It is an officer's job to help the victim through this time
of extreme crisis while performing the technical tasks that are required to locate,
apprehend, and prosecute the suspect. To accomplish that job, sensitivity, knowledge
and confidence are required of the officer. NOT concentrating on the psychological and
technical skills needed for these investigations can lead to additional trauma and
alienation for the victim.
NOTE: The information contained in this bulletin is applicable to all sex crimes; however,
it is crucial information in the following offenses:
• PC 261 - Rape
• PC 261.5 - Unlawful Sexual Intercourse
• PC 285 - Incest
• PC 286 - Sodomy
• PC 288 - Crimes Against Children (Sexual)
• PC 288a - Oral Copulation
• PC 289 - Penetration by an Object
• PC 243.4 - Sexual Battery
• PC 262 - Spousal Rape
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
375 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 158 – Hazardous Materials, Wastes &
Chemical Dumping
REVISED February 2001
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, HAZARDOUS WASTES, AND
CHEMICAL DUMPING
PURPOSE
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide officers with a working knowledge of their
responsibilities as First Responders to hazardous materials incidents and incidents of
hazardous waste and chemical dumping.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENTS
Hazardous Materials and Incidents Defined
Numerous codes and statutes define and regulate hazardous materials. Basic definitions of
what constitutes a hazardous material is any material or substance in a quantity or form that,
when not properly controlled or contained, may pose an unreasonable risk to health, safety,
property or the environment. A hazardous materials incident exists when a release or
threatened release of one of these materials occurs.
Police Officers and Hazardous Materials
All police officers are First Responders for hazardous materials per Title 8 Section 5192 of
the California Code of Regulations (CCR). Officers are trained at the awareness level and
are expected to recognize the release or threatened release of hazardous materials. They
are to take appropriate actions to isolate the incident and make the necessary notifications to
obtain assistance. Officers do not have the training or resources to handle hazardous
chemicals or to enter contaminated areas.
First Responder Actions
Upon recognition of a release or threatened release of hazardous materials, officers shall:
• Isolate the area of release and deny entry to anyone, except those qualified for
assessment, sampling, containment, cleanup or investigation of hazardous materials
• Make notification to the Long Beach Fire Department via Police Communications
• Notify a field supervisor of the incident
• Note pertinent information to help other responders in dealing with the chemicals:
-Placards
-Labels
-Shipping papers
-Information from drivers, shippers, handlers
158 – Hazardous Materials
376 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Safety
Safety is the primary concern for police officers at a hazardous materials incident. All officers
should adhere to the following:
• Stay upwind, uphill and upgrade from all spills or releases
• Keep back far enough to avoid any exposure to chemicals
• Do not attempt rescue of persons down in contaminated areas
• Do not use flares for any incident involving potentially flammable materials
• Do not eat, drink or smoke near incidents
• Do not go into a hazardous material exposure area and sniff the air to see if it’s breathable
Officers who believe they have been exposed to hazardous chemicals should notify incident
command immediately. A proper chemical exposure and medical assessment is essential.
Decontamination of personnel and equipment is required to prevent the spread of hazardous
materials. The officer’s supervisor should also be notified to document the exposure and any
treatment received.
Hazardous Materials Incident Responsibilities
Per a letter of agreement between the Long Beach Police Department and the Long Beach
Fire Department, police officers who discover or arrive first at a hazardous materials incident
will initiate incident command, follow First Responder Awareness actions, and pass command
to the ranking fire officer upon their arrival.
The Long Beach Police Department will support the Fire Department by:
• Providing a supervisor to the Fire Department Command Post
• Maintaining open entry routes for additional emergency responders
• Providing vehicle and pedestrian perimeter control
• Assisting in the evacuation of non-contaminated areas
Hazardous Materials Incident Management
The Long Beach Fire Department is responsible for hazardous materials incident
management. Hazardous Materials Specialists are dispatched 24-hours a day by the Long
Beach Fire Department Alarm Office.
Incidents on freeways, on-ramps and off-ramps are the responsibility of the California
Highway Patrol who acts as incident commander and arranges for cleanup through CalTrans.
Incidents in navigable coastal waters, or at anchorage in these waters are the jurisdiction of
the Unites States Coast Guard. Incidents significantly impacting inland waters are the
responsibility of the California Department of Fish and Game. Releases of petroleum
products to the waters of the State are the responsibility of the Oil Spill Program Emergency
Response section of Fish and Game.
All Long Beach agencies will provide support to other agencies in the management of
hazardous materials incidents.
158 – Hazardous Materials
377 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Criminal Acts
Articles 79 and 80 of the Uniform Fire Code regulate the general storage and use of
hazardous materials. The Uniform Fire Code is adopted as part of the Long Beach Municipal
Code and enforced by Inspectors of the Fire Department’s Fire Prevention Bureau.
Title 49 of the Federal Code of Regulations regulates the transportation of hazardous
materials. This law defines the parameters for shipping papers, placards, labels, containers
and loading for hazardous materials transportation. In Long Beach, enforcement is done by
the Traffic Division Commercial Enforcement Officers.
HAZARDOUS WASTES AND CHEMICAL DUMPING
Hazardous Wastes Defined
Hazardous wastes are defined in Title 22 of the CCR. The criteria for hazardous wastes
include federally listed wastes under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
and chemicals that meet State of California criteria for ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity or
toxicity. The regulations contain many exemptions and chemical testing by a certified
laboratory is often required to determine the status of a waste chemical.
Hazardous wastes often encountered include: gasoline, used motor oil, oil-based paint,
leaded paint, asbestos, corrosives, pesticides, fumigants, solvents, paint strippers, photo
chemicals and explosive oxidizers. When these or other chemicals are dumped or
abandoned, the Fire Department and Department of Health and Human Services should
be notified immediately.
Hazardous Waste Enforcement in Long Beach
In Long Beach, enforcement of Hazardous Waste Control Laws rests with the State of
California chartered Certified Uniform Program Agency (CUPA). The Long Beach
Department of Health and Human Services is the lead agency of the CUPA and the Long
Beach Fire Department is a participating agency. The CUPA regulates the handling of
hazardous wastes by businesses. The Fire Department’s Environmental Investigations
Section provides the enforcement branch for the CUPA.
Criminal Violations
Officers responding to dispatches involving chemicals should be alert for potential criminal
activity. Violations of Title 22 CCR are charged under the California Health and Safety Code.
The subsections under 25189.5 H&S are for the illegal disposal, transportation, treatment and
storage of hazardous waste.
The sections can be charged as felonies or misdemeanors and carry maximum penalties of
imprisonment in the state prison for 16, 24, or 36 months and fines of up to $125,000 per day
of violation.
These are “general intent” crimes. There is no requirement to show intent or malice. Disposal
or transportation requires what amounts to a civil standard of proof (“reasonably should have
known...”). Making a criminal case only requires a hazardous waste not be handled in
compliance with Title 22 CCR.
158 – Hazardous Materials
378 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Due to the complexity of enforcement and resources required, investigations require
hazardous materials specialists from the Long Beach Department of Health and Human
Services and investigators from the Fire Department’s Environmental Investigations Section.
Non-Hazardous Waste
Many chemicals that do not meet the criteria for hazardous waste are still pollutants,
hazardous substances or otherwise regulated. The Health and Safety Code prohibits
dumping of used oil and latex paint into the trash, ground or waters of the State. The City’s
Federal Storm Waters Discharge Permit sets limits on all discharges into the streets and
storm drain system. With certain exceptions, the standard for discharge is potable (drinkable)
water.
Activities such as engine degreasing, washing out paint brushes and cement and stucco wash
downs are prohibited. Officers discovering any chemical or pollutant discharge into the
streets or storm drains should have the Fire Department or Long Beach Water Department
Storm Drain Division notified immediately.
Dumping waste matter into the street or upon private property without the owner’s consent is
chargeable under the Penal Code. Violators of subsections of 374.3 PC can be cited or
booked as infractions. These sections pertain to the dumping of non-hazardous wastes.
Items commonly encountered that come under this section include cooking oil, fish guts, tires,
trash, sewage, and construction waste. Officers should not use this section for any chemical
dumping.
Section 374.8 PC deals with dumping hazardous substances. These include some chemicals
that are not hazardous wastes. Analytical samples are needed to determine if the suspect
chemical comes under this section.
Officers’ Actions
Officers who encounter possible violations related to chemical dumping should first consider
the hazards and take appropriate First Responder Awareness actions. Maintain the crime
scene and call for appropriate resources such as the Long Beach Fire Department, the Long
Beach Department of Health and Human Services or an Environmental Investigator through
Fire dispatch.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
379 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
REVISED January 2003
DIPLOMATIC AND CONSULAR IMMUNITY
INTRODUCTION
The principle of diplomatic immunity is one of the oldest concepts of foreign relations.
While customary international law continues to refine the concepts of diplomatic and
consular immunity, the basic rules are present in the Diplomatic Relations Act of 1978 (22
USC 254) and embodied in many international treaties formally adopted by the United
States. The rights and privileges granted by these treaties are enforceable in the courts
of the United States and the US Government is legally bound to ensure that its states and
municipalities respect such rights.
Dealing with the concept of immunity poses particular problems for law enforcement
officers who, by virtue of their oath and training, are unaccustomed to granting special
privileges or concessions to individuals who break the law. In any event, law enforcement
officers retain their fundamental responsibility to protect and police the orderly conduct of
persons present in the territory of the United States. Law enforcement officers must
understand the rules of immunity to avoid being overly generous in the application of its
principles.
DEFINITIONS
Foreign Officials – See Page 9 for Immunity Status
• “Diplomatic Officers/Agents” are the political representatives of a country. They are
concerned with international relations and foreign policy
• “Consular Officers” have principle duties related to protecting the interests of their
nationals, promoting business for their country, issuing passports and performing
other administrative or legal duties
• “Honorary Consular Officers” are often citizens of the United States who are appointed
honorary consular officers for the purpose of promoting the interests of those
countries. They are not afforded the full ranges of immunities given a career consular
officer and can be arrested for misdemeanor or felony crimes
• “Official Guests” are foreign nationals invited as official guests by the United States
government. They normally carry letters of introduction identifying their status
HANDLING INCIDENTS
The vast majority of persons entitled to privileges and immunities are judicious in their
actions and aware of the significance attached to their actions as representatives of the
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
380 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
sending state. It is not an exaggeration to say that police handling of incidents in this
country may have a direct effect on the treatment of US diplomatic or consular personnel
abroad.
When you are called to the scene of a criminal incident involving a person who claims
diplomatic or consular immunity, the first step should be to verify the status of the suspect.
Should the person be unable to produce satisfactory identification and the situation should
warrant an arrest or a detention, the individual should be informed that they would be
detained until their identity can be confirmed. In all cases, including those in which the
suspect provides a State issued identification card; the officer should verify the status with
the US Department of State or in the case of the UN community, with the US mission to
the United Nations. Once the status is verified, the officer should prepare their report,
fully describing the details of the incident and if the individual enjoys personal inviolability,
they cannot be handcuffed, except when that individual poses an immediate threat to
safety nor can they be arrested or detained. Once all the information has been obtained,
that person must be released and a copy of the report should be faxed or mailed to the
US Department of State in Washington, DC.
TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
Stopping a mission member or dependent and issuing a traffic citation for a moving
violation does not constitute arrest or detention and is permitted. However, the subject
may not be compelled to sign the citation. A copy of the citation and any other reports
should be forwarded to the US Department of State as soon as possible.
In serious cases, e.g., DUI, personal injury or accidents, telephonic notification to the US
Department of State is urged. A field sobriety test should be offered if appropriate but the
taking of these tests may not be compelled. If the individual is too impaired to drive safely,
do not allow them to drive away until they recover sufficiently to drive. You may also
summon a friend or relative to drive or you may call for a taxi.
The property of a person enjoying full criminal immunity, including their vehicle, may not
be searched or seized. Such vehicles may not be impounded or “booted” but may be
towed the distance necessary to remove them from obstructing traffic or endangering
public safety. If it is proved that their vehicle was stolen or used by unauthorized persons
to commit a crime, the inviolability to which the vehicle would normally be entitled must
be considered temporarily suspended and a normal search of the vehicle is permissible.
CONCLUSION
It is important that law enforcement authorities always treat foreign diplomatic and
consular personnel with respect and with due regard for the privileges and immunities to
which they are entitled under international law. Foreign diplomats who violate traffic laws
should be cited. Allegations of serious crimes should be fully investigated and reported
to the US Department of State. Law enforcement should never be inhibited in its efforts
to protect the public welfare in extreme situations.
LIST OF USEFUL TELEPHONE NUMBERS
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
381 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
For information on diplomatic and consular personnel and personnel of international
organizations other than the United Nations:
• Current status of US Department of State Federal license tags, registrations, or other
motor vehicle information – (202) 895-3532 Fax (202) 895-3646
• Current status of US Department of State driver license licenses and general licensing
information – (202) 895-3521
• For reporting traffic incidents or accidents, issuance of citations, etc., involving foreign
missions personnel – (202) 895-3521
Current status of:
• Diplomatic agents and family members - (202) 647-1664
• Embassy administrative, technical, and service staff and families - (202) 647-1405
• Consular personnel and families - (202) 647-1404
• International Organizations - (202) 647-1402
Please send copies of incident reports and citations to: Diplomatic Security Service,
Protective Liaison Division - Fax (202) 895-3613
After normal business hours all inquires should be made to the Diplomatic Security Watch
Officer, Department of State (24-hour number) - (202) 647-7277
For information on United Nations Personnel
Current status of:
• Diplomatic agents and family members - (212) 415-4131
• UN Mission staff and family members - (212) 415-4168
• UN Secretariat employees - (212) 415-4131 or (212) 415-4168
• US Department of State license tags, registration, or other motor vehicle information
- (212) 826-4500
After normal business hours information is available from the Communications Section of
the US United Nations (24 hour number) - (212) 415-4444
Please send copies of police reports to: USUN Host Country - Fax (212) 415-4162
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Office of the Chief of Police
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
382 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
383 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
384 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
385 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity
386 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Diplomatic and Consular Privileges and Immunities from Criminal Jurisdiction
(Summary of Law Enforcement Aspects)
Category
May be
arrested
or
detained
Residence
may be
entered
subject to
ordinary
process
May be
issued
traffic
citation
May be
subpoenaed
as witness
May be
prosecuted
Recognized
family
member Diplomatic Diplomatic
Agent
No 1 No Yes No No Same as
sponsor (full
immunity
and
inviolability)
Member of
Administrative
and Technical
staff
No 1 No Yes No No Same as
sponsor (full
immunity
and
inviolability)
Service staff Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes 2
No immunity
or
inviolability 2 Consular Career
Consular
Officers
Yes, if for
a felony
and
pursuant
to a
warrant 2
Yes 4 Yes No-for official
acts.
Testimony
may not be
compelled in
any case
No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes 2
No immunity
or
inviolability 2
Honorary
Consular
Officers
Yes Yes Yes No-for official
acts. Yes, in
all other
cases
No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes
No immunity
or
inviolability
Consular
Employees Yes 2 Yes Yes No-for official
acts. Yes, in
all other
cases
No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes 2
No immunity
or
inviolability 2 International Organizations International
Organization
Staff
Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes No-for official
acts.
Yes, in all
other cases
No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes
No immunity
or
inviolability
Diplomatic
Level Staff of
Missions to
International
Organizations
No 1 No Yes No No Same as
sponsor (full
immunity
and
inviolability)
Support Staff
of Missions to
International
Organizations
Yes Yes Yes No-for official
acts. Yes, in
all other
cases
No-for
official acts.
Otherwise,
yes
No immunity
or
inviolability
1 Reasonable constraints, however, may be applied in emergency circumstances involving self-defense, public safety, or the prevention of
serious crimes
2 This table presents general rules. Particularly in the cases indicated, the employees of certain foreign countries may
enjoy higher privileges and immunities on the basis of special bilateral agreements. 3 A small number of senior officers
are entitled to be treated identically to “diplomatic agents” 4 Note that the consular residences are sometimes located
within the official consular premises. In such cases, only the official office space is protected from police entry
387 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID Card
REVISED January 2003
CALIFORNIA DRIVER LICENSE & IDENTIFICATION CARD
VERIFICATION PROCEDURES
Every day, millions of Californians use their driver licenses or identification (DL/ID) cards
for identification purposes. Each year, billions of dollars are lost nationwide because
altered or forged licenses and identification cards are used with stolen or counterfeit credit
cards to complete illegal transactions. In addition, use of bogus cards for proof of age by
teenagers continues to rise.
All consumers incur high personal and financial losses when DL/ID cards are used
improperly. The use of security laminates on the face of the DL/ID card has significantly
helped to prevent alteration attempts. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to explain
specific DL/ID security procedures and how to spot fake and/or altered cards.
LEGISLATIVE SUPPORT
§113 PC – Makes it a misdemeanor to manufacture or sell any false government
documents such passports, immigration visas, employment authorization cards, birth
certificates, driver's licenses, ID cards, or social security cards, with the intent to conceal
the true citizenship or resident alien status of another person.
§13004 VC - It is unlawful for any person:
• To display or cause or permit to be displayed or have in his possession any canceled,
fictitious, fraudulently altered, or fraudulently obtained identification card
• To lend his identification card to any other person or knowingly permit the use thereof
by another
• To display or represent any ID card not issued to him as being his ID card
• To photograph, photostat, duplicate, or in any way reproduce any ID card or facsimile
thereof in such a manner that it could be mistaken for a valid ID card, or to display or
have in his possession any such photograph, photostat, duplicate, reproduction, or
facsimile unless authorized by the provisions of this code
§14610 VC - It is unlawful for any person:
• To display or cause or permit to be displayed or have in his possession any canceled,
revoked, suspended, fictitious, fraudulently altered, or fraudulently obtained driver's
license
• To lend his/her driver's license to any other person or knowingly permit the use thereof
by another
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
388 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• To display or represent any driver's license not issued to him as being his license
• To photograph, photostat, duplicate, or in any way reproduce any driver's license or
facsimile thereof in such a manner that it could be mistaken for a valid license, or to
display or have in his possession any such photograph, photostat, duplicate,
reproduction, or facsimile unless authorized by the provisions of this code
CALIFORNIA DL/ID CARDS: WHAT TO LOOK FOR
• Look at the photo on the license or identification card. Compare it to the ghost photo
and the person it identifies. Is it the same person?
• Does the license or identification card describe the person presenting it, in terms of
height, weight, color of eyes and hair and approximate age?
• Ask for date of birth. Is it the same as on the license or identification card?
• Check signatures. Do they match?
• Is the document altered in any way? Has the photograph been altered or substituted?
Look for glue lines or a bumpy surface next to photo or DOB. Uneven surfaces often
indicate tampering. Compare the typeset for the DOB with other lettering on the ID, it
should match
Driver’s License and ID Security Card - Issued: Summer 2001
Features – Uses a two color, optical variable ink coated on the inside of the face of the
laminate, in the configuration of the “California State Seal” and “DMV” Logo. Depending
on the angle of the card, the images will appear either green or gold.
The security feature is invisible to the naked eye. Utilizing ultraviolet technology that can
only be seen through the use of an ultraviolet, “black light”, the image of the California
State Flag can be seen across the bottom of the card.
Image of the
California State
Flag
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
389 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Another security feature is a fine line security printing that uses a series of colored
concentric circles that are placed throughout the face of the card. This helps to protect
the card from being color photocopied or scanned.
The Driver License/Identification Card number is printed in red. Previous versions of the
card show a green DL/ID card number.
The back of the card contains a bar code, an encoded magnetic stripe, a writeable surface
for a change of address, and laser printed restrictions, if appropriate. There have been
no changes to the magnetic stripe or the bar code located on the back of the card from
the previous card version
Detecting Alterations to the Laminate – Attempts to remove the security laminate will
distort the cards. Any alteration of data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will
show clearly.
Security Laminate Card - Issued March 1999 to July 2001
Features –optical variable gold ink coated on the inside of the face of the laminate. The “DMV”
Logo and “California State Seal” are visible in the laminate by varying the angle of viewing under
normal lighting conditions. Micro-printing of “California DMV” is embedded in the top line of the
DMV Logo and can be viewed with a magnifying glass. A smaller less dense version of the main
photo is on the face of the card.
The DL/ID
number is
printed in red
The back of the
card contains a
bar code, an
encoded
magnetic stripe,
a writeable
surface for
change of
address, and
instructions, if
appropriate
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
390 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
“Provisional” and “Age 21” are highlighted with blue and red color bars, respectively.
Driver license and Identification cards issued to persons under the age of 21 will have the
photo on the right side of the card. The provisional driver license will include the interim
issue date.
Detecting Alterations in the Laminate – Attempts to remove the security laminate will
distort the card. Any alteration of data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show
clearly.
Photo Receipt – The Department will issue a “photo receipt” to applicants who are
applying for a driver license requiring DMV tests. This photo receipt will be issued for
DMV purposes only. This receipt is not a verified identification and must not be used as
a license or permit to drive.
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
391 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Hologram without Gridlines - Issued from: July 11, 1994 to June 30, 1999
Features – During processing, a security laminate featuring a thin two-channel hologram
is bonded to the card. This laminate contains holographic images of the “California State
Seal” and the “DMV” Logo, visible at certain angles, to verify the authenticity of the card.
For both holograms, tilt the card away from you to view the “California State Seal.” The
“DMV” Logo hologram can be viewed by turning the card at a 90 degree angle.
Since May 1994, the phrases regarding “Provisional” and “Age 21” were highlighted with
blue and red color bars, respectively. Identification cards and driver licenses issued to
persons under age 21 will have the photo on the right side of the card.
Detecting Alterations in the Holograms – Visible lines or breaks in the holographic image
indicate attempts to alter the card, as do missing or mismatched portions of the image.
Attempts to alter data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show clearly.
Attempts to lift and replace the laminate result in the appearance of a clearly visible
“destruct pattern” that looks like a checker board in the holographic images of both the
card surface and the laminate.
Hologram with Gridlines - Issued from: December 20, 1990 to July 11, 1994
Features – An ultra-thin, transparent layer of plastic, imprinted with gridlines and
holographic images of the “California State Seal” and the “DMV” Logo, is bonded to the
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
392 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
card. For both holograms, tilt the card away from you to view the “California State Seal.”
The “DMV” Logo hologram can be viewed by turning the card at a 90 degree angle.
Since May 1994, the phrases regarding “Provisional” and “Age 21” were highlighted with
blue and red bars, respectively. Identification cards and driver licenses issued to persons
under the age of 21 have the photo on the right side of the card.
Detecting Alterations in the Holograms with Gridlines – visible lines or breaks in the
holographic image indicate attempts to alter the card, as do missing or mismatched
portions of the image. Attempts to alter data by writing or typing on top of the laminate
will show clearly.
Reflective Security Laminate - Issued prior to: December 20, 1990
Features – During processing, an ultra-thin reflective film imprinted with the “California
State Seal” and the word “California” is bonded to the license or identification card. An
ordinary flashlight held closely to the driver license or identification card will allow you to
view the reflective pattern of the “California State Seal” and the word “California.”
162 – CA Driver’s License and ID
393 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Altered Reflective Security Feature – Under normal light, an altered license on which a
picture or birth date has been changed may be difficult to detect. A counterfeit license or
identification card may appear to be valid. However, it’s easy to verify a California license
or identification card with this security feature. A reflective viewer will clearly show the
laminate but if you don’t have one, an ordinary flashlight held close to your eye allows for
viewing the reflective pattern. This will enable you to detect any attempted alterations.
REVIEW Responsibility
Patrol Bureau
394 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 163 – Child Sexual Abuse Material
REVISED September 2022
CHILD SEXUAL ABUSE MATERIAL (CSAM)
INTRODUCTION
This Training Bulletin provides officers with information regarding the investigation,
discovery and handling of evidence in cases involving Child Sexual Abuse Material
(CSAM).
United States federal law defines child pornography as any visual depiction of sexually
explicit conduct involving a minor. The National Center for Missing and Exploited Children
(NCMEC) labels those images as Child Sexual Abuse Material (CSAM) to more
accurately reflect what is depicted – sexual abuse. The acronym CSAM is the appropriate
terminology to use when documenting what was previously known as Child Pornography.
CSAM images are not only the documentation of sexual abuse, but when the files are
shared across the internet, the survivors are re-victimized each time the image is viewed.
“In a recent survey by the Canadian Centre for Child Protection, 67% of CSAM survivors
said the distribution of their images impacts them differently than the hands-on abuse
they suffered because the distribution never ends, and the images are permanent. It’s
important to remember CSAM consists of much more than just images and video files.
While CSAM is seen and transmitted on computers and through other technology, these
images and videos depict actual crimes being committed against children. The human
element, children at risk, must always be considered when talking about this offense that
is based in a high-tech world.” (https://www.missingkids.org/theissues/csam)
Many people falsely believe CSAM can only be accessed on the “Dark web.” CSAM has
become easily accessible to anyone with an internet connection and the number of CSAM
cases are steadily rising every year. Technology has made it simple to distribute and
store large quantities of CSAM that previously would have been difficult to obtain. These
crimes are often committed online using everyday platforms like social media, messaging
applications, online gaming, and email.
CSAM STATUTES & LEGAL DEFINITIONS
Possession of CSAM
Every person who knowingly possesses or controls any obscene matter knowing that the
matter depicts a person under 18 years of age personally engaging in or simulating sexual
conduct. Penal Code §311.11
163 – Sexually Exploited Children
395 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Distribution of CSAM
Every person who knowingly sends or causes to be sent with the intent to distribute or to
exhibit any obscene matter, knowing that the matter depicts a person under the age of 18
years personally engaging in or personally simulating sexual conduct. Penal Code
§311.1
Sexual Conduct
Sexual intercourse, penetration of the vagina or rectum by any object; masturbation for
the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer; sadomasochistic abuse for the purpose
of sexual stimulation of the viewer; exhibition of the genitals or the pubic or rectal area of
any person for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer; or defecation or urination
for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer. Penal Code §311.3
It is important to note that “sexual conduct” as defined by PC311.4 includes the
phrase “for the sexual stimulation of the viewer,” which is based upon a reasonable
person’s standards. A suspect’s personal or subjective sexual stimulation from erotica
material will not cause the material to meet the legal definition of CSAM.
Obscene Matter
Matter, taken as a whole, that to the average person, applying contemporary statewide
standards, appeals to the prurient interest, that, taken as a whole, depicts or describes
sexual conduct in a patently offensive way, and that, taken as a whole, lacks serious
literary, artistic, political, or scientific value. Penal Code §311
Erotica
Some images do not meet the legal definition of CSAM but might be deemed erotica.
Images deemed erotica may not depict sexual conduct, the exhibition of genitals or pubic
or rectal areas, or an actual child, but still have the disturbing perception of CSAM.
Although erotica is legal, the discovery of these types of files still has evidentiary value
because it may indicate a suspect’s intent to possess or distribute CSAM. Erotica includes
but is not limited to: Cartoon or animated images/videos of children engaged in sexual
conduct, nudism, children wearing swimsuits, and sketches.
INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVING CSAM
Officers respond to various calls that may involve CSAM, require a field investigation and
the collection of CSAM evidence. Some examples include but are not limited to:
• Sexual abuse of a child
• Child sex trafficking
• Unsolicited obscene materials sent to children
• Revenge porn
• Indecent Exposure
• Annoying and molesting children
• Peeping
Persons who commit these types of crimes often have an unnatural sexual interest in
children. It is common for these suspects to collect, distribute, or produce CSAM as an
163 – Sexually Exploited Children
396 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
additional element of their crimes. Officers should take this into consideration when
conducting their investigation, interviewing victims/suspect, and collecting evidence. For
example, when questioning a victim of child sexual abuse, an officer should ask the victim
if the suspect took pictures or videos during the abuse.
EVIDENCE COLLECTION
When CSAM comes to the attention of law enforcement, it is important to collect all
devices containing CSAM, book it into evidence, and document the chain of custody. The
device should be placed in airplane mode, remain on and if possible, kept charged. When
possible, obtain the device passcode. This includes devices belonging to suspects,
victims, witnesses, and other involved parties. The devices should not remain in their
possession as they contain CSAM and to allow them to retain possession of the CSAM
is a crime (PC §311.11).
Images of CSAM are shared and duplicated quickly. Leaving even a single image in a
person’s possession can lead to the image being intentionally or inadvertently
memorialized online, creating further trauma to the victim.
Devices containing CSAM should not be returned to the reporting party or the owner.
Refer to Penal Code 312 or 502.01 for information of forfeiting and destroying CSAM,
even if the incident is not filed.
In these situations, officers need to understand Penal Code 312 and 502.01 and
thoroughly explain to the Calling Party the importance of collecting their device and having
it forensically examined to preserve the image or video depicting CSAM. The image(s) or
video(s) will then have to be forensically wiped clear from the device. Owner’s consent or
a search warrant is needed in this situation.
Files containing CSAM should not be copied or shared with others. This includes
situations where the calling party believes they are doing the “right thing” by trying to
assist Law Enforcement in preserving evidence, by taking a photograph or a video of an
image or video depicting CSAM.
These directives also pertain to Law Enforcement. Officers should not do any of the
following when collecting evidence depicting CSAM:
• Do not use BWC’s or cell phones to photograph or video record evidence
depicting CSAM.
• Do not have a victim, witness, or suspect email or text evidence depicting CSAM
to your personal or department issued devices.
• Do not upload evidence depicting CSAM to Evidence.com.
• Do not do any of the above, then delete image from device, and allow the person
to keep the device. In addition to destruction of evidence, this does not ensure
the image was removed from all locations on the device.
Officers should be reminded that a search warrant or consent is required to search an
electronic device. Furthermore, when a search warrant is written for an electronic device
163 – Sexually Exploited Children
397 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
there is additional information related to CalECPA that must be included in the search
warrant, for information regarding the CalECPA requirements refer to California Senate
Bill 178. If these requirements are not included in the search warrant any evidence
located on the device can be suppressed at trial.
LAWS REGARDING NOTIFICATION OF SUSPECT ARREST
When a suspect with one of the below listed occupations is arrested for a crime subject
to PC290 Sex Offender Registration, the assigned detail’s supervisor should ensure that
the handling detective makes the following notifications:
• Teachers and School Employees Public Schools – notify the governing board of
the school district employing the person. PC291
• Teachers and School Employees, Private Schools – notify the private school
authorities employing the teacher of the arrest. PC291.1
• Teacher or Instructor, Community College – notify the Office of the Chancellor of
the California Community Colleges. PC291.5
• Attorneys and Medical Professionals – although law enforcement is not required
to notify the California State Bar or California Board of Medicine of an arrest,
officers should document if the suspect is an attorney or medical professional so
the investigating detective can determine the appropriate notifications.
ADDITIONAL RELEVANT TRAINING MATERIAL AND PENAL CODE SECTIONS
Field officers should acquaint themselves with additional training material, and certain
Penal Code sections regarding child abuse and child sexual abuse material:
• Long Beach Police Department §8.6 – Vice Investigations
• Long Beach Police Department §8.7 – Special Victims Investigations
• Training Bulletin 149 – Child Abuse
• Penal Code §311 to 312.7 – Possession / Distribution of Child Sexual Abuse
Material- Obscene matter
• Penal Code §313 to 313.5 – Harmful Matter
• Penal Code §290 – Sex Offender Registration / Failure to Register
The sexual exploitation of children is a serious problem facing our community. It is
incumbent upon law enforcement personnel to be aware of this problem and actively
investigate cases of this nature.
Officers can contact Computer Crimes, Internet Crimes Against Children (ICAC)
Detectives for CSAM specific evidence collection or if there is an investigation that
involves CSAM, and the victim is not known. For investigative questions regarding any
other crimes that has a CSAM nexus, officers should contact the appropriate detail (E.g.,
Child Abuse, Sex Crimes, or Vice).
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
398 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 164 – At-Risk Missing Person
REVISED March 2021
AT-RISK MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS
An officer’s initial response to a report of a missing person can have a profound effect on
the outcome of the case and the wellbeing of the missing person. Upon arrival, an officer
should first verify that an at-risk missing person incident exists. If the initial investigation
suggests foul play or kidnapping, the Homicide Detail should be contacted. The Homicide
Detail retains investigative authority over these incidents and coordinates their efforts with
the Incident Commander and Missing Persons Detail. If it is determined the person is a
victim of a parental abduction or child concealment where there is no evidence of an
immediate threat to the child, the Child Abuse Detail should be notified. The Child Abuse
Detail retains investigative authority over these incidents and coordinates their efforts with
the Missing Persons Detail.
INVESTIGATIVE CONSIDERATIONS
The following investigative steps will help officers ensure that a thorough missing person’s
investigation is complete:
• Activate your body worn camera when approaching the scene.
• Determine when, where, and by whom the missing was last seen.
• Identify the circumstances surrounding the disappearance.
• Interview the parents, guardian, witnesses, calling party and the individual(s) who last
had contact with the missing person.
• Broadcast updates of pertinent information, including detailed descriptive information
regarding the suspect(s) and/or the suspect’s vehicle(s).
• Ascertain if the missing person has a cellphone, any electronic communication device,
or GPS device.
• Determine if the missing person is a participant in tracking or location programs, such
as LA Found.
• Identify the missing person’s social media accounts.
• If applicable, verify child custody status and examine valid court orders.
• Secure a recent photograph or digital record of the missing person and abductor.
• Make referrals to local counseling agencies.
SEARCH CONSIDERATIONS
• If exigency exists, search the home or building where the missing person was last
seen.
• If there is no exigency, obtain and document permission or obtain a search warrant.
• Search residence and evaluate the contents and appearance of the Missing Person’s
room/residence, if possible photograph and videotape these areas.
164 – At-Risk Missing Person Investigations
399 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Search the immediate area and extend the search to surrounding areas including
vehicles and other places of concealment.
• Treat areas of interest as potential crime scenes.
• Identify possible surveillance or security cameras in the area.
• Identify close friends or a trusted person the missing person is likely to contact.
FIELD SUPERVISOR CONSIDERATIONS
• Establish a command post away from the missing person’s residence.
• Facilitate coordination/cooperation among all law enforcement personnel involved in
the investigation and search effort.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
400 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 166 – Report of Property
REVISED September 2003
THE REPORT OF PROPERTY
INTRODUCTION
All property taken into custody by police department employees during the course of their
duties must be documented on a Report of Property, form PD 2240.009A (04/99),
describing who, what, when, where and how the employee came into possession of the
property. The Report of Property must be completed correctly, documenting a complete
description of the property collected or seized and a complete listing of the
person/persons from whom the property was obtained.
All property must be delivered to the Property/Evidence Section or placed into the
provided evidence lockers prior to going off duty.
HOW TO USE THE REPORTS
• The LBPD Property Report, form PD 2240.009(A) (04/99) is a two page NCR (carbon
copy) form. Upon completion, the original copy (pink) is turned into the Records
Division for filing and storage
• The second copy (yellow) marked "receipt copy" shall be given as a receipt when
needed or used as an information sheet for the Property Office when turning in any
property. On the backside of the yellow receipt is general information for the public
• The LBPD Property Report Continuation Page, form PD 2240.009(D) (08/96), will be
used if there are more than four separate articles or items reported on Report of
Property, form PD 2240.009A
• LBPD Loss Report, form PD2240.009(B) (08/96), will be used in conjunction with all
Incident/Crime Reports where there is a reported loss (i.e., Burglary, Theft, etc.)
• Field officers filing field reports should provide the victim with blank PD 2240.009(B)
forms if additional losses need to be mailed in. The officer should explain to the victim
how to fill out the form and to use black ink if handwritten
• These reports are NOT to be used when listing a bicycle or vehicle as stolen or
recovered
REPORTING PROPERTY DESCRIPTIONS
Officers should make every attempt to obtain as much correct information as possible
when completing the property form.
166 – Report of Property
401 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Item-# - Assign a number to the various articles referred to on each line. The item
number helps to identify the articles in case it should become necessary to make
future reference to the item without renaming or re-describing it each time
• Involved date
• Article - List the name or kind of article.
– Jewelry: Watch, ring (include high school, wedding, men's, women's, etc.)
– Camera
– Television: Color or black and white, portable or console, size of screen
– Credit cards: Include not only Mastercard and Visa, but from which bank and list
the account number
• Brand - List the manufacturer or trade name of the article (e.g., Bulova, Smith-Corona,
Minolta, RCA, IBM, Sears, etc.
• Model - The exact model is of importance when describing similar types of articles
produced in different models (e.g., M-870, Accutron, 2200, SRT-102, M-24 Radio, M-
15, ladies, men's, etc.)
• Serial # - Record the serial number (not model number) assigned on each article.
• Owner applied # - When a serial number is unavailable and the property is marked
with the victim's operator's license or social security number, list that number and
indicate the type of number (SS# or DL#). Also list any name or initials that might be
engraved
• Quantity - List all articles of the same description along the same lateral column and
indicate the number of items
• Value (approximate if unknown) - Enter the market value of the article at the time the
report is made. Total the column and place the total loss on the front of the Incident
Report
• Make (guns only) - the brand name of the gun, e.g. Remington, Smith and Wesson,
etc.
• Type-cat (guns)
– Handgun: Semi-automatic, revolver, blank, derringer, flare, gas or air, percussion,
single-shot
– Rifle: Automatic action, bolt action, carbine, double barrel (side by side), flintlock,
gas or air, lever action, percussion (caplock), pump action, recoilless, semi-
automatic, single shot
– Shotgun: Bolt action, double barrel (side-by-side), over and under, pump action,
semi-automatic, single-shot
• Caliber - the caliber of the gun
• Material and color - Identify the type of material the article is made of (i.e., metal,
cotton, silver, gold, leather or type of wood). Specify the combination of materials on
items that consist of several different types of materials
• Size - List the dimensions of the article as close as possible.
• Color
• Description
• Remarks
CONCLUSION
A complete and correct report, including connecting report numbers, is a vital tool for each
investigative detail.
166 – Report of Property
402 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
403 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 167 – Carotid Restraint
THE CAROTID RESTRAINT
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
404 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration
REVISED August 2002
MEXICAN VEHICLE REGISTRATION
Mexican customs, Department of Federal Vehicle Registry (Registro Federal de
Vehiculos – RFV) is the original registry and titling agency for all vehicles sold in Mexico,
and is responsible for:
• Issuing titles
• Assigning Registro Federal de Vehiculos numbers
– Window decals
– Registro Federal de Vehiculos VIN plates
Individual Mexican States issue license plates and registration cards.
National Plates - National plates are issued to Mexican manufactured vehicles or new
vehicles that are imported into Mexico through a Mexican dealership.
• The new National license plates have a white background with a green border and
alphanumeric sequence
• Old National license plates have a tan background and navy blue alphanumeric
characters
• There are 32 states in Mexico and the plates display an abbreviation of the country of
origin: MEX, as well as the letter abbreviation for the state of issuance
The three types of National plates issued are:
• Commercial trucks or pickup truck license plates will display two letters and five
numbers (example YW27520)
• Commercial truck tractors and trailers will display one number, two letters, and four
numbers (example 1AF1704)
• National passenger plates start with three letters followed by a series of four numbers
(example AGG1869)
Frontier Plates – are issued to vehicles imported to any of the US – Mexico Border
States. The plates are known as “Placas Fronezizas” and have a yellow background with
the green alphanumeric characters. These plates also have the emblem of the state of
issuance and a logo of the state’s pride.
• Frontier plates are issued every five years but the registration fees must be paid every
year. Month and year tabs are issued along with the new registration card at the time
the fees are deposited
168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration
405 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Frontier zone: vehicles with these plates may travel only in the designated “Frontier
Zone.” This zone starts at the US/Mexico Border to 20 kilometers into the interior of
Mexico. A special permit must be obtained if traveling farther into the interior of Mexico
The Frontier States that issue this plate are:
Baja California BC
Baja California Sur BCS
Chihuahua CHIH
Coahuila COAH
Sonora SON
Tamaulipas TAM
Other Mexican License Plates
• Commercial for Hire/Public Service Plates are issued to taxis and buses. They have
a red background with black numbers and letters. The plates will display four numbers
followed by three letters (example 2587ZLC)
• Federal Public Service/Servico Publico Federal (SPF) plates should be displayed on
commercial truck tractors, trailers, and buses for use on federal lands such as airports
− Older issued SPF plates have a green background and white numbers and letters.
These green plates are currently registered and circulating legally
− The new SPF plates have a white background with black letters and numbers. The
sequence will start with 3 numbers, 2 letters and a final number. (example
362HB7). These distinctive plates have a bar code on the upper part of the plate
and a drawing of the type of vehicle authorized to display them
Vehicle Registration Card – the registration cards change in format and color each year
and are issued by the State Secretary of Finances. Vehicles should be registered
between the months of January and June of every year. The registration cards will have
information pertaining to the vehicle and the registered owner.
Final Note
Always run the VIN through the stolen Vehicle System (SVS) on a Mexican registered
vehicle. There are many US stolen vehicles recovered this way because of the rampant
use of Mexican fraudulent documents.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
406 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
REVISED August 2018
SEARCH AND SEIZURE GUIDELINES
See Special Order - Electronic Device Searches 12-18-19
FOURTH AMENDMENT
The United States and California Constitutions prohibit the unreasonable search and
seizure of an individual’s home, person, or personal property. To prevent an
unreasonable search, the Fourth Amendment makes it clear that law enforcement must
possess a warrant to conduct a legal, reasonable search. Under the Fourth Amendment,
a warrantless search is presumptively unreasonable and illegal. However, case law
has created some exceptions to the warrant requirement. There are five situations in
which officers may perform a search on an individual:
• Officers receive consent from the person to be searched;
• Officers are transporting a citizen in a police car;
• Officers are executing a warrant to search a residence for drugs;
• A search incident to arrest;
• A non-consensual search when an officer reasonably believes the person to be
searched is armed and dangerous.
CONSENT SEARCHES
The law classifies citizen contacts as consensual encounters, detentions or arrests. For
an investigative stop or detention to be valid, you must have a reasonable suspicion of
the following:
• Criminal activity is afoot; and
• The person detained is connected with that criminal activity.
With reasonable suspicion, both the quality and quantity of the information you need is
less than the probable cause needed to arrest or search. The Courts will look at the
totality of the circumstances when deciding if your suspicion to detain was reasonable.
Reasonable suspicion is not required for a consensual encounter. Merely approaching
someone in public and engaging them in conversation is not a detention; it is permissible
to ask for consent to search, although this may convert the consensual encounter into a
detention. The Courts will evaluate your language, tone of voice and physical actions to
determine if the encounter was consensual.
TRANSPORTING A CITIZEN
169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
407 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The Courts have ruled that if officers have a duty to transport a person, such as
transporting a person from a freeway, away from a dangerous situation, after a traffic
stop, then an officer has the right to search the person before they enter the car. If there
is no duty to transport (no dangerous situation exists), and you are offering a ride, ensure
that the individual knows that they may refuse the ride; however, they will be searched
prior to transportation. If they accept the ride, a search is permitted.
EXECUTING A SEARCH WARRANT ON A DRUG HOUSE
Due to the dangerous nature of illegal drug trafficking, the Courts have ruled that officers
who are executing a warrant to search a residence for drugs may, as a matter of routine,
search the following people:
• Anyone present when officers arrive to execute the warrant;
• Any person who enters the residence while the search is being conducted, if the
manner of their entry reasonably indicates the person is a resident or is otherwise
closely associated with the residence, such as a person entering without knocking.
SEARCHES INCIDENT TO ARREST
When you have lawfully arrested a person that you intend to transport for booking, you
may conduct a warrantless search of the suspect’s person, and the property and area
within the suspect’s immediate control. A search under these conditions is considered a
search incident (contemporaneous) to arrest, which means the search takes place at, or
near, the time of arrest. A search incident to arrest should not be confused with an
inventory search. An inventory search identifies property as part of the booking process.
NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCHES -TERRY STOP VERSUS TERRY FRISK
A Terry stop is different than a Terry frisk. A Terry stop involves the non-consensual
seizure of an individual based on reasonable suspicion. For the seizure to be valid, an
officer must have facts that would lead a reasonable person to conclude that a crime has
been, is being, or is about to be committed, and the person being investigated is somehow
involved; a non-consensual search during a Terry stop is not automatically permitted.
In Terry v. Ohio, 392 US 1 (1968), the United States Supreme Court determined that an
officer may conduct a Terry frisk, also referred to as a pat search. A Terry frisk is a limited
search for weapons, based on reasonable suspicion that the individual, who has been
lawfully detained, is presently armed and dangerous. This type of frisk does not require
consent, but the officer must articulate specific facts that would lead a reasonable person
to conclude the individual is armed and dangerous. A generalized, non-specific concern
for officer safety is not sufficient for a Terry Frisk. According to POST Learning Domain
16, the following factors may support an officer’s reasonable suspicion to conduct a Terry
Frisk:
• A bulge in the subject’s clothing that is the size of a potential weapon;
• The subject is wearing a heavy coat when it is warm;
• The subject is appearing overly nervous;
• The stop occurred in an area known for violence;
• The subjects outnumber the officer(s);
169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
408 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• The subject is stopped during nighttime.
While conducting a Terry Frisk, an officer may search the subject's outer clothing and
garments by feeling, crushing, or twisting the clothing for weapons or hard objects that
can be used to hurt the officer. Without voluntary consent, reaching inside pockets or
other areas is prohibited unless the object reasonably feels like a weapon or item that
could be used as a weapon, or the subject’s clothing is so rigid or heavy that an officer
could not rule out the possibility of a weapon. If an officer encounters an object they
cannot immediately identify as a weapon, they may not reach into the subject’s pocket
and must continue with the search. If during the frisk an officer immediately identifies an
object as contraband, he or she may retrieve the object; otherwise, the officer may not
further manipulate an area or object unless there is still concern it may be a weapon, or
an item that may be used as a weapon.
Reasonable suspicion to stop an individual does not automatically mean the officer has
reasonable suspicion to frisk. An officer may have reasonable suspicion to stop an
individual, but may lack the additional facts that would lead a reasonable person to
conclude the individual is armed and dangerous. Without these additional facts, the officer
may not conduct a limited search for weapons.
DETERMINING IF A PERSON IS ARMED AND DANGEROUS
Depending on the nature of the crime under investigation, the Courts have held that
officers who are detaining a suspect automatically have grounds to search a suspect if
the crime under investigation was closely associated with any of the following:
• Violence - If there is reasonable suspicion to believe the detainee committed a
crime of violence; e.g., the crime under investigation is a homicide, assault with
a deadly weapon, shots fired, or robbery.
• Possession of weapons - The suspect was detained for possession of a
concealed or illegal weapon.
• Burglary – Burglary suspects often carry weapons or tools, such as knives and
screwdrivers which could be used as weapons.
• Car theft - Car theft suspects often carry tools that could be used as weapons.
• Vehicle Pursuits - All occupants following a pursuit.
• Drug sales - Any person who is lawfully detained for drug sales because guns
and violence are such an integral part of drug dealing.
• Parole - If the detainee is on parole or searchable probation.
The following circumstances require an officer to clearly articulate the reasons for the
search:
• Bulge - If a bulge is consistent with a weapon or if the person is attempting to
conceal the bulge.
• Hostile, agitated - A suspect's overt hostility toward an officer or highly agitated
state is a strong indication that he or she constitutes a danger and may justify a
search.
• History of hostility - If a suspect, although not overtly hostile at the time, has a
history of hostility toward officers a search may be justified.
169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
409 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Under the influence - A suspect who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs
may be considered dangerous if his behavior is unpredictable or he is otherwise
unable to control himself.
• Failure to comply - A detainee's failure to comply with an officer's commands
may be an indication of hostility and may, depending on the circumstances, justify
a search (bulky clothing, putting hands in pockets after being told not to, etc.).
• Nervousness - A suspect's display of nervousness, including failure to make
eye contact, has little or no relevance as an indicator of danger unless the
nervousness is extreme or unusual.
• Furtive gesture - The phrase furtive gesture is used to describe a movement by
a suspect, usually of the hands or arms that reasonably appears to have been
made in response to seeing an officer and was made in such a manner that it
appeared the suspect hoped the gesture would go unnoticed. A furtive gesture
is of concern because of the possibility that the suspect may be attempting to
hide or retrieve a weapon, but a furtive gesture by itself does not justify a
search. If a gesture is furtive, the officer must clearly articulate why the gesture
was threatening.
• Sudden movement - While the objective of a furtive movement is to go
unnoticed, the objective of a sudden movement is speed and surprise. Whether
the movement justifies a search depends on exactly what the suspect did, the
surrounding circumstances, and the officer's reasonable interpretation of both. If
an officer believes that a sudden movement was threatening, then an officer must
clearly articulate why it was threatening.
The following circumstances are relevant factors; however, they are looked at in the
totality of the situation:
• Size of suspect - The size of the suspect by itself does not justify a search, but
is sometimes noted by the court as a relative circumstance.
• Officers outnumbered by suspects – There is potentially increased danger to
officers when they are outnumbered.
• Possession of other potential weapon - e.g., baseball bat, hammer, flashlight.
• Armed and dangerous companions – This is not necessarily enough for a
search, but may help to justify one depending on the existence of other factors.
• Assuming the position - A suspect's act of assuming a search position without
being asked is suspicious and may imply consent.
• Criminal history or gang affiliations - A search is warranted if the subject is a
known gang member or has a known criminal history involving violence or
weapons.
• Detainee on probation - In the absence of search conditions, the fact that the
suspect is on probation is a relevant circumstance.
• High crime area - If a detention occurs in an area where crime, gang or drug
problems are rampant, this is not enough by itself to justify a search, but is a
relevant circumstance that will be considered with other circumstances.
• Darkness, nighttime or deserted area – The fact that it may be nighttime, dark
or the area deserted are relevant circumstances and important factors in
assessing the totality of a situation.
169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines
410 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Tips from citizen informants – A tip is considered reliable if from an identified
informant, based on the informant's personal knowledge and the information is
provided as an act of good citizenship, not gain.
• Tips from police informants – A search is admissible only if there is reason to
believe the tip is reliable.
• Anonymous tips – A search is admissible only if there is reason to believe the
tip is reliable.
VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
The rules for conducting a search of a driver or passengers during a detention do not
change because a vehicle stop has occurred. The Courts have ruled you can order a
lawfully detained driver out of a vehicle. The same rule applies to passengers due to
officer safety concerns. However, if you assert any additional authority over a passenger,
you will have to convince the court that your action was reasonably necessary. The
following circumstances may establish the need to search a vehicle occupant:
• To ensure your safety or the safety of others;
• To carry out your duties relating to initial detention; or
• To investigate that the passenger was involved in criminal activity.
SEARCHING THE OPPOSITE GENDER
If you have reason to believe a person is a threat to your safety, you should search that
person immediately. The gender of a person should have no impact on officer safety
practices.
REPORTING
Arrests resulting solely from evidence found during a search should be thoroughly
documented; including the reasonable suspicion resulting in the detention and facts that
support conducting a search.
CONCLUSION
Officers take an oath to enforce the laws of the State and uphold the Constitution of the
United States and California, both of which protect individuals against unreasonable
searches and seizures. Enforcing the laws, which brings about officer safety concerns,
yet respecting the rights of those whom you serve, is a careful balancing act.
Reasonable suspicion may not be based, in whole or part, on broad profiles that cast
suspicion on entire categories of people without any individualized suspicion of the person
stopped. When the community perceives that searches are being conducted arbitrarily
or discriminately, the result can be anger, suspicion, litigation, and lack of community
support.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
411 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 170 – Searching Techniques
REVISED May 2019
SEARCHING TECHNIQUES
LEGAL ASPECTS
A search occurs when a government officer infringes upon an expectation of privacy that
society considers reasonable. (United States v. Jacobsen, 466 U. S. 109 (1984).)
Warrantless searches are presumptively illegal. When an officer sees the need to search
a person, that need must be articulated in facts. A subject may provide consent thereby
lessening the need for probable cause. However, any non-consensual search requires
probable cause, for further information refer to Training Bulletin 169 – Search and Seizure
Guidelines.
PRINCIPLES OF A SEARCH TECHNIQUE
The purpose of any search technique is to provide an officer with an advantage over the
subject being searched; completing a thorough search before handcuffing a person helps
to provide that advantage.
The following are two reasons why it is advisable to search before handcuffing:
• Both of the officer’s hands are occupied when handcuffing a subject; one hand
controls the subject, the other hand applies the handcuffs. The subject however has
one free hand to resist or reach for a weapon. If the officer has not searched the
subject this could become a deadly scenario.
• There are times when an officer has the factual basis to search a subject but lacks
probable cause to arrest. Handcuffing before searching could conceivably constitute
an unlawful arrest.
The exception to searching before handcuffing is when an officer places a subject into a
prone position, or when an officer is involved in a physical altercation with a subject.
Officers should not use the wall search or any variation because it allows a subject four
points of balance instead of two. Prison inmates commonly rehearse techniques to
assault a searching officer from a wall search.
An officer should never be lulled into a false sense of security because a subject appears
cooperative. A cooperative demeanor does not guarantee that a subject will not become
combative or attempt to escape. Officers should use the following factors to decide which
search technique to utilize:
• The number of subjects involved in the event;
• The size of the subject and amount of control needed to take the subject safely into
custody;
• The subject's and your emotional, mental, and physical limitations;
170 –Searching and Handcuffing
412 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• The type of offense and the degree of cooperation from the subject;
• The time of day, location, and the weather conditions surrounding the contact;
• The past criminal record of the subject, if known;
• Instinct combined with the ability to articulate facts based on experience and training
that cause you to take a specific action.
SEARCH TECHNIQUES
Officers should visually search all subjects for potential weapons before approach; look
at the hands, bulges in clothing, or anything in the immediate area that could be used as
a weapon. The search techniques described below are organized from the least to the
greatest amount of control.
THE CURSORY SEARCH
A cursory search may be utilized when a subject is not suspected of a felony, is
cooperative, and does not appear to be a danger to the officer. The cursory search is a
low-profile search technique that provides an officer with the minimum amount of control
over a subject. The cursory search is a quick, thorough search of the outer layer of
clothing for easily accessible weapons. It therefore only covers those areas from the pant
pockets up and draws as little attention to the subject as possible. An officer can use this
search technique when they have a factual basis to search, but not necessarily to arrest.
THE STANDING MODIFIED SEARCH
The standing modified search is a sound, safe technique to use for most misdemeanor
subjects. It offers more control over a subject than the cursory search and officers may
utilize it when needing a greater degree of control.
THE KNEELING SEARCH
The kneeling search is similar in many ways to the standing modified search. However,
the technique completely takes away the subject’s balance. The kneeling search is a
viable technique when faced with multiple subjects or a dangerous situation. It is also a
preferred technique to choose when lying a subject on the ground or floor is undesirable
or impractical. Before making contact with the subject, officers should provide verbal
directions to the subject from a position of cover and with gun drawn. If the circumstances
prevent this precaution, the officer should position themselves a safe distance from the
subject. An officer's gun should never be used as a pointer to give directions.
THE PRONE SEARCH
The prone technique affords the greatest advantage over a subject. It should be used by
an officer when he or she knows or has good reason to believe a subject is dangerous.
For this reason, the subject remains facing the officer throughout this technique. This
position allows the officer to maintain a constant visual of the subject’s hands. Maximize
your protection by maintaining a safe distance, with gun drawn, and if possible behind
cover. An officer's gun should never be used as a pointer to give directions.
SEARCHING THE OPPOSITE GENDER
Officers should exercise good judgment when searching a member of the opposite
gender. However, the gender of a subject should not impact officer safety practices. If a
subject is a safety threat, officers should search that person immediately.
170 –Searching and Handcuffing
413 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Male officers may search female subjects if probable cause exists in the belief that the
subject is concealing a dangerous weapon or contraband, and a search by a female
officer is either impossible or impractical. Under such circumstances, a male officer may
perform a search of the female subject to ensure the safety of the officer, the subject, or
other persons.
Examples of probable cause include, but are not limited to:
• The crime being investigated involves force or a threat of force, or
• There is an indication that a weapon was used, or
• The subject is known to have carried a weapon in the past, and
• The subject's clothing could reasonably conceal a weapon
SYSTEMATIC SEARCH
Each search technique is mechanically different. However, all searches should be
conducted systematically. A systematic search performed the same way each time
ensures that no area is missed. Remember to search the half of the body that you are
near; you will switch and search the opposite side later. When you search, you should
use your sense of touch; feel with your fingers, do not pat. Patting can desensitize your
fingertips, making it harder to feel a well-concealed weapon under the clothing.
If you find a weapon, alert your partner. If able retrieve the weapon, if not control the
subject’s arm as you take him/her down into prone control. When weapons are found,
continue to search; never assume a subject is carrying only one weapon.
For a systematic search of a person, divide the body, as shown in Figure 1, into the
following seven areas:
1) Front waistband;
2) Front pants pocket;
3) Up the front torso (stopping at the bra line for female subjects);
4) Down the side of the torso and sleeves;
5) Down the back;
6) Across the back waistband;
7) Back pants pocket.
Figure 1:
170 –Searching and Handcuffing
414 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
TWIST LOCK
A subject’s lower legs should be searched after handcuffing; searching the lower body
before handcuffing would place an officer in an unbalanced and dangerous position. A
situation may arise where a subject is not handcuffed and you have adequate cause to
believe the subject is concealing a weapon in a lower extremity. In such a case, utilize a
twist lock to search the lower body. A twist lock may also be used for searching
cooperative, but unsanitary subjects.
HANDCUFFING
When handcuffing a subject, ensure that the handcuffs are checked for proper fit and
are double locked. Handcuffs should not be so tight as to cause injury, but not loose
enough to allow the subject to slip their wrists from the cuffs.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
415 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 174 – Photographic Lineups
REVISED May 2020
PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUPS
INTRODUCTION
California Penal Code § 859.7 requires all law enforcement agencies to adopt regulations for
conducting photographic lineups with eyewitnesses. The law does not apply to field show-ups.
DEFINITIONS
Photographic Lineup – a procedure in which an array of photographs, including the
suspect’s photograph and additional photographs of other persons not suspected of the
offense, are displayed to an eyewitness to determine whether the eyewitness can identify
the suspect (standard photographs or digital photographs from law enforcement database
systems may be used).
Filler – a person or a photograph of a person who is not suspected of an offense and is
included in an identification procedure.
Blind Administration – the administrator of an eyewitness identification procedure does
not know the identity of the suspect.
Blinded Administration – the administrator of an eyewitness identification procedure
may know who the suspect is but does not know where the suspect’s photograph has
been positioned in the identification procedure.
Folder Shuffle Method – a system for conducting a photo lineup by placing photographs
in folders, randomly numbering and shuffling the folders, then presenting the folders so
the administrator cannot see or track which photograph is being presented to the
eyewitness until after the procedure is completed.
California Penal Code § 859.7 PC requires the following:
• The eyewitness shall provide the suspect’s description prior to conducting the
identification procedure, and as close in time to the incident as possible.
• The investigator conducting the identification shall use a blind administration or a
blinded administration procedure.
• The investigator shall state in writing the reason why blind administration was not used
if applicable.
• Prior to any identification procedure, an eyewitness shall be instructed of the following:
- The suspect may or may not be among the persons in the identification
procedure.
174 –Photo Line-ups
416 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
- Do not feel compelled to make an identification.
- An identification or failure to make an identification will not end the
investigation.
• An identification procedure shall be composed so the fillers generally fit the
eyewitness’ description of the suspect. The suspect’s photograph should resemble
their appearance at the time of the offense and not unduly stand out.
• Writings or information concerning any previous arrest of the suspect shall not be
visible to the eyewitness.
• Only one suspect shall be included in any identification procedure.
• All eyewitnesses shall be separated when viewing an identification procedure.
• Nothing shall be said to the eyewitness that might influence the eyewitness’
identification of the suspect.
• If the eyewitness identifies a person they believe to be the suspect, all of the following
shall apply:
- The investigator shall immediately inquire as to the eyewitness’ confidence
level in the identification and record in writing, verbatim, what the eyewitness
says.
- Information concerning the identified person shall not be given to the
eyewitness prior to obtaining the eyewitness’ statement of confidence level and
documenting the exact words of the eyewitness.
- The officer shall not validate or invalidate the eyewitness’ identification.
• An audio and video recording shall be made of the identification procedure.
• Whether it is feasible to make a video recording shall be determined on a case-by-
case basis. When it is not feasible to make an audio and video recording, an audio
recording alone may be used, and the investigator shall state in writing the reason a
video recording was not feasible.
ADMINISTERING THE PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUP
Officers and detectives can use either blind or blinded administration. In either case, the
officer or detective administrating the photographic lineup should advise the
victim/witness of the Photographic Lineup Admonishment (PD Form 3100.006) and
ensure the form is signed and completed.
Field officers should not conduct photographic lineups in the field without prior approval
from the detective assigned to the case. A field officer investigating a new case that has
not been filed and assigned to a detective detail, should first consult with a detective or
sergeant from the investigative detail and a field supervisor for approval before
proceeding with the photographic lineup.
Non-sworn employees who are assigned to the Investigations Bureau and under the
supervision of a sworn police officer/detective can assist in the creation of photographic
lineups. Only sworn personnel should administer a photographic lineup.
Once a photographic lineup is completed, the original lineup should be booked as
evidence and a copy stored in the case file.
PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUP PREPARATION AND PROCEDURE
174 –Photo Line-ups
417 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Blind Administration
The officer creates the photographic lineup by printing a photograph of the suspect and
five filler photographs of other persons who generally fit the eyewitness’ description of the
suspect. The suspect photograph should not unduly stand out. The photos can be full
size, sized to fit on a single sheet of paper or sized for multiple photos on a single page.
Once the photographic array is created, provide the array to another officer or detective
who will then administer the identification procedure. This second officer/detective
administering the lineup cannot know the identity of the suspect.
Blinded Administration
This method allows the administrator of the lineup to know the identity of the suspect but
uses the folder shuffle method to randomize the location of the suspect within the
photographic array. A blinded administration of the folder shuffle method is prepared
using the following steps:
1. Use one suspect photograph and five filler photographs along with six file folders. The
filler photographs should generally fit the eyewitness’ description of the suspect. The
photograph of the person suspected as the perpetrator should, if practicable, resemble
the appearance of the suspect at the time of the offense and not unduly stand out.
2. Affix one filler photo to a folder and number that folder #1.
3. Place the suspect’s photograph and four filler photographs into the remaining five
separate folders. Shuffle the five folders so the administrator is unaware of which
folder contains the suspect’s photograph, and then number those folders #2-#6
accordingly.
4. Instruct the witness by reading the Photographic Lineup Admonishment, per PD Form
3100.006, including that the suspect may or may not be contained in the photographs
and that the administrator does not know which folder, if any, contains the suspect.
5. Without looking at the photographs in the folders, hand each of the six folders to the
witness individually and in sequential order. The witness should look at the entire set
of folders/photographs prior to selecting a photograph, if any. If the witness selects a
photograph without looking at the entire series of folders/photographs, the
administrator should remind the witness to look at all photographs. If the witness
selects a photograph, the administrator should immediately inquire as to the witness’
confidence level in the identification.
6. Document and record the results of the procedure, including the date, time, and
location of the lineup procedure, the name of the administrator, the names of all of the
individuals present during the lineup, the number of photographs shown, the order in
which the folders/photographs were presented, the witness’ level of confidence in their
own words, and any additional information the administrator deems pertinent to the
procedure.
174 –Photo Line-ups
418 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
7. Once complete, the lineup (photo array) should be considered evidence. The original
should be booked as evidence and a copy stored in the case file.
Once the identification procedure is complete, it is acceptable to mark directly on the
photos (i.e. writing “#4” directly on the photo in folder 4). You may also affix the photos to
the folders (staples, tape, etc.) if needed. If you write on the photos or affix the photos to
their folders, ensure you document it in your report.
If Blinded Administration is used for the identification procedure, it must be documented
why it was used instead of Blind Administration. The law prefers that Blind Administration
be the method of administering the lineup procedure. Blinded Administration should only
be used when there is an articulable reason.
Other Methods
The law allows for other methods of administering photographic lineups. Other methods
include any other procedure that achieves “neutral administration” and prevents the lineup
administrator from knowing where the suspect’s photograph, as applicable, has been
placed or positioned in the identification procedure.
CONCLUSION
Valid eyewitness identifications play an important role in enhancing the investigative
process, in solving crimes and securing rightful convictions, and in exonerating those not
involved in the crime.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
419 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence
Review & Collection
REVISED November 2005
LONG BEACH TRANSIT BUS-RELATED VIDEO EVIDENCE
REVIEW AND COLLECTION PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
Video cameras have been installed in over half of Long Beach Transit buses; plans are
in progress to install video cameras on their remaining fleet.
Video evidence from these cameras is recorded on a computer hard drive on the bus.
This video evidence can be reviewed and collected as evidence for prosecuting bus-
related crimes.
The Chief of Police has approved the following procedures for the review and collection
of Long Beach Transit bus-related video evidence.
PROCEDURE
Should a crime occur on, or relating to, a Long Beach Transit bus, first determine whether
the bus was equipped with an on-board video surveillance system. If so, note the bus
number and contact any on-duty Transit Enforcement Officer (Radio Designators “TC
(Tom-Charles) 1 – 6. All Transit Enforcement Officers are designated contact points for
Long Beach Transit and shall facilitate the review and collection of any applicable video
evidence.
In the absence of an on-duty Transit Enforcement Officer, the Transit Enforcement Detail
Sergeant can be called on his Department-issued cellular phone (number on file with the
Communications Division). The Transit Enforcement Detail Sergeant shall then facilitate
the review and collection of any applicable video evidence.
The Transit Enforcement Officers/Sergeant contacted for this purpose shall, in turn,
contact the Long Beach Transit Administrator responsible for maintaining access to on-
board video data collection systems, and request a review of the appropriate data.
If the reviewed data proves to be of evidentiary value, the designated Long Beach Transit
Administrator shall provide a DVD copy of the evidence to the requesting Transit
Enforcement Officer. Transit Enforcement Officers receiving DVD-based evidence from
Long Beach Transit shall complete the required Long Beach Transit forms and then book
the DVD into evidence according to established Police Department evidence collection
procedures.
175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence Review & Collection
420 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Transit Enforcement Officers booking such DVD evidence shall include in the evidence
report the name, title and contact information of the Long Beach Transit Administrator
providing the DVD. Long Beach Transit understands that the Administrator providing the
DVD to Transit Enforcement Officers may be called to testify as a witness and has agreed
to make the Administrator available for that purpose in any subsequent criminal court
hearing.
CONCLUSION
The Long Beach Transit Enforcement Detail is working in partnership with Long Beach
Transit to provide valuable bus-related video evidence for the purpose of successfully
prosecuting bus-related crimes.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
421 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 177 – Reserve Police Officer Duties
REVISED May 2004
RESERVE POLICE OFFICER DUTIES
INTRODUCTION
Reserve police officers are community members who chose to dedicate a portion of their
time to community service by donating needed services to the Police Department to assist
with the police mission. A reserve police officer for the City of Long Beach volunteers to
work without financial compensation in order to supplement, not replace, sworn staffing
levels in the furtherance of the Police Department mission.
RESERVE LEVELS
POST has also established levels of authority and minimum training requirements for
reserve officers. Level I reserve officers possess the highest amount of authority and
training requirements and Level III reserve officers have the least amount of authority and
training requirements.
HIRING STANDARDS
Hiring standards shall be the same as for a full time regular police officer.
Level III Reserve
• Academy Training - Level III reserve police officers shall successfully complete a
course prescribed by section 832 PC. Previously this certification was known as
Module A of the Reserve Police Officers training course
• Duties (PC 832.6 (a) (3)) - Level III reserve police officers shall carry out limited
support duties not requiring general law enforcement powers in their routine
performance. Level III reserve police officers must never be assigned to a position
where there is an expectation of an arrest. A Level III shall be supervised in the
“accessible vicinity” by a Level I reserve officer or a full-time regular police officer
Duties include:
– Traffic control and parking enforcement
– Security at parades and sporting events
– Report taking and evidence transportation
– Other duties that are not likely to result in physical arrests
– A Level III reserve officer may transport prisoners without immediate supervision
Typically, Level III reserve police officers are assigned to such duties as technical and
scientific services, search and rescue, administrative support and community public
information.
177 – Reserve Police Officer
422 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Level II Reserve
• Academy Training – Level II reserve police officers must successfully complete the
course prescribed by POST for a Level II reserve police officer. Previously this
certification was known as Module A & B of the Reserve Police Officer's Course. A
level II reserve officer must satisfy the continuing professional training requirements
• Duties (PC 832.6 (a) (2)) - The level II reserve police officer, upon completion of FTO
training shall only work under the immediate supervision of a peace officer who has
completed a Basic Training Course. The Basic Training Courses are the Basic
Academy, the extended Basic Academy (Level I Reserve), or the module "D" and/or
Level I modular courses
Duties include:
− Prevention and detection of crime
− General enforcement of the laws
− Without immediate supervision they may be assigned those limited duties
authorized for a level III reserve police officer
− Other duties assigned by COP
Level I Reserve
• Academy Training – Level I reserve police officers must successfully complete the
course prescribed by POST for a Level I reserve police officer. Previously this
certification was known as Modules A, B and C of the Reserve Police Officer's Course.
Any Level I reserve police officer appointed after 1/1/97 must have completed the
same basic training course as prescribed by POST for a full time police officer
• Duties - Level I reserve police officers, upon completion of FTO training, will be
assigned to the prevention and detection of crime and the general enforcement of the
laws of this state and the City of Long Beach. Duties include:
– Patrol - working as a partner with any full time police officer or Level I reserve
police officer. A Level I reserve officer may work as a single officer patrol unit
upon successful completion of the Single Officer FTO Program
– Bicycle patrol
– Detectives (adult and juvenile)
– Vice
– Traffic
– Other duties assigned by COP
CONCLUSION
The Long Beach Reserve Unit stands ready and willing to assist any unit or member of
the Long Beach Police Department in serving the citizens of Long Beach.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
423 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 178 – Court Appearances
REVISED February 2001
COURT APPEARANCES
INTRODUCTION
Long Beach Police Department employees are required to know and understand the
subpoena and court appearance procedures outlined in the Department Procedures
Manual and the Police Officers’ Association Memorandum of Understanding (M.O.U.).
Attendance at an adult or juvenile court or quasi-judicial hearing is considered an official
duty when ordered by subpoena, or if directed by a commanding or court liaison officer.
Employees hold sole responsibility for their appearance and testimony in court, and this
duty must be taken seriously.
DRESS CODE
Ensure that you are punctual and properly dressed. When appearing during your off duty
hours you must wear either a uniform or business attire, unless the prosecuting attorney
requests that you wear specific clothing that is relevant to their case. When appearing
during normal scheduled work hours, wear attire appropriate to your duty assignment.
COURT CALL STATUS
Sworn officers in an “off duty” status who are directed to “be there” or placed “on call” by
the District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or the Court Affairs Sergeant will be compensated
accordingly. For further reference officers should refer to the Police Officer’s Association
M.O.U.
Employees who are subpoenaed to court in Orange and Los Angeles Counties will be
credited with driving time from the Public Safety Building to the court of appearance and
return. For appearances out of Orange or Los Angeles Counties, the Court Affairs
Sergeant will review travel arrangements and approve compensation for travel and court
time in advance.
Employees in a “be there” status will report to Court Affairs and sign in on or before the
time stated on the subpoena. For each ½ hour an employee is late in reporting to court,
not less than ½ hour will be deducted from the employee’s overtime. When an employee
is already on duty and must appear in court, he/she will sign in at the Court Affairs Office,
then check in personally with the District Attorney handling the case.
An employee in an “on call” status who is notified to report to court will do so as soon as
possible, but, no later than one hour after such notification. Presiding judges have been
178 – Court Appearances
424 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
known to impose body attachments and fines on officers who were late or failed to appear
in court.
After being notified to appear in court, the employee must go directly to Court Affairs and
sign in. Employees attending court are in an on-duty status and are under the direct
supervision of the Court Affairs Sergeant.
COURT UNAVAILABLITY
Any employee who finds it necessary to be excused from a court appearance must direct
such requests to the Court Affairs Sergeant. If an employee is going to be on vacation or
away at training, he/she must submit a vacation schedule or training schedule to the Court
Affair’s Sergeant, listing cases that will occur during that time period and noting whether
they are available or unavailable for court. Court Affairs must receive this information no
later than one workweek prior to the scheduled vacation or training class.
FILING FOR OVERTIME
Employees filing “be there” overtime must submit overtime cards to the Court Affairs
Office within 24 hours. “On call” overtime must be filed within 24 hours or on the first day
upon returning to work after days off. “On call” hours are from 0930 to 1230 for A.M. and
1330 to 1630 for P.M.
COURT CALENDAR
The court calendar is posted daily outside the Court Affairs Office, located on the first
floor of the Public Safety Building. The calendar is printed daily at 1700 hours for the
following court day, and copies of the calendar are forwarded to the Business Desk at the
main station. Each substation will print the court calendar after 1700 hours, making the
following days calendar available for employees. It is the employee’s responsibility to
check the calendar for the status of cases on a daily basis. Employees can check their
court status either on the posted hard copy of the court calendar, or they can log on to
the host connection and check the calendar electronically. The following is a list of court
dispositions that will appear on the electronic court calendar:
• Pending Appearance Required
• Excused No Appearance Required
• Resubmitted No Appearance Required
• Copped No Appearance Required
• Continued No Appearance Required
• B/W (Bench Warrant) No Appearance Required
• Pled No Appearance Required
Continued/Trailed indicates the case was not presented on that date. If a date appears
after this designation, it is the officer’s responsibility to check the calendar on that date as
to appearance status.
178 – Court Appearances
425 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Once an officer’s case has been assigned to a courtroom, only the judge can excuse
him/her. Officers will remain in the courtroom until a case disposition has been reached
and/or the judge personally excuses the officer.
TRIAL AND HEARING ATTENDANCE
The following is a list of trial and hearing locations:
• Misdemeanor Trials Superior Court
• Felony Trials Superior Court
• Preliminary Hearings Superior Court
• Juvenile Hearings Superior Court, Room 245 o4 246
• Juvenile Traffic Hearings Superior Court, Room 20
• DMV Hearings Usually at DMV or telephonic hearing
• Alcoholic Beverage Control Location indicated on notice to appear
• Civil Trials/Arbitration Boards Location indicated on notice to appear
• Parole Hearing Los Angeles County Jail
• Probation Hearing Location indicated on notice to appear
CONCLUSION
Police Department employees must present themselves in a professional manner when
appearing in court. Attitude, appearance and punctuality are three characteristics that
portray a positive image of both the employee and the Police Department.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
426 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 179 – Communicable Diseases
REVISED January 2023
COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
INTRODUCTION
The Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) strives to provide a safe and healthy work
environment by establishing procedures and guidelines to limit the transmission of
communicable diseases in the workplace. This training bulletin outlines communicable
disease prevention and supplements the City’s Communicable Disease Prevention
Program. Training Bulletin 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis will outline
procedures to follow after an exposure has occurred.
DEFINITIONS
• Communicable Disease: A disease transmitted by direct or indirect human
contact
• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Equipment worn to minimize exposure
to hazards that cause serious workplace injuries and illnesses, including but not
limited to masks, protective eyewear, and coveralls
TYPES OF EXPOSURE
There are varying levels and types of exposure to communicable diseases. Airborne
diseases and contagious skin diseases are generally more easily transmitted than
bloodborne pathogens.
Airborne Disease
An exposure to an airborne disease (e.g., colds, influenza, tuberculosis) occurs when
an infected person expels droplets or small particles in the air, through acts like
coughing, sneezing, or talking and another person inhales the infected droplets.
Bloodborne Pathogens
An exposure to a bloodborne pathogen (e.g., Hepatitis B virus (HBV), Hepatitis C
virus (HCV) and Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)) occurs when there is direct
contact with infected bodily fluids. This can occur through blood transfusions, needle
sticks, human bites, or when blood contacts broken skin.
Contagious Skin Disease
An exposure to a contagious skin disease (e.g., scabies, MRSA, and ringworm)
occurs when a person contacts the infected skin or contaminated surface.
427 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
COMMUNICABLE DISEASE PREVENTION PROCEDURES
To reduce their risk of exposure, officers should:
1. Assume all subjects are potential carriers, even if they are not symptomatic.
2. Cover all cuts and abrasions with waterproof bandages.
3. Wear disposable gloves when handling a subject, clothing, equipment, or evidence
suspected of being soiled with bodily fluids or other contagion. Leather gloves should
not be worn. If they become contaminated, they must be disposed of in accordance
with applicable laws pertaining to the disposal of biohazardous waste.
4. Wear proper PPE when an officer is contacting a contaminated subject.
5. Use authorized resuscitation masks with one-way valves whenever an officer
performs CPR or respiratory resuscitation.
6. Handle all sharp instruments such as knives, scalpels, and needles with extraordinary
care and consider them potentially infectious.
a. Officers should not place their hands in areas (e.g., pockets, bags, containers,
center consoles, etc.) where sharp instruments might be hidden. An initial visual
search of the area should be conducted, and the officer can ask involved subjects
if there are any sharp instruments hidden in these areas.
b. Manipulation of needles should be minimized whenever possible, and should not
be recapped, bent, broken, or removed from a disposable syringe. Needles should
be placed in a puncture-resistant container when being collected for evidentiary or
disposal purposes.
7. Not smoke, eat, drink, bite nails, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses near
potentially contaminated areas or people.
Transport and Custody
When transporting a potentially infected subject, officers should:
1. Consider the availability of PPE and severity of offense when making the decision to
arrest.
2. Limit suspect movement and the number of officers contacting the subject.
3. When possible, bandage or appropriately cover actively bleeding wounds and
transport the subject separate from other subjects.
4. When officers transfer custody of a subject to another person, they should notify the
person the subject is potentially infected with a communicable disease or has bodily
fluids on their person.
5. After taking a suspect into custody and transporting them to booking, place the
suspect directly in the temporary holding cell area for processing and have them
change into uncontaminated clothing. When possible, a sign should be posted
advising others the holding cell contains an infected or contaminated subject.
6. If officers suspect a subject is infected with an Airborne Disease, the officer and the
subject should wear proper PPE. The subject should be instructed to follow proper
hygiene etiquette, such as coughing into their elbow.
7. Document on the Arrestee Medical Screening Form a subject has a communicable
disease or was contaminated with bodily fluids.
428 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Disinfection
When an employee’s skin, clothing, or equipment is exposed to bodily fluids,
contaminated clothing, or an infected subject they should use the applicable disinfectant
procedure listed below:
• After removal of protective gloves, officers should immediately and thoroughly wash
their hands and any other unprotected skin surfaces with soap and water. Alcohol-
based hand cleaning solutions or antiseptic towelettes should be used where soap
and water are unavailable.
• Lightly contaminated clothing should not be laundered at home. It is recommended
that a third-party professional cleaning service launder the clothing.
• Grossly contaminated clothing should be placed in a biohazards bag and removed for
disposal by a licensed hazardous waste disposal company.
• All disposable equipment or cleaning materials contaminated with bodily fluids should
be bagged and removed for disposal by a licensed hazardous waste disposal
company.
• Non-Disposable equipment should be cleaned by first removing all visible bodily fluids
with an absorbent cloth and then cleansed with a hospital-grade disinfectant.
When a Department vehicle is used to transport an infected subject, a subject excreting
bodily fluids, a subject wearing contaminated clothing, or if bodily fluids are spilled in the
vehicle, the below listed disinfectant procedure should be followed:
1. Notify a supervisor and take the vehicle to fleet as soon as possible to be disinfected.
2. Post a sign on the vehicle indicating it is contaminated with an infectious disease while
awaiting decontamination.
3. Clean vehicles by first removing all visible bodily fluids with an absorbent cloth and
then cleanse it with a hospital-grade disinfectant.
Supplies
• Divisional Administrative Aides should ensure communicable disease supplies,
including PPE, disinfectant, and first aid supplies are well stocked and stored in an
easily accessible location.
• Department vehicles should be stocked with communicable-disease supplies.
• Employees who use the supplies carried in police vehicles should replenish them as
they are used.
• Employees should keep disposable gloves on their person while on patrol.
Link to City of Long Beach List of Reportable Communicable Disease
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Business Operations Bureau
429 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure
Prophylaxis
REVISED March 2023
EXPOSURE AND POST EXPOSURE PROPHYLAXIS
PURPOSE
The Department recognizes its responsibility to provide employees with medical care for
job-incurred medical injuries and associated medical problems, which are considered
injured on duty (IOD) incidents.
An exposure to a bloodborne pathogen, airborne disease, or contagious skin disease may
occur when contacting an individual who is a carrier of a communicable disease. All
infections result from an exposure, but most exposures do not result in an infection.
Training Bulletin 179 – Communicable Diseases outlines communicable diseases and
exposure prevention. This Training Bulletin outlines the procedures to follow when an
officer has had a communicable disease exposure.
EXPOSURES TO BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS
Employees who have experienced a possible exposure to a bloodborne pathogen should
immediately be treated by medical personnel for potential exposure to bloodborne
pathogens. The employee should be provided with the bloodborne pathogen post-
exposure evaluation, follow-up, and counseling.
Medical personnel will determine the significance of the exposure and which of the below
described follow-up procedures are necessary.
Post-Exposure Evaluation & Follow-up
Following a report of an exposure incident, the employee and supervisor should refer to
the City’s Exposure Control/Bloodborne Pathogens Program 5.01, specifically “5.6
Employees Shall” and “6.4 Exposure Incidents and Follow-ups.”
A physician should evaluate and certify the significance of the exposure, including its
nature and extent. A medical examination will be performed, and baseline blood samples
should be drawn, with appropriate consents. If the employee declines medical testing,
post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, a waiver (provided by the physician) must be
signed. Efforts should be made to obtain consent from the source individual to obtain a
blood sample and study. If the source individual refuses testing, legal alternatives may
be sought.
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
430 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Law Enforcement Personnel Bloodborne Exposure
California Penal Code §7510(a), (b), and (c) as well as California Health and Safety Code
§121060 and 121060(a)(2) gives law enforcement the right to request blood be drawn
from a source individual after they have been exposed to blood or bodily fluids as defined
by 121060.1.
An officer who believes that they have come into contact with the bodily fluids of an
infected person should report the incident through the completion of the “Report of
Request and Decision for HIV Testing” (State of California, Health and Welfare Agency,
DHS 8459 [11/89]). These forms are available at Occupational Health, or the contract
hospital.
Utilizing this form, the officer, upon seeking medical attention, may request an HIV test of
the person who is the subject of the report. The report should include the names of
witnesses to the incident, names of the persons involved in the incident and, when
feasible, any statements taken. The officer should forward the completed form to
Occupational Health as soon as possible.
Note:
Refer to Manual § 7.1.13.9 Blood Sample Without Consent for further on procedures for
obtaining a blood sample.
If after reviewing Manual § 7.1.13.9 an employee determines the need for a court ordered
blood sample they may utilize the Peace Officer’s Petition and Request for Search
Warrants within attachments A and B of this training bulletin.
EXPOSURES TO AIRBORNE DISEASE OR CONTAGIOUS SKIN DISEASE
Employees who have experienced a possible exposure to an airborne or contagious skin
disease listed on the Department of Health and Human Services Reportable Disease List,
or other serious airborne and/or contagious skin disease not listed, should seek medical
treatment as needed.
WORKER’S COMPENSATION DOCUMENTATION (IOD)
The Department has an obligation to provide employees with medical care for job-
incurred injuries and illnesses. This obligation applies to any communicable disease that
is contracted while the employee is working.
All reported incidents will be managed by the Department safety liaison who will
coordinate with Occupational Health and Workers Compensation to ensure appropriate
medical treatment and follow-up is provided.
Employee Responsibilities
The employee has specific legal and medical responsibilities to the City when claiming
an on-the-job exposure to a communicable disease. For further detail refer to Job-
Incurred Injuries (IOD) § 6.6.15 and Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS)
Training § 6.8.15. When an employee has an exposure, they should:
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
431 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Report any known contact with a carrier of a communicable disease to their immediate
supervisor.
• Report to Occupational health:
− For Bloodborne pathogen exposures, the employee should report immediately
to Occupational Health, the contract hospital or, in an emergency, to the nearest
hospital, to provide a “base line” blood sample to establish that the infection did
not exist prior to the exposure date and to be offered prophylactic treatment.
Refusal to provide a blood sample may result in the City of Long Beach declining
to cover medical expenses as outlined under the Worker’s Compensation Rules
and Regulations.
− For Airborne or contagious skin disease exposures, the employee should
Report to Occupational Health to for screening and relevant treatment options.
Supervisor Responsibilities
The supervisor should:
• Respond to the scene of the employee exposure
• Ensure the exposed employee is transported, without delay, to obtain medical
treatment, if necessary
• Complete all appropriate documentation, including the Employee’s Claim for Workers
Compensation Benefits and related forms
• Notify the Watch Commander
• Bloodborne Pathogen specific exposures:
− Should ensure that the source individual’s status is ascertained, but leave the
actual questioning of the individual to medical personnel
− If the individual’s communicable disease status is not known, and a blood sample
will be needed, follow the procedures outlined in 7.1.13.9 Blood Sample Without
Consent
Watch Commander Responsibilities
The Watch Commander should ensure the incident is documented in the Watch
Commander’s Log.
RECORD KEEPING
The Department should maintain written records of all job-incurred communicable
diseases exposures. The records should be maintained in accordance with federal
regulations, in a secured area with restricted access and in conformance with applicable
privacy laws.
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
Employees should reference the following resources for additional information:
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
432 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Department Manual Section 6.6.15 Injuries - Job-Incurred (IOD)
• Department Manual Section 6.8.15 Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome
(AIDS) – Training
• City Policy and Procedures Exposure Control/Bloodborne Pathogens Program
5.01
• City Injured Workers Procedures Manual
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Business Operations Bureau
Attachment A, Peace Officer’s Petitions
Attachment B, Request for Search Warrants
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
433 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Attachment A - Peace Officer’s Petition
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
(Name of Petitioner,
Name, Address, and Phone Number
of Employing Agency)
___________________________________
___________________________________
(Title of Court)
PEOPLE OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, ) CASE NO.
)
Plaintiff, ) PEACE OFFICER'S PETITION
) FOR ORDER TO TEST
vs. ) ACCUSED'S BLOOD
) (HEALTH & SAFETY CODE)
Defendant. ) (SECTION 121060)
TO THE COURT:
I declare under penalty of perjury that the following is true and accurate to the best of my
knowledge and belief:
1. My name is ________________________________________________________,
(print or type name)
and I am a _________________________________________________________.
(describe status as peace officer)
2. On ____________________________________________________ the defendant,
(date and time)
__________________________________________________________
interfered
(name)
with my official duties by biting, scratching, spitting or transferring blood or other
bodily fluids to me and has been so charged. During the commission of this offense
offense, ________________________________________________________ was
(identify the bodily fluid involved)
transferred from the accused to me.
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
434 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
3.The facts, in brief, supporting my petition and relating to the possible transfer of bodily
fluid are as follows:
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
(Use additional pages if necessary, police reports may be attached.)
4. On the basis of the facts set forth in this petition, and attachments hereto, and the Court
documents in this case and pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 121060, I
request that the Court grant this petition for an order to test the accused’s blood for
medically-accepted indications of exposure to or infection by human
immunodeficiency virus (HIV), HIV-related conditions, and such other communicable
diseases as the Court deems appropriate.
__________________________ _____________________________
(date) (Petitioner’s Signature)
ORDER FOR HEARING
Good cause appearing, therefore, a hearing on the above petition is set for
_______________________ at ____________ in Division/Department ____________,
(date) (time)
of the above-entitled court.
__________________________ _____________________________
(date) (Judge)
______________________________
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
435 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Attachment B - Request for Search Warrant
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
(Name, Address, and Phone Number
of Victim)
___________________________________
___________________________________
(Title of Court)
PEOPLE OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, CASE NO.
)
Plaintiff, ) REQUEST FOR SEARCH
) WARRANT TO TEST
vs. ) DEFENDANT'S BLOOD
) (PENAL CODE SECTION)
Defendant. ) ( 1524.1)
TO THE COURT:
I declare under penalty of perjury that the following is true and accurate to the best of my
knowledge and belief:
1.My name is ________________________________________________________,
(print or type name)
and I am a victim in the above entitled case.
2.The offense(s) charges in this case is (are) _________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
3.During the commission of the charged offense(s), ___________________________
(describe bodily fluid)
was transferred from the defendant, ________________________________, to me.
(Name)
4.[This paragraph applies only if defendant has been held to answer. Otherwise, it should
be stricken.] The defendant was held to answer at a Preliminary Hearing in this case
in_________________________________________ on __________________.
(Court) (date)
5. (This paragraph applies only if the charged offense is a misdemeanor or if a preliminary
hearing has not yet been heard.] The facts, in brief, showing commission of the
charged offense(s) is(are) as follows:
180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis
436 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
(Use additional pages if necessary, police reports and additional affidavits may be
attached.)
6. The transfer of bodily fluid took place in the following manner:
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
(Use additional pages if necessary, police reports and additional affidavits may be
attached.)
7. On the basis of these facts, the Court documents in this case, and other affidavits filed
in support of this request, and pursuant to Penal Code Section 1524.1, by this writing
I request this Court issue a search warrant for the purpose of testing the defendant’s
blood for the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), component of HIV and antibodies
of HIV.
__________________________ _____________________________
(date) (Signature)
ORDER FOR HEARING ON SEARCH WARRANT REQUEST
Good cause appearing, therefore, a hearing on the above request is set for
_______________________ at ____________ in Division/Department ____________,
(date) (time)
of the above-entitled court.
__________________________ _____________________________
(date) (Judge)
437 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 182 – Elder/Dependent Adult Abuse
REVISED September 2022
ABUSE OF AN ELDER OR DEPENDENT ADULT
PURPOSE
The State of California enacted statutes designed to address neglect, sexual, physical,
financial, and emotional abuse of dependent adults and elders. The law requires
mandated reporters to ensure a report is generated in all incidents of suspected physical
abuse against elders and dependent adults. This training bulletin guides officers when
conducting a comprehensive investigation and producing a written report.
DEFINITIONS AND LEGAL STATUTES
The following definitions will assist officers when conducting investigations of alleged
elder and dependent adult abuse:
• Elder or dependent adult abuse - physical abuse, neglect, financial abuse,
abandonment, isolation, abduction, or other treatment with resulting physical harm,
pain, or mental suffering; or the deprivation by a care custodian of goods or services
that are necessary to avoid physical harm or mental suffering. (Welfare and
Institutions Code § 15610.07; Penal Code § 368.5 and 368.6 “Senior and Disability
Justice Act”)
• Dependent adult - any person age 18-64 with physical or mental limitations restricting
his or her ability to carry out normal activities or restricting his or her ability to protect
his or her rights.
• Elder – any person aged 65 or older.
• Fiduciary abuse – taking, secreting, or appropriating an elder/dependent adult’s
money or property by a person having care or custody of the elder/dependent adult.
Also applied to a person standing in a position of trust to the elder/dependent adult,
for any use or purpose not in the due and lawful execution of the trust.
• Health Care Practitioner – a person who engages in acts that are the subject of
licensure or regulation under Division 2 of the Business and Professions Code –
Healing Arts
• Isolation – this can involve false imprisonment or physical/mental constraints, which
prevent an elder/dependent adult from activities including receiving mail, telephone
calls, or contact with family, friends, concerned persons, or other visitors. Isolation
does not constitute abuse when the caretaker is following orders from a doctor as part
of medical care.
• Mental suffering –fear, agitation, confusion, severe depression, or other forms of
serious emotional distress resulting from threats, harassment, or other forms of abuse.
182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse
438 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Neglect – when a person who has care or custody of an elder/dependent adult fails
to provide reasonable care, including failure to assist in personal hygiene, the
provision of food, clothing, or shelter, medical/mental health care, or protection from
safety hazards.
• Physical Abuse – assault, battery, unreasonable physical constraints, prolonged
deprivation of food or water, sexual assault, use of physical/chemical restraints, or use
of psychotropic medication for punishment or beyond what was ordered by a medical
professional.
§15656 WIC or §368(b)(1) PC - a person who knows or reasonably should know that a
person is an elder or dependent adult and who, under circumstances or conditions likely
to produce great bodily harm or death, willfully causes or permits any elder or dependent
adult to suffer, or inflicts thereon unjustifiable physical pain or mental suffering, or having
the care or custody of any elder or dependent adult, willfully causes or permits the person
or health of the elder or dependent adult to be injured, or willfully causes or permits the
elder or dependent adult to be placed in a situation in which his or her person or health is
endangered.
§368(d) PC – a person, who is not a caretaker, who violates any provision of the law
proscribing theft or embezzlement, forgery, or fraud, or who violates §530.5 PC
proscribing identity theft, concerning the property or personal identifying information of an
elder or dependent adult, and who knows or reasonably should know that the victim is an
elder or dependent adult.
§368(e) PC – a caretaker of an elder or dependent adult who violates any provision of
law proscribing theft, embezzlement, forgery, or fraud, or who violates section §530.5 PC
proscribing identity theft, concerning the property or personal identifying information of
that elder or dependent adult.
PROCEDURES
When called upon to investigate suspected elder/dependent adult abuse, the officer
should:
• Arrange emergency medical treatment, if needed
• Notify the Child Abuse Detail if it meets the CART criteria per LBPD manual § 8.7.9.1
• If the elder/dependent adult’s safety is endangered, work with adult protective services
for safe placement.
• If the elder/dependent adult is capable, interview them away from the caregiver
• Examine the elder/dependent adult for injuries.
- Remove clothing and check the body for old or new injuries, have a witness present
during this exam
- Take pictures of injuries, wounds, and bruises
• Make appropriate agency notifications, as described below
• File the appropriate electronic incident reports and upload photographic evidence.
Include complete statements from the victim, suspects, witnesses, and a detailed
description of injuries or living conditions. The officer should describe unusual odors,
unusual or excessive noises, inoperable appliances, lack of food, running water, or
182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse
439 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
other utilities, and any other factors that led them to believe elder/dependent adult
abuse or neglect was occurring.
REQUIRED NOTIFICATIONS
Law enforcement is mandated to notify certain agencies of physical abuse or neglect
involving an elder or dependent adult (§15630 WIC). The following agencies shall be
notified, as soon as practical, in the following circumstances:
• The Department of Public Social Services, Adult Protective Services (APS), must be
notified when the alleged abuse occurred in a private home or hospital.
- 24-Hour Elder Abuse Hotline 1-800-992-1660
• The “Long Term Care Ombudsman Coordinator” must be notified when the alleged
abuse occurred in a long-term care facility.
- Long Term Care Ombudsman Coordinator 1-800-334-9473
• The Los Angeles County Department of Mental Health can be notified when the
alleged abuse occurred in a State Mental Hospital.
- Los Angeles County, Department of Mental Health 213-738-4888 or 800-700-
9996
• The appropriate licensing agency must be notified when a health care practitioner is
accused of committing the alleged abuse or neglect. For example:
- Physicians: Notify State Medical Board online at File a Complaint | MBC (ca.gov)
or by calling 1-800-633-2322
- Nurses: Notify the Board of Nursing online at The Complaint Process (ca.gov) or
by mail at Board of Registered Nursing, Attn: Complaint Intake, PO Box 944210,
Sacramento, CA 94244-2100, or by Fax: (916) 574-7693. For questions contact
916-557-1213
REPORTING
In all incidents of alleged elder/dependent adult physical abuse, an officer should file an
electronic incident report, even if the victim does not desire prosecution. The officer
should also complete the Report of Suspected Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC
341) in all incidents of alleged elder/dependent adult physical abuse. The officer will
forward a copy of the Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341) to the concerned
agency.
The officer should document the required notifications in the electronic incident report and
Section I of the Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341), including the date and
time of the notification and the name and phone number of the contacted official(s). When
APS is the agency contacted, the officer should also document the address of the regional
office that will handle the incident.
The offense listed in the electronic incident report shall reflect the appropriate criminal
violation and the narrative statement should indicate if the incident involved an elder or a
dependent adult.
182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse
440 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
A report is still required, when a specific criminal violation cannot be identified, or the
victim or other facts do not substantiate the informant’s allegations. In such cases, a
Report of Suspected Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341) should also be
submitted.
CONFIDENTIALITY
All reports regarding the suspected abuse of an elder or dependent adult are confidential.
The information in the reports should only be released to individuals with a legal reason
for access; including but not limited to protective service agencies, The Long-Term Care
Ombudsman Coordinator, law enforcement agencies, and a District Attorney in a criminal
prosecution.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
441 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 186 – Communicating with the Deaf or
Hard of Hearing
REVISED June 2012
COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR HARD
OF HEARING
OVERVIEW
It is the policy of the Long Beach Police Department to ensure that a consistently high
level of service is provided to all community members, including people who are deaf or
hard of hearing. LBPD has specific legal obligations under the Americans with Disabilities
Act and the Rehabilitation Act to communicate effectively with people who are deaf or
hard of hearing. To carry out these policies and legal obligations, LBPD instructs its
officers and employees as follows:
• People who are deaf or hard of hearing are entitled to a level of service equivalent to
that provided to any other person.
• The LBPD will make every effort to ensure that its officers and employees
communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard of hearing.
• Effective communication with a person who is deaf or hard of hearing involved in an
incident, whether as a victim, witness, suspect, or arrestee, is essential in ascertaining
what actually occurred, the urgency of the matter, and type of situation.
• The type of aid required for effective communication depends upon an individual’s
usual method of communication, while factoring in the nature, importance, and
duration of the communication. Officers should defer to the expressed choices of the
individual unless:
▪ Another equally effective way of communicating exists, given the
circumstances, length, complexity, and importance of the communication, as
well as the communication skills of the deaf or hard of hearing person.
▪ Doing so would fundamentally alter the nature of the law enforcement activity
in question.
• In many circumstances, oral communication supplemented by gestures and visual
aids or an exchange of written notes will be an effective means of communicating with
people who are deaf or hard of hearing. In other circumstances, a qualified sign
language or oral interpreter may be needed. The more lengthy, complex, and
important the communication, the more likely that a qualified interpreter will be
required for effective communication. For example:
▪ If there has been an incident and the officer is conducting witness interviews,
a qualified sign language interpreter may be required to communicate
effectively with someone whose primary means of communication is sign
language. A qualified oral interpreter may be required to communicate
effectively with someone who has been trained to speech read (read lips).
186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing
442 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
▪ If a person is asking an officer for directions to a location, gestures or an
exchange of written notes will likely be sufficient to communicate effectively.
Information received from people who are deaf or hard of hearing who are involved in
incidents is just as important to the law enforcement process as the information received
from other people. Officers must not draw conclusions about incidents unless they fully
understand, and are understood by all involved, including people who are deaf or hard of
hearing.
ON-CALL INTERPRETIVE SERVICES
The LBPD Communications Section maintains a list of sign language and oral interpreting
services that are available and on-call 24-hours per day and willing to provide interpretive
services.
When it is determined that an interpreter is needed, the requesting officer will obtain
supervisor approval before requesting an interpreter from the Communications Center. If
approved, the supervisor will notify the Watch Commander and ensure that an entry is
made in the Watch Commander’s Log.
Officers should keep in mind that a qualified interpreter must be able to interpret
impartially, therefore a family member, child, or friend of the individual may not be
qualified to render the necessary interpretation because of factors such as professional,
emotional, or personal involvement, or considerations of confidentiality. Additionally, be
aware that a “qualified” interpreter may be certified, but a certified interpreter is not
necessarily “qualified.” For example, the interpreter may not be a good communications
match for the deaf person (e.g., where the deaf person uses Signed English and the
interpreter uses American Sign Language) or for the situation (e.g., where the interpreter
is unfamiliar with law enforcement vocabulary).
TELETYPEWRITER (TTY)/TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICE FOR DEAF PEOPLE
(TDD)
Where warranted, officers must provide persons who are deaf or hard of hearing the
opportunity to place telecommunications calls. These calls may be made using a
teletypewriter (TTY), also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people (TDD).
Officers must also accept telephone calls placed by persons who are deaf or hard of
hearing through the Telecommunications Relay Service.
TTY/TDD devices are located at 400 West Broadway, Main Business Desk, as well as
the 4th and 6th floor jails. The device is portable and officers can request it from the jail
supervisor when it is needed. It will work with pay phones in the station and also with
house phones.
If an officer needs to use a TTY/TDD device with a juvenile subject/suspect, the device
must be used in an area other than booking or the jail because juveniles may not have
contact with adult inmates.
VIDEO RELAY SERVICE (VRS)
186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing
443 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Video Relay Service (VRS) allows a subject to communicate through sign language via
video conferencing, which is relayed by an interpreter to a third party. LBPD has two VRS
systems, one located at 400 West Broadway, on the first floor lobby and one on the 6th
floor men’s jail.
CALIFORNIA RELAY SERVICE (CRS)
The California Relay Service (CRS) enables a person who uses a text telephone device
to communicate by phone with a person who does not use a text telephone device. The
service also works in reverse, allowing a non-text telephone user to call a person using a
text telephone device. A CRS operator can be reached toll-free by dialing 7-1-1.
Additional information about the services provided by CRS is available online at
http://www.ddtp.org/.
People who are deaf or hard of hearing must not be charged for the cost of auxiliary aids
or services needed for effective communication.
TECHNIQUES FOR OFFICERS TO COMMUNICATE EFFECTIVELY
Officers may utilize the following auxiliary aids, when available, to communicate
effectively:
• Gestures
• Visual aids
• Notepad and pen or pencil
• Computer or typewriter
• Assistive listening system or device
• Teletypewriter (TTY) or telecommunications device (TDD)
• Qualified oral or sign language interpreter including VRS and CRS
Officers must review and have a working knowledge of the publication Communicating
with People Who Are Deaf or Hard of Hearing: ADA Guide for Law Enforcement Officers.
This document reviews how officers should communicate effectively in the types of
situations officers will encounter. This publication is available online at
http://www.ada.gov/lawenfcomm.htm.
For further, refer to LBPD policy section 7.3.4.1 COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO
ARE DEAF OR HARD OF HEARING.
REVIEW Responsibility
Support Bureau
444 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 187 – Tactical Communication
REVISED January 2001
TACTICAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to identify the principles of Tactical
Communication. Tactical Communication, formerly Verbal Judo, emphasizes the
mastery of communication by re-directing behavior with words.
Tactical Communication consists of tactics based on the principle of non-resistance and
turning aside aggression to achieve a positive goal. Tactical Communication does not
suggest that physical force is never necessary. Force is sometimes quite necessary and
proper. However, at times, words can be more powerful than force when correctly used.
Talking a combative subject into custody is preferred, rather than having to subdue
him/her with physical force.
Tactical Communication
The principles of Tactical Communication are based on the principles of physical judo,
and some of the tactics of Tactical Communication parallel judo.
• Use language in a professional manner (no profanity). Officers often use profanity as
a bluff or intimidation because they lack confidence in their tactical skills
• Use words to achieve professional objectives
• Stay in contact with the audience, the people you are communicating with
• Keep the communication on target. Don’t allow subjects to change the focus of your
investigation
• Redirection of verbal abuse rather than reacting to verbal abuse
• Achieve maximum efficiency and maximum effectiveness with minimum effort
THE RHETORICAL PERSPECTIVE
Effective rhetoric can be an officer's most useful tool in the field. Loosely defined as
effective communication, rhetoric is exercised numerous times each day by every officer
on duty, whether in civil or criminal matters. An officer's ability to select the appropriate
means of communication, often under surprising and stressful circumstances, is the
measure of good police work and good public relations. The rhetorical perspective
consists of perspective, audience, voice, purpose and organization.
PERSPECTIVE (your point of view, your knowledge)
187 – Tactical Communication
445 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• KNOW what you are talking about
• CONTROL your emotions and biases
Causes of Complaints
The feelings produced by anger are the primary reason complaints are made and lawsuits
filed. Avoid making remarks that will cause this anger and redirect the remarks made
toward you that might cause you to become angry. Categories of conduct that can cause
anger include:
• Embarrassment/loss of dignity
• Belittlement/being talked down to
• Rudeness/discourtesy
• Misunderstanding/lack of explanation
• Verbal abuse/name calling
Action based on these categories may arouse a strong feeling of displeasure and
belligerence. If you do less to stimulate these acts, you will have fewer complaints and
lawsuits. If you redirect the verbal attacks upon you, you will establish more control
through your professionalism and will have a great opportunity to acquire the voluntary
compliance of the person with whom you are dealing.
AUDIENCE (other person)
• READ the audience
• Utilize methods to reduce complaints
• Be considerate to people. This will maximize your investigative and law enforcement
effectiveness
Eliminate anger and negative threats by you and your audience and you will increase or
enhance:
• Consent
• Confessions
• Cooperation
Make people want to give you their voluntary compliance by being considerate,
sympathetic, and by displaying human kindness. Let people retain their personal
dignity and self-respect and you will receive consent, confession and cooperation
in return.
Tactical Explanation
When using force in the field, you must consider not only the effects on the suspect but
also the effects on those who will judge you. Your use of force will be judged not only by
the witnesses but also by the courts. You want both on your side, not against you. You
have to give them reasons to understand why force was needed. You have to convince
them that the use of force was reasonable and unavoidable. This is when you use a
tactical explanation.
187 – Tactical Communication
446 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• When dealing with a combative suspect, make it a point to solicit cooperation. Identify
yourself as a police officer even when in uniform. Use phrases like "Sir, please
cooperate." Or “Sir, you are under arrest, don’t resist.” Repeat these statements both
for the suspect and the audience
• Say them loud enough for witnesses to hear
• If you are in a team arrest situation, you can designate one officer to be the "talker",
soliciting cooperation
• Make sure there is no doubt in anyone's mind that you have made every effort to gain
voluntary compliance with the law and your requests
• Once the arrest is made and the suspect is safely in custody, a short explanation to
the crowd or witnesses about what they just witnessed is usually appropriate
This tactical explanation and solicitation for cooperation is critical when working a
plainclothes assignment. A good example would be a vice-officer arresting a combative
prostitute. Witnesses who would normally be alarmed at this scenario are now provided
the insight as to what is actually occurring.
A tactical explanation may:
• Provide insight to witnesses as to the purpose of your actions
• Keep potentially hostile witnesses from making distorted perceptions
• Help prevent citizen complaints
• Help counter or explain a suspect’s complaint
• Establish good public relations by supporting potentially helpful witnesses
Remember:
• People see the event differently than you do
• Scenes change as you enter the situation
• People watch you perform your duty
• Audiences are made, not found. (You make people what you want them to be)
VOICE (tone, pace)
Voice is part of the total role adopted by professionals and it must be consistent with the
assumed role.
PURPOSE
Obtain your desired results, i.e., cooperation, professionally.
ORGANIZATION
How you want the encounter to unfold, from beginning to middle to end. You order it,
given your "reading" of the encounter and your resulting behavior.
Example: "The Eight Step Vehicle Stop"
• Greeting
• Identify yourself
• State reasons for stop
187 – Tactical Communication
447 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Ask if there is any legal justification for their actions
• Request driver's license
• Request vehicle registration and proof of insurance
• Decision stage (citation or warning)
• Close*
* If you cite the individual, ask him/her to "Drive Safely". If you warn the individual, say,
"Have a good day".
The advantages of employing the principles of the "Eight Step Vehicle Stop" are:
• Creates command presence
• Deflects argument
• Adds assessment time
• Sounds good
• Looks good
CONCLUSION
Practice positive personal contacts and being nice. Limit your stress. Limit your liability.
Increase your effectiveness. Increase your own personal safety.
Researchers have interviewed numerous suspects who have disarmed and killed a police
officer. The primary reason for this was the fact that the officer was verbally abusive
towards the suspect. The officer called the suspect names, and quite simply, made him
angry. Cooperation achieved through professional behavior, without the use of force and
without any one being injured, is the end result and a positive effect of directing behavior
with words.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
448 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 191 – Hazards of Approaching
Suspects
REVISED August 2019
HAZARDS OF APPROACHING SUSPECTS:
POSITION OF INTERVIEW AND POSITION OF ADVANTAGE
APPROACHING A SUBJECT
Police officers must be aware of the daily dangers they might encounter and avoid
complacency while working in a patrol function. The following are the six major hazards
to be aware of when approaching a subject:
• Hands – A subject's hands can telegraph hostile behavior or hold a weapon.
- Where are the subject’s hands?
- Are they in a pocket(s), concealed in an area where they cannot be seen, or are
they where you can see them?
- Is there anything in them?
- Is the subject clenching their fists, preparing to strike?
• Weapons – Complete a visual search of the subject for weapons, and for bulges in
their clothing that may reveal a concealed weapon, or other items in the nearby area
which may be used as a weapon.
- Many common objects may be used as weapons, e.g., pool cues, beer bottles,
chairs, etc.
• Friends, Relatives, Associates – Be aware of and consider anyone in the immediate
area as a potential threat during contacts and/or arrests.
- Friends, relatives, or associates may come to the assistance of a subject.
• Escape Routes – Subjects often have better knowledge of escape routes in their
neighborhood.
- Try to foresee a subject's avenues of escape and plan accordingly.
– For safety, plan your own escape route in the event the situation escalates into an
armed confrontation.
– Use extreme caution when involved in foot pursuits.
– It can be dangerous to split up from a partner and act independently; use caution
and good judgment.
• Footing – Be aware of what you are standing on or near.
- Wet grass, loose asphalt, concrete, curbs, stairs, etc., can cause you to slip or trip
as well as provide an object to be pushed over during a confrontation.
- Be aware of how slippery a surface might be if you must run on or arrest a
combative subject on it.
• Cover and Concealment – Cover is anything you can use as a protective barrier
which can stop a bullet, while concealment is anything that will hide you from view.
191 – Hazards of Approaching Subjects
449 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Cover alone may be the most important factor in keeping you alive if the situation
escalates into an armed confrontation.
- Examples of cover include vehicles, trees, buildings, and brick or cement walls.
- Examples of concealment include shrubs, bushes, doorways, and vehicles.
POSITION OF INTERVIEW
The position of interview is a defensive position that provides you a degree of safety when
interviewing a subject. If you find it is necessary to search, make an arrest, or elicit
cooperation, you can quickly move into a position of physical control.
Consider the following four important aspects of the position of interview:
1) Distance – Remain slightly more than the subject’s arm’s length away.
• This distance gives you time to react to a threat while providing a margin of safety.
• If you can touch the subject, or the subject can touch you, then you are too close.
• You should be able to see the subject from head to toe.
2) Balance – An unbalanced stance makes you vulnerable to being knocked down.
• A balanced stance keeps your weapon away from the subject reducing the
opportunity for a subject to grab or take your weapon.
• The following are components of a balanced stance:
- Even distribution of weight between both legs;
- Knees unlocked to facilitate a quick and efficient movement in any direction;
- Feet positioned shoulder-width apart to provide strength, balance, and mobility
in any direction;
- Lead foot (weak side) should point towards the subject, and the rear foot
(strong side) should point out at a 45 to 60-degree angle, back and away from
the subject.
3) Awareness – Be aware of your surroundings, the subject, and the entire situation;
this can also be referred to as situational awareness.
− Do not narrow your field of vision by focusing only on the subject's face. Using
peripheral vision to detect movement is more effective if you look toward the
subject’s shoulder and chest area.
− Use the sun to your advantage. Maneuver yourself so the sun or bright light is to
your back and shining in the eyes of the suspect.
4) Gun Side Away – Keep your gun side away from the subject.
• Be aware of where your gun is in relation to where a subject(s) is standing;
remember situational awareness.
POSITION OF ADVANTAGE
The position of advantage is a reasonably safe position from which you can make an
arrest or defend yourself. It is a position from which you can quickly and effectively apply
different physical control holds. The following steps will assist you in holding a position
of advantage:
• Position yourself in physical contact with the subject;
• Use a light touch, not a grab; by grasping too firmly, you might provoke an undesired
response;
• Stand to the side and slightly to the rear with your strong side closest to the subject;
191 – Hazards of Approaching Subjects
450 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Utilize a well-balanced stance as described in the interview position;
• Position your strong hand, closest to the subject, open in an "L" shape and placed just
above the subject's elbow;
• Position your weak hand across the subject's lower forearm just above the wrist joint.
CONCLUSION
There is a potential for danger with every contact. The position taken by an officer will
vary according to the type of situation. The most common position used by an officer
during contact is the position of interview. The lowest level of hands-on physical control
is the position of advantage. Memorize the six major hazards; always place yourself in a
position that is to your advantage and avoid complacency, even when a contact looks
routine.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
451 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 192 – Foot Pursuits
REVISED February 2021
FOOT PURSUITS
Foot pursuits may be dangerous to officers, suspects, and the community. Foot pursuits
require sound tactics and officer safety awareness. Officers must continuously balance
the objective of apprehending the suspect with the risk and potential for injury to all
involved.
The Decision to Pursue
Officers may initiate a foot pursuit of any individual the officer reasonably believes is about
to engage, is engaging, or has engaged in criminal activity. Mere flight by a person should
not serve as the sole justification to engage in a foot pursuit.
Prior to engaging in a foot pursuit, do a mental risk assessment; are the risks of engaging
in a foot pursuit worth it compared to the potential danger to the community, and officers
should the suspect go free? Factors to consider in your assessment include but are not
limited to the following:
• Is the suspect armed?
• What was the offense committed?
• Where is the location of the foot pursuit?
• Can the suspect be apprehended later??
The suspect has a distinct advantage, since they choose the route, may live in and be
familiar with the area, may be younger, and more appropriately dressed to run. Officers
should expect and prepare for a potential ambush while in foot pursuit of a suspect; avoid
going over obstacles at the same location as the suspect. The same precautions apply
to rounding building corners. Officers should listen, slice the pie around the corner or
take a quick peek to minimize exposure. While chasing a suspect, officers should watch
for hazards like dogs, clotheslines, sprinkler heads, or other obstacles. It is recommended
partners stay together and avoid splitting up unless extenuating circumstances dictate
capture over officer safety.
Consider setting a perimeter when a suspect flees on foot. When setting up a perimeter,
using the four C's can increase the safety of those involved and the likelihood of
apprehending the suspect. The four C’s include the following:
• Communicate,
• Control,
• Coordinate, and
• Contain.
Communicate
192 – Foot Pursuits
452 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
During a foot pursuit, an officer is responsible for broadcasting the progress in a timely
manner. Prior to broadcasting, collect your thoughts and attempt to control your voice so
your transmission and the information is clear to responding units. It is important to
broadcast the following information if you are in a foot pursuit:
1. Officer’s location,
2. Number and location of suspects,
3. Direction of travel,
4. Suspect description,
5. Type of crime,
6. Where additional units should respond, and
7. Type of weapon, if armed.
Control
Control your own actions to reduce the chance of having an unintentional discharge.
Proper physical control and arrest techniques should be utilized in overcoming a suspect's
resistance. Penal Code 835(a) states officers must use reasonable force.
Control the area to prevent danger to the public and prevent outside help from reaching
the suspect. This includes isolating pedestrian and vehicular traffic until deemed safe by
the Incident Commander. After the foot pursuit and the scene is safe, the path of the
pursuit should be retraced to locate possible discarded evidence.
Coordinate
Consider using the Air Support Unit, the Police Service Dog Unit, and additional
Department resources with the coordination of the perimeter. Assisting units should drive
carefully and immediately begin to think of positioning into a perimeter location. Radio
traffic should be kept to a minimum, if able assist using the KDT.
Contain
Immediate containment using a perimeter is essential to prevent the suspect's escape.
During containment, officers should consider good cover, avenues for escape,
geography, natural barriers, and the number of officers available to assist.
The Incident Commander should continuously assess the totality of the circumstances to
determine continuing the operation.
Officers must be physically and mentally prepared to apprehend a fleeing suspect. Blindly
chasing a suspect can give away any tactical advantage and greatly increases the
likelihood of injury. The safety of all involved greatly increases when officers work as a
team, employ sound tactics, and maintain regular physical exercise.
As you go about your workday, strive to avoid the following ten fatal errors which have
killed experienced officers:
1. Attitude – Maintain a positive will-to-survive attitude. Do not allow outside
distractions to affect your performance.
2. Tombstone Courage – No one doubts you are brave, but in every situation where
time allows, wait for backup.
3. Not Enough Rest – To do your job you must be alert and well rested for your shift.
192 – Foot Pursuits
453 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
4. Taking A Bad Position – There is no such thing as a routine call or stop. Always
position yourself, or your vehicle, so as to have the tactical advantage.
5. Danger Signs – Recognize red flags and danger signs and react to them. Trust
your instincts.
6. Failure to Watch the Hands – It is the hands that kill; control them.
7. Relaxing too Soon – Always be alert and observant. The routine can become life
threatening in seconds.
8. Improper Use or No Handcuffs – Once you have made the arrest, handcuff the
prisoner properly.
9. No Search or Poor Search – There are many places a suspect can hide weapons.
Your failure to search properly will be used against you and other officers.
10. Dirty or Inoperative Weapon – Maintain your equipment in good working order and
be proficient with your shooting skills.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
454 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 195 – Vessel Collision Responses
REVISED February 2022
VESSEL COLLISION RESPONSES
INTRODUCTION
This Training Bulletin provides standardized vessel collision response guidelines set forth
by the State of California, Department of Boating and Waterways (DBAW) and the Long
Beach Police Department.
The jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach extends to the breakwater. The jurisdiction of
the State of California extends approximately three-miles seaward from the mainland and
around the perimeter of each of the oil islands.
RESPONSIBLE DEPARTMENTS
Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) – Uniformed patrol
Long Beach Fire Department – Marine Safety Division (LBFD MSD)
REPORTING GUIDELINES
Vessel Collisions
All recreational vessel collisions are reportable to the Department of Boating and
Waterways, which include any of the following vessels:
• Motorized vessels
• Sailboats or sailboards
• Rowboats or rafts
• Canoes or kayaks
• Any other non-motorized recreational vessel
• Inner tubes only if operated with paddles
• Water skiing/wakeboarding, tubing or kite boards
RESPONSIBILITIES
Long Beach Police Department Personnel
When LBPD personnel are the first to arrive at the scene of a vessel collision, they should
evaluate risk to life, property, and the environment. When the collision is a reportable
collision involving one of the vessels listed above, police personnel should contact the
LBFD MSD.
195 – Vessel Collision Responses
455 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Once notified, the LBFD MSD is responsible to investigate all recreational vessel
collisions and file all necessary reports. When requested, Long Beach Police personnel
may assist with the collision investigation and file any necessary supplemental reports
(e.g., a dead body report, BUI report). All copies of supplemental reports filed should be
given to the handling MSD unit.
LBPD personnel may assist involved parties with an exchange of information when there
is minor property damage and/or no complaint of injury. A report should be taken by MSD
when requested by a citizen.
Marine Safety Division Personnel
The Marine Safety personnel handling the incident should assume the responsibility of all
immediate notifications and coordinating a thorough investigation.
Collisions Outside City Limits
When an incident occurs outside the Long Beach City limits the responding jurisdictional
agency should take over responsibility for the incident. LBPD personnel who respond to
the scene may assist the outside agency if requested to do so and with approval from the
field Sergeant or Watch Commander.
The agencies adjacent to the City of Long Beach are:
• Los Angeles Port Police (Westside)
• US Coast Guard (Outside the Federal Breakwater)
• Orange County Sheriff Harbor Patrol (Eastside on water)
• Seal Beach Police Department (Eastside aground)
• Los Angeles Sheriff Department (Federal Breakwater to three miles seaward)
Incident Command/Assumption of Command
The first unit on scene should assume command as Incident Commander. The Incident
Commander should identify the incident location and coordinate with other responding
units. The Incident Commander should remain in command until relieved by the proper
jurisdictional agency who will be responsible for the investigation and reporting. Under
extenuating circumstances, it may become necessary for the next available responding
unit to assume command.
Incident Scene Assessment
The first unit on scene should identify the search/scene area by the location of the
involved vessels and by witness accounts. Buoys should be used to mark the scene.
The initial scene assessment should be sent to Communications, who will notify LBFD.
Initial notifications are made to facilitate the immediate deployment of search and rescue
units. The initial information needed includes the following:
• Type and number of vessels involved
• Approximate number of victims/survivors
• Latitude/longitude, Global Positioning System (GPS)
• On-scene sea conditions/weather
• Additional resources/agencies needed (e.g., LBPD Dive Team or LBFD Dive Team)
195 – Vessel Collision Responses
456 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
As persons are removed from the water, they should be evaluated for medical treatment.
When necessary, LBFD MSD, will respond to treat and transport any patients to the
nearest designated EMS transfer point. When dispatched to a collision that has occurred
within one-hour of the dispatch time, all efforts should be made to rescue the submerged
victim, determine life status, and render medical aid.
Fatalities
When a subject has been submerged for over one-hour or when death has been
determined, the deceased should not be moved (for further see LBPD Manual § 7.1.21.4
Death Determination).
LBPD will be responsible to contact the LA County Medical-Coroner's office. Recovery
of the body should be at the direction of the LA County Coroner.
NOTE: It may be necessary to move the deceased in the event the scene is unsafe, or
the deceased is creating a hazard. If the deceased must be moved due to an emergent
situation, field personnel may relocate the deceased to a safer location.
The recovery location should be documented using a GPS plotted position. All efforts
should be taken to prevent loss or contamination of any potential evidence.
LBFD Dive Team Response
The LBFD Dive Team should be notified of any search and rescue operations within one
hour of the reported incident.
LBPD Dive Team Response
The LBPD Dive Team should be notified under the following circumstances:
• Evidence collection
• Body recoveries
• Underwater investigations
Preservation of Evidence/Salvage of Wreckage
When responding to vessel collisions, evaluate the circumstances and environmental
factors such as location, weather, and water conditions surrounding damaged vessels at
the collision site.
It may be necessary to tow, impound or secure the damaged vessel to prevent the loss
of the vessel and/or evidence. There may be situations where LBFD, LBPD or the US
Coast Guard is requested to assist with the towing of a vessel.
Hazardous Material (Hazmat)/Environmental Emergencies
When hazardous materials are spilled into the water, notify the Field Sergeant or Watch
Commander and the LBFD. The LBFD routinely makes the appropriate notifications to
the following agencies:
• US Coast Guard, LA/LB
• California Department of Fish and Wildlife
• Offices of Emergency Services (OES)
• City of Long Beach, Health Department
195 – Vessel Collision Responses
457 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• City of Long Beach, City Attorney's Office
Boating Accident Investigation Team (BAIT) Response
BAIT is a joint effort with members of the LBFD, MSD, and the LBPD Collision
Investigations Detail (CID). On all BAIT responses, evidence collection is handled by
responding team members and the LBPD Crime Lab. All necessary precautions should
be taken to preserve the integrity of potential evidence.
BAIT Response
The MSD initiates a BAIT notification when an LBFD MSD Rescue Boat Operator
responds to any of the following incidents:
• Fatality (or death appears imminent)
• Missing person from a vessel
• When any injured party (complaint of pain, or more serious) is transported to a medical
facility by paramedics or private vehicle
• Suspicion of criminal intent involving vessel flooding, swamping, capsizing or sinking
• Suspicion of arson involvement in a vessel fire or explosion
• Substantial damage to a vessel and or property requiring additional investigative
resources
• Hit and Run (Harbor and Navigation Code 656.1 Damage to Property) with or without
suspect information
• City property damage or potential liability to a public agency
BAIT Members
Upon notification the BAIT members should contact the LBFD, MSD, Operations Captain
who will assist in coordinating the response and any additional resources needed. The
on-call detective from LBPD CID may evaluate the information provided by LBFD, MSD
and determine their need to respond. BAIT can assist Marine Safety personnel with the
accident scene and investigation, which may include one or more of the following:
• Interviewing suspects, witnesses and victims
• Arrest/booking of suspects
• Follow-up notifications
• Coordinating with other city departments and outside agencies
• Collection of evidence
• Impound of vessels involved
• Monitoring salvage operation
• Filing supplemental reports
REVIEW REPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
458 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 196 – Vessel Report
REVISED January 2021
VESSEL REPORT
The California Department of Motor Vehicles defines a "vessel" as over eight feet in length
and sail-powered or motor-driven (regardless of length) that is not documented by the
U.S. Coast Guard. A vessel is described as a watercraft used, or capable of being used,
as a means of transportation on water except a seaplane on water. This includes
motorboats, amphibious vehicle/vessels, inflatable vessels with motors, shuttlecraft, jet
skis or wet bikes.
The Vessel/Boat Trailer Report Form (PD Form 2310.010) is used to report theft,
recovery, and storage or impound of boats regardless of value. The officer taking a vessel
report should contact the Auto Stats desk as soon as possible to enter the boat’s
description, registration number, and hull number into the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS).
Information for Stolen Vessel Reports
There are three general types of vessels: power, sail, and other (kayaks, row boats, or
other hand propelled vessels).
Hull types include mono (single hull) or multi (catamarans, trimarans, or other multihull
vessels). The Hull Identification Number (HIN) is the equivalent of a vehicle identification
number (VIN). The HIN number is almost always stamped or engraved on the starboard
(right) edge of the transom (back of the boat).
If the vessel is registered with the DMV, it will have a CF number on the forward part of
the vessel and on the vessel’s certificate of number. If the boat is homemade, the number
issued by DMV will begin with the letters CFZ. Other states will have a different two-letter
prefix.
If the vessel is documented with the United States Coast Guard (USCG), it will have a
documentation number issued by the USCG. This number will be three inches high and
permanently affixed on a bulkhead or other clearly visible interior structural part of the
boat. The USCG documentation number usually begins with one letter followed by six
numbers. Generally, larger vessels or vessels engaged in international travel will be
documented with the USCG issued numbers, while smaller pleasure boats have CF
numbers.
Typically, both documented and non-documented (registered with a CF/CFZ number)
boats have a vessel name. The vessel name is usually located on the stern transom (rear)
196 – Vessel Reports
459 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
of the boat. Most vessels have a home port where the boat is moored. The home port is
usually displayed below the vessel name, on the transom.
Federal law requires that all boat manufacturers place the HIN in an alternate hidden
location on the boat. This hidden location varies by manufacturer.
Authorization for storage: refer to Harbors and Navigation (H&N) Code Section 523,
LBMC Section 16.08.300(D), and VC Section 22651.
Situations Requiring Multiple Reports
If the stolen boat was on a trailer, a separate vehicle report is filed for the trailer. The
vessel and auto theft reports should be cross-referenced with the appropriate
supplemental report numbers. The detective assigned to the case of a stolen boat on a
trailer should investigate both the trailer and vessel reports.
In some cases, a boat may be stolen from a slip that contains a smaller dinghy-type boat
on board. When a vessel is stolen, which has a separate dinghy on board, an additional
vessel report form should be filed if the dinghy has a Hull Identification Number (HIN).
Another possible situation might be a ski boat on a trailer, which also has a rack containing
one or more jet skis. Since a jet ski has its own registration and HIN, a separate vessel
report for each jet ski is filed, in addition to the vessel/trailer report for the ski boat and
trailer.
Officers are reminded that it is not uncommon for boat owners to place small boats in
incorrect dinghy racks or boat slips. Lost vessels should not be entered into the Stolen
Vehicle System, so discretion is required in assessing the situation.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
460 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 197 – Officer & Employee Involved
Traffic Collisions
REVISED June 2002
OFFICER/EMPLOYEE INVOLVED TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
INTRODUCTION
During the year 2001 there were 161 employee involved traffic accidents. In 100 of those
traffic accidents, Department employees were found to be at fault. Employees operating
Department vehicles are charged with a higher degree of responsibility than the general
public, in order to enhance officer/citizen safety and protect public and private property.
Definition of Collision
The Department adheres to the State Wide Integrated Traffic Records System and
complies with the California Highway Patrol Collision Investigation Manual (CIM). The
CIM defines collision: as "an unintentional event that produces damage or injury. The
word injury includes 'fatal injury'. 'Accident' and 'collision' are synonymous,
interchangeable words describing the event.
CAUSE OF COLLISION
The primary factor in a majority of employee involved traffic collisions has been
determined to be inattention on the part of the employee. The collisions have usually
occurred as a result of the employee/driver trying to do more that devoting full attention
to the task of driving, e.g., using the radio, KDT, tunnel vision, or looking at something
other than the roadway. This is not to suggest that employees habitually drive in a
careless manner. It is understood that many job duties require multitasking at times when
it is not always possible to pull over and do one thing at a time.
Most employee involved collisions can be prevented by driving defensively and being
alert to potential danger on the roadway. The most common primary collision factors in
the officer involved traffic accidents were Vehicle Code Sections:
1. 22350 Speed
2. 22106 Unsafe Backing
3. 22107 Turning Movements
Police Vehicle Accidents - (Ref 7.4.1 through 7.4.2 of the Long Beach Manual)
When an employee is involved in a collision, a reporting patrol unit and supervisor shall
be dispatched to the scene. The supervisor shall assume command of all operations at
the scene of a collision and assure that a complete and thorough investigation is
197 – Employee Involved Traffic Collisions
461 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
conducted. The supervisor shall be responsible for the personal delivery of a copy of the
Supervisor's Report of Collision (PD Form SF-48 Rev 3/97) to the Patrol Bureau Deputy
Chief's office before the end of watch. A copy shall also be forwarded to the Division
Commander of the personnel involved and to the Chief of Police. The report shall outline
the following information:
• The names and photo numbers of personnel involved
• The events leading up to the collision
• Injuries to police personnel and other individuals
• Damage to police equipment and other property
• Name of the City Attorney's Office investigator who responded, or statement that the
investigator declined to respond
• Supervisor's conclusion regarding the cause of the collision
The supervisor shall forward the original of the Supervisor's Report of Collision to the
Accident Investigation Detail, along with the original traffic collision report.
The supervisor shall cause the City Attorney's Office investigator to be notified.
Whenever possible, officers shall leave the accident scene "as is" until arrival of the
investigator so that photographs can be taken.
Collisions Failing to Meet Minimum Reporting Criteria
If a collision occurs but there is no damage or injury, no report is required. It is requested
that a memorandum be forwarded to the Accident Investigation Detail Sergeant giving a
brief description of the event. Included shall be the names of all passengers in the
vehicles. The Accident Investigation Detail will have the responsibility of forwarding this
information to the City Attorney's Office.
Use of Safety Belts in Department Vehicles
Employees and all others operating or riding in Department vehicles shall wear the
provided two and three point safety belts. Two-point belts (lap belts) shall be worn when
three-point safety belts are not provided. Employees intending to drive or ride in a
Department vehicle shall ensure that all occupants are using the available safety belts
before the vehicle is operated.
Note: A Department vehicle is any motor vehicle which is under the direction and
control of the Police Department, including privately-owned vehicles used for City
business.
Safety belts shall be adjusted so they provide maximum protection with reasonable
comfort. Safety belts shall be inspected at the start of each watch. Any Department
vehicle equipped with an unserviceable safety belt shall be removed from service.
When a potentially dangerous tactical situation is perceived or anticipated, the safety belt
may be removed to allow adequate time for safe response to the situation. Officer
discretion is allowed per CVC §27315(g). During special operations, the safety belt may
197 – Employee Involved Traffic Collisions
462 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
be removed when, in the belted employee's judgment, wearing the safety belt might
adversely affect the special operation or endanger the employee.
Examples:
• Officers may remove their safety belts immediately prior to arriving at the location of
an emergency call so they can quickly leave their vehicles upon arrival
• Officers may remove their safety belts immediately prior to stopping a suspect.
However, officers should be careful not to remove their safety belts prematurely and
thus risk being without safety belt protection during a pursuit
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
463 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 198 – Parolees
REVISED April 2021
PAROLEES
Parole is the early supervised release of an inmate from state prison. If the inmate
qualifies, they are released to either state supervised parole or county-level supervision
also known as Post Release Community Supervision (PRCS). The type of supervision is
determined by the California Penal Code. The more serious and violent offenders and
high-risk sex offenders are released to state parole and the non-serious, non-violent, and
non-sex offenders are released under PRCS.
Currently, the law requires that parolees be returned to the county that was the last legal
residence of the offender prior to incarceration. A parolee may be returned to another
county if that would be in the best interest of the public. The Division of Adult Parole
Operations (DAPO) carefully reviews each case and makes decisions on an individual
basis.
Offenders released from prison to state supervised parole are assigned a parole agent in
the community where the offender will be living. California Department of Corrections and
Rehabilitation (CDCR) parole offices are located throughout California.
STATE PAROLE CONDITIONS
All prison inmates are assigned a CDCR number for identification purposes while in
custody and while on parole. CDCR numbers consist of six digits, one to two letters of the
alphabet, followed by four to five numbers (e.g., A12345 or AA1234). All California
parolees are in the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) system and a warrant check
will indicate if the subject is on parole via the Supervisor Release File (SRF).
Prior to the release from state prison, adult offenders must sign a CDCR Form 1515
Notice and Conditions of Parole acknowledging a clear understanding of all conditions
while in the community. These conditions serve as both instructions and an agreement
between the State of California and the parolee.
Parolees shall not violate any of the conditions of their parole or violate any law or they
may be subject to arrest and/or incarceration in a county jail or returned to state prison,
pursuant to regardless whether new charges are filed.
Conditions listed on the CDCR Form 1515 include General Conditions as well as Special
Conditions which are imposed based on individual case factors discovered during the
commission of the felony conviction. Special conditions may include no contact with the
victim or victim’s family or that the parolee may not be allowed within 35 miles of the
victim’s actual residence if the crime was a violent felony.
198 – Parolees
464 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
General Conditions of Parole include:
• Forfeiture of the right to extradition hearing if apprehended outside of the State of
California.
• If another jurisdiction has a lodged detainer against the parolee, CDCR may release
custody to that jurisdiction.
• A parolee’s residence and any property under their control are subject to search or
seizure by a probation officer, an agent or officer of CDCR or any Peace Officer at any
time with or without a search warrant, with or without cause.
• Report in advance any changes or anticipated changes in residence or employment.
• Report on the next business day upon release from custody following an arrest.
• Follow all parole agent instructions.
• Shall not travel more than 50 miles from their residence of record without agent
approval.
• Shall not leave the county of legal residence for more than 48 hours without agent
approval.
• Shall not leave the State of California without written approval by the assigned parole
agent.
• Shall not own, use, or have access to firearms, anything that looks like a firearm,
bullets, or any other weapons.
• Shall not engage in conduct prohibited by law.
PAROLE OFFICE
The Adult State Parole Office for Long Beach is located at the Compton Parole Complex
at 322 W. Compton Blvd., City of Compton, and consists of three units:
• Long Beach Unit I
• Long Beach Unit II
• Long Beach Unit IV
Special Services Unit – SSU
The SSU is an additional law enforcement and investigative branch of the Office of
Correctional Safety which supports the CDCR’s investigative and security interests. They
have Special Agents statewide who assist parole agents with surveillance, violent or
armed suspect arrests, and to relocate or apprehend parolees at large. They have
extensive weapons training and are well armed to regain control of halfway houses in
hostage or takeover situations. The SSU is the primary liaison with local, county, state
and federal law enforcement agencies, especially involving prison gang information and
incidents.
PAROLEE ARRESTS AND VIOLATIONS
If a parolee commits a crime, they are automatically in violation of parole. Regardless of
whether the crime is a felony or misdemeanor, a parole hold may be placed in the interest
of public safety at the time of booking. A parolee who does not identify themself or gives
a false name to an officer, is in violation of their parole in addition to Penal Code §148.9(a)
(false ID to a peace officer).
198 – Parolees
465 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Even if a parole violation is not obtained at that time, the parolee should still be arrested
for all law violations. Document all misconduct for parole, including uncooperative
behavior. This thoroughness by the officer may lead to a parole violation in the future.
Parolee at Large (PAL) Warrants
In the event that a parolee’s whereabouts are unknown to the assigned parole agent, an
absconding parole supervision warrant is issued by the Los Angeles County Superior
Court. Once the warrant is signed by the Los Angeles Superior Court, the parolee is
considered a parolee at large (PAL) and is subject to arrest by any peace officer under
Penal Code §3000.08.
Parole Agent Directed Arrests
A parole agent may request an officer to arrest a pre-PAL parolee. This is a parolee who
is wanted by their agent, but there is not a warrant in the system. When arresting a pre-
PAL parolee, the officer must obtain direction from the parole agent to effect an arrest,
and the agent must place a hold on the subject at the time of booking, or as soon as
possible. This includes arrests at the parole office when parole agents request our
assistance with potentially violent or intoxicated parolees, multiple arrest situations,
parolees wanted on a new LBPD case, or other special circumstances. Officers should
respond quickly to these requests before the parolee escapes into the general public.
Parolees and Possession of Weapons
The most common parole violation that affects law enforcement, other than criminal
conduct, is weapons possession or access to weapons by parolees. Conditions of parole
specific to possession of weapons are posted on the CDCR website and are listed to the
parolee as follows:
• Obligation to not be around guns, or anything that looks like a real gun, bullets, or any
other weapons.
• Obligation to not have a knife with a blade longer than two inches except as a kitchen
knife. Kitchen knives must be kept in your kitchen.
• Knives you use for work are allowed only when approved by your parole agent, but
they can only be carried while you are at work or going to and from work. You must
ask for a note from your parole agent that approves carrying the knife while going to
and from work and you must carry the note at all times.
• You must not own, use, or have access to any weapon that is prohibited by the
California Penal Code.
If you contact a parolee in possession of a knife with a blade longer than two inches, place
them under arrest and contact the parole agent to obtain a hold. A photograph of the knife
next to a ruler should be included in the report to show the length of the knife. The knife
should be booked into evidence and the violation of Penal Code §3056 (revocation of
parole) should be charged.
Constructive possession (access) of a weapon for a parolee includes nearby and not only
on their person (e.g., in a vehicle, in a bicycle seat, on the ground by the parolee’s feet
where a parolee may access the weapon or item in question).
198 – Parolees
466 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
PAROLE HOLDS AND NOTIFICATIONS
Officers must be able to articulate the criminal offense that would cause the violation of
parole by the parolee and/or parole violation that would endanger public safety if the
parolee is allowed to remain in the community.
When a parolee is arrested for committing a crime, the open charge should be listed first
and Penal Code §3056 as an additional charge on the booking sheet. After acquiring the
booking number, the arresting officer should call the Sacramento Adult Parole Operations
to request a parole hold. Obtaining a parole hold puts the arrested parolee on a “no bail”
status, preventing them from bailing out of jail. Only a parole agent, parole supervisor or
AOD can authorize a no bail parole violation.
The following information is needed to obtain a parole hold or when a parolee is arrested
on a parole warrant:
1. Name of parolee
2. Date of birth
3. Physical description
4. LBPD agency identification (“LBD0”)
5. Booking desk phone number
6. Arresting officer name and DID number
7. Booking number of arrestee
8. How subject was verified as a parolee (e.g., subject knew his CDC#)
If an arrest on a parole warrant is made, confirm the warrant is valid with Sacramento
Control request the hold be forwarded to the Booking Sergeant. If an officer arrests a
parolee on a warrant other than a parole warrant, the CDCR I.D. Warrants Unit should be
called to request a 3056 PC hold on the parolee.
NOTE: It is important for the officer to ensure the booking desk receives the parole hold,
or the parolee will be released if no other criminal charges are pending.
After Hours Parole Holds
In order to get a parole hold or an abstract of the warrant after 1700 hours and prior to
0800 hours, officers need to contact the CDCR I.D. Warrants Unit and request the Agent
of Record (AOR). If the AOR is unavailable, their immediate parole supervisor may be
contacted via I.D. Warrants. In the event that neither the agent nor the immediate
supervisor can be located, the Parole Administrator of the Day (AOD) may be contacted
to authorize a parole hold. Officers may also request an abstract of the warrant to be
faxed to their agency via I.D Warrants.
PAROLE SEARCHES
Search conditions of a parolee are an additional tool that can be used by officers to assist
in detentions and criminal investigations. When feasible, the Agent of Record for that
specific parolee should be contacted before the search. Penal Code §3067(d) states, “It
is not the intent of the Legislature to authorize law enforcement to conduct searches for
the sole purpose of harassment.”
198 – Parolees
467 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Officer Safety
All contacts with parolees should be considered high risk. Parolees are often in excellent
physical condition and are also aware of police tactics. Some have trained to disarm
police officers or to escape from handcuffs by using paper clips hidden in clothes. When
confronting a parolee, weapon retention should be of utmost concern.
HALFWAY HOUSE
Halfway houses are transitional living facilities for inmates who are allowed to serve the
end of their sentences in the community in lieu of confinement in state prison. There is
strict adherence to the rules of the house including random drug and alcohol testing,
participation in individual and group sessions, check in and out requirements, and curfew
hours. One such facility in Long Beach is the Male Community Re-Entry Program (MCRP)
located at 2233 E. 69th St.
Per CDCR regulations, certain inmates are excluded from entry into a halfway house,
such as gang members, violent offenders, 290 PC registrants, or persons convicted of
narcotic sales, weapons possession, or prior escape.
If an inmate violates an administrative requirement, the inmate may be sent back to state
prison for 120 days and they could be disqualified from future halfway house placement.
If any new law violations occur, the inmate is arrested, sentenced, then turned over to the
prison for additional administrative violation prosecution. Sometimes the House Agent
requests assistance with an arrest, and officers should respond quickly before the inmate
escapes into the general public.
The primary section for arrests from halfway houses is Penal Code §5054.1 (return of
prisoner to prison). If the charge is escape with force from a halfway house, use Penal
§4530(a)(escape).
POST RELEASE COMMUNITY SUPERVISION
PRCS is a form of supervision provided to an offender who has been released from a
California Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation (CDCR) institution to the
jurisdiction of a county agency, pursuant to the Post Release Community Supervision Act
of 2011.
Penal Code §3451 states that all persons released from prison on or after October 1,
2011, after serving a prison term for a felony and, if eligible, upon release from prison
shall be subject to supervision provided by a county agency.
Once released to PRCS, the offender is discharged from CDCR which no longer has
jurisdiction of the offender. The offender is then under the supervision of the assigned
county agency.
CONCLUSION
Field officers come into contact with parolees in the field on a daily basis. Knowledge of
parole procedures and parolee conditions of release is instrumental in detentions and
198 – Parolees
468 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
arrests of parolees stemming from field criminal investigations. Law enforcement officers
must remain vigilant to locate and monitor parolees as potential repeat offenders in the
community. When an officer contacts a parolee who is not arrested, a completed Field
Interview Card should be turned in so the information is documented.
AUDIT RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
469 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 200 – Mandatory Helmet Law
REVISED May 2002
MANDATORY HELMET LAW
INTRODUCTION
The California Mandatory Helmet Law applies to all persons who drive or ride on a
motorcycle, motor-driven cycle or motorized bicycle while on the highways of the State of
California.
THE LAW
• §27803 CVC (a) A driver and any passenger shall wear a safety helmet meeting the
requirements established pursuant to §27802 when riding on a motorcycle, motor-
driven cycle, or motorized bicycle
– (b) It is unlawful to operate a motorcycle, motor-driven cycles, or motorized bicycle
if the driver or any passenger is not wearing a safety helmet as required by
subdivision (a)
– (c) It is unlawful to ride as a passenger on a motorcycle, motor driven cycles, or
motorized bicycle if the driver or any passenger is not wearing a safety helmet as
required by subdivision (a)
– (d) This section applies to persons who are riding on motorcycles, motor driven
cycles, or motorized bicycles operated on the highways
– (e) For the purpose of this section, "wear a helmet" or "wearing a helmet" means
having a safety helmet meeting the requirements of §27802 on the person's head
that is fastened with the helmet straps and is of a size that fits the wearing person's
head securely without excessive lateral or vertical movement
An approved helmet is a motorcycle helmet that meets the United States Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
standards meet or exceed DOT standards. Snell Foundation standards meet and exceed
both DOT and ANSI standards. To be legally sold in California, all motorcycle helmets
must meet DOT standards.
DEFINITIONS
The legal definition of a motorcycle can be found under California Vehicle Code sections
400, 405, and 406. The definitions are as follows:
• §400CVC - A Motorcycle - is any motor vehicle other than a tractor having a seat or
saddle for the use of the rider and designed to travel on not more than three wheels
in contact with the ground and weighing less than one thousand five hundred pounds,
200 – Helmet Law
470 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
except that four wheels may be in contact with the ground when two of the wheels are
a functional part of side car
• §405CVC - A Motor-Driven Cycle - is any motorcycle with a motor which produces
less than 15 gross brake horsepower, and every bicycle with a motor attached. A
motor-driven cycle does not include a motorized bicycle, as defined in §406CVC
• §406CVC - A Motorized Bicycle or Moped - is any two or three wheeled device
having fully operative pedals for propulsion by human power, or having no pedal if
powered solely by electrical energy, and an automatic transmission and a motor which
produces less than 2 gross brake horsepower and is capable of propelling the device
at a maximum speed of not more than 30 miles per hour on level ground.
• §407.5CVC (a) A Motorized Scooter - is any two-wheeled device that has handle
bars, is designed to be stood or sat upon by the operator, and is powered by an electric
motor that is capable of propelling the device with or without human propulsion. For
purposes of this section, a motorcycle, as defined in §400, a motor-driven cycle, as
defined in §405, a motorized bicycle or moped, as defined in §406, or a toy, as defined
in §108550 of the Health and Safety Code, is not a motorized scooter
− (b) A device meeting the definition in subdivision (a) that is powered by a source
other than electrical power is also a motorized scooter
NOTE: In order to operate a motorized scooter the operator, among other
requirements, must wear an approved bicycle helmet. Failure to do so is a violation
of §21235(c)CVC. The bicycle helmet must meet ANSI, Snell Foundation, or
American Society for Testing Materials Standards.
CONCLUSION
Since California initiated the Helmet Law in 1992, the instances of death or severe head
trauma to motorcycle riders have dramatically declined. Continued support by citing
violators will allow this trend to continue, resulting in lessening of head injuries and its
economic impact upon society.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
471 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 201 – Recognizing and Handling
Alzheimer’s Victims
REVISED December 2001
RECOGNIZING AND HANDLING ALZHEIMER'S VICTIMS
INTRODUCTION
Field officers are frequently confronted with persons who suffer from a variety of mental
illnesses. Often times, persons who are suffering from Alzheimer's Disease demonstrate
behavior that may be misinterpreted as criminal in nature, or dismissed as some other
form of mental illness. This Training Bulletin is intended to assist the field officer in
correctly identifying Alzheimer's patients, thus enabling the officer to provide appropriate
assistance to those in need.
BACKGROUND
Alzheimer's Disease affects a person's short-term memory. Because of this, the person
may be able to easily recall information from years past, but may not recall current
information such as his or her address. Alzheimer's patients exhibit a variety of behaviors
that may be construed as violations of the law. With a little careful questioning, an officer
should be able to develop sufficient information to ascertain that the person's behavior
was a manifestation of his/her illness, rather than a criminal act. Alzheimer's normally
affects persons 65 years of age or older, but has been known to manifest itself as early
as age 40. Below are common behaviors associated with Alzheimer's and suggestions
for dealing with persons you encounter who suffer from the disease.
PROCEDURES
Wandering: Wandering may occur at any time of the day, however it is most common
after dark. Alzheimer's sufferer's often become lost, even in front of their homes. Since
short-term memory is affected, they may forget where they are and where they are going.
Often times, the Alzheimer's patient will remember an address and phone number from
years past, but will not realize that they have since moved. Perhaps motivated by
embarrassment or fear, Alzheimer's victims will often make up stories to explain their
behavior, or will become agitated and refuse your assistance.
Should you be unable to determine the identity of the Alzheimer's sufferer or return
him/her to their residence, there are a few options or resources available to assist in this
effort. The Alzheimer's Association, a volunteer group, has a 0830 to 1730 hours
information and referral number (323) 938-3370. This group has the names of missing
Alzheimer's sufferer and makes arrangements for public broadcasts giving descriptions
and requesting the public's help in locating persons reported to them.
201 – Alzheimers Victims
472 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Alzheimer's Disease is listed as a mental disorder under the Diagnostic and Statistical
Manual of Mental Disorders. This, combined with facts and observations that would
indicate the person is gravely disabled, will allow officers to file an application for a 72-
hour hold under 5150 W&I Code.
Unusual Sexual Behaviors: Alzheimer's may be a factor in inappropriate public sexual
behavior or indecent exposure. Patients may remove clothing, if too warm, or may urinate
in public. When confronted with situations of this nature, it is best to avoid rebuking or
lecturing the subject. If possible, distract the individual with dialogue or find a task to keep
him/her occupied.
Shoplifting: Alzheimer's patients may forget to pay for merchandise, or that payment is
required. When accused of shoplifting, Alzheimer's sufferers may accuse the store staff
of stealing from them. Picking items up and carrying them about is a common behavior
of Alzheimer's victims. When responding, attempt to include the Alzheimer's victim in
your discussion with the store personnel. Speak slowly, taking things one step at a time.
Driving Under the Influence: Many symptoms of alcohol intoxication and Alzheimer's
are similar. Both conditions diminish brain function, which may manifest itself as
confusion, disorientation or a blank facial expression. If the odor of alcohol is not present,
consider Alzheimer's as a possible explanation for the circumstances. Check for a
medical alert bracelet and if the driving is erratic, notify the patient's family if at all possible.
Consider having the individual reevaluated by the Department of Motor Vehicles for
his/her driving privilege.
Other Behavior Typical of Alzheimer's: Victims may frequently exhibit confusion and/or
disorientation, rendering them unable to mentally process what is going on to sort out the
obvious. Anger and agitation may manifest themselves, as well as a difficulty in judging
the passage of time. Alzheimer's victims may perceive their family members as strangers
or accuse them of theft.
Short-term memory is affected while long-term memory may remain intact. Alzheimer's
victims may have difficulty processing language normally, resulting in the expression of
incomplete thoughts or repetition of phrases over and over. Often the person suffering
from Alzheimer's will forget the name of common objects or family members and friends.
If the subject recognizes this they may try to cover for themselves by getting you to say
the name of the person or object by saying things like "you know what (or who) that is?"
Hints on Handling Alzheimer's Victims: Keep the tone of your contact as subdued and
non-threatening as possible. Avoid overloading the subject with too much information or
too many questions at a time. If possible, avoid the use of restraints (remember to keep
safety in mind). When speaking to persons you suspect are affected by Alzheimer's,
speak slowly, in a low tone of voice and employ simple language. Identify yourself and
inform the subject why you are contacting him/her. Ask only one question or give only
one direction at a time.
There should be orientation questions asked of the subject, such as:
201 – Alzheimers Victims
473 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Do you know what city you are in?
• What day is it?
• What month is it?
• What year is it?
• Who is the president?
• If we left right now, what would you do?
Try to keep the conversation in a positive light; avoid scolding or chastising. Avoid
instructions that require more that one action in sequence and attempt to keep
distractions to a minimum. Most importantly, keep the contact friendly. Maintain eye
contact while conversing and bear in mind that you are dealing with an individual who is
in need of your professional help.
If the person's home is found, questions should be asked if arrangements are being made
for in-home or long term care. There also may be a need for the family or care facility to
get the patient some type of identification bracelet that is not easily removed so that they
can be identified if found. As police officers we may not be able to mandate these
suggestions but we can definitely use our influence to help safeguard Alzheimer's patients
and make our jobs easier in the future.
A MET unit may also be able to provide assistance if the beat unit or dispatched unit has
difficulty finding the patient's home or if the patient is considered gravely disabled or a
danger to themselves or others.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
474 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 204 – Field Shotgun Inspections
REVISED February 2002
Reviewed January 2020
FIELD SHOTGUN INSPECTION
BACKGROUND
In the past, officers have checked the operation of the shotgun firing pin by disassembling
the barrel and dry firing the gun to feel if the firing pin functioned properly. Dry firing of a
shotgun, with the barrel on or off, may cause firing pin failure, which cannot be detected
until inspected by the Department Armorer. Officers shall not dry fire shotguns.
The appropriate method (proper technique) to field check shotguns is as follows:
• Check the shotgun safety. Place safety in the on (safe) position.
• Check the chamber visually and confirm it is empty. This is accomplished by activating
the slide release and pulling the slide halfway to the rear. If loaded, remove the round
by slowly pulling the slide far enough to the rear to clear the round. If done slowly,
this will not eject a round from the magazine into the port.
• Push the follower (loading port) up into the chamber area as the slide is pulled fully to
the rear. One round will eject out the bottom of the loading port. Remove the
remaining rounds by pressing the right shell latch inside the loading port. Do not rack
each round through the chamber to clear the shotgun.
• With an empty shotgun and the slide to the rear, look down the barrel and check for
obstructions.
• Place the slide in the forward position with the safety on and pull the trigger. If the
weapon fires (audible click), the safety is not functioning. Return the shotgun to the
Department Armorer at the range.
• To check the smoothness of the slide operation, hold down the slide release while
operating the slide. Do not fire the weapon and rack the slide for this check. Repeated
dry firing may cause weapon failure.
• Recheck the safety. With the safety in the on (safe) position, reload the shotgun.
Place four shotgun rounds (00 buck) into the magazine tube, leaving the chamber
empty. The internal hammer shall be in the cocked position making it necessary
to use the slide release to operate the shotgun.
CONCLUSION
The aforementioned shotgun inspection technique is intended to ensure that shotguns
will function properly when required.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
475 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 205 – Proper Handling of Prisoners
Property
REVISED July 2000
PROPER HANDLING OF PRISONER PROPERTY
PURPOSE
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide accountability for prisoner’s property
when booked into the jail.
Booking
Upon arrival in booking, every officer transporting a prisoner will collect any property
belonging to that prisoner. Each officer shall confirm that they have included any property
that may have been retained in the field, together with property removed from the
prisoner, and place into the plastic trays provided in booking.
After completing the booking work sheet, the searching officer shall note each item in the
plastic tray on the booking work sheet under the title of prisoner property. These items
shall then be placed into a clear plastic bag.
Search and Property Inventory
• It is recommended that only one officer begin and complete the searching procedure
in order to avoid any missed areas
• All property removed from a prisoner shall be noted on the booking worksheet
• All loose property will be placed in the provided, clear plastic bag. Property that does
not fit into the clear plastic bag will be sent to fifth floor property room with the
appropriate property report being filed and appropriate notation made on the booking
worksheet
• All shoelaces shall be removed from the prisoner’s shoes and placed into the clear
plastic bag
• No lighters, matches, open packs of cigarettes or tobacco products shall be placed in
the plastic bag (unopened, sealed packs of cigarettes or tobacco products are the only
exception)
• All batteries shall be removed from pagers and cell phones, they should not just be
turned off
• Jewelry shall be identified on the booking sheet and placed in the special envelopes
provided
• All medication shall be placed into the plastic bag, NO medication, prescription or
otherwise is to be brought to the jail
• Special items such as collectible coins, currency, food stamps or checks shall be
placed into the plastic bag with the loose property
Cash
205 – Proper Handling of Prisoner’s Property
476 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• All money belonging to the prisoner shall be placed into the provided envelope after
being counted by the searching officer
• The searching officer shall ask the prisoner if he/she has any money concealed on
their person
• The searching officer shall complete the required information located on the outside
of the envelope and then give the envelope to the booking supervisor
• The booking supervisor shall ensure that the cash count is accurate, initial and seal
the envelope with clear tape
• The booking supervisor shall return the envelope to the searching officer who will
retain it until the envelope is sealed into the plastic bag
• The searching officer will ensure that the prisoner’s booking number is written on the
cash envelope
• The searching officer must also write the amount of cash on the booking sheet and be
sure all counts listed are the same on the booking worksheet, on the cash envelope
and on the final booking face sheet
Sealing the Bag
• All loose property, including the jewelry envelope, will go into the lower portion of the
plastic bag
• The pink copy of the completed booking slip shall be placed in the lower portion of the
bag in a manner that the prisoner’s name, booking number and money deposited, can
be read. The lower portion will be sealed
• The cash envelope shall be placed in the top portion of the bag and sealed separately
from the loose property
• It is the booking supervisor’s responsibility to ensure that the money is counted
properly and that the plastic bag is sealed correctly before the bag is placed into the
safe
Any property that does not fit into the plastic bag, for example, large back packs, large
purses, etc., will be inventoried and placed into the fifth floor property room. The correct
property form will be filed with a receipt copy being placed in the plastic bag to ensure
that the prisoner can locate his/her property when released.
When a prisoner’s bicycle is placed into property, a property report will be filled out, a
copy attached to the bike and a copy placed in the prisoner’s plastic bag. Bicycles do not
remain at the station; they are taken to the bicycle warehouse. Paperwork indicating the
bicycle has been stored is necessary for the subject to locate the bike when he/she is
released.
Any property or money that is kept as evidence also needs to be indicated on the booking
sheet.
It is the responsibility of every searching officer to be certain prisoner’s property is
correctly collected and stored.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Support Bureau
477 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 211 – Unloading Firearms
REVISED September 2004
Reviewed January 2020
UNLOADING FIREARMS
INTRODUCTION
This Training Bulletin shall provide officers with knowledge relative to the safe unloading
operations for the most common types of weapons they may encounter.
A loaded firearm can be an instrument of death, if not handled carefully. Accidents with
firearms are always the result of neglecting the basic rules of firearms safety. Officers
should never attempt to unload an unfamiliar firearm. Approached in a
knowledgeable and responsible manner, firearms can be handled in a safe manner.
OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Loaded firearms recovered in the field should not be transported until every effort has
been made to unload and render the firearm safe. Officers who find firearms they are
unfamiliar with have the responsibility of:
• Requesting assistance from another officer who is familiar with that firearm; i.e. an
officer who has completed firearm safety classes, specialized training with firearms,
etc.
• Calling the range during business hours for assistance, phone # (562) 570-5974
There are rare circumstances when a LOADED FIREARM cannot be unloaded in the
field, and the range is closed. The following procedures shall apply:
• The officer shall notify the range expert on-call to respond to the scene
(Communications center will have the list of experts)
• In the event no experts from the list are available: notify the on-call Property
supervisor to respond to the station to receive the firearm into Property
• During a Homicide Investigation, in the unlikely event a loaded firearm needs to be
transported, it will become the responsibility of a Homicide Detective
Semi-Automatic Handgun (cocked or uncocked)
Handle the firearm in a safe location and keep it pointed in a safe direction toward a
surface that will absorb an accidental discharge; i.e. grass, dirt, sand.
• Hold firearm in your strong hand, keeping your finger clear of the trigger
211 – Unloading Firearms
478 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Remove the magazine by depressing the button on the side of the frame or grip, or
release the lever on bottom of the magazine well. Do not unload the magazine. Keep
the loaded magazine separate from the firearm, inside a paper envelope or bag. Do
not mark the magazine. NOTE: The magazine is the most frequent location where
fingerprints are found
• Grab the rear portion of the slide (which is the upper moveable portion) with your weak
hand and pull the slide straight back quickly and firmly to eject any ammo in the barrel.
(Visually check the chamber for any stuck rounds)
Properly package the removed round. Make a note on the package to identify which
chamber the round came from for later ballistics analysis. If firearm has a slide stop on
the left side, push the slide stop up and this will keep the slide open. If the slide is open
and a round is still in the chamber, keep the slide open and tilt the firearm up to shake it
out. (Refer to Training Bulletin 48 "Packaging of Evidence")
Some assault type firearms (Mac 10-11, Tech 9) may have a fixed firing pin. If the bolt
is open and the magazine is in place when the trigger is pulled, the firearm will
discharge. This is referred to as an open bolt system.
REVOLVER HANDGUN
Handle the firearm in a safe location and keep it pointed in a safe direction toward a
surface that will absorb an accidental discharge; e.g., grass, dirt, sand.
• Mark the position of the chamber with a pencil to the left and right of the chambered
round (see example below). This allows ballistics experts to reconstruct the exact
position of the cylinder
• To open the cylinder push the cylinder release button (forward) for Smith/Wesson and
to the (rear) for Colt models
• Carefully remove the rounds (both live and expended) systematically and package
them individually in coin envelopes or paper, marking what position they were in the
cylinder. Package and identify the rounds removed from the cylinder for later ballistics
analysis (see example below)
EXAMPLES:
Illustration A Illustration B
Top break-open type revolvers have latches located in or near the rear sight. Some types
of small caliber revolvers require the cylinder pin be taken out to remove the cylinder.
211 – Unloading Firearms
479 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Some single action revolvers have a loading gate on the right side, rear of the frame (Colt
and Ruger). By opening the loading gate, the cylinder can be rotated to unload the
chambers. On other models, the hammer must be in the half-cocked position to rotate
the cylinder. Unload the chambers by rotating the cylinder with the barrel in an upward
position. Some models have an ejector rod that must be pulled or removed to open the
cylinder.
RIFLE/SHOTGUN (Military and Civilian)
There are several different types of rifles/ shotguns which may have a detachable or non-
detachable magazine; e.g., single shot, break open, bolt action, semi-auto, pump, lever
action.
Single-Shot/Break-Open Rifle/Shotgun
The lever will usually be located to the rear of the hammer, which swings right or left.
Moving this lever will allow the rifle or shotgun to be broken open and the round removed.
If the hammer is cocked the firearm will engage a safety mechanism to prevent the firearm
from opening. The hammer must be Safely disengaged to allow the firearm to be opened.
Bolt Action Rifle/Shotgun
If bolt-action rifle/shotgun does not contain any magazine well, the mere opening of the
bolt (usually in a up and back motion) should remove any rounds from the chamber. If
the firearm contains a magazine well, manually remove the rounds from the magazine
leaving the bolt open. DO NOT cycle the bolt to remove the rounds.
If the bolt will not open, locate the safety mechanism and move it. This may unlock the
bolt. Some firearms have a button in front of the trigger guard to release the magazine
floor plate, which allows the rounds to fall out.
Semi-Automatic Rifle/Shotgun
Most semi-automatic firearms contain a detachable magazine. Remove the magazine
first by locating and depressing the magazine release button or lever. Operate the
cocking handle and or bolt to remove any live rounds from the chamber.
Pump-Type Rifle
Put the safety on. Remove the magazine, if present. Depress the slide release button,
slowly open the slide, remove any live rounds. Rifle .22 Caliber: If the rifle has a
magazine tube under the barrel or in the stock, put the safety on, remove the magazine
tube from the rifle and tilt the weapon down if the magazine tube is under the barrel, or
up if the magazine is in the stock. Push the slide release, if present. Slowly open the
slide and remove any live rounds. Exposed Hammer-type .22 Caliber: You must lower
the hammer on the firing pin to operate the slide-action.
Pump-Type Shotgun
Put the safety on. Depress the release button, pull the slide back (to rear) and remove
any live ammunition. Leave the bolt open. Depress the shell carrier to the up position.
Depress the shell stop, which is located inside the loading port, and remove the
ammunition (870 Remington). If unable to remove the ammunition from the magazine
tube in this manner, ensure the safety is on and operate the slide manually, removing any
live ammunition.
211 – Unloading Firearms
480 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Lever-Action Rifle
Some lever-action rifles have a detachable magazine that can be removed by depressing
the magazine release button. Other models may have a tubular magazine underneath
the barrel.
Some lever action firearms will have a detachable magazine that can be removed by
depressing the magazine release button. Others may have a tubular magazine
underneath the barrel.
On lever actions with removable magazines, the magazine must first be removed. Pull
the lever down, which will open the bolt and remove any rounds from the chamber. Rifles
that do not have a detachable magazine require the lever to be returned to the up
position. Re-open the bolt by pulling down the lever to expose any other live rounds lying
on top of the shell carrier. Lift the rounds out by hand and continue this process until
the firearm is empty.
REVIEW Responsibility
Support Bureau
481 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jerome Lance, Chief of Police
212 – Notification to School
Authorities of the Arrest of School
Employees
REVISED September 2001
NOTIFICATION TO SCHOOL AUTHORITIES OF THE ARREST
OF SCHOOL EMPLOYEES
PURPOSE
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to establish policy and procedure relative to the
notification of school authorities when a school employee is arrested for specific offenses.
California State Law requires that school authorities be notified both verbally and in writing
when a school employee is arrested for certain offenses.
POLICY
It is the responsibility of the Police Department, upon the arrest of a school employee for
any of the following offenses, to see to it that appropriate notifications to school authorities
are made. (Authorizing codes and specific offenses begin on page 3)
• When a school employee is arrested for a sex offense as defined in Education Code
§44010
• When a school employee is arrested for a sex offense which requires registration
(290 PC)
• When a school employee is arrested for an offense which requires registration as a
substance abuser (11590 HS)
• When a school employee is arrested for drug paraphernalia as it relates to LSD
(11364 HS)
Notification requirements apply to the following school employees (§291 PC):
• Employees of any public school in the state: both teachers and non-teachers
• Teachers employed in any private school in the state
• Teachers employed in any community college district in the state
Patrol Officer Responsibilities
• Notify Booking Sergeant
• Note in the arrest report that the arrestee is a school employee and note the name of
the sergeant notified
Booking Sergeant Responsibilities
• Notify the Watch Commander
• If the arrest occurred during normal business hours the Booking Sergeant will
complete the telephonic notifications as follows:
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
482 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• If the school employee is a teacher or non-teacher in any of the public schools of this
state, the booking sergeant shall immediately notify the superintendent of schools of
the school district employing the teacher or non-teacher
• If the individual arrested is employed as a teacher in any private school of this state,
the booking sergeant shall immediately notify the private school authorities employing
the teacher
• If the school employee is a teacher in any community college district in the state, the
booking sergeant shall notify the superintendent of the community college district
employing the teacher. (The list of persons to be notified begins on page 6)
Watch Commander Responsibilities
• Make the necessary Watch Log entries and notify the Duty Chief if necessary
Handling Detective Responsibilities
• Make appropriate telephonic notifications for arrests that occurred outside of normal
school business hours
• Make appropriate notifications if at any time during the investigation it becomes known
that the individual arrested is a school employee and notification has not yet been
made
• If the school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state, the
handling detective shall notify, in writing, the Commission for Teacher Credentialing
and the superintendent of schools in the county where the person is employed
• If the school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state, the
handling detective shall notify, in writing, the governing board of the school district
employing the person
• If the individual arrested is employed as a teacher in any private school of this state,
the handling detective shall notify, in writing, the private school authorities employing
the teacher
• If the school employee is a teacher in any community college district, the handling
detective shall notify, in writing, the Office of the Chancellor of the California
Community Colleges
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
483 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
AUTHORIZING CODE SECTIONS
Penal Code §291
Notice of Arrest of Public School Employee
• Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in
section 290 or in subdivision 1 of section 261, or section 44010 of the Education Code
of any school employee, shall do either of the following:
• If the school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state he /she
shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the school
district employing the teacher and shall immediately give written notice of arrest to
the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing and to the superintendent
of schools in the county wherein the person is employed.
• If the school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state,
he/she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the
school district employing the non-teacher and shall immediately give written notice
of the arrest to the governing board of the school district employing the person.
Penal Code §291.1
Notice of Arrest of Private School Teacher
• Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in
Section 290 of any person who is employed as a teacher in any private school of this
state, shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the private school
authorities employing the teacher. The sheriff or chief of police shall immediately
notify by telephone the private school authorities employing such teacher.
Penal Code §291.5
Notice of Arrest of Community College Instructor
• Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in
Section 290 or in subdivision (1) of Section 261 of any teacher or instructor employed
in any community college district shall immediately notify by telephone the
superintendent of the community college district employing the teacher or instructor
and shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the Office of the Chancellor
of the California Community Colleges.
Health and Safety Code §11591
Notification to School Authorities of Arrest of School Employee
• Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the controlled substance
offenses enumerated in Section 11590, (Drug offenses requiring registration) or
Section 11364, insofar as that section relates to paragraph (12) of subdivision (d) of
Section 11054, (Paraphernalia related to LSD) of any school employee, shall do either
of the following:
• If such school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state he
/she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the
school district employing the teacher and shall immediately give written notice of
arrest to the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing and to the
superintendent of schools in the county wherein the person is employed.
• If such school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state,
he/she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
484 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
school district employing the non-teacher and shall immediately give written notice
of the arrest to the governing board of the school district employing the person.
• If such school employee is a teacher in any private school of this state, he/she
shall immediately notify by telephone the private school authorities employing such
teacher and shall give written notice of the arrest to the private school authorities
employing the teacher.
Health and Safety Code §11591.5
Notice to Community College Authorities of Arrest of Instructor
• Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the controlled substance
offenses enumerated in Section 11590, (Drug offenses requiring registration) or
Section 11364, insofar as that section relates to paragraph (9) of subdivision (d) of
Section 11054, (Paraphernalia related to Diethyl tryptamine, an hallucinogenic
substance) of any teacher or instructor employed in any community college district
shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of the community college
district employing the teacher or instructor and shall immediately give written notice of
the arrest to the Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges.
CODE SECTIONS REQUIRING NOTIFICATION
290 PC – Registration of Sex Offender
261(a)(1) PC – Rape of mentally, developmentally or physically disabled person
11590 HS – Registration of Controlled Substance Offenders
11364 HS – Possession of drug paraphernalia as it relates to LSD
Education Code §44010
“Sex Offense” means any one or more of the offenses listed below:
• Any offense defined in Penal Code Sections 220, 261, 261.5, 262, 264.1, 266, 266(j),
267, 285, 286, 288, 288a, 289, 311.3, 311.4, 313.1, 647(b), 647.6, or former Section
647a, subdivision (a), (b) or (c) of Section 243.4 subdivisions (b), (c) and (d) of section
311.2, or subdivision (a) or (d) of Section 647
• Any offense defined in Section 314 of the Penal Code committed on or after
September 15, 1961
• Any offense involving lewd and lascivious conduct under Section 272 of the Penal
Code committed on or after September 15, 1961
• Any attempt to commit any of the above-mentioned offenses
• Any offense committed or attempted in any other state which, if committed or
attempted in this state, would have been punishable as one or more of the above-
mentioned offenses
• Any conviction for an offense resulting in the requirement to register as a sex offender
pursuant to section 290 of the Penal Code
• Commitment as a mentally disordered sex offender
290 PC
(a)(1)(A) Every person described in paragraph (2), for the rest of his/her life while residing
in California, shall be required to register with the Chief of Police of the city in which he/she
is residing.
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
485 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The following persons shall be required to register pursuant to paragraph one:
Paragraph (2)
Any person who, since July 1,1944, has been or is hereafter convicted in any court in this
state or in any federal or military court of a violation of section 207 or 209 committed with
intent to violate section 261,286,288,288a,or 289, section 220, except assault to commit
mayhem, Section 243.4 paragraph (1) (2) (3) (4) or (6) of subdivision (a) of section 262
involving the use of force or violence for which the person is sentenced to the state prison,
Section 264.1, 266, 266c,subdivision (b) of 266h subdivision (b) of Section
266I,266j,267,269,285,286,288,288a,288.5,or 289, subdivision (b)(c) or (d) of section
311.2, Section 311.3, 311.4, 311.10, 311.11, or 647.6, former Section 647a, subdivision
(c) of Section 653f, subdivision 1 or 2 of Section 314, any offense involving lewd or
lascivious conduct under section 272, or any felony violation of Section 288.2; or any
person who since that date has been or is hereafter convicted of the attempt to commit
the above mentioned offenses.
(B) Any person released, discharged, or paroled from a penal institution where he or she
was confined because of the commission or attempted commission of one of the offenses
described above.
(C) Any person who has been or is hereafter determined to be a mentally disordered sex
offender. (Per Article 1 Chapter 2 of Part 2 of Division 6 of the Welfare and Institutions
Code.) Any person who has been found guilty in the guilt phase of a trial for an offense
for which registration is required by this section but who has been found not guilty by
reason of insanity in the sanity phase of the trial.
(D) Any person found at the time of conviction to have committed the offense as a result
of sexual compulsion or for the purposes of sexual gratification.
(E) Any person convicted of any offense not specifically listed but the court found that at
time of conviction that the person committed the offense as a result of sexual compulsion
of for the purposes of sexual gratification.
• 207PC-Kidnapping
• 209PC-Kidnapping for ransom, reward or extortion
• 261PC-Rape
• 286PC-Sodomy
• 288PC-Sex offense or lewd act against child or dependent adult
• 288aPC-Unlawful oral copulation
• 289PC-Penetration by foreign object
• 220PC-Assault with intent to commit mayhem or sex crimes
• 243.4PC-Sexual battery
• 264.1PC-Conspiracy to commit sexual assault
• 266PC-Seduction for purposes of prostitution
• 266cPC-Consent to sexual act induced by fear
• 266h(b)PC-Pimping, victim is a minor
• 266iPC-Pandering, victim is a minor
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
486 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• 266jPC-Furnishing child for lewd purposes
• 267PC-Abduction of minor for purposes of prostitution
• 269PC-Aggravated sexual assault of a child
• 288.5PC-Continuous sexual abuse of a child
• 311.2PC Trafficking in obscene matter- subdivisions (b) depicting persons under 18
yrs. (c) the intent to distribute or exchange with person under 18yrs. or (d) sends or
cause to be sent with the intent to distribute or exchange with a person under the age
of 18
• 311.4PC-Employment of minor for purposes of traffic in obscene matter
• 311.10PC-Advertising depictions of sexual conduct by minors
• 311.11PC-Possession of depictions of sexual conduct by minors
• 647.6PC-Molesting a minor
• 653f(c)-Solicits another person to commit a crime, with the intent that the crime be
committed, rape, sodomy, oral copulation, any by force and violence
• 314PC Section 1 and 2-Indecent exposure; obscene exhibitions
• 288.2PC Furnishing harmful matter to minor for purposes of seduction
• 272PC Contributing to the delinquency of a minor
LIST FOR REQUIRED NOTIFICATION TO SCHOOL AUTHORITIES OF ARREST OF
SCHOOL EMPLOYEES
LONG BEACH UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
Superintendent of Schools
1515 Hughes Way
Long Beach, CA 90810
(562) 997-8000
Board of Education
Assistant Superintendent – Human Resources Services
1515 Hughes Way
Long Beach, CA 90810 (562) 997-8257
COMMISSION ON TEACHER CREDENTIALING
Division of Professional Practices
1900 Capital Avenue
Sacramento, Ca 95814
(916) 445-0243
CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, LONG BEACH
Vice President of Administration and Finance
1250 Bellflower Blvd.
Long Beach, Ca 90840
(562) 985-1658
LONG BEACH COMMUNITY COLLEGE
212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee
487 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Administrative Dean – Human Resources
4901 E. Carson St.
Long Beach, Ca 90808
(562) 938-4397
Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges
Program Assistant, Faculty and Staff Development
Human Resources Division
1102 ‘Q’ Street
Sacramento, CA 95814
(916) 445-6240 or 8752
488 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 213 – 14602.6 CVC – 30 Day Impounds
REVISED July 2013
SECTION 14602.6 CVC – 30-DAY IMPOUNDS
INTRODUCTION
Since 1995, the Long Beach Police Department has utilized a powerful tool to keep
unlicensed drivers, or drivers with a suspended or revoked license, off the road. California
Vehicle Code (CVC) 14602.6 allows a peace officer to impound a violator's vehicle for 30
days at the owner's expense. Section 14602.6 CVC, is not a mandatory towing or
impound section, however it is a useful tool to keep irresponsible drivers off the road.
Officers should use common sense and discretion when enforcing this section, and
should consider if the driver was forced to operate a vehicle because of an emergency.
Section 14602.6 CVC - "Whenever a peace officer determines that a person was driving
a vehicle while his or her driving privilege was suspended or revoked, … or … without
ever having been issued a driver's license, the peace officer may either immediately arrest
that person and cause the removal and seizure of the vehicle or, if the vehicle is involved
in a traffic collision, cause the removal and seizure of the vehicle without the necessity of
arresting the person … A vehicle so impounded shall be impounded for 30 days."
ELEMENTS
• The officer must have probable cause to stop the vehicle
• The driver must be operating the vehicle, or the officer has reason to believe the driver
was operating the vehicle; e.g., at the scene of an accident, a subject admits to driving,
or witness statements
• The driver must be arrested; a traffic citation is a form of arrest
o EXCEPTION: At the scene of an accident, especially where the driver is
incapacitated, the officer need not cite or arrest the driver for the impoundment
to be valid; however, if the driver is available and able to sign a citation, one
should be issued
LICENSE STATUS
The Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) driver's license history (LICENSE STATUS)
indicates if a license is suspended or revoked.
KNOWLEDGE OF REVOCATION/SUSPENSION – NOTIFICATION
If a driver’s license shows suspended or revoked, "action ended" may appear on the
driver's license history. The driver must reapply for his/her license to remove the
213 – Thirty Day Impounds
489 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
suspension. The status of the license is considered suspended or revoked until the
license is reinstated.
VERBAL OR PERSONAL SERVICE NEEDED
If “verbal or personal service needed” appears on the driver's license history, complete
DMV Form #DL-310, Verbal Notice by Peace Officer, DMV or Court Employee. If a driver
has not been served, the vehicle may only be towed using 22651(p) CVC.
As with any vehicle impound or storage, a Long Beach Police Department Vehicle Report,
PD Form 2310.010, must be completed to include the following:
• In the box for “TOW AUTH. (SECTION),” write “14602.6 CVC”
• In the box for "PERSON/BUSINESS," the driver's name, physical description, and
date of birth are mandatory; if the driver has an operator's license, even if the license
is from another state or country, the number is required in the appropriate space
• Attach a copy of the issued citation
As with any Vehicle Report, immediately notify Auto Stats regarding the impoundment.
Provide the driver's license number and vehicle information directly to Auto Stats either
in person or telephonically. Auto Stats is required to obtain a copy of the driver's license
history and attach it to the Vehicle Report.
14602.6 CVC vs. 22651(p) CVC
• Do not impound rental cars; use 22651(p) CVC and store the vehicle
• If the driver has a valid driver’s license for another class of vehicle, use 22651(p) CVC;
if a passenger with a valid driver's license is in the vehicle, the vehicle should be
released to the subject with the valid license
• If a driver's license is suspended because child support payments were not paid, then
use 22651(p) CVC, which means the registered owner must have a legally licensed
driver and show proof of insurance to get the car; this can happen the same day of
the tow
• If the driver has an expired license, no matter how long it has been expired use
22651(p) CVC
• If the driver has an expired out of state or out of country license, use 22651(p) CVC
even if they have established residency in California
NOTE: If the vehicle is stopped in close proximity to the registered owner’s house,
or in the registered owner’s driveway, the vehicle should not be towed for either
section. However, the driver should still be cited for appropriate section (Community
Caretaker Doctrine, Miranda v. City of Cornelius, 2006 and People v. Williams, 2007).
PROCEDURE
• Write an “X” in the box for “14602.6” to indicate a vehicle is being impounded under
this section and write 14602.6 CVC as the reason for the tow
213 – Thirty Day Impounds
490 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• DO NOT place a hold on a vehicle unless there is another crime involved, e.g., 20002
CVC, 23153 CVC, 212.5 PC, hold for prints, VIN inspection, etc; the impound hold for
14602.6 CVC will be automatic
• You must complete the top section of page two of the Long Beach Police Department
Vehicle Report to indicate additional impound information; indicate if the driver
received permission from the registered owner to drive the vehicle, if the registered
owner knew the driver was unlicensed, and if the driver knew he/she did not have a
license or that it was suspended or revoked
• Ensure the narrative articulates and justifies the seizure, include any additional
information the officer finds pertinent, such as prior contacts, other related crimes, if
the registered owner gave the keys to the driver or whether the registered owner asked
if the driver had a valid license, and the relationship between the registered owner and
the driver
RELEASE OF VEHICLE TO OWNER
To obtain the release of the vehicle by Towing Operations, the owner is required to do
the following:
• Obtain a release from Accident Investigations (AID) by having the driver obtain a valid
CDL and providing proof of insurance on the vehicle
• Provide identification
• Register the vehicle in his/her name, if the vehicle was recently purchased
• Provide a driver who is licensed, if the registered owner does not have a valid license
• Pay all fees associated with the 14602.6 CVC 30-day impound to the City of Long
Beach
SEIZING VEHICLES AT DUI CHECKPOINTS
Governor Jerry Brown signed Assembly Bill 353 in October 2011. AB353 states, “… a
peace officer or any other authorized person shall not cause the impoundment of a vehicle
at a sobriety checkpoint if the driver’s only offense is a violation of 12500 CVC.” This
does not change the authority to impound a vehicle being driven by a subject with
a suspended or revoked driver's license for 14602.6 CVC.
If the registered owner is not present at the time of the offense, then AB353 requires, “…
a law enforcement officer to make a reasonable attempt to identify the registered owner
of the vehicle in order to release the vehicle to the registered owner if he or she is a
licensed driver or to a licensed driver authorized by the registered owner.” Officers must
also allow the registered owner or another licensed driver, acting as an agent for the
registered owner, to drive the vehicle from the checkpoint. Per 22651 CVC, if a licensed
driver is not available, the vehicle can be legally parked with the permission of the
registered owner, or towed if the registered owner or appointed agent cannot be reached.
The name and driver's license number of the individual the vehicle was released to must
be written on the officer’s copy of the citation. Vehicles which have not been claimed by
the registered owner, or an agent of the registered owner, may be towed from the scene,
but must be released as soon as the registered owner or agent claim the vehicle if they
possess a valid license, proof of registration and current insurance.
213 – Thirty Day Impounds
491 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
The above applies only to vehicles stopped at DUI checkpoints, not vehicles stopped at
any other time or location.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
492 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 216 – Computer Crimes
REVISED May 2003
COMPUTER CRIMES
Introduction
The transition from manual records to computer/electronic records, in the personal,
business and criminal environment, has created a major impact on law enforcement and
the way investigations are conducted. Computer crime is not limited to network intrusion,
security issues and the creation of, and distribution of viruses. Computers in criminal
matters are most often found in traditional crimes, such as, forgery/fraud, child
pornography, bookmaking, homicide, sex crimes, and narcotics.
In the past, most records pertaining to criminal matters were kept on paper, which made
identification and seizure of evidence relatively simple. However, computer/electronic
evidence can be invisible to the untrained officer or detective. Recognizing potential
sources of computer/electronic evidence is important, but may not be readily apparent.
The court system now requires specially trained investigators to secure, recover and
present computer/electronic evidence.
Procedures
Computer/electronic evidence shall only be accessed and searched by authorized Long
Beach Police Department detectives, who have the proper training and equipment. The
following procedures shall be adhered to when officers or detectives discover potential
computer/electronic evidence at a scene.
• Secure the computer and the immediate area. Do not allow anyone access to the
computer or the immediate area. Secure all visible computer disks, manuals, records
and peripherals (printers, scanners, fax machines, modems, CD-ROM drives, PDAs,
etc.). If circumstances require you to identify a specific computer operator, all items
seized should be preserved for latent print processing
• Do not touch, power-on, power-off or attempt to look at the contents of the computer,
or any other computer/electronic device in question. Any interaction with the computer
or electronic device can alter vital evidence files, dates and times
• Contact the Computer Crimes Detail personnel immediately. Detectives are available
during regular business hours at extension 8-7223 and after hours via the
Communications Center
• Computer equipment should not be exposed to static electricity. Prior to handling any
computer equipment, the officer should “neutralize” themselves by touching a metal
216 – Computer Crimes
493 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
object or surface. Use paper packaging for evidence storage. Do not use plastic of
any kind
• Collect and tag each item of equipment. If possible, photograph the physical
conditions of the computer and all relative computer/electronic equipment and their
connections
• Package the equipment in a manner to safeguard against physical jarring that may
cause damage. Do not paper clip, staple or place any adhesive (i.e. Evidence or
masking tape) on computer disks or cables
• Do not transport any computer/electronic equipment in the trunk of police cars
equipped with radios or MDTs. This exposes the computer/electronics to electro-
magnetic fields resulting in corruption of evidence. Transport equipment in the front or
rear seats
• Forward a copy of the Incident Report and Property Report to the Detective Division,
Computer Crimes Detail
• In many cases personnel from the Computer Crimes Detail will respond to and assist
officers or detectives in the field. It will remain the responsibility of the officer or
detective on scene to maintain, inventory and place into evidence all items seized, to
ensure a proper chain of custody
Summary
The likelihood that an officer or detective will encounter computer/electronic evidence or
be called upon to seize this evidence is drastically increasing. The unintentional
destruction or corruption of computer/electronic evidence is a vital concern. When
assistance is needed contact the Computer Crimes Detail at extension 8-7223, during
business hours, or via the Communications Center after hours.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
494 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 218 – Sex Offender Status – Megan’s Law
REVISED March 2004
SEX OFFENDER STATUS – COMMUNITY & INDIVIDUAL
NOTIFCATION (MEGAN'S LAW)
INTRODUCTION
On September 27, 1996, Federal Legislation, Section 290 PC (Megan's Law) became
effective. Megan's Law allows law enforcement to inform members of the community of
the identity and addresses of certain convicted sex offenders.
BACKGROUND
The law addresses several issues; however, two portions are of primary importance:
• A CD-ROM computer disc will be made accessible to the public. (Refer to General
97/02, "Sex Offender Identification Information (Megan's Law)," or upon insertion into
the Department Manual, Section 8.5.11.1)
• Community or individual notification of sex offender status may be made by law
enforcement agencies
The Department of Justice has the responsibility of classifying registered sex offenders
into the following categories:
• High Risk Offenders: "Serious offenders" who have additionally been identified as
having a higher risk of re-offending, and may pose a greater danger to the public
• Serious Offenders: A serious offender is a registrant convicted of a felony offense
(except those listed in the "other" category), or of misdemeanor child molestation
• Other Offenders: Other offenders are those convicted of misdemeanors (except 647.6
PC and 288(c) PC), and those felons convicted of 314.1 PC, pornography-related
offenses, and 262 PC
Information on "Other Offenders" may not be released to the public.
RELEASE OF INFORMATION ON "SERIOUS OFFENDERS" BY FIELD OFFICERS
Field officers may inform individual members of the public regarding a "High Risk
Offender's" or "Serious Offender's status, after obtaining approval, under the following
conditions per California PC Section 290(m)(1).
• A field officer must have a reasonable suspicion
• Based on information, which has come to his/her attention
495 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• That a person might become a victim of a serious offender, and the offender;
• Is likely to encounter the person
When these conditions are met, registration information on "High Risk Offender" may be
released to individual members of the public by field officers without restriction, after
obtaining approval from a field supervisor. Sex Crime Detail detectives will handle
community notification.
Under the authority of California Penal Code Section 290.4(a)(4), the person being
notified shall read and sign the attached "Megan's Law Field Disclosure" form, PD Form
3114.001(A)(B), stating the information is being provided to protect the public, and in any
misuse of the information may result in a 5-year sentence enhancement against the
person who misuses the information.
Officers in the field may verify an offender's registration status and classification any time
by accessing CLETS, Violent Crime Information Network, or by contacting the
Department of Justice directly. For any further assistance needed during business hours,
contact the Sex Crimes Detail.
If registered sex offender information is released, the releasing field officer shall document
the notification by filing an "Incident Report," entitled "SEX OFF-NOTI" (Sexual Offender
Notification). The officer shall identify the offender, method of verifying offender status,
identification of supervisor who approved the notification, and identification and address
of the person or business notified. The "Incident Report" should also include a brief
description of the circumstances surrounding the notification. This "Incident Report" and
the "Megan's Law Field Disclosure" form shall be maintained together in the Records
Section and copies of both forms shall be forwarded to the Sex Crimes Detail upon receipt
by Records Section personnel. Both forms shall be maintained together in the Records
Section and Records Section personnel shall forward copies of both forms to the Sex
Crimes Detail upon receipt. Both forms shall be maintained in Department files for a
minimum of five years.
COMMUNITY NOTIFICATIONS
The Long Beach Police Department believes an informed public is a safer public.
Therefore, the police department may notify the communities in which "High Risk
Offenders" live and work.
Sex Crimes detectives have the responsibility for evaluating each high risk offender
regarding suitability for community notification. The sex registration contact detective will
present registrants who appear suitable for community notification to the Detective
Division Commander for approval.
Upon approval, community notification will normally be made at a community education
meeting. Depending on the offender's victim preferences, notification will also be made
to public and private schools, day care centers, women or fraternal groups, the Parks
Department, or other community organizations whose members are likely to encounter
the offender.
496 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Community notification bulletins are prepared by the Sex Crimes Detail and approved by
the Detective Division Commander. The bulletins do not include the address of the
offender, but may include a hundred block. The bulletins may also include statements as
to the offender's past victim, modus operandi, description, alias, and authority for
distribution of the bulletin as well as general information as to sex offenders. The bulletin
will also contain the statement, "Do Not Duplicate," to prevent mass posting of the bulletin.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigation Bureau
497 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 221 – Tire Deflation Device
REVISED June 2017
TIRE DEFLATION DEVICE
PURPOSE
The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to outline the use of and identify strategic locations
for tire deflation device deployment. When suspect vehicles cross a tire deflation device,
hollow spikes are embedded into the tires, causing the tire to deflate at a controlled rate.
Even though the suspect vehicle has one or more of its tires deflated, the suspect may
continue to drive; however, the ability of the suspect to operate the vehicle at high speeds
is greatly reduced, if not eliminated.
INTRODUCTION
A tire deflation device is used to assist in terminating vehicle pursuits. Pursuits, by their
very nature, are dynamic. When authorized, the deployment of a tire deflation device
serves as a tool for trained officers. Once a supervisor authorizes the deployment of a tire
deflation device, all units are authorized to deploy a tire deflation device. Each patrol
substation has been issued a limited number of tire deflation devices and is responsible
for ensuring the availability of the devices.
DRIVING PATTERNS
Fleeing drivers often follow a common pattern:
• They tend to make right turns because it is the path of least traffic resistance;
• They tend to stay on major thoroughfares, rather than becoming boxed in on narrow
streets;
• They tend to select freeways as an avenue of quick escape;
• They tend to head to familiar locations;
- If the suspect is the registered owner of the fleeing vehicle, the path to his or her
address should be considered a possible route.
PROPER PLACEMENT
• The most important decision for proper placement is officer safety;
- Pursuing officers should maintain a safe distance at the deployment location;
• A location must be picked with proper cover for the deploying officer;
- A vehicle should not be used for cover when deploying a tire deflation device;
• If the pursuit is a low speed pursuit, concealment of the police vehicle is strongly
encouraged;
• When deploying the device, remember that the device can be pulled easily towards
the deploying officer, but it cannot be pushed away from the officer;
EFFECTIVE DEPLOYMENT
221 – Tire Deflation Device
498 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
Officers deploying tire deflation devices should familiarize themselves with their beats and
area to know optimal locations for deployment. In order for the tire deflation device to be
the most effective the following is recommended:
• The deploying officer must be in a position to observe the suspect vehicle and other
traffic;
• Tire deflation devices must be on flat, solid ground, such as pavement or concrete;
• Avoid using tire deflation devices on wet surfaces, gravel or loose pavement;
• Deploy the tire deflation device before intersections or driveways into businesses;
• Give consideration for traffic flow in the immediate area, upcoming intersections,
high-use driveways, school zones, and pedestrian traffic.
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
• Never wrap the cord of the tire deflation device around your hand or any other portion
of your body;
• Do not enter the roadway if pursuing vehicles have not passed;
• Do not bend the tire deflation device;
• Do not dismantle or try to repair the tire deflation device.
COMMUNICATION
Effective deployment of the tire deflation device requires proper communication. The
following information should be communicated when deploying a tire deflation device:
• Advise all officers of deployment location;
• Pursuing units shall provide frequent location, direction and speed updates;
• When possible, deploying personnel should notify the dispatcher of the placement and
exact location of spike strips;
- The Communications Center will be responsible for notification of such locations
to our units and any foreign jurisdiction involved;
• Once the tire deflation device is deployed, broadcast this information so pursuing units
are aware the pursuit may terminate within a relatively short period of time and
distance;
• Notification by the pursuing unit, as to the number of tires deflating (if any) is needed
to help the supervisor:
− Make an informed decision whether to allow more units to the termination site;
− Decide whether or not to request additional resources (K-9 unit, allied agencies if
out of city, etc.);
− Evaluate information on the effectiveness of the tire deflation device and decide
whether to continue to use additional tire deflation devices.
DEPLOYMENT ON FREEWAYS
Generally, freeway entrances and exits should be covered first. Deployment of tire
deflation devices on the freeway is not prohibited, however the following consideration
should be given prior to freeway deployment:
• Freeways have multiple lanes and a tire deflation device can only cover one lane;
• Concealment on the freeway is more difficult, although bridge pillars are excellent
sources, as well as providing cover for the deploying officer;
• Speeds on the freeway tend to be much greater than on surface streets, which
decreases the time to recognize the suspect vehicle and make an evaluation when to
deploy the tire deflation device;
221 – Tire Deflation Device
499 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Some freeway on-ramps have dual entrances that allow vehicles to enter and merge
into one on-ramp;
- The best position for deployment would be after the two entrances merge.
• Some freeway off-ramps diverge into two exits in opposite directions;
- The best position for deployment would be on the exit ramp before the lanes
bifurcate.
POST DEPLOYMENT INSPECTION
Use of a tire deflation device shall be documented in the Supervisor’s Vehicle Pursuit
Review and is to include documentation of the following:
• Location of deployment, direction of travel, lanes covered, and any other pertinent
information;
• Name of the officer(s) who deployed the tire deflation device and whether or not the
suspect vehicle traversed the tire deflation device;
• Injury or death to suspect(s), civilian, or police personnel;
• Civilian or patrol vehicles which have traversed a tire deflation device.
The Patrol Division where the deploying officer is assigned is responsible for turning in
any used tire deflation device(s) to the Collision Investigation Detail before a replacement
is issued.
TRAINING
Training is necessary for officers to develop and maintain the skills necessary for proper
usage. Training also serves as a periodic inspection of the equipment on a continual
basis to ensure the devices are in proper working order.
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Patrol Bureau
500 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING BULLETIN
Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 222 – Hate Crimes
REVISED July 2019
HATE CRIMES AND
HATE OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS
The Long Beach Police Department investigates reported or observed incidents of
violence or threats directed at an individual, institution or business, motivated by race,
ethnicity, national origin, religion, disability, gender or sexual orientation.
HATE CRIME
Penal Code § 422.55(a) defines a hate crime as a criminal act committed in whole or in
part, because of one or more of the following actual or perceived characteristics of the
victim:
1) Disability
2) Sex
3) Nationality
4) Race or ethnicity
5) Religion
6) Sexual orientation
7) Association with a person or group with one or more of these actual or perceived
characteristics
Examples of hate crimes include, but are not limited to:
• Interfering with, oppressing or threatening any other person in the free exercise or
enjoyment of any right or privilege secured by the Constitution or laws because of
one or more of the actual or perceived characteristics of the victim (Penal Code §
422.6);
• Defacing a person’s property because of one or more of the actual or perceived
characteristics of the victim (Penal Code § 422.6(b));
• Terrorizing a person with a swastika or burning cross (Penal Code § 11411);
• Vandalizing a place of worship (Penal Code § 594.3).
Any crime might be a hate crime depending on the perpetrator's motivation. For example,
if a robbery is committed due to the victim's sexual orientation, the patrol officer can simply
notify the on-call Violent Crimes detective and file a 212.5 (C) PC - ROBBERY report
including all the elements that supported the incident's classification as a hate crime. The
District Attorney's Office will decide whether to add the enhancement of 422.6 PC - HATE
CRIME. Patrol officers need not be concerned with filing a separate report for a hate
crime.
222 – Hate Crimes
501 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
HATE OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENT
A hate or bias-motivated incident does not rise to the level of a hate crime as defined by
the penal code. A hate or bias-motivated incident is not categorized as a hate crime
because it lacks a criminal act. For example, a note reading, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS”
is posted on the door of a residence occupied by a homosexual. That act would be
classified as a bias-motivated incident, not a hate crime, because although there was a
bias motivation there was no criminal act. If the words, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS” were
spray painted on the same door, that act would be considered a hate crime because it
involved a criminal act and a bias motivation.
ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES FOR HATE CRIME DETERMINATION
• Graffiti must be racial, ethnic, religious, or homophobic in nature, such as swastika,
KKK, Nazi, or other hate group symbol or slogans, or involve the use of epithets.
• Any assault against a person, in the absence of other apparent motivation, when
initiated with racial, ethnic, religious, or homophobic epithets, shall be considered a
hate crime.
HUMAN DIGNITY COORDINATOR
The office of the Human Dignity Coordinator is a liaison between the Police Department
and the community. The Violent Crimes Sergeant will notify the Human Dignity
Coordinator when hate crimes occur. The purpose of the office is to:
• Make the victim(s) aware of available resources;
• Educate the public about hate crimes;
• Seek to reduce hate crimes;
• Assist in the investigation of hate crimes;
• Promote harmony between different groups in different communities.
PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION
The point of first contact is critical in the handling of hate crimes. The initial responding
officer must be sensitive to the distinguishing characteristics of hate crimes, so that the
victim and the incident are treated appropriately.
• If a motive is unclear, or if the incident appears to have overtones of bigotry, ask
questions in a sensitive manner.
• Sample questions could include: "Do you have any reason to believe this incident
may have been motivated by race, religion, gender, disability, ethnicity, nationality, or
sexual orientation?”
• If the incident is an obvious hate crime or seems to have components of it, reassure
the victim of the Department's concern over such incidents and intention to help, and
provide the victim with How to Report & Protect Yourself Against Hate Crimes.
Inform the victim that these crimes receive a separate designation and special
attention.
• Give priority to the needs and feelings of the victim. Reassure them, especially
concerning threats to their safety or the likelihood of a recurrence.
222 – Hate Crimes
502 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents
• Ask the victim about possible suspects. Encourage them to express their feelings,
which may provide useful information about motives, potential perpetrators, etc. If
there no possible suspects, note proximity to local schools and history of hate groups
in the area.
• Ask the victim and other parties present if they are aware of other incidents in the
area.
If the crime was one of vandalism or graffiti, look around the neighborhood for other
incidents
REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY
Investigations Bureau
222 – Hate Crimes
503 | P a g e
Return to the Table of Contents